W912C309B0006Amend1 by nZmi1d77

VIEWS: 20 PAGES: 463

									                                                                                                                                                 1. CONTRACT ID CODE              P AGE OF P AGES
      AMENDMENT OF SOLICITATION/MODIFICATION OF CONTRACT                                                                                                      J                        1       463
2. AMENDMENT/MODIFICATION NO.                                3. EFFECTIVE DATE           4. REQUISITION/P URCHASE REQ. NO.                                         5. P ROJECT NO.(If applicable)
0001                                                             19-Aug-2009             SEE INDIVIDUAL DELIVERY ORDERS                                            R9-08(B9-L-0389-R-08
6. ISSUED BY                                    CODE         W912C3                      7. ADMINISTERED BY (If other than item 6)                           CODE

  ARMY RESERVE CONTRACTING CENTER
  FT BUCHANAN                                                                                                 See Item 6
  DIRECTORATE OF CONTRACTING
  BLDG 399 218 BROOK STREET
  FORT BUCHANAN PR 00934-4206

8. NAME AND ADDRESS OF CONT RACT OR (No., Street, County, State and Zip Code)                                                             X 9A. AMENDMENT OF SOLICIT AT ION NO.
                                                                                                                                            W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                                                                          X 9B. DAT ED (SEE IT EM 11)
                                                                                                                                            05-Aug-2009
                                                                                                                                              10A. MOD. OF CONT RACT /ORDER NO.

                                                                                                                                              10B. DAT ED (SEE IT EM 13)
CODE                                                               FACILIT Y CODE
                                                          11. T HIS IT EM ONLY APPLIES T O AMENDMENT S OF SOLICIT AT IONS
 X The above numbered solicitation is amended as set forth in Item 14. The hour and date specified for receipt of Offer                       is extended,        X is not extended.
     Offer must acknowledge receipt of this amendment prior to the hour and date specified in the solicitation or as amended by one of the following methods:
     (a) By completing Items 8 and 15, and returning       1 copies of the amendment; (b) By acknowledging receipt of this amendment on each copy of the offer submitted;
     or (c) By separate letter or telegram which includes a reference to the solicitation and amendment numbers. FAILURE OF YOUR ACKNOWLEDGMENT TO BE
     RECEIVED AT THE P LACE DESIGNATED FOR THE RECEIP T OF OFFERS P RIOR TO THE HOUR AND DATE SP ECIFIED MAY RESULT IN
     REJECTION OF YOUR OFFER. If by virtue of this amendment you desire to change an offer already submitted, such change may be made by telegram or letter,
     provided each telegram or letter makes reference to the solicitation and this amendment, and is received prior to the opening hour and date specified.

12. ACCOUNT ING AND APPROPRIAT ION DAT A (If required)


                                           13. T HIS IT EM APPLIES ONLY T O MODIFICAT IONS OF CONT RACT S/ORDERS.
                                               IT MODIFIES T HE CONT RACT /ORDER NO. AS DESCRIBED IN IT EM 14.
   A. T HIS CHANGE ORDER IS ISSUED PURSUANT T O: (Specify authority) T HE CHANGES SET FORT H IN IT EM 14 ARE MADE IN T HE
      CONT RACT ORDER NO. IN IT EM 10A.

   B. T HE ABOVE NUMBERED CONT RACT /ORDER IS MODIFIED T O REFLECT T HE ADMINIST RAT IVE CHANGES (such as changes in paying
      office, appropriation date, etc.) SET FORT H IN IT EM 14, PURSUANT T O T HE AUT HORIT Y OF FAR 43.103(B).
   C. T HIS SUPPLEMENT AL AGREEMENT IS ENT ERED INT O PURSUANT T O AUT HORIT Y OF:

   D. OT HER (Specify type of modification and authority)

E. IMPORT ANT : Contractor                      is not,            is required to sign this document and return                           copies to the issuing office.

14. DESCRIPT ION OF AMENDMENT /MODIFICAT ION (Organized by UCF section headings, including solicitation/contract subject matter
    where feasible.)

 A. The purpose of this amendment is to delete the Statement of Work (SOW) in its entirety and replace w ith Revised Statement of Work
 incorporated in this amendment. Although the SOW is deleted in its entirety from the original solicitation, the onlv changes made under the
 revised copy are to the numbering system and to the names of the section headings.

 B. The date and time specified for receipt of bids remains unchanged.




Except as provided herein, all terms and conditions of the document referenced in Item 9A or 10A, as heretofore changed, remains unchanged and in full force and effect.
15A. NAME AND T IT LE OF SIGNER (T ype or print)                                              16A. NAME AND T IT LE OF CONT RACT ING OFFICER (T ype or print)

                                                                                              TEL:                                             EMAIL:

15B. CONT RACT OR/OFFEROR                                     15C. DAT E SIGNED               16B. UNIT ED ST AT ES OF AMERICA                                              16C. DAT E SIGNED
                                                                                              BY                                                                             19-Aug-2009
   (Signature of person authorized to sign)                                                          (Signature of Contracting Officer)
EXCEPT ION T O SF 30                                                                  30-105-04                                                              ST ANDARD FORM 30 (Rev. 10-83)
APPROVED BY OIRM 11-84                                                                                                                                       Prescribed by GSA
                                                                                                                                                             FAR (48 CFR) 53.243
                                                                    W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                        Page 2 of 463

SECTION SF 30 BLOCK 14 CONTINUATION PAGE

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

(End of Summary of Changes)



The following items are applicable to this modification:
    REVISED STATEMENT OF WORK
     ROOF INSPECTION, REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE AT FORT BUCHANAN

        ARMY RESERVE INSTALLATION, ARMY RESERVE CENTERS (ARC),

             ARMY FAMILY HOUSING (AFH) & DOMESTIC DEPARTMENT

       ELEMENTARY AND SECONDARY SCHOOLS (DDESS) IN PUERTO RICO
                            ENG-10389-8-J
                         R9-08(B9-L-0389-R-08)
                   OCTOBER 2008 (REVISED AUG 2009)


                         GENERAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

DESCRIPTION

1. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS:

  a. DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
  b. DIVISION 02 THROUGH 26, TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS


2. ATTACHMENTS/DOCUMENTS/DRAWINGS:

 a. ATTACHMENT 1 - Fort Buchanan Facilities List Summary

  b. ATTACHMENT 2 - Island wide USARC Buildings Summary

  c. ATTACHMENT 3 - Project Identification Sign Sketch

 d. ATTACHMENT 4 - Material Approval Submittal Form 3,000-R-E, Feb 2002
                  (with Instructions)

 e. ATTACHMENT 5 – Submittal Register Form 4288-R, Jan 97
                                                                          W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                      0001
                                                                              Page 3 of 463

 f. ATTACHMENT 6 - Form 1, Roofing System Description with Instructions

 h. ATTACHMENT 7 - Asbestos Operations and Maintenance Plan for U.S. Army
                 Fort Buchanan, Puerto Rico, August 2003

 i. Drawings SI-1, SI-2 & SI-3 (See Section 00 01 15, List of Drawings)


                                * * * END OF SECTION * * *



DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS


  SECTION 00 01 15      LIST OF DRAWINGS
  SECTION 01 11 00      SUMMARY OF WORK
  SECTION 01 33 00      SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
  SECTION 01 35 29      HEALTH, SAFETY AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES
  SECTION 01 45 00      QUALITY CONTROL
  SECTION 01 57 19      TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
  SECTION 01 58 00      PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
  SECTION 01 81 16      FACILITY ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS


DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS


   SECTION 02 41 00     DEMOLITION
   SECTION 02 82 13     ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
   SECTION 02 82 16     ENGINEERING CONTROL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING
                        MATERIAL

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE


   SECTION 03 01        REHABILITATION OF CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
   30.71
   SECTION 03 52 00     LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE ROOF INSULATION


DIVISION 04 - NOT USED


DIVISION 05 - METALS


   SECTION 05 30 00     STEEL DECKING
   SECTION 05 50 00     METAL FABRICATIONS


DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS & COMPOSITES
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                 0001
                                                                         Page 4 of 463


   SECTION 06 10 00     ROUGH CARPENTRY


DIVISION 07 - THERMAL & MOSITURE PROTECTION


   SECTION 07 13 53     ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING
   SECTION 07 14 00     FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING
   SECTION 07 22 00     ROOF AND DECK INSULATION
   SECTION 07 31 13     ASPHALT SHINGLES
   SECTION 07 51 13     BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
   SECTION 07 51        COLD-APPLIED BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
   13.13
   SECTION 07 53 23     EHTYLENE-PROPILENE-DIENE-MONOMER
   SECTION 07 55 52     MODIFIED BITUMINOUS PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING
   SECTION 07 57 13     SPRAYED POLYURETHANE FOAM (SPF) ROOFING
   SECTION 07 60 00     FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
   SECTION 07 61 13     STANDING SEAM SHEET METAL ROOFING
   SECTION 07 92 00     JOINT SEALANTS


DIVISION 08 - DOORS & WINDOWS


   SECTION 08 62 00     SKY LIGHTS


DIVISION 09    - FINISHES

SECTION   09 97 13.23       EXTERIOR STEEL COATINGS

DIVISIONS 10    THROUGH 21 – NOT USED

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING


SECTION 22 00 00 PLUMBING


DIVISION 23    - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)


   SECTION 23 00 00     HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
   SECTION 23 05 00     COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
   SECTION 23 07 00     HVAC INSULATION
   SECTION 23 73 00     INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS


DIVISIONS 24    THROUGH 25 – NOT USED

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
                                                                       W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                   0001
                                                                           Page 5 of 463


      SECTION 26 00 00    ELECTRICAL
      SECTION 26 20 00    LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
      SECTION 26 41 13    LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES



DIVISONS 27 THROUGH 49 – NOT USED




                                   SECTION 00 01 15

                                   LIST OF DRAWINGS

PART 1      GENERAL

1.1      SUMMARY

 This document lists the drawings for the project pursuant to contract clause
 "DFARS 252.236-7001, Contract Drawings, Maps and Specifications."

1.2      CONTRACT DRAWINGS

 Contract drawings are as follows:

            DRAWING NO.                TITLE

            SI-1                 ARMY RESERVE CENTERS LOCATION SITE PLANS
                                 SITES NO.1 THROUGH NO.6, SITES 8 THROUGH NO. 13
                                 & RAMEY DDESS LOCATION SITE AND COVER SHEET

            SI-2                 FORT BUCHANAN ARMY RESERVE INSTALLATION SITE
                                 PLAN NO.1 AND RAMEY DDESS SITE PLAN

            SI-3                 ARMY RESERVE CENTERS SITE PLANS NO.2 THROUGH
                                 NO. 6, AND NO. 8 THROUGH NO.13


1.3      REFERENCE DRAWINGS

 The reference drawings are intended only to show the existing construction
 condition. Drawings are the property of the Government and shall not be
 used for any purpose other than that intended by the contract. The drawings
 are non scaled full size. Additional drawings are available at the bidder's
 or Contractor's expense. Information on procuring these drawings may be
 obtained from the Contracting Officer. In addition, drawings may be
 inspected during regular working hours at the office of the Contracting
 Officer.
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                      Page 6 of 463


                           * * *    END OF SECTION    * * *




                                   SECTION 01 11 00

                                   SUMMARY OF WORK


1.      DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

1.1 Work to be done: The Contractor shall furnish all necessary
administrative functions, personnel, materials, tools, equipment, services,
transportation, and insurance required to perform roof works described in the
delivery orders issued by the Contracting Officer (CO) to support services in
connection with “Roof Inspection, Repair and Maintenance” for Fort Buchanan
Army Reserve Installation, Army Reserve Centers (ARC), Army Family Housing
(AFH), and Domestic Department Elementary & Secondary Schools (DDESS) in
Puerto Rico” as described herein.

1.1.1    Work will be executed in accordance with the following sequence:

  a. Roof Inspection Survey and Written Report: Contracting Officer will
provide a specific delivery order to the Contractor to proceed with the
selected building inspection, and report preparation. Inspection Survey and
Written Report shall be prepared as indicated in paragraph 1.2 of this
section.

  b. Roofing Repair and/or Replacement: Contracting Officer will provide
the specific delivery order to the Contractor to repair and/or replace the
roofing system of the selected building. Work shall be done in accordance
with survey report recommendations and/or Contracting Officer instructions.

  c. Warranty Document: After final approval of the roofing system repair
and/or replacement, for the previously selected building in the delivery
order, the Contractor shall issue the Warranty Document in accordance with
paragraph 1.8 of this section.

  d. Maintenance: Contracting Officer will provide the specific delivery
order to the Contractor to maintain the new roofing system installed in the
selected building. Work shall be done in accordance with paragraphs 1.6, 1.7,
and 1.9 in this section.
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                      Page 7 of 463


1.2     Roof Inspection Survey and Written Report

1.2.1   Roof Inspection Survey shall be in accordance to applicable
requirements in paragraph 1.9 of this section.

1.2.2     Written Report shall include, but is not limited to the following:

  a. Roofing system performance history description.

  b. Description of existing roofing system condition and visual observations
of all exposed roofing components.

  c. Roofing cores sampling and location within the roof, and testing to
determine system components, and roofing system type.



  d. Inspection for subsurface moisture contamination with Infrared
Equipment, provide thermograms and exact location within the As-Built roof
plan drawing.

  e. Sampling with exact location in the roof plan, Laboratory Testing, and
Test Report for roofing Asbestos Containing Material (ACM) only if requested
by the Contracting Officer in the delivery order due to previously
Contractor’s Report recommendations.

  f. Photographs of roofing system conditions and area location where they
were taken, including interior structural components, and ceilings indicated
in paragraph 1.9 of this section.

  g. As-Built Roof Plans with the location of all roof components indicated
in paragraphs 1.4.1 through 1.4.6, and all items related to the incidental
work in paragraph 1.10 of this section. Scaled Roof Plan shall include: area,
equipment with structural supports dimensions, diameter and length of
electrical conduits, diameter and length of plumbing vents and piping,
exhaust fans, drainage components, air conditioning ducts, access hatch
doors, skylights, and any other condition not described here. Contractor
shall submit two sets of drawings in 18-inch x 24-inch hard copy and
electronic copy.

  h. Recommendations for Roofing System Repair and/or Replacement and roofing
system type to be used in the complete roofing replacement.

  i. Contractor shall submit two hard copy sets and one electronic copy of
the Roof Inspection Survey Report to the Contracting Officer for review by
the Directorate of Public Woks (DPW).

1.2.3 Value Engineering: The Government acknowledges that due to the
continuous advancements in new technology and market trends in the roofing
construction and treatment systems new and better ways to approach problem
solution may arise. Therefore, the Contractor is encouraged to develop,
prepare, and submit a Value Engineering change proposal (VECP) voluntarily to
substitute any Government proposed and/or existing roofing system and/or
material with all the required details. The Contractor shall share in any
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                    Page 8 of 463

instant contract savings realized from an accepted VECP. (Refer to FAR
52.248-3, Value Engineering Construction, Feb/2000).

1.3   The scope of work in this specification for the different Roofing
Systems shall serve as a guide to Contractor in the job execution. Contractor
shall immediately inform the Contracting Officer Representative (COR) any
doubt of the execution of a particular part of the job due to the
discrepancies in the scope of work, drawings and specifications.

1.4   Roof and/or Roofing System Repair/Replacement Work: This work for the
various types of Roofing Systems consists of, but is not limited to, the
following:

1.4.1   Concrete Roofs Repairs (plain concrete):

   a. Remove debris, vegetation and loose material from old coatings.

   b. Wash roof surfaces, including gutters and downspouts, with a hydro-
      pressure machine with a maximum of 2,000-psi (pound per square inch) of
      water pressure.

   c. Repair cracks and holes with epoxy fill compound.

   d. Provide treatment against fungus to the entire roof area with approved
      fungicide and as indicated by the Contracting Officer.

   e. Provide a minimum 15 mils thick dry film waterproofing membrane to all
      concrete surfaces.

   f. Apply to the entire concrete roof area an sprayed polyurethane layer of
      minimum 3/4-inch thick with top silicone coats (two coats minimum) with
      a minimum total dry film thickness of 30 mils.

   g. Replace gutters and downspouts that are badly rusted, broken or bent
      with the same material, gage, pattern, and finish as existing.

1.4.2   Corrugated Metal Roof Repairs (plain metal):

   a. Remove debris and vegetation, and wash roof surfaces, including gutters
      and downspouts, with a hydro-pressure machine with a maximum of 1,500-
      psi (pound per square inch) of water pressure.

   b. Replace roof panels screws that are rusted and/or have damaged neoprene
      washers, except for standing seam roof type. New screws shall be
      corrosion resistant and with neoprene washers.

   c. Seal water leaking joints, pin and screw holes with silicone caulking.

   d. Sand, brush and clean rusted corrugated roof panel areas and apply two
      coats of metal primer.

   e. Replace metal panels that are badly rusted, broken or bent with the
      same material, gage, pattern, and finish as existing.

   f. Apply two coats of paint to partial or entire roof area of color equal
      or similar to existing.
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                    Page 9 of 463


   g. Area to be painted and color to be used will be selected by the
      Contracting Officer.

1.4.3 Roofing Treatment Systems over Concrete and Metal Roof Repairs and or
      Replacement:

   a. Remove debris and vegetation, and wash roof surfaces, including gutters
      and downspouts, with a hydro-pressure machine with 1,500 to 2,000-psi
      (pound per square inch) of water pressure. The Contracting Officer
      will indicate exact water pressure limit in accordance to the roofing
      system type.

   b. Inspect roof and mark appropriately blistering and splitting of top
      membranes, plies or coatings, and gaps in insulation.

   c. Repair blister and splits by cutting top membranes, plies or coatings,
      remove and replace all substrate components (lightweight concrete,
      insulation, plies, felts, etc.) moisture/water contaminated in the
      affected area according to the type of roofing, apply required water
      proofing sealant and patch area with new top membrane, plies or
      coating.

   d. Mark all areas that accumulate rain water. Modify roofing system slopes
      to correct this deficient drainage condition. Specific method to
      correct these deficiencies shall be in accordance with the type of
      roofing system, and shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer for
      the review and approval of DPW.

   e. Identify cracks at counter flashing, base flashing, metal copping
      flashing, metal guard fascias, seams, penetrations, vent or pipe
      flashing and mark them appropriately. Repair cracks by widening and
      drying them, and applying approved waterproofing sealant. Affected
      substrate elements with moisture/water shall be repaired and/or
      replaced as requested by the Contracting Officer.

   f. Inspect and check insulation and substrate for moisture contamination
      with a moisture detector instrument (Infrared Equipment), and mark the
      areas appropriately. Affected substrate elements with moisture/water
      shall be repaired and/or replaced as requested by the Contracting
      Officer.

1.4.4 For the purpose of this contract, the existing Roofing Treatment
Systems over concrete or metal structural roofs listed below shall be
considered for inspection, repair and replacement:

   a. Insulation and 3-ply with cold adhesive (modified bitumen).

   b. Lightweight concrete, insulation and 3-ply with cold adhesive (modified
      bitumen).

   c. Lightweight concrete, insulation and 3-ply with torch (modified
      bitumen).

   d. Lightweight concrete, insulation and 2-ply (modified bitumen).
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                    Page 10 of 463

  e. Insulation and 2-ply (modify bitumen).

  f. Lightweight concrete, insulation and E.P.D.M. (Ethylene Propylene Diene
     Monomer).

  g. Insulation, 3-ply hot asphalt and gravel (built-up roofing).

  h. Insulation and E.P.D.M. (Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer).

  i. Single ply.

  j. Mop asphalt and 1-ply felt.

  k. Insulation and hot asphalt plies.

  l. Standing seam metal over insulation.

  m. Asphalt shingles over insulation and over a standing seam metal roof.

  n. Waterproof asphalt coatings.

  o. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam (“PUF”), coating and gravel.

  p. Primer and elastomeric/waterproofing coating.

1.4.5 Repairs to "PUF"   (Sprayed-in Place Polyurethane Foam) over concrete,
metal or wood roof:

  a. Remove debris, vegetation, and wash roof surfaces, including gutters
     and downspouts, with a hydro-pressure machine with a maximum 2,000-psi
     water pressure.

  b. Inspect roof and mark appropriately all blisters, cracks and pinholes.

  c. Minor Repairs: The defects in this category are small cuts, fractures,
     punctures, penetrations, cracks, gouges, and scuffs limited to 1 to 1-
     1/2-inches in width or less. Length may be variable and does not
     impose a restriction for this type of repair. Depth may be variable.
     Isolated defects in the coating such as cracking, flaking, spalling,
     and blisters. The procedure for repairs is as follows:

     (1) Inspect the area to be repaired for water, dirt or contamination.
     Dry off the area if wet and/or clean away granules (if any) dirt or
     contamination over and around the area to be repaired.

     (2) Using a serrated or razor knife, trim exposed foam in any fracture
     to obtain a clean dry foam surface to the depth of penetration.
     Typically, 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch slices are adequate to clean up the
     penetration.

     (3) Fill the prepared area with caulk sealant that is compatible with
     the coating system, and trowel smooth over the filled area extending
     onto the surrounding surface.

     (4) If applicable, granules can be sprinkled onto the wet caulked
     surface and patted lightly to obtain embedment. If coating is to be
                                                             W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                          0001
                                                                 Page 11 of 463

  applied, the caulk sealant must be permitted to set of cure
  sufficiently to allow brush application of coating for completion of
  repair.

  (5) If only coating is required, a sufficiently large area should be
  dried and/or cleaned off to permit trying-I of new coating application
  to existing coating in surrounding area. It is recommended that at
  least two separate brush coats of the proper coating to applied,
  allowing sufficient curing or drying time between coats. Minimum DFT
  of the new coating should be 30 mils.

d. Moderate Repairs: Occasionally an inspection could reveal isolated area
   of poor quality foam, wet foam, foam blisters, foam delamination, or
   mechanically damaged areas that are two large, and that cannot be
   corrected by caulking or re-coating. Such areas require removal and
   replacement of foam. If these areas are limited and not larger than
   about 2 square feet in size, they can be repaired fairly easily without
   the use of spray foam or coating equipment.

e. Foam replacement can be made by pouring foam with the proper density,
   (that can be hand mixed). Canned froth foam, and in limited instances
   rigid PUF board stock. The coating replacement can be accomplished by
   use of either brush or roller. The procedure for repairs is as follows:

  (1)   Using a serrated or razor knife cut away distressed foam and

  coated area back to the point where foam is clean, dry and/or firmly
  adhered to a minimum depth of 1/2-inch.

  (2)   Bevel cut the foam edge at approximately a 45-degree angle around
  the perimeter of the opening to the depth of the penetration.

  (3)   Clean the substrate surface in the opening and brush dirt, dust
  and/or other debris from around the opening.

  (4)   Gradually introduce foaming mixture into the prepared area by
  pouring materials onto the beveled cut foam edge in order to wet out
  the cut surface as completely as possible, then distribute remaining
  material evenly over the bottom of the opening.

  (5)   Permit the foam to rise and set, so that the opening is
  completely filled. Allow in-place foam to cure for a minimum of 1/2-
  hour. Larger repairs may require slightly long to dissipate heat on
  the foam and for the foam to become firm enough for cutting and
  trimming.

  (6)   Once foam in the filled void is cured or firm, trim away excess
  foam with a serrated knife or hand saw to nominal level of adjacent
  foam surface, then grinds rasp or sand smooth.

  (7)   Remove all foam dust and/or bits of foam debris from repair
  area and after permitting the foam to cure for, at least, one hour,
  proceed with new coating application and addition of coatings and
  granules if required.

  (8)   When work is done over the cut and sanded surfaces of foam as
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                    Page 12 of 463

      described on this procedure, at least three brush or rolled coats of
      new coating be applied to obtain 35 to 40 mils DFT. It is especially
      important that the first coat be worked thoroughly into the cut and
      open cells of the foam surface to compensate for the fact that no skin
      exists, as is the case with a normally applied spray foam.

      (9)   Severe Repairs: Remove existing and install new PUF roofing
      system and all related drainage systems, flashings, and any other
      related roofing component as indicated by the Contracting Officer.

1.4.6 Repairs to “PUF” or Built-up Roofing with Asbestos Mastic over
concrete Roof.

   a. Contractor shall submit an asbestos containing material abatement plan
      for the approval of the Contracting Officer, and the DPW, Environmental
      Services Division, in accordance with specification sections:

      (1) Section 01 33 00 -- Submittal Procedures.

      (2) Section 01 57 20.0010 -- Environmental Protection.

      (3) Section 01 45 01 - Contractor Quality Control

      (4) Section 01 35 29.13 - Safety Requirements

      (5) Section 01 57 19.0020 - Temporary Environmental Controls

      (6) Section 02 41 00 - Demolition

      (7) Section 02 82 13 - Asbestos Abatement.

      (8) Section 02 82 16 - Engineering Control of Asbestos Containing
                             Material.

   b. Contractor shall follow the same repair procedures indicated in
      paragraphs 1.4.3 and 1.4.5, and in accordance with the Asbestos
      Operations and Maintenance Plan for U.S. Army Garrison, Fort Buchanan
      prepared by U.S. Army Corps of Engineers on January 2001. See
      attachments “g” and “h”.

1.5   Radiant Barrier Blanket: Contractor shall submit the material(s)
for the approval of the Contracting Officer, and provide all material, labor
and tools for the installation. The area to be considered for this work and
exact location, inside a specific building, will be indicated by the
Contracting Officer.

1.5.1 References

      a. ASTM E-96 (Perm Rating)
      b. ASTM E-94-98 (Flame and Smoke)
      c. FSEC-DN-7 1984 (Florida Solar Energy Center)

1.5.2 Product specifications

      a. Physical state and composition: 1/4-inch minimum thickness solid
         flexible blanket double-sided aluminum foil with interior
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                         Page 13 of 463

             reinforcement between foil layers. Reinforcement may be cardboard,
             craft paper, mylar or fiber webbing.

         b. Color: Aluminum

         c. Facing: 99.4 % polished aluminum with reinforced scrim

         d. Bulk Density: 1.2 – 1.7 lb/cu.ft

         e. Specific Gravity: 0.02 – 0.04

         f. Emissivity: 0.03

         g. Perm Rating: 0.008 (unperforated) ASTM E-96

         h. Flame and Smoke: ASTM E-94-98; Flame Spread: 10; Smoke Developed: 34

         i. Flash Point: above 450 degrees F

1.6     Roofing systems partially repaired or completely replaced for specific
        buildings shall be performed in accordance with attached technical
        specifications for each type of roofing system and with drawings
        prepared by the Contractor and approved by the Contracting Officer.


1.7   Maintenance for all types of roofing systems shall be performed
in accordance with the roofing work involved:

        a.   For Roofing System Partially Repaired: No maintenance program shall
             be established and executed.

        b.   For Roofing System Replacement: A maintenance program shall be
             established and executed every three (3) years. Contractor shall
             submit a Roof Maintenance Manual for every new roofing system
             installed for the approval of the Directorate of Public Works (DPW).

1.8      WARRANTY

1.8.1   Warranty Coverage - Contractor and Manufacturer standard warranty for
the roofing system shall be provided for not less than:

      a.     Three - (3) years warranty for partially repaired roofing system.

      b.     Ten - (10) years warranty for completely replaced roofing systems.

1.8.2      Warranty Document

   Document shall state the manufacturer and/or contractor shall repair or
replace the complete roofing system if deterioration is caused by defective
materials and/or workmanship, and if the roofing system leaks or allows the
insulation beneath the membrane, plies, or coating to become wet during the
period of the warranty. Also included shall be a paragraph certifying that
all work was performed according to manufacturer’s recommendations. Replaced
roofing systems shall be capable of withstanding hurricane winds of 125 miles
per hour of velocity, and warranty documents shall state this. In addition,
warranty shall specify that in the event of any deficiency created by an "Act
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                       Page 14 of 463

of God" or any other event different from the above statements, if the
contractor with the same original product does the repairs, the contractor
shall continue honoring the existing warranty. Document shall be submitted to
the Contracting Officer for approval prior to final payment of the previously
issued delivery order.

1.8.3      Roofing System Information Card

    For each roofing system, furnished a typewritten card, laminated in
plastic and framed. Card shall be 8-1/2 by 11 inches minimum, and shall
contain the information in the attached Form 1, Roofing System Description.
Send card and two- (2) photostatic paper copies to Department of the Army,
Directorate of Public Works, Engineering Division, Building 556, Fort
Buchanan, P.R.

1.9      Maintenance Procedure for replaced Roofing Systems with ten (10) years
      warranty:

 a. Clean and wash the entire roof area with the same procedure indicated in
    the repair work in paragraphs 1.4.1 through 1.4.6 in this section
    according to the roofing system type.

 b. Roof visual inspections - provide yearly inspection checklists and
    reports, and schedule for corrections.

 c. Inspection shall include, but not limited the following:

       (1) All roof drains and through wall scuppers should be checked to see
           that they are open and free of debris.

       (2) The complete roof shall be checked for accumulated debris such as
           leaves, tree branches and foreign objects thrown or left on the roof.

       (3) A walkover of the roof shall be made to examine for cracks, punctures,
           penetrations, coating blisters, foam blisters, or delamination of
           either foam or coating. The roof surface should also be carefully
           examined for any unusual signs of wear, erosion or flaking of the
           coated surface.

       (4) Flashing around drains, equipment, roof vents, stacks, hatches, along
           roof edges and parapet walls should be examined for cracks or loss of
           adhesion of foam, coating or plies.

       (5) Expansion joints, if existing, should be inspected along curbing
           details to insure that no structural movement has taken place outside
           the expansion joint area resulting in cracks in the roofing system.

       (6) Peripheral items that are not a direct part of the roofing system that
           shall be checked during an inspection are integrity of metal copping
           flashing in parapet walls, the masonry parapet walls themselves to see
           if they are free from structural cracks that might permit water entry
           into the building or behind the applied roof system, and seals or
           caulk joints on sky-light units.

       (7) Surface contaminants like oil spills shall be monitored for adverse
           effects on membranes and coatings.
                                                                    W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                 0001
                                                                        Page 15 of 463


       (8) Subsurface contamination: If from inspection, it is established that a
           roof has been leaking for sometime, the insulation and substrate
           should be checked for moisture contamination. This can be done by
           using either a two-inch diameter core sampler, or a non-destructive
           moisture tester, either nuclear, infrared, or capacitance type, which
           indicates the moisture content of the substrate. The core sampler
           removes a cylindrical core of the roof membrane and insulation. The
           sample is weighed wet, then dried in an oven and weighed again. The
           quantity of moisture per cubic foot of insulation can thus be
           calculated.

1.10     Incidental work due to Roofing System Repair and/or Replacement:

  a. Structural: Contractor shall repair and/or replaced damaged
     corrugated metal sheets, steel joist, and beams to match existing.

  b. Roof access hatch doors and skylights: Contractor shall repair
     and/or replaced these items if found deteriorated during roof
     inspection.

 c. Drainage Components: Contractor shall replace damaged roof drains &
    grilles, gutters, and downspouts, and assure that new and/or repaired
    roofing systems have proper drainage slopes to avoid water accumulation.
    Install new, missing flashing parts, gutters, downspouts, and elbows with
    same material, gage, and finish as existing.

 d. Plumbing: Contractor shall repair damaged vent pipes above roof and
    shall replace piping on top of roofing that should be removed due to
    roofing system replacement.

 e. Electrical: Contractor shall replace and/or relocate, and/or reinstall,
    and/or repair conduit and wiring installed at top of the roofing system
    to be replaced. Deteriorated, damaged, and/or not in compliance with NEC
    (National Electrical Code) disconnect switches, condulets, junction
    boxes, conduits and conductors shall be replaced. Also, lightning
    protection systems installed at the roof shall be repaired or replaced if
    they are deteriorated.

 f. Ventilation and Air Conditioning Systems: Contractor shall repair and/or
    replace deteriorated and damaged steel framing supports for air
    conditioning units, prefabricated metal curbs, condense water drainage
    piping, piping for freon gas, metal ducts, insulation for piping and
    ducts, and roof penetration for metal ducts. Also, if required removal
    and reinstallation of roof top air conditioning units.

1.11 The project is located at the U.S. Army Installation of Fort Buchanan
in Guaynabo, Puerto Rico. The exact location will be indicated by the
Contracting Officer.

1.12 ALL PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS: Are encouraged to visit the site and
familiarize themselves with all conditions that might affect the work or cost
thereof.

1.13     ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION:   In order to present and provide for
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                    Page 16 of 463

abatement and control of any environmental pollution arising from the
activities in the performance of this contract, the Contractor shall comply
with all applicable pollution control and abatement, and all applicable
provisions of the Corps of Engineers Manual, EM 385-1-1, entitled: General
Safety Requirements, in effect on the date of solicitation. For the purposes
of this contract, environmental pollution is defined as the presence of
chemical, physical, or biological elements of agents which adversely affect
human life; affect other species of importance to man; or degrade the utility
of the environment for aesthetics and recreational purposes.

1.14 CLEANING UP: All clothes, cotton, wastes, sanding disks, and other
cleaning materials which might constitute a fire hazard shall be placed in a
metal container or destroyed at the end of each work day. Upon completion of
the work, all staging, scaffolding, containers, and debris shall be removed
from the site or destroyed in a manner approved by the Contracting Officer.
Adjacent areas and surfaces negatively affected during the performance of
this contract shall be left clean and returned to the original condition.

1.15 SHOP DRAWINGS, MANUFACTURERS DATA AND CERTIFICATIONS REQUIRED TO THE
CONTRACTOR: As soon as practicable after award of the contract, and before
procurement of fabrication; submit, except as specified otherwise, to the
Contracting Officer, all the shop drawings, manufacturers data and
certifications required in the technical sections of this specification.

1.16 SALVAGE: The Contractor shall dispose off the installation all
existing materials and equipment which are required to be removed or
disconnected to perform the work, but are not indicated or specified for use
in the new work or salvaged, and that have been properly identified and
authorized for disposal by the Contracting Officer.

1.17 SAFETY PROGRAM: The Contractor shall submit for approval a plan
detailing the Safety Program in accordance with the safety requirements.
Prior to starting the work, the Contractor shall meet in conference with
representatives of the Directorate of Public Works (DPW) to discuss and
develop mutual understanding relative to the administration of the Safety
Program.

1.18 ACCIDENT REPORT: The Contractor and his sub-contractors shall maintain
an accurate record, of, and shall report to the Contracting Officer, exposure
data and all accidents resulting in death, traumatic injury, occupational
disease, or damage to property, material, supplies, and equipment incidental
to work performed under the contract.

1.19 PROTECTION OF PREMISES: The Contractor shall take all necessary
precautions to protect the Government and private property from damage as a
result of his operations. Existing property so damaged shall be promptly
restored, repaired or replaced to its original condition by the Contractor at
his own expense.

1.20 ACCESS ROADS: The Contractor shall at all times refrain from the use
of any roads, grounds, or other facilities which have not been specifically
authorized for his use.

1.21 STORM PROTECTION:    Should warnings of wind of gale force or stronger
be issued, the Contractor shall take every practicable precaution to minimize
dangers to persons, to the work, and to adjacent property. These precautions
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                    Page 17 of 463

shall include removing all loose materials, tools, and/or equipment from
exposed locations, and removing or securing other temporary work.

1.22 STORAGE OF MATERIAL: The Contractor shall store materials only in
places where directed. No fire hazardous materials of flammable liquids
shall be stored or otherwise maintained within a building or structure,
except as approved, and in accordance with the local fire regulations.

1.23 ACCESS TO THE INSTALLATION: Notwithstanding the provisions of the
General Clauses entitled "Identification of Employees 1965 Jan", the
Contractor will be required to obtain from the Contracting Officer,
identification cards for his key personnel in order to have access to the job
site.

1.24 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: The Contractor shall comply with all safety
requirements of Manual Corps of Engineers US Army EM 385-1-1, and OSHA
Safety and Health Standards Digest, latest version, in all his activities and
operations to perform the work.

1.25 EQUIPMENT STANDARDS: The Contractor shall submit proof that the
equipment which he proposes to furnish under these specifications conforms to
the standards of the Underwriters Laboratories. The label of Underwriters
Laboratories shall be accepted as conforming to this requirements. In lieu
of the label, the Contractor may submit a written certification from any
nationally recognized testing agency, adequately equipped and competent to
perform such services, that the (stated item) has been tested and conforms to
the standards, including methods of test, of the Underwriters Laboratories.

1.26 Contractor shall comply with Special Considerations, Safety Program,
Required Insurance, and Post Regulations.

1.27 Contractor shall submit for approval all materials to be used in this
contract with Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), and Submittal Status Log
Sheet. Submittals in duplicate shall be delivered to Contracting Officer
within 15 calendar days after Delivery Order issuance, and using a
Transmittal Form.

1.28 Contractor shall install a project identification sign in accordance
with attached sketch. Location shall be approved by the Contracting Officer.

1.29 Contractor shall be required to commence work under this Contract
within 15 and not more than 30 calendar days after being notified to proceed
by Contracting Officer, and complete the specific work order, and have
facility ready for use in 20 to 120 calendar days after issuance of notice to
proceed as required by Contracting Officer.

1.30 Contractor shall submit for approval a work schedule of planned
performance within 15 calendar days after Delivery Order issuance.

1.31   Contractor Personnel Requirements:

1.31.1 Regular working hours shall consist of a period between 7 a.m. and 4
p.m., Monday through Friday, excluding Federal Government holidays. Work
outside working hours will require the Contracting Officer approval. Written
request shall be provided 15 calendar days prior to such work to allow
Government arrangements for inspection.
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                       Page 18 of 463


1.31.2 A personnel list with their social security numbers shall be
submitted to the Contracting Officer in order to obtain a temporary
pass/access approval to Post for each employee.

1.32 The Contractor shall verify all dimensions and existing field
conditions that could or will affect his contract, performance and warranty
prior to start any the work, and notify in writing to the Contracting Officer
(CO) within 20 calendar days after the Notice to Proceed is issued.
Notification Letter to Contracting Officer shall be for:

         a. Any conflicting detail or discrepancy within the scope of
            work, drawings and specifications.
         b. Any deviation from normal or assumed conditions related to site,
            civil, architectural, structural, engineering works that could
            affect contract performance.
         c. Any detrimental interference of inserts, conduits, openings,
            or any mechanical and electrical equipment not shown in
            drawings or mentioned in the specifications.
         d. Any condition that shall or should be investigated with the
            corresponding justification based in his experience and
            expertise.
         e. Any recommendation to improve contract project execution for a
            better final product with the related cost estimate.

1.32.1 On the other way, if after investigation and verification that
existing field conditions will not affect in any way contract performance,
final product and/or warranty, the Contractor shall notify in writing to the
CO that existing field conditions are satisfactory and will not jeopardize
contract performance, final product and warranty.

1.32.2 No work shall be permitted to be executed if the Contractor do not
provide to the CO one or both Notification Letters of the nature indicated in
paragraphs 1.32 and 1.32.1.

1.33 All details, sections, and notes shown in the sketches are intended to
be typical and shall be applied to similar situations elsewhere unless
otherwise noted.

1.34 Contractor shall submit a weekly report with the following but not
limited information:

         a.   Work performed every day
         b.   Weather conditions
         c.   Personnel working every day
         d.   Equipment being used
         e.   Weight in pounds of debris removed from the base.

1.35     ATTACHMENTS:

1.35.1 Contractor shall comply with attached specifications listed in the
Table of Contents which includes General and Technical Specifications for
every type of roofing system.

1.35.2        Other Documents to be used by Contractor:
                                                                        W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                     0001
                                                                            Page 19 of 463

       a.   Fort Buchanan Facilities List Summary (Attachment 1)
       b.   Island wide USARC Buildings Summary (Attachment 2)
       c.   Project identification sign sketch (Attachment 3)
       d.   Material Approval Submittal Form (Attachment 4)
       e.   Submittal Register Form (Attachment 5)

       f.   Form 1, Roofing System Description with instructions (Attachment 6)
       g.   Asbestos Operations and Maintenance Plan for U.S. Army Fort
            Buchanan, Puerto Rico, August 2003 (Attachment 7)
       h.   Drawings SI-1, SI-2, SI-3 (See SECTION 00 01 15, LIST OF DRAWINGS)

1.36 Contractor shall protect existing buildings, facilities, utilities, and
equipment during working period and will be responsible for any damages
resulting from operation and/or execution of this contract.

1.37   Contractor shall protect personnel and new construction from damages.

1.38 Contractor shall clean job site daily and dispose debris outside Army
property.

1.39 Contractor shall conduct his operations so as to cause the least
possible interference with the normal operations of the Post because the
facilities (streets, driveways, and parking areas) will remain in operation
during the entire construction period.

1.40 Contractor shall request final inspection in writing with at least
fifteen (15) working days in advance for proper coordination and approval by
the Contracting Officer.

1.41 Existing Roofing Systems with a current Warranty: Roofing Systems
under this category are identified in Attachment “a”, Post Building Summary
List in paragraph 1.35.2 of this section. These Warranties are for ten (10)
years, which Warranty starting dates could be provided upon request.
Contractor shall perform a Roof Inspection Survey and submit a Written Report
in accordance with delivery order description, and with requirements in
paragraphs 1.2 and 1.9 of this section.

                               *   *   *   END OF SECTION   *   *   *
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                   Page 20 of 463




                                  SECTION 01 33 00

                                SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1     GENERAL

1.1      DEFINITIONS

1.1.1     Submittal

 Shop drawings, product data, samples, and administrative submittals
 presented for review and approval. Contract Clauses "FAR 52.236-5, Material
 and Workmanship," paragraph (b) and "FAR 52.236-21, Specifications and
 Drawings for Construction," paragraphs (d), (e), and (f) apply to all
 "submittals."

1.1.2     Types of Submittals

 All submittals are classified as indicated in paragraph "Submittal
 Descriptions (SD)". Submittals also are grouped as follows:
                                                                 W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                     Page 21 of 463

      a.   Shop drawings: As used in this section, drawings, schedules,
           diagrams, and other data prepared specifically for this contract,
           by contractor or through contractor by way of subcontractor,
           manufacturer, supplier, distributor, or other lower tier
           contractor, to illustrate portion of work.

      b.   Product data: Preprinted material such as illustrations, standard
           schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams,
           manufacturer's descriptive literature, catalog data, and other data
           to illustrate portion of work, but not prepared exclusively for
           this contract.

      c.   Samples: Physical examples of products, materials, equipment,
           assemblies, or workmanship that are physically identical to portion
           of work, illustrating portion of work or establishing standards for
           evaluating appearance of finished work or both.

      d.   Administrative submittals: Data presented for reviews and approval
           to ensure that administrative requirements of project are
           adequately met but not to ensure directly that work is in
           accordance with design concept and in compliance with contract
           documents.

1.2   SUBMITTAL IDENTIFICATION (SD)

Submittals required are identified by SD numbers and titles as
follows:

 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

      Certificates of insurance.
      Surety bonds.
      List of proposed subcontractors.
      List of proposed products.
      Construction Progress Schedule.
      Submittal schedule.

      Schedule of values.
      Health and safety plan.
      Work plan.
      Quality control plan.
      Environmental protection plan.

 SD-02 Shop Drawings

      Drawings, diagrams and schedules specifically prepared to illustrate
      some portion of the work.

      Diagrams and instructions from a manufacturer or fabricator for use in
      producing the product and as aids to the contractor for integrating the
      product or system into the project.

      Drawings prepared by or for the contractor to show how multiple systems
      and interdisciplinary work will be coordinated.
                                                              W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                           0001
                                                                  Page 22 of 463


SD-03 Product Data

    Catalog cuts, illustrations, schedules, diagrams, performance charts,
    instructions and brochures illustrating size, physical appearance and
    other characteristics of materials or equipment for some portion of the
    work.

    Samples of warranty language when the contract requires extended
    product warranties.

SD-04 Samples

    Physical examples of materials, equipment or workmanship that
    illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of a material or
    product and establish standards by which the work can be judged.

    Color samples from the manufacturer's standard line (or custom color
    samples if specified) to be used in selecting or approving colors for
    the project.

    Field samples and mock-ups constructed on the project site establish
    standards by which the ensuring work can be judged. Includes
    assemblies or portions of assemblies which are to be incorporated into
    the project and those which will be removed at conclusion of the work.

SD-05 Design Data

    Calculations, mix designs, analyses or other data pertaining to a part
    of work.

SD-06 Test Reports

    Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that a
    material, product or system identical to the material, product or
    system to be provided has been tested in accord with specified
    requirements. (Testing must have been within three years of date of
    contract award for the project.)


    Report which includes findings of a test required to be performed by
    the contractor on an actual portion of the work or prototype prepared
    for the project before shipment to job site.

    Report which includes finding of a test made at the job site or on
    sample taken from the job site, on portion of work during or after
    installation.

    Investigation reports

    Daily checklists

    Final acceptance test and operational test procedure
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                      Page 23 of 463

 SD-07 Certificates

        Statements signed by responsible officials of manufacturer of product,
        system or material attesting that product, system or material meets
        specification requirements. Must be dated after award of project
        contract and clearly name the project.

        Document required of Contractor, or of a supplier, installer or
        subcontractor through Contractor, the purpose of which is to further
        quality of orderly progression of a portion of the work by documenting
        procedures, acceptability of methods or personnel qualifications.

        Confined space entry permits.

 SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

        Preprinted material describing installation of a product, system or
        material, including special notices and Material Safety Data sheets
        concerning impedances, hazards and safety precautions.

 SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports

        Documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by
        manufacturer's representative to confirm compliance with manufacturer's
        standards or instructions.

        Factory test reports.

 SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data

        Data intended to be incorporated in operations and maintenance manuals.

 SD-11 Closeout Submittals

        Documentation to record compliance with technical or administrative
        requirements or to establish an administrative mechanism.

        As-built drawings.

        Special warranties.

        Posted operating instructions.

        Training plan.

1.3.1     Approving Authority

 Person authorized to approve submittal.

1.3.2     Work

 As used in this section, on- and off-site construction required by contract
 documents, including labor necessary to produce construction and materials,
                                                                    W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                 0001
                                                                        Page 24 of 463

 products, equipment, and systems incorporated or to be incorporated in such
 construction.

1.4   SUBMITTALS
  Submit the following in accordance with the requirements of this section.

        SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

            Submittal register; G

1.5   USE OF SUBMITTAL REGISTER
  Prepare and maintain submittal register, as the work progresses. Use
  submittal register furnished by the Government. Do not change data which is
  output in columns (c), (d), (e), and (f) as delivered by government; retain
  data which is output in columns (a), (g), (h), and (i) as approved.

1.5.1   Submittal Register
  Submit submittal register for approval within 15 days after Notice of Award.
  Do not change data in columns (c), (d), (e), and (f) as delivered by the
  government. Verify that all submittals required for project are listed and
  add missing submittals. Complete the following on the register:

        Column (a) Activity Number:   Activity number from the project schedule.

        Column (g) Contractor Submit Date: Scheduled date for approving
            authority to receive submittals.

        Column (h) Contractor Approval Date:     Date contractor needs approval of
            submittal.

        Column (i) Contractor Material: Date that contractor needs material
            delivered to contractor control.

1.5.2     Contractor Use of Submittal Register

 Update the following fields in the government-furnished submittal register.

        Column (b) Transmittal Number:     Contractor assigned list of consecutive
            numbers.

        Column (j) Action Code (k): Date of action used to record contractor's
            review when forwarding submittals to QC.

        Column (l) List date of submittal transmission.

        Column (q) List date approval received.

1.5.3     Approving Authority Use of Submittal Register

 Update the following fields in the government-furnished submittal register.

        Column (b).
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                       Page 25 of 463


        Column (l) List date of submittal receipt.

        Column (m) through (p).

        Column (q) List date returned to contractor.

1.5.4     Contractor Action Code and Action Code

 Entries used will be as follows (others may be prescribed by Transmittal
 Form):

        NR - Not Received

        AN - Approved as noted

        A - Approved

        RR - Disapproved, Revise, and Resubmit

1.5.5   Copies Delivered to the Government
  Deliver 4 copies of submitted register updated by contractor to government
  with each invoice request and as requested by the Contracting Officer.

1.6     PROCEDURES FOR SUBMITTALS

1.6.1     Reviewing, Certifying, Approving Authority

 QC Organization shall be responsible for reviewing and certifying that
 submittals are in compliance with contract requirements. Approving
 authority on submittals is QC Manager unless otherwise specified for
 specific submittal. At each "Submittal" paragraph in individual
 specification sections, a notation "G," following a submittal item,
 indicates contracting officer is approving authority for that submittal
 item.

1.6.2     Constraints

        a.   Submittals listed or specified in this contract shall conform to
             provisions of this section, unless explicitly stated otherwise.

        b.   Submittals shall be complete for each definable feature of work;
             components of definable feature interrelated as a system shall be
             submitted at same time.

        c.   When acceptability of a submittal is dependent on conditions,
             items, or materials included in separate subsequent submittals,
             submittal will be returned without review.

        d.   Approval of a separate material, product, or component does not
             imply approval of assembly in which item functions.
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                       Page 26 of 463

        e. Submittal approval is required prior to the procurement
           of fabrication and the commencement of an activity
           related to it.

1.6.3     Scheduling

        a.   Coordinate scheduling, sequencing, preparing and processing of
             submittals with performance of work so that work will not be
             delayed by submittal processing. Allow for potential requirements
             to resubmit.

        b.   Except as specified otherwise, allow review period, beginning with
             receipt by approving authority, that includes at least 20 working
             days for submittals for contracting officer approval. Period of
             review for submittals with contracting officer approval begins when
             Government receives submittal from QC Organization. Period of
             review for each resubmittal is the same as for initial submittal.
        c.   For submittals requiring review by fire protection engineer, allow
             review period, beginning when government receives submittal from QC
             Organization of 30 working days for return of submittal to the
             contractor. Period of review for each resubmittal is the same as
             for initial submittal.

1.6.4     Variations

 Variations from contract requirements require Government approval pursuant
 to contract Clause entitled "FAR 52.236-21, Specifications and Drawings for
 Construction" and will be considered where advantageous to government.

1.6.4.1      Considering Variations

 Discussion with contracting officer prior to submission, will help ensure
 functional and quality requirements are met and minimize rejections and
 resubmittals. When contemplating a variation which results in lower cost,
 consider submission of the variation as a Value Engineering Change Proposal
 (VECP).

1.6.4.2      Proposing Variations

 When proposing variation, deliver written request to the contracting
 officer, with documentation of the nature and features of the variation and
 why the variation is desirable and beneficial to government. If lower cost
 is a benefit, also include an estimate of the cost saving. In addition to
 documentation required for variation, include the submittals required for
 the item. Clearly mark the proposed variation in all documentation.

1.6.4.3      Warranting That Variations Are Compatible

 When delivering a variation for approval, contractor warrants that this
 contract has been reviewed to establish that the variation, if incorporated,
 will be compatible with other elements of work.
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                       Page 27 of 463

1.6.4.4      Review Schedule Is Modified

 In addition to normal submittal review period, a period of 10 working days
 will be allowed for consideration by the Government of submittals with
 variations.

1.6.5     Contractor's Responsibilities

        a.   Determine and verify field measurements, materials, field
             construction criteria; review each submittal; and check and
             coordinate each submittal with requirements of the work and
             contract documents.

        b.   Transmit submittals to QC Organization in accordance with schedule
             on approved Submittal Register, and to prevent delays in the work,
             delays to government, or delays to separate contractors.

        c.   Advise contracting officer of variation, as required by paragraph
             entitled "Variations."

        d.   Correct and resubmit submittal as directed by approving authority.
             When resubmitting disapproved transmittals or transmittals noted
             for resubmittal, the contractor shall provide copy of that
             previously submitted transmittal including all reviewer comments
             for use by approving authority. Direct specific attention in
             writing or on resubmitted submittal, to revisions not requested by
             approving authority on previous submissions.

        e.   Furnish additional copies of submittal when requested by
             contracting officer, to a limit of 12 copies per submittal.

        f.   Complete work which must be accomplished as basis of a submittal in
             time to allow submittal to occur as scheduled.

        g.   Ensure no work has begun until submittals for that work have been
             returned as "approved," or "approved as noted", except to the
             extent that a portion of work must be accomplished as basis of
             submittal.

1.6.6     QC Organization Responsibilities

        a.   Note date on which submittal was received from contractor on each
             submittal.

        b.   Review each submittal; and check and coordinate each submittal with
             requirements of work and contract documents.

        c.   Review submittals for conformance with project design concepts and
             compliance with contract documents.

        d.   Act on submittals, determining appropriate action based on QC
             organization's review of submittal.
                                                            W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                         0001
                                                                Page 28 of 463

     (1) When QC manager is approving authority, take appropriate
     action on submittal from the possible actions defined in paragraph
     entitled, "Actions Possible."

     (2) When contracting officer is approving authority or when
     variation has been proposed, forward submittal to Government with
     certifying statement or return submittal marked "not reviewed" or
     "revise and resubmit" as appropriate. The QC organization's review
     of submittal determines appropriate action.

e.   Ensure that material is clearly legible.

f.   Stamp each sheet of each submittal with QC certifying statement or
     approving statement, except that data submitted in bound volume or
     on one sheet printed on two sides may be stamped on the front of
     the first sheet only.

     (1)   When approving authority is contracting officer, QC
           Organization will certify submittals forwarded to contracting
           officer with the following certifying statement:

"I hereby certify that the (equipment) (material) (article) shown and
    marked in this submittal is that proposed to be incorporated with
    contract Number [_____], is in compliance with the contract
    drawings and specification, can be installed in the allocated
    spaces, and is submitted for Government approval.

Certified by Submittal Reviewer _____________________, Date _______
(Signature when applicable)

Certified by QC manager _____________________________, Date ______"
(Signature)

     (2) When approving authority is QC manager, QC manager will use
     the following approval statement when returning submittals to
     contractor as "Approved" or "Approved as Noted."

"I hereby certify that the (material) (equipment) (article) shown and
    marked in this submittal and proposed to be incorporated with
    contract Number [_____], is in compliance with the contract
    drawings and specification, can be installed in the allocated
    spaces, and is _____ approved for use.

Certified by Submittal Reviewer ______________________, Date ______
(Signature when applicable)

Approved by QC manager _______________________________, Date _____"
(Signature)

g.   Sign certifying statement or approval statement. The person
     signing certifying statements shall be QC Organization member
     designated in the approved QC Plan. The signatures shall be in
     original ink. Stamped signatures are not acceptable.
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                       Page 29 of 463

        h.   Update submittal register as submittal actions occur and maintain
             the submittal register at project site until final acceptance of
             all work by contracting officer.

        i.   Retain a copy of approved submittals at project site, including
             contractor's copy of approved samples.

1.6.7    Government's Responsibilities

 When approving authority is contracting Officer, the Government will:

        a.   Note date on which submittal was received from QC manager, on each
             submittal for which the contracting officer is approving authority.

        b.   Review submittals for approval within scheduling period specified
             and only for conformance with project design concepts and
             compliance with contract documents.

        c.   Identify returned submittals with one of the actions defined in
             paragraph entitled "Actions Possible" and with markings appropriate
             for action indicated.

1.6.8    Actions Possible

 Submittals will be returned with one of the following notations:

        a.   Submittals marked "not reviewed" will indicate submittal has been
             previously reviewed and approved, is not required , does not have
             evidence of being reviewed and approved by contractor, or is not
             complete. A submittal marked "not reviewed" will be returned with
             an explanation of the reason it is not reviewed. Resubmit
             submittals returned for lack of review by contractor or for being
             incomplete, with appropriate action, coordination, or change.

        b.   Submittals marked "approved" "approved as submitted" authorize
             contractor to proceed with work covered.

        c.   Submittals marked "approved as noted" or "approval except as noted;
             resubmission not required" authorize contractor to proceed with
             work as noted provided contractor takes no exception to the
             notations.

        d.   Submittals marked "revise and resubmit" or "disapproved" indicate
             submittal is incomplete or does not comply with design concept or
             requirements of the contract documents and shall be resubmitted
             with appropriate changes. No work shall proceed for this item
             until re-submittal is approved.
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                       Page 30 of 463

1.7     FORMAT OF SUBMITTALS

1.7.1     Transmittal Form

 Transmit each submittal, except sample installations and sample panels, to
 office of approving authority. Transmit submittals with transmittal form
 prescribed by contracting officer and standard for project. The transmittal
 form shall identify contractor, indicate date of submittal, and include

 information prescribed by transmittal form and required in paragraph
 entitled "Identifying Submittals." Process transmittal forms to record
 actions regarding sample panels and sample installations.

1.7.2     Identifying Submittals

 Identify submittals, except sample panel and sample installation, with the
 following information permanently adhered to or noted on each separate
 component of each submittal and noted on transmittal form. Mark each copy
 of each submittal identically, with the following:

        a.   Project title and location.

        b.   Construction contract number.

        c.   Section number of the specification section by which submittal is
             required.

        d.   Submittal description (SD) number of each component of submittal.

        e.   When a resubmission, add alphabetic suffix on submittal
             description, for example, SD-10A, to indicate resubmission.

        f.   Name, address, and telephone number of subcontractor, supplier,
             manufacturer and any other second tier contractor associated with
             submittal.

        g.   Product identification and location in project.

1.7.3     Format for Product Data

        a.   Present product data submittals for each section as a complete,
             bound volume. Include table of contents, listing page and catalog
             item numbers for product data.

        b.   Indicate, by prominent notation, each product which is being
             submitted; indicate specification section number and paragraph
             number to which it pertains.

        c.   Supplement product data with material prepared for project to
             satisfy submittal requirements for which product data does not
             exist. Identify this material as developed specifically for
             project.
                                                                      W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                   0001
                                                                          Page 31 of 463

1.7.4    Format for Shop Drawings

        a.   Shop drawings shall not be less than 8 1/2 by 11 inches nor more
             than 30 by 42 inches.

        b.   Present 8 1/2 by 11 inches sized shop drawings as part of the bound
             volume for submittals required by section. Present larger drawings
             in sets.

        c.   Include on each drawing the drawing title, number, date, and
             revision numbers and dates, in addition to information required in
             paragraph entitled "Identifying Submittals."

        d.   Dimension drawings, except diagrams and schematic drawings; prepare
             drawings demonstrating interface with other trades to scale. Shop
             drawing dimensions shall be the same unit of measure as indicated
             on the contract drawings. Identify materials and products for work
             shown.

1.7.5    Format of Samples

        a.   Furnish samples in sizes below, unless otherwise specified or
             unless the manufacturer has prepackaged samples of approximately
             same size as specified:

             (1)   Sample of Equipment or Device:   Full size.

             (2) Sample of Materials Less Than 2 by 3 inches:     Built up to 8
             1/2 by 11 inches.

             (3) Sample of Materials Exceeding 8 1/2 by 11 inches: Cut down to
             8 1/2 by 11 inches and adequate to indicate color, texture, and
             material variations.

             (4) Sample of Linear Devices or Materials: 10 inch length or
             length to be supplied, if less than 10 inches. Examples of linear
             devices or materials are conduit and handrails.

             (5) Sample of Non-Solid Materials: Pint.      Examples of non-solid
             materials are sand and paint.

             (6)   Color Selection Samples: 2 by 4 inches.

             (7)   Sample Panel: 4 by 4 feet.

             (8)   Sample Installation: 100 square feet.

        b.   Samples Showing Range of Variation: Where variations are
             unavoidable due to nature of the materials, submit sets of samples
             of not less than three units showing extremes and middle of range.
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                       Page 32 of 463

        c.   Reusable Samples: Incorporate returned samples into work only if
             so specified or indicated. Incorporated samples shall be in
             undamaged condition at time of use.

        d.   Recording of Sample Installation: Note and preserve the notation
             of area constituting sample installation but remove notation at
             final clean up of project.

        e.   When color, texture or pattern is specified by naming a particular
             manufacturer and style, include one sample of that manufacturer and
             style, for comparison.

1.7.6     Format of Administrative Submittals

        a.   When submittal includes a document which is to be used in project
             or become part of project record, other than as a submittal, do not
             apply contractor's approval stamp to document, but to a separate
             sheet accompanying document.

        b.   Operation and Maintenance Manual Data: Submit in accordance with
             the various technical specification if required. Include
             components required in every section.

1.8     QUANTITY OF SUBMITTALS

1.8.1     Number of Copies of Product Data

        a.   Submit four copies of submittals of product data requiring review
             and approval by contracting officer. Submit three copies of
             submittals of product data for operation and maintenance manuals.

1.8.2     Number of Copies of Shop Drawings

 Submit shop drawings in compliance with quantity requirements specified for
 product data.

1.8.3     Number of Samples

        a.   Submit two samples, or two sets of samples showing range of
             variation, of each required item. One approved sample or set of
             samples will be retained by approving authority and one will be
             returned to contractor.

        b.   Submit one sample panel.   Include components listed in technical
             section or as directed.

        c.   Submit one sample installation, where directed.

        d.   Submit one sample of non-solid materials.
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                         Page 33 of 463

1.8.4     Number of Copies of Administrative Submittals

         a.    Unless otherwise specified, submit administrative submittals
               compliance with quantity requirements specified for product data.

         b.    Submit administrative submittals required under "SD-10 Operation
               and Maintenance Data" to conform to Section 01781N, "Operation and
               Maintenance Data."

1.9      FORWARDING SUBMITTALS

1.9.1      Samples Required of the Contractor

 Submit samples to the Contracting Officer.

1.9.2      Shop Drawings, Product Data, and O&M Data

 As soon as practicable after award of contract, and before procurement of
 fabrication, submit, except as specified otherwise, to the Contracting
 officer the shop drawings, product data and O&M Data required in the
 technical sections of this specification. The Architect-Engineer for this
 project will review and provide surveillance for the Contracting Officer to
 determine if Contractor-approved submittals comply with the contract
 requirements, and will review and approve for the Contracting Officer those
 submittals not permitted to be Contractor approved to determine if
 submittals comply with the contract requirements.

1.9.2.1       Overseas Shop Drawing Submittals

 All submittals shall be sent via overnight express mail service. All costs
 associated with the overnight express mail service shall be borne by the
 construction contractor. Costs associated with the overnight express mail
 of submittals related to proposed submittal variances of resubmittals
 necessary as a result of noncompliant or incomplete contractor submittals
 shall be the responsibility of the contractor.

1.10      SUBMITTAL CLASSIFICATION

 Submittals are classified as follows:

1.10.1        Government Approved

 Government approval is required for extensions of design, critical
 materials, deviations, equipment whose compatibility with the entire system
 must be checked, and other items as designated by the Contracting Officer.
 Within the terms of the Contract Clause entitled "Specifications and
 Drawings for Construction," they are considered to be "shop drawings."

1.10.2        Information Only

 All submittals not requiring Government approval will be for information
 only. They are not considered to be "shop drawings" within the terms of the
 Contract Clause referred to above.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                   Page 34 of 463


1.11   APPROVED SUBMITTALS

 The Contracting Officer's approval of submittals shall not be construed as a
 complete check, but will indicate only that the general method of
 construction, materials, detailing and other information are satisfactory.
 Approval will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for any error
 which may exist, the Contractor under the Contractor Quality Control (CQC)
 requirements of this contract is responsible for dimensions, the design of
 adequate connections and details, and the satisfactory construction of all
 work. After submittals have been approved by the Contracting Officer, no
 resubmittal for the purpose of substituting materials or equipment will be
 considered unless accompanied by an explanation of why a substitution is
 necessary.

1.12   DISAPPROVED SUBMITTALS

 The Contractor shall make all corrections required by the Contracting
 Officer and promptly furnish a corrected submittal in the form and number of
 copies specified for the initial submittal. If the Contractor considers any
 correction indicated on the submittals to constitute a change to the
 contract, a notice in accordance with the Contract Clause "Changes" shall be
 given promptly to the Contracting Officer.

1.13   WITHHOLDING OF PAYMENT

 Payment for materials incorporated in the work will not be made if required
 approvals have not been obtained.

1.14   GENERAL

 The Contractor shall make submittals as required by the specifications. The
 Contracting Officer may request submittals in addition to those specified
 when deemed necessary to adequately describe the work covered in the
 respective sections. Units of weights and measures used on all submittals
 shall be the same as those used in the contract drawings. Each submittal
 shall be complete and in sufficient detail to allow ready determination of
 compliance with contract requirements. Prior to submittal, all items shall
 be checked and approved by the Contractor's Contractor Quality Control (CQC)
 System Manager and each item shall be stamped, signed, and dated by the CQC
 System Manager indicating action taken. Proposed deviations from the
 contract requirements shall be clearly identified. Submittals shall include
 items such as: Contractor's, manufacturer's, or fabricator's drawings;
 descriptive literature including (but not limited to) catalog cuts,
 diagrams, operating charts or curves; test reports; test cylinders; samples;
 O&M manuals (including parts list); certifications; warranties; and other
 such required submittals. Submittals requiring Government approval shall be
 scheduled and made prior to the acquisition of the material or equipment
 covered thereby. Samples remaining upon completion of the work shall be
 picked up and disposed of in accordance with manufacturer's Material Safety
 Data Sheets (MSDS) and in compliance with existing laws and regulations.
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                    Page 35 of 463

1.15   SUBMITTAL REGISTER
  At the end of this section is a submittal register showing items of
  equipment and materials for which submittals are required by the
  specifications; this list may not be all inclusive and additional submittals
  may be required. The Contractor shall maintain a submittal register for the
  project and issue an updated submittal register with each invoice request.

1.16     SCHEDULING

 Submittals covering component items forming a system or items that are
 interrelated shall be scheduled to be coordinated and submitted
 concurrently. Certifications to be submitted with the pertinent drawings
 shall be so scheduled. Adequate time (a minimum of 20 calendar days
 exclusive of mailing time) shall be allowed and shown on the register for
 review and approval. No delay damages or time extensions will be allowed
 for time lost in late submittals. An additional 20 calendar days shall be
 allowed and shown on the register for review and approval of submittals for
 refrigeration and HVAC control systems.

1.17     TRANSMITTAL FORM (ENG FORM 4025)

 The sample transmittal form (ENG Form 4025) attached to this section shall
 be used for submitting both Government approved and information only
 submittals in accordance with the instructions on the reverse side of the
 form. These forms will be furnished to the Contractor. This form shall be
 properly completed by filling out all the heading blank spaces and
 identifying each item submitted. Special care shall be exercised to ensure
 proper listing of the specification paragraph and/or sheet number of the
 contract drawings pertinent to the data submitted for each item.

1.18     SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

 Submittals shall be made as follows:

1.18.1    Deviations

 For submittals which include proposed deviations requested by the
 Contractor, the column "variation" of ENG Form 4025 shall be checked. The
 Contractor shall set forth in writing the reason for any deviations and
 annotate such deviations on the submittal. The Government reserves the
 right to rescind inadvertent approval of submittals containing unnoted
 deviations.

1.19     CONTROL OF SUBMITTALS

 The Contractor shall carefully control his procurement operations to ensure
 that each individual submittal is made on or before the Contractor scheduled
 submittal date shown on the approved "Submittal Register."

1.20     GOVERNMENT APPROVED SUBMITTALS

 Upon completion of review of submittals requiring Government approval, the
 submittals will be identified as having received approval by being so
 stamped and dated. Three copies of the submittal will be retained by the
                                                                 W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                     Page 36 of 463

 Contracting Officer and one copy of the submittal will be returned to the
 Contractor.

1.21     INFORMATION ONLY SUBMITTALS

 Normally submittals for information only will not be returned. Approval of
 the Contracting Officer is not required on information only submittals.
 The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to resubmit any
 item found not to comply with the contract. This does not relieve the
 Contractor from the obligation to furnish material conforming to the plans
 and specifications; will not prevent the Contracting Officer from requiring
 removal and replacement of nonconforming material incorporated in the work;
 and does not relieve the Contractor of the requirement to furnish samples
 for testing by the Government laboratory or for check testing by the
 Government in those instances where the technical specifications so
 prescribe.

1.22     STAMPS

 Stamps used by the Contractor on the submittal data to certify that the
 submittal meets contract requirements shall be similar to the following:


    ________________________________________________________________________
  |                                CONTRACTOR                                |
  |                                                                          |
  |                                (Firm Name)                               |
  |                                                                          |
  |                                                                          |
  |                                                                          |
  | _____ Approved                                                           |
  |                                                                          |
  |                                                                          |
  | _____ Approved with corrections as noted on submittal data and/or        |
  | attached sheets(s).                                                      |
  |                                                                          |
  |                                                                          |
  |                                                                          |
  | SIGNATURE: __________________________________________________________ |
  |                                                                          |
  | TITLE: ______________________________________________________________ |
  |                                                                          |
  | DATE: _______________________________________________________________ |
  |                                                                          |
  |________________________________________________________________________|


PART 2     PRODUCTS

 Not used.

PART 3     EXECUTION

 Not used.
                         W912C3-09-B-0006
                                      0001
                             Page 37 of 463



*** END OF SECTION ***




   SECTION 01 35 29
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                         Page 38 of 463

                  HEALTH, SAFETY AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES


PART 1      GENERAL

1.1      REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
 basic designation only.

           AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

 ANSI A10.14                       (1991) Construction and Demolition Operations
                                   - Requirements for Safety Belts, Harnesses,
                                   Lanyards and Lifelines for Construction and
                                   Demolition Use

 ANSI Z359.1                       (1992) Safety Requirements for Personal Fall
                                   Arrest Systems

           ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)

 ASME B30.5                        (1994) Mobile Cranes

 ASME B30.22                       (1993) Articulating Boom Cranes

           U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

 29 CFR 1910.94                    Ventilation

 29 CFR 1910.120                   Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency
                                   Response

 29 CFR 1926.65                    Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency
                                   Response

 29 CFR 1926.502(f)                Warning Line Systems

           U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)

 COE EM-385-1-1                    (1996) Safety and Health Requirements Manual

           NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

 NFPA 10                           (1995) Portable Fire Extinguishers

 NFPA 70                           (1999) National Electrical Code

 NFPA 241                          (1996) Safeguarding Construction, Alteration,
                                   and Demolition Operations
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                       Page 39 of 463


1.2   DEFINITIONS

      a.   Competent Person. A competent person is one who is capable of
           identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings or
           working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to
           employees, and who has authorization to take prompt corrective
           measures to eliminate them.

      b.   Confined Space. A space which by design has limited openings for
           entry and exit, unfavorable natural ventilation which could contain
           or produce dangerous air contaminants, and which is not intended
           for continuous employee occupancy. Confined spaces include, but
           are not limited to storage tanks, process vessels, pits, silos,
           vats, degreasers, reaction vessels, boilers, ventilation and
           exhaust ducts, sewers, tunnels, underground utility vaults, and
           pipelines.

      c.   First Aid. First aid is any one-time    treatment, and any follow-up
           visit for the purpose of observation,   of minor scratches, cuts,
           burns, splinters, and so forth, which   do not ordinarily require
           medical care, even though provided by   a physician or registered
           professional personnel.

      d.   Health and Safety Plan (HASP). The HASP is the Navy equivalent Army
            term of SHP or SSHP used in COE EM-385-1-1. "USACE" property and
            equipment specified in COE EM-385-1-1 should be interpreted as
            Government property and equipment.

      e.   Lost Workdays.    The number of days (consecutive or not) after, but
           not including,   the day of injury or illness during which the
           employee would   have worked but could not do so; that is, could not
           perform all or   part of his normal assignment during all or any part
           of the workday   or shift; because of the occupational injury or
           illness.

      f.   Medical Treatment. Medical treatment includes treatment
           administered by a physician or by registered professional personnel
           under the standing orders of a physician. Medical treatment does
           not include first aid treatment even through provided by a
           physician or registered personnel.

      g.   Multi-employer work site (MEWS). A multi-employer work site, as
           defined by OSHA, is one in which many employers occupy the same
           site. The Navy considers the prime contractor to be the
           "controlling authority" for all work site safety and health of the
           subcontractors.

      h.   Operating Envelope. There is an "operating envelope" around any
            crane, and inside the envelope are the operator, riggers, rigging
            gear between the hook and the load, the load and the crane's
            supporting structure (ground, rail, etc.).
                                                            W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                         0001
                                                                Page 40 of 463

i.    Qualified Person. One who, by possession of a recognized degree,
      certificate, or professional standing, or extensive knowledge,
      training, and experience, has successfully demonstrated his or her
      ability to solve or resolve problems related to the subject matter,
      the work or the project.

j.    Recordable Occupational Injuries or Illnesses.   Any occupational
      injuries or illnesses which result in:

(1)    Fatalities, regardless of the time between the injury and death,
      or the length of the illness; or

(2)    Lost Workday Cases, other than fatalities, that result in lost
      workdays, or

(3)    Non-Fatal Cases without lost workdays which result in transfer to
      another job or termination of employment, or require medical
      treatment (other than first aid) or involve: loss of consciousness
      or restriction of work or motion. This category also includes any
      diagnosed occupational illnesses which are reported to the employer
      but are not classified as facilities or lost workday cases.

k.    Safety Officer. The superintendent or other qualified or competent
      person who is responsible for the on-site safety required for the
      project. The contractor quality control person cannot be the
      safety officer, even through the QC has safety inspection
      responsibilities as part of the QC duties.

l.    Serious Accidents. Any work-related incident, which results in, a
      fatality, in-patient hospitalization of three or more employees, or
      property damage in excess of $200,000.

m.    Significant Accident. Any contractor accident which involves falls
      of (4 feet) or more, electrical accidents, confined space
      accidents, diving accidents, equipment accidents, crane accident or
      fire accidents, which, result in property damage of $10,000 or
      more, but less than $200,000; or when fire department or emergency
      medical treatment (EMT) assistance is required.

n.    Weight Handling Equipment (WHE) Accident. A WHE accident occurs
      when any one or more of the six elements in the operating envelope
      fails to perform correctly during operation, including operation
      during maintenance or testing resulting in personnel injury or
      death; material or equipment damage; dropped load; derailment; two-
      blocking; overload; and collision, including unplanned contact
      between the load, crane, and/or other objects. A dropped load,
      derailment, two-blocking, overload and collision are considered
      accidents even though no material damage or injury occurs. A
      component failure (e.g., motor burnout, gear tooth failure, bearing
      failure) is not considered an accident solely due to material or
      equipment damage unless the component failure results in damage to
      other components (e.g., dropped boom, dropped load, roll over,
      etc.).
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                       Page 41 of 463



1.3     SUBMITTALS

 Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330, "Submittal
 Procedures."

        SD-07 Certificates

             Accident Prevention Plan (APP); G

             Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA); G

             Health and Safety Plan (HASP); G

        SD-11 Closeout Submittals

             Reports

             Submit reports as their incidence occurs, in accordance with the
             requirements of the paragraph entitled, "Reports."

1.4     QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.4.1     Safety Specialist

 Provide a Safety Specialist at the work site to perform safety management,
 surveillance, inspections, and safety enforcement for the contractor. The
 Safety Specialist shall be the safety "competent person" as defined by COE
 EM-385-1-1. The Safety Specialist shall be at the work site at all times
 whenever work or testing is being performed, shall conduct daily safety
 inspections and shall have no other duties other than safety management,
 inspections, and safety enforcement on this contract.

1.4.2     Qualifications

        a.   Qualifications of Safety Officer:

             (1) Ability to manage the on-site contractor safety program
             through appropriate management controls.

             (2) Ability to identify hazards and have the capability to expend
             resources necessary to abate the hazards.

             (3) Must have worked on similar types of projects that are equal
             to or exceed the scope of the project assigned with the same
             responsibilities.

             (4) Shall, as a minimum, have attended an OSHA training
             qualification class including at least 10 hours of classroom
             instruction.
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                      Page 42 of 463


1.4.3     Meetings

1.4.3.1      Preconstruction Conference

 The safety officer shall attend the preconstruction conference.

1.4.3.2      Meeting on Work Procedures

        a.   Meet with Contracting Officer to discuss work procedures and safety
             precautions required by the APP. Ensure the participation of the
             contractor's superintendent, the quality control, and the CSP or
             CIH.

        b.   Meet with Contracting Officer to discuss work procedures and safety
             precautions required by the HASP. Ensure the participation of the
             contractor's superintendent, the quality control, and the CSP or
             CIH.

1.4.3.3      Weekly Safety Meetings

 Hold weekly at the project site. Attach minutes showing contract title,
 signatures of attendees and a list of topics discussed to the QC Contractor
 Quality Control daily report.

1.4.3.4      Work Phase Meetings

 The appropriate AHA shall be reviewed and attendance documented by the
 Contractor at the preparatory, initial, and follow-up phases of quality
 control inspection.

1.4.3.5      New Employee Indoctrination

 New employees will be informed of specific site hazards before they begin
 work. Documentation of this orientation shall be kept on file at the
 project site.

1.4.4     Certifications

1.4.4.1      Accident Prevention Plan (APP)

 Submit the APP at least 15 calendar days prior to start of work at the job
 site, following Appendix A of COE EM-385-1-1. Make the APP site specific.
 Notice To Proceed will be given after Government finds the APP acceptable.

1.4.4.2      Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA)

 Submit the AHA for review at least 15 calendar days prior to the start of
 each phase. Format subsequent AHA as amendments to the APP. In accordance
 with contract quality control requirements each AHA will be reviewed during
 an on-site preparatory inspection.
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                         Page 43 of 463

1.4.4.3      Health and Safety Plan (HASP)

 Submit the HASP for projects involving the handling of hazardous materials
 and allow 15 calendar days for review by Preventive Medicine Department at
 the Rodriguez Army Health Clinic and the command Safety Office, DCSPER.
 Both at the U.S. Army Garrison, Fort Buchanan. The Contracting Officer will
 act on the HASP only after 15 days Safety Officer reviews.

1.5     ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN (APP)

 Prepare the APP in accordance with the required and advisory provisions of
 COE EM-385-1-1 including Appendix A, "Minimum Basic Outline for Preparation
 of Accident Prevention Plan," and as modified herein. Include the
 associated AHA and other specific plans, programs and procedures listed on
 Pages A-3 and A-4 of COE EM-385-1-1, some of which are listed below.

1.5.1     Contents of the Accident Prevention Plan

        a.   Name and safety related qualifications of safety officer (including
             training and any certifications).

        b.   Qualifications of competent and of qualified persons.

        c.   Identity of the individual who will complete exposure data (hours
             worked); accident investigations, reports and logs; and immediate
             notification of accidents to include subcontractors.

        d.   Emergency response plan. Conform to COE EM-385-1-1, paragraph 01.E
             and include a map denoting the route to the nearest emergency care
             facility with emergency phone numbers. Contractor may be required
             to demonstrate emergency response.

        e.   Hazardous Material Use. Provisions to deal with hazardous
             materials, pursuant to the Contract Clause "FAR 52.223-3, Hazardous
             Material Identification and Material Safety Data." And the
             following:

             (1) Inventory of hazardous materials to be introduced to the site
             with estimated quantities.

             (2) Plan for protecting personnel and property during the
             transport, storage and use of the materials.

             (3) Emergency procedures for spill response and disposal,
             including a site map with approximate quantities on site at any
             given time. The site map will be attached to the inventory,
             showing where the hazardous substances are stored.

             (4) Material Safety Data Sheets for inventoried materials not
             required in other section of this specification.

             (5) Labeling system to identify contents on all containers on-
             site.
                                                           W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                        0001
                                                               Page 44 of 463


     (6)  Plan for communicating high health hazards to employees and
     adjacent occupants.

f.   Hazardous Energy Control Plan. For hazardous energy sources,
     comply with COE EM-385-1-1, paragraph 12.A.07.

g.   Alcohol and Drug Abuse Plan

     (1) Describe plan for random checks and testing with pre-
     employment screening in accordance with the DFAR Clause subpart
     252.223-7004, "Drug Free Work Force."

     (2)   Description of the on-site prevention program

h.   Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan. The plan shall be site
     specific and address all fall hazards in the work place. It shall
     address how to protect and prevent workers from falling to lower
     levels when they are exposed to fall hazards above 6 feet. A
     qualified person shall prepare the plan. The plan shall include
     fall protection and prevention systems, equipment and methods
     employed, responsibilities, rescue and escape equipment and
     operations, training requirements, and monitoring methods. FP&P
     Plan shall be revised once every six months for lengthy projects,
     to reflect any new changes during the course of construction, due
     to changes of personnel, equipment, systems or work habits.

i. Silica Exposure Reduction. The plan shall include specific
   procedures to prevent employee silica inhalation exposures.

j.   Lead Abatement Plan. The safety and health aspects of lead-based
     paint removal if required, prepared in accordance with Federal and
     Local Environmental Regulations

k.   Asbestos Abatement Plan. The safety and health aspects prepared in
     accordance with Section 02 82-16, "Engineering Control of Asbestos
     Containing Materials"

l.   Site Demolition Plan. The safety and health aspects prepared in
     accordance with Section 02 41 00, "Demolition" and referenced
     sources. Include engineering survey as applicable.

m.    Training Records and Requirements. List of mandatory training and
     certifications which are applicable to this project (e.g., personal
     protective equipment); list of requirements for periodic
     retraining/certification; outline requirements for supervisory and
     employee safety meetings.

n.    Severe Weather Plan. Procedures of ceasing on-site operations
     during lightning or upon reaching maximum allowed wind velocities.

o.    Emergency Lighting and Power Systems Plan (e.g. periodic testing of
     batteries for emergency lighting.)
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                       Page 45 of 463

 1.5.2        Hazardous Material Use

 Each hazardous material must receive approval prior to bringing onto the job
 site or prior to any other use in connection with this contract. Allow a
 minimum of 10 working days for processing of the request for use of a
 hazardous material. Any work or storage involving hazardous chemicals or
 materials must be done in a manner that will not expose government employees
 to any unsafe or unhealthful conditions. Adequate protective measures must
 be taken to prevent government employees from being exposed to any hazardous
 condition that could result from the work or storage. Approval by the
 Contracting Officer of protective measures and storage area is required
 prior to the start of the work.

1.6      ACTIVITY HAZARD ANALYSIS (AHA)

 Prepare for each phase of the work. As a minimum, define activity being
 performed, sequence of work, specific hazards anticipated, control measures
 to eliminate or reduce each hazard to acceptable levels, training
 requirements for all involved, and the competent person in charge of that
 phase of work. The appropriate AHA shall be reviewed and attendance
 documented by the Contractor at the preparatory, initial, and follow-up
 phases of quality control inspection.

1.7      HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN (HASP)

 Prepare as required by 29 CFR 1910.120 and COE EM-385-1-1.

1.7.1     Qualified Personnel

 Retain a Certified Safety Professional (CSP) to prepare the HASP, conduct
 activity hazard analyses, and prepare detailed plan for demolition, removal,
 and disposal of materials. Retain the CIH or CSP for duration of contract.

1.7.2     Contents

 In addition to the requirements of COE EM-385-1-1, Table 28-1, the HASP must
 include:

         a.    Location, size, and details of control areas.

         b.    Location and details of decontamination systems.

         c.    Interface of trades involved in the construction.

         d.    Sequencing of work.

         e.    Disposal plan.

         f.    Sampling protocols.

         g.    Testing labs.

         h.    Protective equipment.
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                       Page 46 of 463


        i.   Pollution control.

        j.   Evidence of compliance with 29 CFR 1910.120 and 29 CFR 1926.65.

        k.   Training and certifications of CIH, CSP or other competent persons.

1.8     DRUG PREVENTION PROGRAM

 Conduct a proactive drug and alcohol use prevention program for all workers,
 prime and subcontractor, on the site. Ensure that no employees either use
 illegal drugs or consume alcohol during work hours. Ensure there are no
 employees under the influence of drugs or alcohol during work hours. After
 accidents, collect blood, urine or saliva specimens and test injured
 employee's influence. A copy of the test shall be made available to the
 Contracting Officer upon request.

1.9     FALL HAZARD PROTECTION AND PREVENTION PROGRAM

1.9.1     Scaffolds

 Delineate the fall protection requirements necessary during the erection and
 dismantling operation of scaffolds used on the project in the Fall
 Protection and Prevention (FP&P) plan and activity hazard analysis for the
 phase of work.

1.9.2     Training

 Institute a fall protection training program. As part of the Fall Hazard
 Protection and Prevention Program, Contractor shall provide training for
 each employee who might be exposed to fall hazards.

1.10    DUTIES OF THE SAFETY OFFICER

        a.   Ensure construction hazards are identified and corrected.

        b.   Maintain applicable safety reference material on the job site.

        c.   Maintain a log of safety inspections performed.

        d.   Attend the pre-construction conference as required.

        e.   Identify hazardous conditions and take corrective action. Failure
             to do so will result in a dismissal from the site, with a work
             stoppage pending approval of suitable replacement personnel.

1.11     DISPLAY OF SAFETY INFORMATION

 Display the following information in clear view of the on-site construction
 personnel:

        a.   Map denoting the route to the nearest emergency care facility with
             emergency phone numbers.
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                         Page 47 of 463


         b.    AHA

         c.    Confined space entry permit.

         d. A sign indicating the number of hours worked since last lost workday
             accident.

1.12     SITE SAFETY REFERENCE MATERIALS

 Maintain safety-related references applicable to the project, including
 those listed in the article "References." Maintain applicable equipment
 manufacturers' manuals.

1.13      HIGH HAZARD WORK AND LONG DURATION

 Work under this contract is potentially hazardous. Pursuant to contract
 clause "FAR 52.236-13, Accident Prevention, Alternate I," submit in writing
 additional proposals for effecting accident prevention under hazardous
 conditions. Meet in conference with Contracting Officer to discuss and
 develop mutual understanding relative to the administration of the overall
 safety program.

1.14 EMERGENCY MEDICAL TREATMENT

 Contractors will arrange for their own emergency medical treatment.
 Government has no responsibility to provide emergency medical treatment.
 However, if emergency medical care is rendered by Federal Government medical
 services, charges may be billed to Contractor at prevailing rates
 established in BUMED Instruction 6320.4 series. Reimbursement shall be made
 by Contractor to Medical Center Collection Agent upon receipt of monthly
 statement.

1.15      SITE CONDITIONS

1.15.1        Noise

 Enforce hearing protection protecting contractor's site personnel from
 adjacent or working area produced noise.

1.16 REPORTS

1.16.1     Accident Reports

         a.    For recordable occupational injuries and illnesses, the Prime
               Contractor shall conduct an accident investigation to establish the
               root cause(s) of the accident, complete the Contractor Significant
               Incident Report (CSIR) form and provide to the Contracting Officer
               within 5 calendar days of the accident. The Contracting Officer
               will provide a copy of the CSIR form.

         b.    For a weight handling equipment accident the Prime Contractor shall
               conduct an accident investigation to establish the root cause(s) of
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                         Page 48 of 463

               the accident, complete the WHE Accident Report form and provide to
               the Contracting Officer within 30 calendar days of the accident.
               The Contracting Officer will provide a blank copy of the WHE
               accident report form.

1.16.2        Notification

 Notify the Contracting Officer as soon as practical, but not later than four
 hours, of any accident meeting the definition of Recordable Occupational
 Injuries or Illnesses or Significant Accidents. Information shall include
 contractor name; contract title; type of contract; name of activity,
 installation or location where accident occurred; date and time of accident;
 names of personnel injured; extent of property damage, if any; and brief
 description of accident (to include type of construction equipment used, PPE
 used, etc.).

1.16.3        Monthly Exposure Report

 Monthly exposure reporting, to the Contracting Officer is required to be
 attached to the monthly billing request. This report is a compilation of
 employee-hours worked each month for all site workers, both prime and
 subcontractor.

1.16.4        OSHA Citations and Violations

 Provide the Contracting Officer with a copy of each OSHA citation, OSHA
 report and contractor response. Correct violations and citations promptly
 and provide written corrective actions to the Contracting Officer.

1.17     HOT WORK

 Prior to performing "Hot Work" (welding, etc.) or operating other flame-
 producing devices, the Contractor shall request a written permit from the
 Fire Division. CONTRACTORS ARE REQUIRED TO MEET ALL CRITERIA BEFORE A
 PERMIT IS ISSUED. The Contractor will provide at least two (2) twenty (20)
 pound extinguishers for normal "Hot Work". All extinguishers shall be
 current inspection tagged, approved safety pin and tamper resistant seal.
 It is also mandatory to have a designated FIRE WATCH for any "Hot Work" done
 at this activity.

         a.    Oil painting materials (paint, brushes, empty paint cans, etc.),
               and all flammable liquids shall be removed from the building at
               quitting time. All painting materials and flammable liquids shall
               be stored outside in a suitable metal locker or box and will
               require re-submittal with non-hazardous materials.

         b.    Accumulation of trays, paper, shavings, sawdust, boxes and other
               packing materials shall be removed from the building at the close
               of each workday and such material disposed of in the proper
               containers located away from the building.

         c.    The storage of combustible supplies shall be a safe distance from
               structures.
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                         Page 49 of 463

         d.    Area outside of building undergoing work shall be cleaned of trash,
               paper, or other discarded combustibles at the close of each
               workday.

         e.    All portable electric devices (saws, sanders, compressors,
               extension chord, lights, etc.) shall be disconnected at the close
               of each workday. When possible, the main electric switch in the
               building shall be deactivated.

         f.    When starting work in building or areas, Contractors shall require
               their personnel to familiarize themselves with the location of the
               nearest fire alarm boxes and place in memory the emergency Fire
               Division phone number. ANY FIRE, NO MATTER HOW SMALL, SHALL BE
               REPORTED TO THE BASE FIRE DIVISION IMMEDIATELY.

PART 2        PRODUCTS

2.1      FALL PROTECTION ANCHORAGE

 Fall protection anchorage, conforming to ANSI Z359.1, will be left in place
 and so identified for continued customer use.

PART 3        EXECUTION

3.1      CONSTRUCTION

 Comply with COE EM-385-1-1, NFPA 241, the accident prevention plan, the
 activity hazard analysis and other related submittals and activity fire and
 safety regulations.

3.1.1      Hazardous Material Exclusions

 Notwithstanding any other hazardous material used in this contract,
 radioactive materials or instruments capable of producing ionizing/non-
 ionizing radiation as well as materials which contain asbestos, mercury or
 polychlorinated biphenyls, di-isocynates, lead-based paint are prohibited.
 Exceptions to the use of any of the above excluded materials may be
 considered by Contracting Officer upon written request by Contractor.

3.1.2      Unforeseen Hazardous Material

 The design should have identified materials such as PCB, lead paint, and
 friable and nonfriable asbestos. If material, not indicated, that may be
 hazardous to human health upon disturbance during construction operations is
 encountered, stop that portion of work and notify the Contracting Officer
 immediately. Within 14 calendar days the Government will determine if the
 material is hazardous. If material is not hazardous or poses no danger, the
 Government will direct the Contractor to proceed without change. If
 material is hazardous and handling of the material is necessary to
 accomplish the work, the Government will issue a modification pursuant to
 "FAR 52.243-4, Changes" and "FAR 52.236-2, Differing Site Conditions."
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                   Page 50 of 463

3.2     PRE-OUTAGE COORDINATION MEETING

 Contractors are required to apply for utility outages a minimum of 15 days
 in advance. As a minimum, the request should include the location of the
 outage, utilities being effected, duration of outage and any necessary
 sketches. Special requirements for electrical outage requests are contained
 elsewhere in this specification section. Once approved and prior to
 beginning work on the utility system requiring shut down, the Contractor
 shall attend a pre-outage coordination meeting with the ROICC and the
 Station Utilities Department to review the scope of work and the lock
 out/tag out procedures for worker protection. No work will be performed on
 energized electrical equipment unless proven impassable. Working equipment
 "hot" must be considered the last option.

3.3     PERSONNEL PROTECTION

3.3.1     Hazardous Noise

 Provide hazardous noise signs, and hearing protection, wherever equipment
 and work procedures produce sound-pressure levels greater than 85 dBA steady
 state or 140 dBA impulse, regardless of the duration of the exposure.

3.3.2     Fall Protection

 Enforce use of the fall protection device designated for each specific work
 activity in the FP&P plan and/or AHA all times when an employee is on a
 surface 6 feet or more above lower levels. Personal fall arrest systems are
 required when working from an articulating or extendible boom, scissors
 lifts, swing stages, or suspended platform.   Fall protection must comply
 with ANSI A10.14.

3.3.2.1      Personal Fall Arrest Device

 Personal fall arrest device equipment, systems, subsystems, and components
 shall meet ANSI Z359.1, "Safety Requirements for Personal Fall Arrest
 Systems". Only a full-body harness with a shock-absorbing lanyard or self-
 retracting lanyard is an acceptable personal fall arrest device. Body belts
 may only be used as a positioning device system such as steel reinforcing
 assembly and in conjunction with another fall arrest system. Harnesses shall
 have a fall arrest attachment, which is a connector, affixed to the body
 support (usually a D-ring) and specifically designated for attachment to the
 rest of the system. Only double locking snap hooks and carabiners shall be
 used. Webbing, straps, and ropes shall be made of synthetic fiber.

3.3.2.2      Fall Protection for Roofing Work

 Fall protection controls shall be implemented based on the type of roof
 being constructed and work being performed. The roof area to be accessed
 shall be evaluated for its structural integrity including weight-bearing
 capabilities for the projected loading.

        a.   Low Sloped Roofs:
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                       Page 51 of 463

             (1) For work within 6 feet of an edge, on low-slope roofs,
             personnel shall be protected from falling by use of personal fall
             arrest systems, guardrails, or safety nets. Safety monitoring
             system is not adequate fall protection and is not authorized.

             (2) For work greater than 6 feet from an edge, warning lines shall
             be erected and installed in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.502(f).

        b.   Steep Roofs: Work on steep roofs requires personal fall arrest
             system, guardrails with toe-boards, or safety nets. This
             requirement also includes residential or housing type construction.

3.3.2.3      Safety Nets

 If safety nets are used as the selected fall protection system on the
 project, they shall be provided at unguarded workplaces, over water,
 machinery, dangerous operations and leading edge work.

3.3.2.4      Existing Anchorage

 Existing anchorage’s, used for attachment of personal fall arrest equipment,
 if to be used by the Contractor, shall be re-certified by the contractor's
 fall protection engineer (QP).

3.3.3     Shipyard Requirements

 All personnel who enter the Controlled Industrial Area (CIA) will wear
 mandatory personal protective equipment (PPE) at all times. All personnel
 shall also comply with PPE postings of shops both inside and outside the
 CIA. PPE shall be governed in all other areas by the nature of the work the
 employee is performing. They will also have personal hearing protection on
 their person at all times in designated noise hazardous areas or when
 performing noise hazardous tasks. Mandatory PPE includes:

        a.   Hard Hat

        b.   Safety Glasses

        c.   Safety Toed Shoes

3.4     SCAFFOLDING

 Employees shall be provided with a safe means of access to the work area on
 the scaffold. Climbing of any scaffold braces or supports not specifically
 designed for access is prohibited. Stair towers or ladders built into
 scaffold systems in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 Appendix J are required
 for work platforms greater than 20 feet in height. Contractor shall ensure
 that employees that are qualified perform scaffold erection. Do not use
 scaffold without the capability of supporting at least four times the
 maximum intended load or without appropriate fall protection as delineated
 in the accepted fall protection plan. Minimum platform size shall be based
 on the platform not being greater in height than three times the dimension
 of the smallest width dimension for rolling scaffold. Some Baker type
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                      Page 52 of 463

 scaffolding has been found not to meet these requirements. Stationary
 scaffolds must be attached to structural building components to safeguard
 against tipping forward or backward. Special care shall be given to ensure
 scaffold systems are not overloaded. Outrigger brackets used to extend
 scaffold platforms on self supported scaffold systems for the storage of
 material is prohibited. The first tie-in shall be at the height equal to 4
 times the width of the smallest dimension of the scaffold base.

3.5     EQUIPMENT

3.5.1     Material Handling Equipment

        a.   Material handling equipment such as forklifts shall not be modified
             with work platform attachments for supporting employees unless
             specifically delineated in the manufacturer's printed operating
             instructions.

        b.   The use of hooks on equipment for lifting of material must be in
             accordance with manufacturers printed instructions.

3.5.2     Weight Handling Equipment

  Each load shall be rigged/attached independently to the hook/master-link in
  such a fashion that the load cannot slide or otherwise become detached.
  Christmas-tree lifting (multiple rigged materials) is not allowed.

3.6 ELECTRICAL

3.6.1     Conduct of Electrical Work

 Underground electrical spaces must be certified safe for entry before
 entering to conduct work. Cable intended to be cut must be positively
 identified and de-energized prior to performing each cut. Positive cable
 identification must be made prior to submitting any outage request for
 electrical systems. Arrangements are to be coordinated with the Contracting
 Officer and Station Utilities for identification. The Contracting Officer
 will not accept an outage request until the Contractor satisfactorily
 documents that the circuits have been clearly identified. Perform all high
 voltage cutting remotely. When racking in or live switching of circuit
 breakers, no additional person other than the switch operator will be
 allowed in the space during the actual operation. Plan so that work near
 energized parts is minimized to the fullest extent possible. Use of
 electrical outages clear of any energized electrical sources is the
 preferred method. When working in energized substations, only qualified
 electrical workers shall be permitted to enter. When work requires
 Contractor to work near energized circuits as defined by the NFPA 70, high
 voltage personnel must use personal protective equipment that includes, as a
 minimum, electrical hard hat, safety shoes, insulating gloves with leather
 protective sleeves, fire retarding shirts, coveralls, face shields, and
 safety glasses. Insulating blankets, hearing protection, and switching
 suits may be required, depending on the specific job and as delineated in
 the Contractor AHA.
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                       Page 53 of 463

3.6.2      Portable Extension Cords

 Portable extension cords shall be sized in accordance with manufacturer
 ratings for the tool to be powered.

3.7     CRYSTALLINE SILICA

 Grinding, abrasive blasting, and foundry operations of construction
 materials containing crystalline silica, shall comply with OSHA regulations,
 such as 29 CFR 1910.94, and COE EM-385-1-1, (Appendix C). The Contractor
 shall develop and implement effective exposure control and elimination
 procedures to include dust control systems, engineering controls, and
 establishment of work area boundaries, as well as medical surveillance,
 training, air monitoring, and personal protective equipment.

3.8      HOUSEKEEPING

3.8.1      Clean-up

 All debris in work areas shall be cleaned up daily or more frequently as
 necessary. Construction debris may be temporarily located in an approved
 location, however garbage accumulation must be removed each day.

3.8.2      Dust Control

 In addition to the dust control measures required elsewhere in the contract
 documents dry cutting of brick or masonry shall be prohibited. Wet cutting
 must address control of water run off.

3.9      ACCIDENT SCENE PRESERVATION

 For serious accidents, and accidents involving weight handling equipment,
 ensure the accident site is secured and evidence is protected remaining
 undisturbed until released by the Contracting Officer.

3.10      FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.10.1      Inspections

 Include safety inspection as a part of the daily Quality Control inspections
 required in Section 01450N - "Quality Control".

3.11       FLAMMABLE AND COMBUSTIBLE LIQUID HANDLING AND STORAGE

3.11.1      Safety Gas Containers

 Handling of flammable and combustible liquids shall be in safety containers
 with flame arresters, with not more than 5 gallons capacity, having a
 spring-closing lid and spout cover and designed to safely relieve internal
 pressures under fire exposures. Flammable and combustible Liquids shall be
 stored in separate NFPA approved storage cabinets 50 feet away from any
 sources of ignition with suitable NO SMOKING OR OPEN FLAME signs posted in
 all such areas.
                                                                        W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                     0001
                                                                            Page 54 of 463


                          *     *   *    END OF SECTION    *   *   *




                                        SECTION 01 45 00

                                        QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1      GENERAL

1.1      REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic
 designation only.

           AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

 ASTM D 3740                             (2001) Minimum Requirements for Agencies
                                         Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of
                                         Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design
                                         and Construction

 ASTM E 329                              (2000b) Agencies Engaged in the Testing
                                         and/or Inspection of Materials Used in
                                         Construction

1.2      PAYMENT

 Separate payment will not be made for providing and maintaining an effective
 Quality Control program, and all costs associated therewith shall be
 included in the applicable unit prices or lump-sum prices contained in the
 Bidding Schedule.

PART 2      PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)

PART 3      EXECUTION

3.1      GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

 The Contractor is responsible for quality control and shall establish and
 maintain an effective quality control system in compliance with the Contract
 Clause titled "Inspection of Construction." The quality control system
 shall consist of plans, procedures, and organization necessary to produce an
 end product which complies with the contract requirements. The system shall
 cover all construction operations, both onsite and offsite, and shall be
 keyed to the proposed construction sequence. The site project
 superintendent will be held responsible for the quality of work on the job
 and is subject to removal by the Contracting Officer for non-compliance with
 the quality requirements specified in the contract. The site project
 superintendent in this context shall be the highest level manager
 responsible for the overall construction activities at the site, including
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                       Page 55 of 463

 quality and production. The site project superintendent shall maintain a
 physical presence at the site at all times, except as otherwise acceptable
 to the Contracting Officer, and shall be responsible for all construction
 and construction related activities at the site.

3.2     QUALITY CONTROL PLAN

 The Contractor shall furnish for review by the Government, not later than 15
 days after receipt of notice of award, the contractor Quality Control (QC)
 Plan proposed to implement the requirements of the Contract Clause titled
 "Inspection of Construction." The plan shall identify personnel,
 procedures, control, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used.
 The Government will consider an interim plan for the first 90 days of
 operation. Construction will be permitted to begin only after acceptance of
 the QC Plan or acceptance of an interim plan applicable to the particular
 feature of work to be started. Work outside of the features of work
 included in an accepted interim plan will not be permitted to begin until
 acceptance of a QC Plan or another interim plan containing the additional
 features of work to be started.

3.2.1     Content of the QC Plan

 The QC Plan shall include, as a minimum, the following to cover all
 construction operations, both onsite and offsite, including work by
 subcontractors, fabricators, suppliers, and purchasing agents:

        a.   A description of the quality control organization, including a
             chart showing lines of authority and acknowledgment that the QC
             staff shall implement the three phase control system for all
             aspects of the work specified. The staff shall include a QC System
             Manager who shall report to the project superintendent.

        b.   The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties,
             responsibilities, and authorities of each person assigned a QC
             function.

        c.   A copy of the letter to the QC System Manager signed by an
             authorized official of the firm which describes the
             responsibilities and delegates sufficient authorities to adequately
             perform the functions of the QC System Manager, including authority
             to stop work which is not in compliance with the contract. The QC
             System Manager shall issue letters of direction to all other
             various quality control representatives outlining duties,
             authorities, and responsibilities. Copies of these letters shall
             also be furnished to the Government.

        d.   Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing
             submittals, including those of subcontractors, offsite fabricators,
             suppliers, and purchasing agents. These procedures shall be in
             accordance with Section 01 33 00 “SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES”.

        e.   Control, verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each
             specific test to include the test name, specification paragraph
             requiring test, feature of work to be tested, test frequency, and
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                       Page 56 of 463

             person responsible for each test. (Laboratory facilities will be
             approved by the Contracting Officer.)

        f.   Procedures for tracking preparatory, initial, and follow-up control
             phases and control, verification, and acceptance tests including
             documentation.

        g.   Procedures for tracking construction deficiencies from
             identification through acceptable corrective action. These
             procedures shall establish verification that identified
             deficiencies have been corrected.

        h.   Reporting procedures, including proposed reporting formats.

        i.   A list of the definable features of work. A definable feature of
             work is a task which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has
             separate control requirements, and may be identified by different
             trades or disciplines, or it may be work by the same trade in a
             different environment. Although each section of the specifications
             may generally be considered as a definable feature of work, there
             are frequently more than one definable features under a particular
             section. This list will be agreed upon during the coordination
             meeting.

3.2.2     Acceptance of QC Plan

 Acceptance of the Contractor's QC plan is required prior to the start of
 construction. Acceptance is conditional and will be predicated on
 satisfactory performance during the construction. The Government reserves
 the right to require the Contractor to make changes in his CQC Plan and
 operations including removal of personnel, as necessary, to obtain the
 quality specified.

3.2.3     Notification of Changes

 After acceptance of the QC Plan, the Contractor shall notify the Contracting
 Officer in writing of any proposed change. Proposed changes are subject to
 acceptance by the Contracting Officer.

3.3     COORDINATION MEETING

 After the Preconstruction Conference, before start of construction, and
 prior to acceptance by the Government of the QC Plan, the Contractor shall
 meet with the Contracting Officer or Authorized Representative and discuss
 the Contractor's quality control system. The QC Plan shall be submitted for
 review a minimum of 15 calendar days prior to the Coordination Meeting.
 During the meeting, a mutual understanding of the system details shall be
 developed, including the forms for recording the QC operations, control
 activities, testing, administration of the system for both onsite and
 offsite work, and the interrelationship of Contractor's Management and
 control with the Government's Quality Assurance. Minutes of the meeting
 shall be prepared by the Government and signed by both the Contractor and
 the Contracting Officer. The minutes shall become a part of the contract
 file. There may be occasions when subsequent conferences will be called by
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                   Page 57 of 463

 either party to reconfirm mutual understandings and/or address deficiencies
 in the QC system or procedures which may require corrective action by the
 Contractor.

3.4     QUALITY CONTROL ORGANIZATION

3.4.1     Personnel Requirements

 The requirements for the QC organization are a QC System Manager and
 sufficient number of additional qualified personnel to ensure safety and
 contract compliance. The Safety and Health Manager shall receive direction
 and authority from the QC System Manager and shall serve as a member of the
 QC staff. Personnel identified in the technical provisions as requiring
 specialized skills to assure the required work is being performed properly
 will also be included as part of the QC organization. The Contractor's QC
 staff shall maintain a presence at the site at all times during progress of
 the work and have complete authority and responsibility to take any action
 necessary to ensure contract compliance. The QC staff shall be subject to
 acceptance by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall provide
 adequate office space, filing systems and other resources as necessary to
 maintain an effective and fully functional QC organization. Complete
 records of all letters, material submittals, shop drawing submittals,
 schedules and all other project documentation shall be promptly furnished to
 the QC organization by the Contractor. The QC organization shall be
 responsible to maintain these documents and records at the site at all
 times, except as otherwise acceptable to the Contracting Officer.

3.4.2     QC System Manager

 The Contractor shall identify as QC System Manager an individual within the
 onsite work organization who shall be responsible for overall management of
 QC and have the authority to act in all QC matters for the Contractor. The
 QC System Manager shall be a graduate engineer or graduate architect, with a
 minimum of 2 years construction experience on construction similar to this
 contract or a construction person with a minimum of 5 years in related work.
 This QC System Manager shall be on the site at all times during construction
 and shall be employed by the prime Contractor. The QC System Manager shall
 be assigned no other duties. An alternate for the QC System Manager shall
 be identified in the plan to serve in the event of the System Manager's
 absence. The requirements for the alternate shall be the same as for the
 designated QC System Manager.

3.4.3     QC Personnel

 In addition to QC personnel specified elsewhere in the contract, the
 Contractor shall provide as part of the QC organization specialized
 personnel to assist the QC System Manager for the following areas:
 electrical, mechanical, civil, structural, environmental, architectural,
 materials technician, submittals clerk. These individuals may be employees
 of the prime or subcontractor; be responsible to the QC System Manager; be
 physically present at the construction site during work on their areas of
 responsibility; have the necessary education and/or experience in accordance
 with the experience matrix listed herein. These individuals may perform
 other duties but must be allowed sufficient time to perform their assigned
 quality control duties as described in the Quality Control Plan.
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                      Page 58 of 463




                                 Experience Matrix

        Area                                                Qualifications


a.      Civil                                   Graduate Civil Engineer with
                                                2 years experience in the type
                                                of work being performed on this
                                                project or technician with
                                                5 yrs related experience

b.      Mechanical                              Graduate Mechanical Engineer
                                                with 2 yrs experience or

                                                person with 5 yrs related
                                                experience

c.      Electrical                              Graduate Electrical
                                                Engineer with 2 yrs
                                                related experience or
                                                person with 5 yrs
                                                related experience

d.      Structural                              Graduate Structural
                                                Engineer with 2 yrs
                                                experience or person with
                                                5 yrs related experience

e.      Architectural                           Graduate Architect with 2 yrs
                                                experience or person with
                                                5 yrs related experience

f.      Environmental                           Graduate Environmental
                                                Engineer with 3 yrs experience

g.      Submittals                              Submittal Clerk with 1 yr
                                                experience

3.4.4   Additional Requirement

 In addition to the above experience and/or education requirements the QC
 System Manager shall have completed the course entitled "Construction
 Quality Management For Contractors". This course is periodically offered at
 Corps of Engineer, San Juan, Puerto Rico; telephone (787)729-6833.

3.4.5   Organizational Changes

 The Contractor shall maintain the QC staff at full strength at all times.
 When it is necessary to make changes to the QC staff, the Contractor shall
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                       Page 59 of 463

 revise the QC Plan to reflect the changes and submit the changes to the
 Contracting Officer for acceptance.

3.5     SUBMITTALS AND DELIVERABLES

 Submittals, if needed, shall be made as specified in Section 01 33 00
 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. The QC organization shall be responsible for
 certifying that all submittals and deliverables are in compliance with the
 contract requirements. When Sections in DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING
 AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) are included in the contract, the submittals
 required by those sections shall be coordinated with Section 01 33 00
 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES to ensure adequate time is allowed for each type of
 submittal required.

3.6     CONTROL

 Contractor’S Quality Control is the means by which the Contractor ensures
 that the construction, to include that of subcontractors and suppliers,
 complies with the requirements of the contract. At least three phases of
 control shall be conducted by the QC System Manager for each definable
 feature of work as follows:


3.6.1     Preparatory Phase

 This phase shall be performed prior to beginning work on each definable
 feature of work, after all required plans/documents/materials are
 approved/accepted, and after copies are at the work site. This phase shall
 include:

        a.   A review of each paragraph of applicable specifications, reference
             codes, and standards. A copy of those sections of referenced codes
             and standards applicable to that portion of the work to be
             accomplished in the field shall be made available by the Contractor
             at the preparatory inspection. These copies shall be maintained in
             the field and available for use by Government personnel until final
             acceptance of the work.

        b.   A review of the contract drawings.

        c.   A check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been
             tested, submitted, and approved.

        d.   Review of provisions that have been made to provide required
             control inspection and testing.

        e.   Examination of the work area to assure that all required
             preliminary work has been completed and is in compliance with the
             contract.

        f.   A physical examination of required materials, equipment, and sample
             work to assure that they are on hand, conform to approved shop
             drawings or submitted data, and are properly stored.
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                       Page 60 of 463


        g.   A review of the appropriate activity hazard analysis to assure
             safety requirements are met.

        h.   Discussion of procedures for controlling quality of the work
             including repetitive deficiencies. Document construction
             tolerances and workmanship standards for that feature of work.

        i.   A check to ensure that the portion of the plan for the work to be
             performed has been accepted by the Contracting Officer.

        j.   Discussion of the initial control phase.

        k.   The Government shall be notified at least 48 hours in advance of
             beginning the preparatory control phase. This phase shall include
             a meeting conducted by the QC System Manager and attended by the
             superintendent, other QC personnel (as applicable), and the foreman
             responsible for the definable feature. The results of the
             preparatory phase actions shall be documented by separate minutes
             prepared by the QC System Manager and attached to the daily QC
             report. The Contractor shall instruct applicable workers as to the
             acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet contract
             specifications.

3.6.2    Initial Phase

 This phase shall be accomplished at the beginning of a definable feature of
 work. The following shall be accomplished:

        a.   A check of work to ensure that it is in full compliance with
             contract requirements. Review minutes of the preparatory meeting.

        b.   Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full contract compliance.
             Verify required control inspection and testing.

        c.   Establish level of workmanship and verify that it meets minimum
             acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required sample
             panels as appropriate.

        d.   Resolve all differences.

        e.   Check safety to include compliance with and upgrading of the safety
             plan and activity hazard analysis. Review the activity analysis
             with each worker.

        f.   The Government shall be notified at least 96 hours in advance of
             beginning the initial phase. Separate minutes of this phase shall
             be prepared by the QC System Manager and attached to the daily QC
             report. Exact location of initial phase shall be indicated for
             future reference and comparison with follow-up phases.
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                       Page 61 of 463

        g.   The initial phase should be repeated for each new crew to work
             onsite, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not
             being met.

3.6.3     Follow-up Phase

 Daily checks shall be performed to assure control activities, including
 control testing, are providing continued compliance with contract
 requirements, until completion of the particular feature of work. The
 checks shall be made a matter of record in the QC documentation. Final
 follow-up checks shall be conducted and all deficiencies corrected prior to
 the start of additional features of work which may be affected by the
 deficient work. The Contractor shall not build upon nor conceal non-
 conforming work.

3.6.4     Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases

 Additional preparatory and initial phases shall be conducted on the same
 definable features of work if: the quality of on-going work is
 unacceptable; if there are changes in the applicable QC staff, onsite
 production supervision or work crew; if work on a definable feature is
 resumed after a substantial period of inactivity; or if other problems
 develop.

3.7     TESTS

3.7.1     Testing Procedure

 The Contractor shall perform specified or required tests to verify that
 control measures are adequate to provide a product which conforms to
 contract requirements. Upon request, the Contractor shall furnish to the
 Government duplicate samples of test specimens for possible testing by the
 Government. Testing includes operation and/or acceptance tests when
 specified. The Contractor shall perform the following activities and record
 and provide the following data:

        a.   Verify that testing procedures comply with contract requirements.

        b.   Verify that facilities and testing equipment are available and
             comply with testing standards.

        c.   Check test instrument calibration data against certified standards.

        d.   Verify that recording forms and test identification control number
             system, including all of the test documentation requirements, have
             been prepared.

        e.   Results of all tests taken, both passing and failing tests, shall
             be recorded on the QC report for the date taken. Specification
             paragraph reference, location where tests were taken, and the
             sequential control number identifying the test shall be given. If
             approved by the Contracting Officer, actual test reports may be
             submitted later with a reference to the test number and date taken.
             An information copy of tests performed by an offsite or commercial
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                      Page 62 of 463

            test facility shall be provided directly to the Contracting
            Officer. Failure to submit timely test reports as stated may
            result in nonpayment for related work performed and disapproval of
            the test facility for this contract.

3.7.2     Testing Laboratories

3.7.2.1     Capability Check

 The Government reserves the right to check laboratory equipment in the
 proposed laboratory for compliance with the standards set forth in the
 contract specifications and to check the laboratory technician's testing
 procedures and techniques. Laboratories utilized for testing soils,
 concrete, asphalt, and steel shall meet criteria detailed in ASTM D 3740 and
 ASTM E 329.

3.7.2.2     Capability Recheck

 If the selected laboratory fails the capability check, the Contractor will
 assume the charges for each succeeding recheck of the laboratory or the
 checking of a subsequently selected laboratory. Such costs will be deducted
 from the contract amount due the Contractor.

3.7.3     Onsite Laboratory

 The Government reserves the right to utilize the Contractor's control
 testing laboratory and equipment to make assurance tests, and to check the
 Contractor's testing procedures, techniques, and test results at no
 additional cost to the Government.

3.7.4   Furnishing or Transportation of Samples for Testing
  Costs incidental to the transportation of samples or materials shall be
  borne by the Contractor. Samples of materials for test verification and
  acceptance testing by the Government shall be delivered to the Directorate
  of Public Works, Design Division, Fort Buchanan.

3.8     COMPLETION INSPECTION

3.8.1     Punch-Out Inspection

 Near the end of the work, or any increment of the work established by a time
 stated in the Special Clause, "Commencement, Prosecution, and Completion of
 Work", or by the specifications, the QC Manager shall conduct an inspection
 of the work. A punch list of items which do not conform to the approved
 drawings and specifications shall be prepared and included in the QC
 documentation, as required by paragraph DOCUMENTATION. The list of
 deficiencies shall include the estimated date by which the deficiencies will
 be corrected. The QC System Manager or staff shall make a second inspection
 to ascertain that all deficiencies have been corrected. Once this is
 accomplished, the Contractor shall notify the Government that the facility
 is ready for the Government Pre-Final inspection.
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                      Page 63 of 463

3.8.2     Pre-Final Inspection

 The Government will perform the pre-final inspection to verify that the
 facility is complete and ready to be occupied. A Government Pre-Final Punch
 List may be developed as a result of this inspection. The Contractor's QC
 System Manager shall ensure that all items on this list have been corrected
 before notifying the Government, so that a Final inspection with the
 customer can be scheduled. Any items noted on the Pre-Final inspection
 shall be corrected in a timely manner. These inspections and any deficiency
 corrections required by this paragraph shall be accomplished within the time
 slated for completion of the entire work or any particular increment of the
 work if the project is divided into increments by separate completion dates.

3.8.3     Final Acceptance Inspection

 The Contractor's Quality Control Inspection personnel, plus the
 superintendent or other primary management person, and the Contracting
 Officer's Representative shall be in attendance at the final acceptance
 inspection. Additional Government personnel including, but not limited to,
 those from Base/Post Civil Facility Engineer user groups, and major commands
 may also be in attendance. The final acceptance inspection will be formally
 scheduled by the Contracting Officer based upon results of the Pre-Final
 inspection. Notice shall be given to the Contracting Officer at least 14
 days prior to the final acceptance inspection and shall include the
 Contractor's assurance that all specific items previously identified to the
 Contractor as being unacceptable, along with all remaining work performed
 under the contract, will be complete and acceptable by the date scheduled
 for the final acceptance inspection. Failure of the Contractor to have all
 contract work acceptably complete for this inspection will be cause for the
 Contracting Officer to bill the Contractor for the Government's additional
 inspection cost in accordance with the contract clause titled "Inspection of
 Construction".

3.9     DOCUMENTATION

 The Contractor shall maintain current records providing factual evidence
 that required quality control activities and/or tests have been performed.
 These records shall include the work of subcontractors and suppliers and
 shall be on an acceptable form that includes, as a minimum, the following
 information:

        a.   Contractor/subcontractor and their area of responsibility.

        b.   Operating plant/equipment with hours worked, idle, or down for
             repair.

        c.   Work performed each day, giving location, description, and by whom.
             When Network Analysis (NAS) is used, identify each phase of work
             performed each day by NAS activity number.

        d.   Test and/or control activities performed with results and
             references to specifications/drawings requirements. The control
             phase shall be identified (Preparatory, Initial, Follow-up). List
             of deficiencies noted, along with corrective action.
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                      Page 64 of 463


       e.   Quantity of materials received at the site with statement as to
            acceptability, storage, and reference to specifications/drawings
            requirements.

       f.   Submittals and deliverables reviewed, with contract reference, by
            whom, and action taken. Submittal register.

       g.   Offsite surveillance activities, including actions taken.

       h.   Job safety evaluations stating what was checked, results, and
            instructions or corrective actions.

       i.   Instructions given/received and conflicts in plans and/or
            specifications.

       j.   Contractor's verification statement.

 These records shall indicate a description of trades working on the project;
 the number of personnel working; weather conditions encountered; and any
 delays encountered. These records shall cover both conforming and deficient
 features and shall include a statement that equipment and materials
 incorporated in the work and workmanship comply with the contract. The
 original and one copy of these records in report form shall be furnished to
 the Government daily within 16 hours after the date covered by the report.
 As a minimum, one report shall be prepared and submitted for every 7 days of
 no work and on the last day of a no work period indicating the reason for no
 work performed on everyday. All calendar days shall be accounted for
 throughout the life of the contract. The first report following a day of no
 work shall be for that day only. Reports shall be signed and dated by the
 QC System Manager. The report from the QC System Manager shall include
 copies of test reports and copies of reports prepared by all subordinate
 quality control personnel.

3.10   SAMPLE FORMS

 Sample forms enclosed at the end of this section.

3.11   NOTIFICATION OF NONCOMPLIANCE

 The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor of any detected
 noncompliance with the foregoing requirements. The Contractor shall take
 immediate corrective action after receipt of such notice. Such notice, when
 delivered to the Contractor at the work site, shall be deemed sufficient for
 the purpose of notification. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply
 promptly, the Contracting Officer may issue an order stopping all or part of
 the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No part of
 the time lost due to such stop orders shall be made the subject of claim for
 extension of time or for excess costs or damages by the Contractor. Cost
 related to work not completed and re-done by the Government shall be charged
 to the Contractor or deducted from the contract amount due to the
 Contractor.
                                                                 W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                     Page 65 of 463


                        * * *    END OF SECTION    * * *




                                SECTION 01 57 19

                      TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

PART 1      GENERAL

1.1      REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
 basic designation only.
       U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

 29 CFR 1910                     Occupational Safety and Health Standards

 29 CFR 1910.1200                Hazard Communication

 40 CFR 112                      Oil Pollution Prevention

 40 CFR 122.26                   EPA National Pollutant Discharge Elimination
                                 System Permit Regulations

 40 CFR 173                      Title

 40 CFR 241                      Guidelines for Disposal of Solid Waste

 40 CFR 243                      Guidelines for the Storage and Collection of
                                 Residential, Commercial, and Institutional
                                 Solid Waste

 40 CFR 258                      Subtitle D Landfill Requirements

 40 CFR 260                      Hazardous Waste Management Systems:   General

 40 CFR 261                      Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste

 40 CFR 262                      Generators of Hazardous Waste
                                                         W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                      0001
                                                             Page 66 of 463


40 CFR 263             Transporters of Hazardous Waste

40 CFR 264             Owners and Operators of Hazardous Waste
                       Treatment, Storage, and Disposal Facilities

40 CFR 265             Interim Status Standard for Owners and
                       Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment,
                       Storage, and Disposal Facilities

40 CFR 266             Management of Specific Hazardous Wastes and
                       Specific Types of Hazardous Waste Management
                       Facilities

40 CFR 268             Land Disposal Restrictions

40 CFR 270             EPA Administrated Permit Programs:     The
                       Hazardous Waste Permit Program

40 CFR 271             Requirements for Authorization of State
                       Hazardous Waste Programs

40 CFR 272             Approved State Hazardous Waste Management
                       Programs

40 CFR 273             Universal Waste Management

40 CFR 279             Used Oil Regulations

40 CFR 280             Owners and Operators of Underground Storage
                       Tanks

40 CFR 300             National Oil and Hazardous Substances
                       Pollution Contingency Plan

40 CFR 355             Emergency Planning and Notification

40 CFR 372-SUBPART D   EPA Toxic Chemical Release Reporting
                       Regulations

40 CFR 716             Health and Safety Data Reporting

40 CFR 761             Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs)
                       Manufacturing, Processing, Distribution in
                       Commerce, and Use Prohibitions

49 CFR 173             Shipments and Packaging

49 CFR 178             Packaging
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                         Page 67 of 463

             U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)

 EPA SW-846                          (1996) Evaluating Solid Waste
                                     (Physical/Chemical Methods)

 EPA 832-R-92-005                    Storm Water Management for Construction
                                     Activities

1.2     DEFINITIONS

1.2.1     Sediment

 Soil and other debris that have eroded and have been transported by runoff
 water or wind.

1.2.2     Solid Waste

 Garbage, refuse, debris, sludge, or other discharged material (except
 hazardous waste as defined in paragraph entitled "Hazardous Waste" or
 hazardous debris as defined in paragraph entitled "Hazardous Debris"),
 including solid, liquid, semisolid, or contained gaseous materials resulting
 from domestic, industrial, commercial, mining, or agricultural operations.
 Material not regulated as solid waste are: nuclear source or byproduct
 materials regulated under the Federal Atomic Energy Act of 1954 as amended;
 suspended or dissolved materials in domestic sewage effluent or irrigation
 return flows, or other regulated point source discharges; regulated air
 emissions; and fluids or wastes associated with natural gas or crude oil
 exploration or production.

        a.    Green waste: The vegetative matter from landscaping, land clearing
              and grubbing, including, but not limited to, grass, bushes, scrubs,
              small trees and saplings, tree stumps and plant roots. Marketable
              trees, grasses and plants that are indicated to remain, be re-
              located, or be re-used are not included.

        b.    Surplus soil: Existing soil that is in excess of what is required
              for this work, including aggregates intended, but not used, for on-
              site mixing of concrete, mortars and paving. Contaminated soil
              meeting the definition of hazardous material or hazardous waste is
              not included.

        c.    Inert construction and demolition debris: Broken or removed
              concrete, masonry, and rock asphalt paving; ceramics; roofing paper
              and shingles. Inert materials may be re-enforced with or contain
              ferrous wire, rods, accessories and weldments.

        d.    Wood: Dimension and non-dimension lumber, plywood, chipboard,
              hardboard. Treated and/or painted wood that meets the definition
              of lead contaminated or lead based contaminated paint is not
              included.

        e.    Scrap metal: Scrap and excess ferrous and non-ferrous metals such
              as re-enforcing steel, structural shapes, pipe and wire that are
              recovered or collected and disposed of as scrap. Scrap metal
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                       Page 68 of 463

             meeting the definition of hazardous material or hazardous waste is
             not included.

        f.   Paint cans: Metal cans that are empty of paints, solvents,
             thinners and adhesives. If permitted by the paint can label, a
             thin dry film may remain in the can.

        g.   Recyclables: Materials, equipment and assemblies such as doors,
             windows, door and window frames, plumbing fixtures, glazing and
             mirrors that are recovered and sold as recyclable. Metal meeting
             the definition of lead contaminated or lead based paint
             contaminated may not be included as recyclable if sold to a scrap
             metal company. Paint cans may be included as recyclable if sold to
             a scrap metal company.

1.2.3    Debris

 Non-hazardous solid material generated during the construction, demolition,
 or renovation of a structure which exceeds 2.5 inch particle size that is: a
 manufactured object; plant or animal matter; or natural geologic material
 (e.g. cobbles and boulders). A mixture of debris and other material such as
 soil or sludge is also subject to regulation as debris if the mixture is
 comprised primarily of debris by volume, based on visual inspection.

1.2.4    Hazardous Debris

 As defined in paragraph entitled "Debris" of this section, debris that
 contains listed hazardous waste (either on the debris surface, or in its
 interstices, such as pore structure) per 40 CFR 261; or debris that exhibits
 a characteristic of hazardous waste per 40 CFR 261.

1.2.5    Chemical Wastes

 This includes salts, acids, alkalis, herbicides, pesticides, and organic
 chemicals.

1.2.6    Garbage

 Refuse and scraps resulting from preparation, cooking, dispensing, and
 consumption of food.

1.2.7    Hazardous Waste

 Hazardous waste as defined in 40 CFR 261 or as defined by applicable State
 and local regulations.

1.2.8    Oily Waste

 Petroleum products and bituminous materials.
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                         Page 69 of 463

1.2.9      Regulated Waste

 Those solid waste that have specific additional Federal, state, or local
 controls for handling, storage, or disposal.

1.2.10      Class I Ozone Depleting Substance (ODS)

 Class I ODS is defined in Section 602(a) of The Clean Air Act and includes
 the following chemicals:

 chlorofluorocarbon-11 (CFC-11)             chlorofluorocarbon-213   (CFC-213)
 chlorofluorocarbon-12 (CFC-12)             chlorofluorocarbon-214   (CFC-214)
 chlorofluorocarbon-13 (CFC-13)             chlorofluorocarbon-215   (CFC-215)
 chlorofluorocarbon-111 (CFC-111)           chlorofluorocarbon-216   (CFC-216)
 chlorofluorocarbon-112 (CFC-112)           chlorofluorocarbon-217   (CFC-217)
 chlorofluorocarbon-113 (CFC-113)           halon-1211
 chlorofluorocarbon-114 (CFC-114)           halon-1301
 chlorofluorocarbon-115 (CFC-115)           halon-2402
 chlorofluorocarbon-211 (CFC-211)           carbon tetrachloride
 chlorofluorocarbon-212 (CFC-212)           methyl chloroform

1.2.11      Hazardous Materials

 Any material that is regulated as a hazardous material in accordance with 49
 CFR 173, requires a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) in accordance with 29
 CFR 1910.1200, or which during end use, treatment, handling, storage,
 transportation or disposal meets or has components which meet or have the
 potential to meet the definition of a Hazardous Waste in accordance with 40
 CFR 261. Throughout this specification, hazardous material includes
 hazardous chemicals.

1.3      SUBMITTALS

 Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00, "SUBMITTAL
 PROCEDURES."

         SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

             Environmental protection plan; G

             Environmental Quality Board Permits;

         SD-06 Test Reports

             Laboratory analysis

         SD-11 Closeout Submittals

             Some of the records listed below are also required as part of other
             submittals. For the "Records" submittal, maintain on-site a
             separate three-ring Environmental Records binder and submit at the
             completion of the project. Make separate parts to the binder
             corresponding to each of the applicable sub-items listed below.
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                      Page 70 of 463


            Preconstruction survey

            Solid waste disposal permit

            Waste determination documentation

            Disposal documentation for hazardous and regulated waste

            Contractor 40 CFR employee training records

            Regulatory notification

            Solid waste disposal report

            Contractor Hazardous Material Inventory Log; G

1.4     DIRT AND DUST CONTROL PLAN

 Submit truck and material haul routes along with a plan for controlling
 dirt, debris, and dust on base roadways. As a minimum, identify in the plan
 the subcontractor and equipment for cleaning along the haul route and
 measures to reduce dirt, dust, and debris from roadways.

1.5     LABORATORY ANALYSIS

 Submit a copy of a laboratory analysis of solid waste and debris with the
 potential of becoming classified as a hazardous waste (i.e., abrasive/sand
 blasting debris, etc.). Waste stream determinations are required at the
 point of generation and must sufficiently document whether the waste will be
 a solid waste, hazardous waste, or Resource Conservation and Recovery Act
 (RCRA) exempt waste. Determinations must use EPA approved methods and
 provide written rational for whether the waste is classified as hazardous or
 non-hazardous. The Contractor shall bear the cost of the waste stream
 determinations, and the Contracting Officer reserves the right to request
 waste stream determinations on questionable waste streams.

1.6     REPORTS

1.6.1     Preconstruction Survey

 Perform a preconstruction survey of the project site with the Contracting
 Officer, and take photographs showing existing environmental conditions in
 and adjacent to the site. Submit a report for the record.

1.6.2     Solid Waste Disposal Permit

 Submit one copy of a State permit or license showing such agency's approval
 of the disposal plan before transporting wastes off Government property.
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                       Page 71 of 463

1.6.3   Waste Determination Documentation

 The Contractor shall complete a Waste Determination form (provided at the
 pre-construction conference) for all contractor derived wastes to be
 generated. The waste determination must be based upon either a constituent
 listing from the manufacturer used in conjunction with consideration of the
 process by which the waste was generated, EPA approved analytical data, or
 laboratory analysis (Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) by themselves are
 not adequate). All support documentation must be attached to the Waste
 Determination form. As a minimum, a Waste Determination form must be
 provided for the following wastes (this listing is not all inclusive): oil
 and latex based painting and caulking products, solvents, adhesives,
 aerosols, petroleum products, and all containers of the original materials.

1.6.4   Disposal Documentation for Hazardous and Regulated Waste

 Submit a copy of the applicable EPA and State permit(s), manifest(s), or
 license(s) for transportation, treatment, storage, and disposal of hazardous
 and regulated waste by permitted facilities.

1.6.5   Contractor 40 CFR Employee Training Records

 Prepare and maintain employee training records throughout the term of the
 contract meeting applicable 40 CFR requirements. The Contractor shall
 ensure every employee completes a program of classroom instruction or on-
 the-job training that teaches them to perform their duties in a way that
 ensures compliance with Federal, State and local regulatory requirements for
 RCRA Large Quantity Generator. The Contractor shall provide a Position
 Description for each employee, by subcontractor, based on the Davis-Bacon
 Wage Rate designation or other equivalent method, evaluating the employee's
 association with hazardous and regulated wastes. This Position Description
 shall include training requirements as defined in 40 CFR 265 for a Large
 Quantity Generator facility. Submit these training records to the
 Contracting Officer at the conclusion of the project, unless otherwise
 directed.

1.6.6   Regulatory Notification

 The Contractor is responsible for all regulatory notification requirements
 in accordance with Federal, State and local regulations. The Contractor
 shall forward copies to the Contracting Officer prior to commencement of
 work activities. Typically, regulatory notifications must be provided for
 the following (this listing is not all inclusive): demolition, renovation,
 NPDES defined site work, remediation of controlled substances (asbestos,
 hazardous waste, lead paint).

1.6.7   Erosion and Sediment Control Inspection Reports

 Submit "Erosion and Sediment Control Inspection Reports" if required (form
 provided at the pre-construction conference) to the Contracting Officer once
 every 7 calendar days and within 24 hours of a storm event that produces 0.5
 inch or more of rain.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                   Page 72 of 463

1.6.8     Solid Waste Disposal Report

 Monthly the Contractor shall submit a solid waste disposal report to the
 Contracting Officer. For each waste, the report shall state the
 classification (using the definitions provided in this section), amount,
 location, and name of the business receiving the solid waste. The
 Contractor shall include copies of the waste handling facilities' weight
 tickets, receipts, bills of sale, and other sales documentation. In lieu of
 sales documentation, the Contractor may submit a statement indicating the
 disposal location for the solid waste which is signed by an officer of the
 Contractor firm authorized to legally obligate or bind the firm. The sales
 documentation or Contractor certification shall include the receiver's tax
 identification number and business, EPA or State registration number, along
 with the receiver's delivery and business addresses and telephone numbers.
 For each solid waste retained by the Contractor for his own use, the
 Contractor shall submit on the solid waste disposal report the information
 previously described in this paragraph. Prices paid or received shall not
 be reported to the Contracting Officer unless required by other provisions
 or specifications of this Contract or public law.

1.7     CLASS I ODS PROHIBITION

 Class I ODS as defined and identified herein shall not be used in the
 performance of this contract, nor be provided as part of the equipment.
 This prohibition shall be considered to prevail over any other provision,
 specification, drawing, or referenced documents.

1.8     ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS

 Provide and maintain, during the life of the contract, environmental
 protection as defined. Plan for and provide environmental protective
 measures to control pollution that develops during normal construction
 practice. Plan for and provide environmental protective measures required
 to correct conditions that develop during the construction of permanent or
 temporary environmental features associated with the project. Comply with
 Federal, State, and local regulations pertaining to the environment,
 including water, air, solid waste, hazardous waste and substances, oily
 substances, and noise pollution.

 Environmental Brief: Attend an environmental brief to be included in the
 preconstruction meeting. Provide the following information: types,
 quantities, and use of hazardous materials that will be brought onto the
 activity; types and quantities of wastes/wastewater that may be generated
 during the contract.

1.8.1     Facility Hazardous Waste Generator Status

 The Contractor shall comply with all provisions of Federal, State and local
 regulatory requirements applicable to the generator status regarding
 training and storage, handling, and disposal of all construction derived
 wastes.
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                       Page 73 of 463

1.8.2     Licenses and Permits

        Obtain licenses and permits pursuant to the "Permits and
        Responsibilities" FAR Clause.

 For permits obtained by the Contracting Officer, whether or not required by
 the permit, the Contractor is responsible to perform quality control
 inspections of the work in progress, and to submit notifications and
 certifications to the applicable regulatory agency, via the Contracting
 Officer, that the work conforms to the contract and permit requirements.
 The inspections and certifications shall be provided through the services of
 a Professional Engineer, registered in the State where the work is being
 performed. As a part of the quality control plan, which is required to be
 submitted for approval by the quality control section, provide a sub item
 containing the name, P.E. registration number, address, and telephone number
 of the professional engineer(s) who will be performing the inspections and
 certifications for each permit listed above.

1.8.2.1     Environmental Quality Board Permits for Puerto Rico

 The Contractor is advised the work under this contract will require
 obtaining certain permits from the local Environmental Quality Board (EQB).
 These permits may include a (1) Solid Waste Generating Activity Permit (D: -
 3), (2) Permit to Construct an Emission Source, (3) Permit to Operate an
 Emission Source, (4) Asbestos Removal Permit, and (5) Erosion and
 Sedimentation Control Plan (CESI Plan). Obtain of these permits from the
 EQB will require a Preliminary Environmental Assessment (PEA). The PEA will
 be on file at the Directorate of Public Works, Environmental Division and
 may be obtained therefrom. If needed for the project, the PEA will be
 provided to the Contractor at the pre construction conference. Obtaining of
 required permits will be necessary prior to beginning any construction.

1.8.3     Contractor Liabilities for Environmental Protection

 The Contractor is advised that this project and the station are subject to
 Federal, State, and local regulatory agency inspections to review compliance
 with environmental laws and regulations. The Contractor shall fully
 cooperate with any representative from any Federal, State or local
 regulatory agency who may visit the job site and shall provide immediate
 notification to the Contracting Officer, who shall accompany them on any
 subsequent site inspections. The Contractor shall complete, maintain, and
 make available to the Contracting Officer, station, or regulatory agency
 personnel all documentation relating to environmental compliance under
 applicable Federal, State and local laws and regulations. The Contractor
 shall immediately notify the Contracting Officer if a Notice of Violation
 (NOV) is issued to the Contractor.
 The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to persons or property
 resulting from Contractor fault or negligence as well as for the payment of
 any civil fines or penalties which may be assessed by any Federal, State or
 local regulatory agency as a result of the Contractor's or any
 subcontractor's violation of any applicable Federal, State or local
 environmental law or regulation. Should a Notice of Violation (NOV), Notice
 of Noncompliance (NON), Notice of Deficiency (NOD), or similar regulatory
 agency notice be issued to the Government as facility owner/operator on
 account of the actions or inactions of the Contractor or one of its
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                      Page 74 of 463

 subcontractors in the performance of work under this contract, the
 Contractor shall fully cooperate with the Government in defending against
 regulatory assessment of any civil fines or penalties arising out of such
 actions or inactions.

1.9    ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGER

 The Contractor shall appoint in writing an Environmental Manager for the
 project site. The Environmental Manager shall be directly responsible for
 coordinating contractor compliance with Federal, State, local, and station
 requirements. The Environmental Manager shall ensure compliance with
 Hazardous Waste Program requirements (including hazardous waste handling,
 storage, manifesting, and disposal); implement the Environmental Protection
 Plan; ensure that all environmental permits are obtained, maintained, and
 closed out; ensure compliance with Storm Water Program Management
 requirements; ensure compliance with Hazardous Materials (storage, handling,
 and reporting) requirements; and coordinate any remediation of regulated
 substances (lead, asbestos, PCB transformers). This can be a collateral
 position; however the person in this position must be trained to adequately
 accomplish the following duties: ensure waste segregation and storage
 compatibility requirements are met; inspect and manage Satellite
 Accumulation areas; ensure only authorized personnel add wastes to
 containers; ensure all Contractor personnel are trained in 40 CFR
 requirements in accordance with their position requirements; coordinate
 removal of waste containers; and maintain the Environmental Records binder
 and required documentation, including environmental permits compliance and
 close-out.

1.10   ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN

 Five days after the award of contract, the Contractor shall meet with the
 Contracting Officer to discuss the proposed Environmental Protection Plan
 and develop a mutual understanding relative to the details of environmental
 protection, including measures for protecting natural resources, required
 reports, and other measures to be taken. The Environmental Protection Plan
 shall be submitted in the following format and shall, at a minimum, address
 the following elements as applicable (also refer to paragraph entitled
 "Protection of Natural Resources" in this section):

       a.   Description of the Environmental Protection Plan

            (1) General overview and purpose
            (2) General site information
            (3) A letter signed by an officer of the firm appointing the
            Environmental Manager and stating that he/she is responsible for
            managing and implementing the Environmental Program as described in
            this contract. Include in this letter the Environmental Manager's
            authority to direct the removal and replacement of non-conforming
            work.

       b.   Protection of Natural Resources

            (1)   Land resources
                                                             W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                          0001
                                                                 Page 75 of 463

     (2)   Tree protection

     (3)   Replacement of damaged landscape features

     (4)   Temporary construction

     (5)   Stream crossings

     (6)   Fish and wildlife resources

     (7)   Wetland areas

c.   Protection of Historical and Archaeological Resources

     (1)   Objectives

     (2)   Methods

d.   Storm Water Management and Control

     (1)   Ground cover

     (2)   Erodible soils

     (3)   Temporary measures

     (a)   Mechanical retardation and control of runoff

     (b) Vegetation and mulch
     (4) Storm Water Pollution Prevention Measures and Notice of Intent
     40 CFR 122.26, EPA 832-R-92-005. Provide a "Storm Water Pollution
     Prevention Plan" (SWPPP) for the project. The SWPPP shall meet the
     requirements of the EPA and State of PR general permit for storm
     water discharges from construction sites. Submit the SWPPP along
     with any required Notice of Intents, Notice of Termination, and
     appropriate permit fees, to the appropriate Federal and State
     agency for approval, a minimum of 14 calendar days prior to the
     start of construction. A copy of the approved SWPPP shall be kept
     at the construction on-site office, and continually updated as
     regulations require to reflect current site conditions.

     (a) Identify potential sources of pollution which may be
     reasonably expected to affect the quality of storm water discharge
     from the site.

     (b) Describe and ensure implementation of practices which will be
     used to reduce the pollutants in storm water discharge associated
     with industrial activity at the construction site.

     (c) Ensure compliance with terms of EPA and EQB general permits
     for storm water discharge.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                   Page 76 of 463

     (d)   Select applicable management practices from EPA 832-R-92-005.

     (e) Provide completed copy of "Notice of Intent" and "Notice of
     Termination".

e.   Prevention of Releases to the Environment

     (1)   Procedures to prevent releases to the environment

     (2)   Notifications in the event of a release to the environment

f.   Protection of the Environment from Waste Derived from Contractor
     Operations

     (1)   Control and disposal of solid and sanitary waste

     (2) Control and disposal of hazardous waste (Hazardous Waste
     Management Section)

     This item shall consist of the management procedures for all
     hazardous waste to be generated. The elements of those procedures
     shall coincide with the Activity Hazardous Waste Management Plan.
     A copy of the Activity Hazardous Waste Management Plan will be
     provided to the Contracting Officer. As a minimum, include the
     following:

     (a) Procedures to be employed to ensure a written waste
     determination is made for appropriate wastes which are to be
     generated;

     (b)   Sampling/analysis plan;

     (c) Methods of hazardous waste accumulation/storage (i.e., in
     tanks and/or containers);

     (d) Management procedures for storage, labeling, transportation,
     and disposal of waste (treatment of waste is not allowed unless
     specifically noted);

     (e) Management procedures and regulatory documentation ensuring
     disposal of hazardous waste complies with Land Disposal
     Restrictions (40 CFR 268);

     (f) Management procedures for recyclable hazardous materials such
     as lead-acid batteries, used oil, and the like;

     (g)   Used oil management procedures in accordance with 40 CFR 279;

     (h)   Pollution prevention\hazardous waste minimization procedures;

     (i) Plans for the disposal of hazardous waste by permitted
     facilities;
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                      Page 77 of 463


             (j) Procedures to be employed to ensure all required employee
             training records are maintained.

1.10.1      Environmental Protection Plan Review

 Fourteen days after the environmental protection meeting, submit the
 proposed Environmental Protection Plan for further discussion, review, and
 approval. Commencement of work shall not begin until the environmental
 protection plan has been approved.

1.11      UNFORESEEN HAZARDOUS OR REGULATED MATERIAL

 If material that is not indicated in the contract documents is encountered
 that may be dangerous to human health upon disturbance during construction
 operations, stop that portion of work and notify the Contracting Officer
 immediately. Intent is to identify materials such as PCB, lead paint,
 mercury, petroleum products, and friable and nonfriable asbestos. Within 14
 calendar days the Government will determine if the material is hazardous.
 If the material is not hazardous or poses no danger, the Government will
 direct the Contractor to proceed without change. If the material is
 hazardous and handling of the material is necessary to accomplish the work,
 the Government will issue a modification pursuant to "FAR 52.243-4, Changes"
 and "FAR 52.236-2, Differing Site Conditions."

1.12      CONTRACTOR HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INVENTORY LOG

 Submit the "Contractor Hazardous Material Inventory Log" (copy at end of
 section), which provides information required by (EPCRA Sections 312 and
 313) along with corresponding Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) to the
 Contracting Officer at the start and at the end of construction (30 days
 from final acceptance), and update no later than January 31 of each calendar
 year during the life of the contract. Documentation for any
 spills/releases, environmental reports or off-site transfers may be
 requested by the Contracting Officer.

PART 2      PRODUCTS

 Not used.

PART 3      EXECUTION

3.1      PROTECTION OF NATURAL RESOURCES

 Preserve the natural resources within the project boundaries and outside the
 limits of permanent work. Restore to an equivalent or improved condition
 upon completion of work. Confine construction activities to within the
 limits of the work indicated or specified. Conform to the national
 permitting requirements of the clean Water Act.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                   Page 78 of 463

3.1.1      Land Resources

 Except in areas to be cleared, do not remove, cut, deface, injure, or
 destroy trees or shrubs without the Contracting Officer's permission. Do
 not fasten or attach ropes, cables, or guys to existing nearby trees for
 anchorages unless authorized by the Contracting Officer. Where such use of
 attached ropes, cables, or guys is authorized, the Contractor shall be
 responsible for any resultant damage.

3.1.1.1      Protection of Trees

 Protect existing trees which are to remain and which may be injured,
 bruised, defaced, or otherwise damaged by construction operations. Remove
 displaced rocks from uncleared areas. By approved excavation, remove trees
 with 30 percent or more of their root systems destroyed.

3.1.1.2      Replacement

 Remove trees and other landscape features scarred or damaged by equipment
 operations, and replace with equivalent, undamaged trees and landscape
 features. Obtain Contracting Officer's approval before replacement.

3.1.2     Water Resources

3.1.2.1      Storm water Drainage

 Construction site runoff shall be prevented from entering any storm drain or
 the river directly by the use of straw bales or other method suitable to the
 Environmental Programs Division of the Shipyard. Contractor shall provide
 erosion protection of the surrounding soils.

3.1.3      Fish and Wildlife Resources

 Do not disturb fish and wildlife. Do not alter water flows or otherwise
 significantly disturb the native habitat adjacent to the project and
 critical to the survival of fish and wildlife, except as indicated or
 specified.

3.2     HISTORICAL AND ARCHAEOLOGICAL RESOURCES

 Carefully protect in-place and report immediately to the Contracting Officer
 historical and archaeological items. Upon discovery, notify the Contracting
 Officer. Stop work in the immediate area of the discovery until directed by
 the Contracting Officer to resume work. The Government retains ownership
 and control over historical and archaeological resources.

3.3     EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MEASURES

3.3.1      Burn off

 Burn off of the ground cover is not permitted.

3.3.2     Temporary Protection for Erodible Soils
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                    Page 79 of 463


Use the following methods to prevent erosion and control sedimentation.

3.3.2.1     Mechanical Retardation and Control of Runoff

 Mechanically retard and control the rate of runoff from the construction
 site. This includes construction of diversion ditches, benches, berms, and
 use of silt fences and straw bales to retard and divert runoff to protected
 drainage courses.

3.3.2.2     Vegetation and Mulch

  Seeding: Provide new seeding or sodding as applicable, where ground is
  disturbed. Include topsoil or nutriment during the seeding operation
  necessary to reestablish a suitable stand of grass.

3.4     CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF SOLID WASTES

 Pick up solid wastes, and place in covered containers which are regularly
 emptied. Do not prepare or cook food on the project site. Prevent
 contamination of the site or other areas when handling and disposing of
 wastes. At project completion, leave the areas clean. Recycling is
 encouraged and can be coordinated with the Contracting Officer and the
 activity recycling coordinator. Remove all solid waste (including non-
 hazardous debris) from Government property and dispose off-site at an
 approved landfill. Solid waste disposal off-site must comply with most
 stringent local, State, and Federal requirements including 40 CFR 241, 40
 CFR 243, and 40 CFR 258.

3.4.1     Dumpsters

 Equip dumpsters with a secure cover and paint the standard base color. Keep
 cover closed at all times, except when being loaded with trash and debris.
 Locate dumpsters behind the construction fence or out of the public view.
 Empty site dumpsters at least once a week. or as needed to keep the site
 free of debris and trash. If necessary, provide 55 gallon trash containers
 painted the darker base color to collect debris in the construction site
 area. Locate the trash containers behind the construction fence or out of
 the public view. Empty trash containers at least once a day. For large
 demolitions, large dumpsters without lids are acceptable but should not have
 debris higher than the sides before emptying.

3.5     CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS WASTES

3.5.1     Hazardous Waste/Debris Management

 The Contractor shall identify all construction activities which will
 generate hazardous waste/debris. The Contractor must provide a documented
 waste determination for all resultant waste streams. Hazardous waste/debris
 shall be identified, labeled, handled, stored, and disposed of in accordance
 with all Federal, State, and local regulations including 40 CFR 261, 40 CFR
 262, 40 CFR 263, 40 CFR 264, 40 CFR 265, 40 CFR 266, and 40 CFR 268.
 Hazardous waste shall also be managed in accordance with the approved
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                         Page 80 of 463

 Hazardous Waste Management Section of the Environmental Protection Plan.
 Store hazardous wastes in approved containers in accordance with 49 CFR 173
 and 49 CFR 178. Hazardous waste generated within the confines of Government
 facilities shall be identified as being generated by the Government. Prior
 to removal of any hazardous waste from Government property, all hazardous
 waste manifests must be signed by activity personnel from the Station
 Environmental Office. No hazardous waste shall be brought onto Government
 property. Provide to the Contracting Officer a copy of waste determination
 documentation for any solid waste streams that have any potential to be
 hazardous waste or contain any chemical constituents listed in 40 CFR 372-
 SUBPART D. For hazardous wastes spills, verbally notify the Contracting
 Officer immediately.

3.5.1.1    Regulated Waste Storage/Satellite Accumulation/90 Day Storage Areas

 If the work requires the temporary storage/collection of regulated or
 hazardous wastes, the Contractor shall request the establishment of a
 Regulated Waste Storage Area. The Contractor must submit a request in
 writing to the Contracting Officer providing the following information:

 Contract Number           ____________      Contractor        ______________

 Haz/Waste or
 Regulated Waste POC       ____________      Phone Number      ______________

 Type of Waste             ____________      Source of Waste   ______________

 Emergency POC             ____________      Phone Number      ______________

 Location of the Site: ____________
 (Attach Site Plan to the Request)

 Attach a waste determination form.       Allow ten working days for processing
 this request.


3.5.1.2    Sampling and Analysis of HW
      a.   Sampling

           The Contractor shall sample waste in accordance with EPA SW-846.
           Each sampled drum or container shall be clearly marked with the
           Contractor's identification number and cross referenced to the
           chemical analysis performed.

      b.   Analysis

           The Contractor shall follow the analytical procedure and methods in
           accordance with the 40 CFR 261. The Contractor shall provide all
           analytical results and reports performed to the Contracting Officer

      c.   Analysis Type
                                                                 W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                     Page 81 of 463

           Identification of waste hazardous material/hazardous waste shall be
           accomplished by analyzing for the following properties as a
           minimum: ignitability, corrosiveness, total chlorides, BYTU value,
           PCBs, TCLP for heavy metals, and cyanide.

3.5.1.3    Asbestos Certification

      a.   Asbestos containing material: Items, components, or materials which
           are specified to be worked on under this contract may involve
           asbestos, and shall be indicated per Delivery Order If applicable.
           Other materials especially thermal insulation, in the general work
           area may contain asbestos. All thermal insulation, in all work
           areas should be considered to be asbestos unless positively
           identified by conspicuous tags or previous laboratory analysis

           certifying asbestos free. The Contractor shall not remove or
           perform work on any such materials without the prior approval of
           the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall not engage in any
           activity, which would remove or damage such materials of cause the
           generation of fibers from such materials. The Contractor shall
           immediately stop all work which would generate further damage to
           the material, evacuate the potential asbestos exposed area, and
           notify the Contracting Officer for resolution of the situation
           prior to resuming normal work activities in the affected area.

3.5.1.4    Hazardous Waste Disposal
           COMPLETE AS APPLICABLE WITH THE DETAILS OF THE CONTRACT. THE
           SECTIONS WITH () SHOULD BE MARKED AS APPLICABLE WITH AN 'X'.

 Controlled of stored waste, packaging, sampling, analysis, and disposal
 shall be determined by the details in the contract. The requirements for
 jobs in the following paragraphs shall be used as the guidelines for
 disposal of any hazardous waste generated.

           (X)(a)   Responsibilities for Contractor's Disposal

           Any generation of WHM/HW requiring Contractor disposal of solid
           waste or liquid.

      a.   The Contractor agrees to provide all service necessary for the
           final treatment/disposal of the hazardous material/waste in
           accordance with all local, State and Federal laws and regulations,
           and the terms and conditions of the contract within sixty (60) days
           after the materials have been generated. These services shall
           include all necessary personnel, labor, transportation, packaging,
           detailed analysis (if required for disposal, and/or transportation,
           including manifesting or completing waste profile sheets,
           equipment, and the compilation of all documentation is required).

      b.   Contain all waste in accordance with 40 CFR 260, 40 CFR 261, 40 CFR
           262, 40 CFR 263, 40 CFR 264, 40 CFR 265, 40 CFR 266, 40 CFR 268, 40
           CFR 270, 40 CFR 272, 40 CFR 273, 40 CFR 279, 40 CFR 280, and 40 CFR
           761.
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                    Page 82 of 463

    c.   Control and turn in all hazardous waste requiring disposal in
         accordance with specification entitled "Contractor Disposal Turn-In
         Requirements".

    d.   Obtaining a representative sample of the material generated for
         each job done to provide waste stream determination.

    e.   Analyzing for each sample taken and providing analytical results to
         the Contracting Officer. Provide two copies of the results.

    f.   Determine the DOT proper shipping names for all waste (each
         container requiring disposal) and shall demonstrate how this
         determination is developed and supported by the sampling and
         analysis requirements contained herein to the Contracting Officer
         for Code 106's review.


Government Responsibilities

To review all documentation submitted by the Contractor for accuracy.
Provide guidance to the Contractor in reference to environmental compliance.

(X)Interim Waste Generation Site for Contractor Disposal of WHM/HW

The Contractor shall request approval of the Government for an area suitable
for packaging WHN/HW requiring disposal. The Contractor shall comply with
the requirements of the EPA & EQP.. The area will be barricaded and a sign
identifying as follows:

Signage- "DANGER - UNAUTHORIZED PERSONNEL KEEP OUT"

With additional custody sign indicating:

         (1) Site #
         (2) Controlled by
         Call Mr./Ms. [____] at

Barricade Type: Yellow and black three (3) inch plastic tape.   Corner
barricades shall be provided by the Government.

(X)Contractor Disposal Turn-In Requirements

For any waste hazardous materials or hazardous waste generated which
requires the Contractor to dispose of, the following conditions must be
complied with:

    a.   Call Code 106.322 dispatcher, at 396-7231 ext. 161 and provide the
         following information:

         (1)   Your name and company

         (2)   Service/contract number
                                                                 W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                     Page 83 of 463


          (3)   Code 460 number

          (4)   Telephone number where you can be reached

          (5)   Material requiring disposal

          (6)   Location of material

          (7)   Volume of material in each container

    b.    All material must meet the following conditions in order to be
          acceptable for disposal

          (1) Drums compatible with waste contents and drums meet DOT
          requirements for 49 CFR 173 for transportation of materials.

          (2) Drums banded to wooden pallets. No more than three (3) 55
          gallon drums to a pallet, or two (2) 85 gallon over packs.

          (3)   Band using 1-1/4 inch minimum band on upper third of drum.

          (4) Recovery materials label (provided by Code 106.321) located in
          middle of drum, filled out to indicate actual volume of material,
          name of material manufacturer, other vendor information as
          available.

          (5) Always have three (3) to five (5) inches of empty space above
          volume of material. This space is called 'outage'.

    (b)    Responsibilities for Government's Disposal

Any generation of WHM/HW requiring Government disposal of solid waste or
liquid.

(X)Contractor's Representative

    a.    Contain all   waste in accordance with 40 CFR 260, 40 CFR 261, 40 CFR
          262, 40 CFR   263, 40 CFR 264, 40 CFR 265, 40 CFR 266, 40 CFR 268, 40
          CFR 270, 40   CFR 271, 40 CFR 272, 40 CFR 273, 40 CFR 279, 40 CFR
          280, and 40   CFR 716.

    b.    Control and turn-in all hazardous waste requiring disposal in
          accordance with NNSY Recovery Material Instruction contained in the
          specification entitled "Government Disposal Turn-In Requirements".

    c.    Providing identification of material requiring disposal to permit
          safe opening, storage and handling by the Government.

Government Responsibilities

    a.    Sample material requiring disposal.
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                       Page 84 of 463


        b.   Analyzing each sample taken.

        c.   Determine the DOT proper shipping names for all waste (each
             container requiring disposal) and shall demonstrate how this
             determination is developed and supported by the sampling and
             analysis requirements.

        d.   Accepting and disposing of all WHM/HW properly turned in by the
             Contractor for disposal.

 (X)Acceptance of WHM/HW for Disposal

 Upon completion of all above applicable requirements (i.e. sample, analysis,
 identification, packaging, etc.), the Contractor shall notify the
 Contracting Officer three (3) working days in advance for review and
 acceptance by the Environmental Programs Division, Code 106.3. The
 Contractor shall correct all discrepancies not conforming to this contract
 at his expense. Upon acceptance by the Environmental Programs, the waste
 will be removed from the Contractor's work site within three (3) days.

3.5.2    Pollution Prevention/Hazardous Waste Minimization

 The Contractor shall actively pursue minimizing the use of hazardous
 materials and the generation of hazardous waste while on-base. The
 Hazardous Waste Management Section of the Environmental Protection Plan
 shall include the Contractor's procedures for pollution prevention/
 hazardous waste minimization. For preparing this part of the plan, the
 Contractor may consult the activity Environmental Office for suggestions and
 to obtain a copy of the installation's pollution prevention/hazardous waste
 minimization plan for reference material. If no written plan exists, the
 Contractor may obtain information by contacting the Contracting Officer.
 The Contractor shall describe the types of the hazardous materials expected
 to be used in the construction when requesting information.

3.5.3    Hazardous Material Control

 The Contractor shall include hazardous material control procedures in the
 Safety Plan. The procedures shall address and ensure the proper handling of
 hazardous materials, including the appropriate transportation requirements.
 The Contractor shall submit a MSDS and estimated quantities to be used for
 each hazardous material to the Contracting Officer prior to bringing the
 material on base. Typical materials requiring MSDS and quantity reporting
 include, but are not limited to, oil and latex based painting and caulking
 products, solvents, adhesives, aerosol, and petroleum products. At the end
 of the project, the Contractor shall provide the Contracting Officer with
 the maximum quantity of each material that was present at the site at any
 one time, the dates the material was present, the amount of each material
 that was used during the project, and how the material was used. The
 Contractor shall also ensure that hazardous materials are utilized in a
 manner that will minimize the amount of hazardous waste that is generated.
 The Contractor shall ensure that all containers of hazardous materials have
 NFPA labels or their equivalent. Copies of the MSDS for hazardous materials
 shall be kept on site at all times and provided to the Contracting Officer
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                   Page 85 of 463

 at the end of the project. The Contractor shall certify that all hazardous
 materials removed from the site are hazardous materials and do not meet the
 definition of hazardous waste per 40 CFR 261.

3.5.4    Petroleum Products

 Conduct the fueling and lubricating of equipment and motor vehicles in a
 manner that protects against spills and evaporation. All used oil generated
 on site shall be managed in accordance with 40 CFR 279. The Contractor
 shall determine if any used oil generated while on-site exhibits a
 characteristic of hazardous waste. In addition, used oil containing 1000
 parts per million of solvents will be considered a hazardous waste and
 disposed of at Contractor's expense. Used oil mixed with a hazardous waste
 will also be considered a hazardous waste. All hazardous waste will be
 managed in accordance with the paragraph entitled Hazardous Waste/Debris
 Management of this section and shall be managed in accordance with the
 approved Environmental Protection Plan.

3.5.5 Releases/Spills of Oil and Hazardous Substances

 Take precautions to prevent releases/spills of oil and hazardous substances.
 In the event of any releases of oil and hazardous substances, chemicals, or
 gases immediately (within 15 minutes) notify the Base Fire Department, the
 Environmental Office at the Directorate of Public Works and the Contracting
 Officer. The Contractor is responsible for verbal and written notifications
 as required by the federal 40 CFR 355, State, local regulations and Army
 Instructions. Spill response shall be in accordance with 40 CFR 300 and
 applicable State and local regulations. Contain and clean up these spills
 without cost to the Government. If Government assistance is requested or
 required, the Contractor shall reimburse the Government for such assistance.
 Provide copies of the written notification and documentation that a verbal
 notification was made within 20 days.

3.6     DUST CONTROL

 Keep dust down at all times, including during non-working periods. Sprinkle
 or treat, with dust suppressants, the soil at the site, hauls roads, and
 other areas disturbed by operations. Dry power brooming will not be
 permitted. Instead, use vacuuming, wet mopping, wet sweeping or wet power
 brooming. Air blowing will be permitted only for cleaning non-particulate
 debris such as steel reinforcing bars. Only wet cutting will be permitted
 for cutting concrete blocks, concrete, and bituminous concrete. Do not
 unnecessarily shake bags of cement, concrete mortar, or plaster.

3.7     ABRASIVE BLASTING

3.7.1 Blasting Operations

 The use of silica sand is prohibited in sandblasting.
 Provide tarpaulin drop cloths and windscreens to enclose abrasive blasting
 operations to confine and collect dust, abrasive, agent, paint chips, and
 other debris in accordance with the requirements specified. Perform work
 involving removal of hazardous material in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                      Page 86 of 463

3.7.2 Disposal Requirements

 Submit analytical results of the debris generated from abrasive blasting
 operations per paragraph entitled Laboratory Analysis of this section.
 Hazardous waste generated from blasting operations shall be managed in
 accordance with paragraph entitled "Hazardous Waste\Debris Management" of
 this section and with the approved HWMP. Disposal of non-hazardous abrasive
 blasting debris shall be in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Control and
 Disposal of Solid Wastes".

3.8      NOISE

Make the maximum use of low-noise emission products, as certified by the EPA.
Blasting or use of explosives will not be permitted


                       *   *   *    END OF SECTION    *   *   *




                                   SECTION 01 81 16

                      FACILITY ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1      GENERAL

1.1      REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic
 designation only.
                                                                    W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                 0001
                                                                        Page 87 of 463

          U.S. AIR FORCE (USAF)

 AFI 32-1053                      Pest Management Program

          U.S. ARMY (DA)

 AR 200-5                         Pest Management

          U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

 33 CFR 328                       Definitions

 40 CFR 68                        Chemical Accident Prevention Provisions

 40 CFR 152 - 186                 Pesticide Programs

 40 CFR 260                       Hazardous Waste Management System: General

 40 CFR 261                       Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste

 40 CFR 262                       Standards Applicable to Generators of
                                  Hazardous Waste

 40 CFR 279                       Standards for the Management of Used Oil

 40 CFR 302                       Designation, Reportable Quantities, and
                                  Notification

 40 CFR 355                       Emergency Planning and Notification

 49 CFR 171 - 178                 Hazardous Materials Regulations

          U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)

 EM 385-1-1                       (1996) U.S. Army Corps on Engineers Safety
                                  and Health Requirements Manual

 WETLAND MANUAL                   Corps of Engineers Wetlands Delineation
                                  Manual Technical Report Y-87-1


1.2     DEFINITIONS

1.2.1     Environmental Pollution and Damage

 Environmental pollution and damage is the presence of chemical, physical, or
 biological elements or agents which adversely affect human health or
 welfare; unfavorably alter ecological balances of importance to human life;
 affect other species of importance to humankind; or degrade the environment
 aesthetically, culturally and/or historically.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                   Page 88 of 463

1.2.2   Environmental Protection

 Environmental protection is the prevention/control of pollution and habitat
 disruption that may occur to the environment during construction. The
 control of environmental pollution and damage requires consideration of
 land, water, and air; biological and cultural resources; and includes
 management of visual aesthetics; noise; solid, chemical, gaseous, and liquid
 waste; radiant energy and radioactive material as well as other pollutants.

1.2.3   Contractor Generated Hazardous Waste

 Contractor generated hazardous waste means materials that, if abandoned or
 disposed of, may meet the definition of a hazardous waste. These waste
 streams would typically consist of material brought on site by the
 Contractor to execute work, but are not fully consumed during the course of
 construction. Examples include, but are not limited to, excess paint
 thinners (i.e. methyl ethyl ketone, toluene etc.), waste thinners,excess
 paints, excess solvents, waste solvents, and excess pesticides, and
 contaminated pesticide equipment rinse water.

1.2.4   Installation Pest Management Coordinator

 Installation Pest Management Coordinator (IPMC) is the individual officially
 designated by the Installation Commander to oversee the Installation Pest
 Management Program and the Installation Pest Management Plan.

1.2.5   Project Pesticide Coordinator

 The Project Pesticide Coordinator (PPC) is an individual that resides at a
 Civil Works Project office and that is responsible for oversight of
 pesticide application on Project grounds.

1.2.6   Land Application for Discharge Water

 The term "Land Application" for discharge water implies that the Contractor
 shall discharge water at a rate which allows the water to percolate into the
 soil. No sheeting action, soil erosion, discharge into storm sewers,
 discharge into defined drainage areas, or discharge into the "waters of the
 United States" shall occur. Land Application shall be in compliance with
 all applicable Federal, State, and local laws and regulations.

1.2.7   Pesticide

 Pesticide is defined as any substance or mixture of substances intended for
 preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating any pest, or intended for
 use as a plant regulator, defoliant or desiccant.

1.2.8   Pests

 The term "pests" means arthropods, birds, rodents, nematodes, fungi,
 bacteria, viruses, algae, snails, marine borers, snakes, weeds and other
 organisms (except for human or animal disease-causing organisms) that
 adversely affect readiness, military operations, or the well-being of
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                   Page 89 of 463

 personnel and animals; attack or damage real property, supplies, equipment,
 or vegetation; or are otherwise undesirable.

1.2.9      Surface Discharge

 The term "Surface Discharge" implies that the water is discharged with
 possible sheeting action and subsequent soil erosion may occur. Waters that
 are surface discharged may terminate in drainage ditches, storm
 sewers,creeks, and/or "waters of the United States" and would require a
 permit to discharge water from the governing agency.

1.2.10      Waters of the United States

 All waters which are under the jurisdiction of the Clean Water Act, as
 defined in 33 CFR 328.

1.2.11      Wetlands

 Wetlands means those areas that are inundated or saturated by surface or
 ground water at a frequency and duration sufficient to support, and that
 under normal circumstances do support, a prevalence of vegetation typically
 adapted for life in saturated soil conditions. Wetlands generally include
 swamps, marshes, and bogs. Official determination of whether or not an area
 is classified as a wetland must be done in accordance with WETLAND MANUAL.

1.3      GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

 The Contractor shall minimize environmental pollution and damage that may
 occur as the result of construction operations. The environmental resources
 within the project boundaries and those affected outside the limits of
 permanent work shall be protected during the entire duration of this
 contract. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable environmental
 Federal, State, and local laws and regulations. The Contractor shall be
 responsible for any delays resulting from failure to comply with
 environmental laws and regulations.

1.4      SUBCONTRACTORS

 The Contractor shall ensure compliance with this section by subcontractors.

1.5      PAYMENT

 No separate payment will be made for work covered under this section. The
 Contractor shall be responsible for payment of fees associated with
 environmental permits, application, and/or notices obtained by the
 Contractor. All costs associated with this section shall be included in the
 contract price. The Contractor shall be responsible for payment of all
 fines/fees for violation or non-compliance with Federal, State, Regional and
 local laws and regulations.
                                                                 W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                     Page 90 of 463


1.6     SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that
 will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
 submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

        SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

            Environmental Protection Plan; G.

              The environmental protection plan.

1.7     ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN

 Prior to commencing construction activities or delivery of materials to the
 site, the Contractor shall submit an Environmental Protection Plan for
 review and approval by the Contracting Officer. The purpose of the
 Environmental Protection Plan is to present a comprehensive overview of
 known or potential environmental issues which the Contractor must address
 during construction. Issues of concern shall be defined within the
 Environmental Protection Plan as outlined in this section. The Contractor
 shall address each topic at a level of detail commensurate with the
 environmental issue and required construction task(s). Topics or issues
 which are not identified in this section, but which the Contractor considers
 necessary, shall be identified and discussed after those items formally
 identified in this section. Prior to submittal of the Environmental
 Protection Plan, the Contractor shall meet with the Contracting Officer for
 the purpose of discussing the implementation of the initial Environmental
 Protection Plan; possible subsequent additions and revisions to the plan
 including any reporting requirements; and methods for administration of the
 Contractor's Environmental Plans. The Environmental Protection Plan shall
 be current and maintained onsite by the Contractor.

1.7.1     Compliance

 No requirement in this Section shall be construed as relieving the
 Contractor of any applicable Federal, State, and local environmental
 protection laws and regulations. During Construction, the Contractor shall
 be responsible for identifying, implementing, and submitting for approval
 any additional requirements to be included in the Environmental Protection
 Plan.

1.7.2     Contents

 The environmental protection plan shall include, but shall not be limited
 to, the following:

        a. Name(s) of person(s) within the Contractor's organization who
        is(are) responsible for ensuring adherence to the Environmental
        Protection Plan.
                                                          W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                       0001
                                                              Page 91 of 463

b. Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for manifesting
hazardous waste to be removed from the site, if applicable.

c. Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for training
the Contractor's environmental protection personnel.

d. Description of the Contractor's environmental protection personnel
training program.

e. An erosion and sediment control plan which identifies the type and
location of the erosion and sediment controls to be provided. The plan
shall include monitoring and reporting requirements to assure that the
control measures are in compliance with the erosion and sediment
control plan, Federal, State, and local laws and regulations. A Storm
Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) may be substituted for this
plan.

f. Drawings showing locations of proposed temporary excavations or
embankments for haul roads, stream crossings, material storage areas,
structures, sanitary facilities, and stockpiles of excess or spoil
materials including methods to control runoff and to contain materials
on the site.

g. Traffic control plans including measures to reduce erosion of
temporary roadbeds by construction traffic, especially during wet
weather. Plan shall include measures to minimize the amount of mud
transported onto paved public roads by vehicles or runoff.

h. Work area plan showing the proposed activity in each portion of the
area and identifying the areas of limited use or nonuse. Plan should
include measures for marking the limits of use areas including methods
for protection of features to be preserved within authorized work
areas.

i. The Spill Control plan shall include the procedures, instructions,
and reports to be used in the event of an unforeseen spill of a
substance regulated by 40 CFR 68, 40 CFR 302, 40 CFR 355, and/or
regulated under State or Local laws and regulations. The Spill Control
Plan supplements the requirements of EM 385-1-1. This plan shall
include as a minimum:

    1. The name of the individual who will report any spills or
    hazardous substance releases and who will follow up with complete
    documentation. This individual shall immediately notify the
    Contracting Officer, Facility Fire Department and Facility
    Environmental Office in addition to the legally required Federal,
    State, and local reporting channels (including the National
    Response Center 1-800-424-8802) if a reportable quantity is
    released to the environment. The plan shall contain a list of the
    required reporting channels and telephone numbers.

    2. The name and qualifications of the individual who will be
    responsible for implementing and supervising the containment and
    cleanup.
                                                          W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                       0001
                                                              Page 92 of 463


    3. Training requirements for Contractor's personnel and methods of
    accomplishing the training.

    4. A list of materials and equipment to be immediately available
    at the job site, tailored to cleanup work of the potential
    hazard(s) identified.

    5. The names and locations of suppliers of containment materials
    and locations of additional fuel oil recovery, cleanup,
    restoration, and material-placement equipment available in case of
    an unforeseen spill emergency.

    6. The methods and procedures to be used for expeditious
    contaminant cleanup.

j. A non-hazardous solid waste disposal plan identifying methods and
locations for solid waste disposal including clearing debris. The plan
shall include schedules for disposal. The Contractor shall identify
any subcontractors responsible for the transportation and disposal of
solid waste. Licenses or permits shall be submitted for solid waste
disposal sites that are not a commercial operating facility. Evidence
of the disposal facility's acceptance of the solid waste shall be
attached to this plan during the construction. The Contractor shall
attach a copy of each of the Non-hazardous Solid Waste Diversion
Reports to the disposal plan. The report shall be submitted on the
first working day after the first quarter that non-hazardous solid
waste has been disposed and/or diverted and shall be for the previous
quarter (e.g. the first working day of January, April, July, and
October). The report shall indicate the total amount of waste
generated and total amount of waste diverted in cubic yards or tons
along with the percent that was diverted.

k. A recycling and solid waste minimization plan with a list of
measures to reduce consumption of energy and natural resources. The
plan shall detail the Contractor's actions to comply with and to
participate in Federal, State, Regional, and local government sponsored
recycling programs to reduce the volume of solid waste at the source.

l. An air pollution control plan detailing provisions to assure that
dust, debris, materials, trash, etc., do not become air borne and
travel off the project site.

m. A contaminant prevention plan that: identifies potentially
hazardous substances to be used on the job site; identifies the
intended actions to prevent introduction of such materials into the
air, water, or ground; and details provisions for compliance with
Federal, State, and local laws and regulations for storage and handling
of these materials. In accordance with EM 385-1-1, a copy of the
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and the maximum quantity of each
hazardous material to be on site at any given time shall be included in
the contaminant prevention plan. As new hazardous materials are
brought on site or removed from the site, the plan shall be updated.
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                      Page 93 of 463

        n. A waste water management plan that identifies the methods and
        procedures for management and/or discharge of waste waters which are
        directly derived from construction activities, such as concrete curing
        water, clean-up water, dewatering of ground water, disinfection water,
        hydrostatic test water, and water used in flushing of lines. If a
        settling/retention pond is required, the plan shall include the design
        of the pond including drawings, removal plan, and testing requirements
        for possible pollutants. If land application will be the method of
        disposal for the waste water, the plan shall include a sketch showing
        the location for land application along with a description of the
        pretreatment methods to be implemented. If surface discharge will be
        the method of disposal, a copy of the permit and associated documents
        shall be included as an attachment prior to discharging the waste
        water. If disposal is to a sanitary sewer, the plan shall include
        documentation that the Waste Water Treatment Plant Operator has
        approved the flow rate, volume, and type of discharge.

        o. A historical, archaeological, cultural resources biological
        resources and wetlands plan that defines procedures for identifying and
        protecting historical, archaeological, cultural resources, biological
        resources and wetlands known to be on the project site: and/or
        identifies procedures to be followed if historical archaeological,
        cultural resources, biological resources and wetlands not previously
        known to be onsite or in the area are discovered during construction.
        The plan shall include methods to assure the protection of known or
        discovered resources and shall identify lines of communication between
        Contractor personnel and the Contracting Officer.

        p. A pesticide treatment plan shall be included and updated, as
        information becomes available. The plan shall include: sequence of
        treatment, dates, times, locations, pesticide trade name, EPA
        registration numbers, authorized uses, chemical composition,
        formulation, original and applied concentration, application rates of
        active ingredient (i.e. pounds of active ingredient applied), equipment
        used for application and calibration of equipment. The Contractor is
        responsible for Federal, State, Regional and Local pest management
        record keeping and reporting requirements as well as any additional
        specific requirements. The Contractor shall follow AR 200-5 Pest
        Management, Chapter 2, Section III "Pest Management Records and
        Reports" for data required to be reported to the Installation.

1.7.3     Appendix

 Copies of all environmental permits, permit application packages, approvals
 to construct, notifications, certifications, reports, and termination
 documents shall be attached, as an appendix, to the Environmental Protection
 Plan.

1.8     PROTECTION FEATURES

 This paragraph supplements the Contract Clause PROTECTION OF EXISTING
 VEGETATION, STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, UTILITIES, AND IMPROVEMENTS. Prior to
 start of any onsite construction activities, the Contractor and the
 Contracting Officer shall make a joint condition survey. Immediately
 following the survey, the Contractor shall prepare a brief report including
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                   Page 94 of 463

 a plan describing the features requiring protection under the provisions of
 the Contract Clauses, which are not specifically identified on the drawings
 as environmental features requiring protection along with the condition of
 trees, shrubs and grassed areas immediately adjacent to the site of work and
 adjacent to the Contractor's assigned storage area and access route(s), as
 applicable. This survey report shall be signed by both the Contractor and
 the Contracting Officer upon mutual agreement as to its accuracy and
 completeness. The Contractor shall protect those environmental features
 included in the survey report and any indicated on the drawings, regardless
 of interference which their preservation may cause to the Contractor's work
 under the contract.

1.9      ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT OF CONTRACT DEVIATIONS

 Any deviations, requested by the Contractor, from the drawings,plans and
 specifications which may have an environmental impact will be subject to
 approval by the Contracting Officer and may require an extended review,
 processing, and approval time. The Contracting Officer reserves the right
 to disapprove alternate methods, even if they are more cost effective, if
 the Contracting Officer determines that the proposed alternate method will
 have an adverse environmental impact.

1.10     NOTIFICATION

 The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor in writing of any
 observed noncompliance with Federal, State or local environmental laws or
 regulations, permits, and other elements of the Contractor's Environmental
 Protection plan. The Contractor shall, after receipt of such notice, inform
 the Contracting Officer of the proposed corrective action and take such
 action when approved by the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer
 may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory
 corrective action has been taken. No time extensions shall be granted or
 equitable adjustments allowed to the Contractor for any such suspensions.
 This is in addition to any other actions the Contracting Officer may take
 under the contract, or in accordance with the Federal Acquisition Regulation
 or Federal Law.

1.11     HTRW PERIMETER AIR MONITORING

 For the protection of public health, the Contractor shall monitor and
 control contaminant emissions to the air from HTRW remedial action area
 sources to minimize short term risks that might be posed to the community
 during implementation of the remedial alternative.

1.11.1     Perimeter Air Contaminant of Concern


1.11.2     Time Averaged Perimeter Action Levels

1.11.3     Perimeter Sampling/Monitoring Location[s]
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                       Page 95 of 463

1.11.4      Monitoring Instruments/Sampling and Analysis Methods

1.11.5      Staffing

PART 2      PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3      EXECUTION

3.1      ENVIRONMENTAL PERMITS AND COMMITMENTS

 The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and complying with all
 environmental permits and commitments required by Federal, State, Regional,
 and local environmental laws and regulations.

3.2      LAND RESOURCES

 The Contractor shall confine all activities to areas defined by the drawings
 and specifications. Prior to the beginning of any construction, the
 Contractor shall identify any land resources to be preserved within the work
 area. Except in areas indicated on the drawings or specified to be cleared,
 the Contractor shall not remove, cut, deface, injure, or destroy land
 resources including trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, topsoil, and land forms
 without approval. No ropes, cables, or guys shall be fastened to or
 attached to any trees for anchorage unless specifically authorized. The
 Contractor shall provide effective protection for land and vegetation
 resources at all times as defined in the following subparagraphs. Stone,
 soil, or other materials displaced into uncleared areas shall be removed by
 the Contractor.

3.2.1      Work Area Limits

 Prior to commencing construction activities, the Contractor shall mark the
 areas that need not be disturbed under this contract. Isolated areas within
 the general work area which are not to be disturbed shall be marked or
 fenced. Monuments and markers shall be protected before construction
 operations commence. Where construction operations are to be conducted
 during darkness, any markers shall be visible in the dark. The Contractor's
 personnel shall be knowledgeable of the purpose for marking and/or
 protecting particular objects.

3.2.2      Landscape

 Trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, land forms and other landscape features
 indicated and defined on the drawings to be preserved shall be clearly
 identified by marking, fencing, or wrapping with boards, or any other
 approved techniques. The Contractor shall restore landscape features
 damaged or destroyed during construction operations outside the limits of
 the approved work area.

3.2.3      Erosion and Sediment Controls

 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing erosion and sediment
 control measures in accordance with Federal, State, and local laws and
 regulations. The erosion and sediment controls selected and maintained by
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                   Page 96 of 463

 the Contractor shall be such that water quality standards are not violated
 as a result of the Contractor's construction activities. The area of bare
 soil exposed at any one time by construction operations should be kept to a
 minimum. The Contractor shall construct or install temporary and permanent
 erosion and sediment control best management practices (BMPs). BMPs may
 include, but not be limited to, vegetation cover, stream bank stabilization,
 slope stabilization, silt fences, construction of terraces, interceptor
 channels, sediment traps, inlet and outfall protection, diversion channels,
 and sedimentation basins. The Contractor's best management practices shall
 also be in accordance with the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination
 System (NPDES) Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) which may be
 reviewed at the Environmental Office within 15 days after Notice of Award.
 Any temporary measures shall be removed after the area has been stabilized.

3.2.4     Contractor Facilities and Work Areas

 The Contractor's field offices, staging areas, stockpile storage, and
 temporary buildings shall be placed in areas designated on the drawings or
 as directed by the Contracting Officer. Temporary movement or relocation of
 Contractor facilities shall be made only when approved. Erosion and
 sediment controls shall be provided for on-site borrow and spoil areas to
 prevent sediment from entering nearby waters. Temporary excavation and
 embankments for plant and/or work areas shall be controlled to protect
 adjacent areas.

3.3     WATER RESOURCES

 The Contractor shall monitor construction activities to prevent pollution of
 surface and ground waters. Toxic or hazardous chemicals shall not be
 applied to soil or vegetation unless otherwise indicated. All water areas
 affected by construction activities shall be monitored by the Contractor.
 For construction activities immediately adjacent to impaired surface waters,
 the Contractor shall be capable of quantifying sediment or pollutant loading
 to that surface water when required by State or Federally issued Clean Water
 Act permits.

3.4     AIR RESOURCES

 Equipment operation, activities, or processes performed by the Contractor
 shall be in accordance with all Federal and State air emission and
 performance laws and standards.

3.4.1     Particulates

 Dust particles; aerosols and gaseous by-products from construction
 activities; and processing and preparation of materials, such as from
 asphaltic batch plants; shall be controlled at all times, including
 weekends, holidays and hours when work is not in progress. The Contractor
 shall maintain excavations, stockpiles, haul roads, permanent and temporary
 access roads, plant sites, spoil areas, borrow areas, and other work areas
 within or outside the project boundaries free from particulates which would
 cause the Federal, State, and local air pollution standards to be exceeded
 or which would cause a hazard or a nuisance. Sprinkling, chemical treatment
 of an approved type, baghouse, scrubbers, electrostatic precipitators or
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                   Page 97 of 463

 other methods will be permitted to control particulates in the work area.
 Sprinkling, to be efficient, must be repeated to keep the disturbed area
 damp at all times. The Contractor must have sufficient, competent equipment
 available to accomplish these tasks. Particulate control shall be performed
 as the work proceeds and whenever a particulate nuisance or hazard occurs.
 The Contractor shall comply with all State and local visibility regulations.

3.4.2     Odors

 Odors from construction activities shall be controlled at all times. The
 odors shall not cause a health hazard and shall be in compliance with State
 regulations and/or local ordinances.

3.4.3     Sound Intrusions

 The Contractor shall keep construction activities under surveillance and
 control to minimize environment damage by noise. The Contractor shall
 comply with the provisions of the State of Puerto Rico rules.

3.5     HTRW AIR EMISSION CONTROL

 The Contractor shall implement the following control(s) to meet or exceed
 performance levels identified in HTRW PERIMETER AIR MONITORING.

3.5.1     Air Emission Control to Meet Action Levels

3.5.2     Excavation/Production/Processing Rate Reduction

3.5.3     Exposed Surface Area Reduction

3.6     CHEMICAL MATERIALS MANAGEMENT AND WASTE DISPOSAL

 Disposal of wastes shall be as directed below, unless otherwise specified in
 other sections and/or shown on the drawings.

3.6.1     Solid Wastes

 Solid wastes (excluding clearing debris) shall be placed in containers which
 are emptied on a regular schedule. Handling, storage, and disposal shall be
 conducted to prevent contamination. Segregation measures shall be employed
 so that no hazardous or toxic waste will become co-mingled with solid waste.
 The Contractor shall transport solid waste off Government property and
 dispose of it in compliance with Federal, State, and local requirements for
 solid waste disposal. A Subtitle D RCRA permitted landfill shall be the
 minimum acceptable off-site solid waste disposal option. The Contractor
 shall verify that the selected transporters and disposal facilities have the
 necessary permits and licenses to operate.

3.6.2     Chemicals and Chemical Wastes

 Chemicals shall be dispensed ensuring no spillage to the ground or water.
 Periodic inspections of dispensing areas to identify leakage and initiate
 corrective action shall be performed and documented. This documentation
 will be periodically reviewed by the Government. Chemical waste shall be
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                      Page 98 of 463

 collected in corrosion resistant, compatible containers. Collection drums
 shall be monitored and removed to a staging or storage area when contents
 are within 6 inches of the top. Wastes shall be classified, managed,
 stored, and disposed of in accordance with Federal, State, and local laws
 and regulations.

3.6.3    Contractor Generated Hazardous Wastes/Excess Hazardous Materials

 Hazardous wastes are defined in 40 CFR 261, or are as defined by applicable
 State and local regulations. Hazardous materials are defined in 49 CFR 171
 - 178. The Contractor shall, at a minimum, manage and store hazardous waste
 in compliance with 40 CFR 262 and shall manage and store hazardous waste in
 accordance with the hazardous waste management plan. The Contractor shall
 take sufficient measures to prevent spillage of hazardous and toxic
 materials during dispensing. The Contractor shall segregate hazardous waste
 from other materials and wastes, shall protect it from the weather by
 placing it in a safe covered location, and shall take precautionary measures
 such as berming or other appropriate measures against accidental spillage.
 The Contractor shall be responsible for storage, describing, packaging,
 labeling, marking, and placarding of hazardous waste and hazardous material
 in accordance with 49 CFR 171 - 178, State, and local laws and regulations.
 The Contractor shall transport Contractor generated hazardous waste off
 Government property within 60 days in accordance with the Environmental
 Protection Agency and the Department of Transportation laws and regulations.
 The Contractor shall dispose of hazardous waste in compliance with Federal,
 State and local laws and regulations. Spills of hazardous or toxic
 materials shall be immediately reported to the Contracting Officer and the
 Facility Environmental Office. Cleanup and cleanup costs due to spills
 shall be the Contractor's responsibility. The disposition of Contractor
 generated hazardous waste and excess hazardous materials are the
 Contractor's responsibility.

3.6.4    Fuel and Lubricants

 Storage, fueling and lubrication of equipment and motor vehicles shall be
 conducted in a manner that affords the maximum protection against spill and
 evaporation. Fuel, lubricants and oil shall be managed and stored in
 accordance with all Federal, State, Regional, and local laws and
 regulations. Used lubricants and used oil to be discarded shall be stored
 in marked corrosion-resistant containers and recycled or disposed in
 accordance with 40 CFR 279, State, and local laws and regulations. There
 shall be no storage of fuel on the project site. Fuel must be brought to
 the project site each day that work is performed.

3.6.5    Waste Water

 Disposal of waste water shall be as specified below.

        a.   Waste water from construction activities, such as onsite material
             processing, concrete curing, foundation and concrete clean-up,
             water used in concrete trucks, forms, etc. shall not be allowed to
             enter water ways or to be discharged prior to being treated to
             remove pollutants. The Contractor shall dispose of the
             construction related waste water off-Government property in
                                                                 W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                     Page 99 of 463

           accordance with all Federal, State, Regional and Local laws and
           regulations.

3.7   RECYCLING AND WASTE MINIMIZATION

 The Contractor shall participate in State and local government sponsored
 recycling programs. The Contractor is further encouraged to minimize solid
 waste generation throughout the duration of the project.

3.8   NON-HAZARDOUS SOLID WASTE DIVERSION REPORT

 The Contractor shall maintain an inventory of non-hazardous solid waste
 diversion and disposal of construction and demolition debris. The
 Contractor shall submit a report to the environmental Division at DPW
 through the Contracting Officer on the first working day after each fiscal
 year quarter, starting the first quarter that non-hazardous solid waste has
 been generated. The following shall be included in the report:

      a.   Construction and Demolition (C&D) Debris Disposed =   in cubic yards
           or tons, as appropriate.

      b.   Construction and Demolition (C&D) Debris Recycled = in cubic yards
           or tons, as appropriate.

      c.   Total C&D Debris Generated = in cubic yards or tons, as
           appropriate.

      d.   Waste Sent to Waste-To-Energy Incineration Plant (This amount
           should not be included in the recycled amount) = in cubic yards or
           tons, as appropriate.

3.9   HISTORICAL, ARCHAEOLOGICAL, AND CULTURAL RESOURCES

 The Contractor shall protect these resources and shall be responsible for
 their preservation during the life of the Contract. If during excavation or
 other construction activities any previously unidentified or unanticipated
 historical, archaeological, and cultural resources are discovered or found,
 all activities that may damage or alter such resources shall be temporarily
 suspended. Resources covered by this paragraph include but are not limited
 to: any human skeletal remains or burials; artifacts; shell, midden, bone,
 charcoal, or other deposits; rock or coral alignments, pavings, wall, or
 other constructed features; and any indication of agricultural or other
 human activities. Upon such discovery or find, the Contractor shall
 immediately notify the Contracting Officer so that the appropriate
 authorities may be notified and a determination made as to their
 significance and what, if any, special disposition of the finds should be
 made. The Contractor shall cease all activities that may result in impact
 to or the destruction of these resources. The Contractor shall secure the
 area and prevent employees or other persons from trespassing on, removing,
 or otherwise disturbing such resources.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 100 of 463

3.10     BIOLOGICAL RESOURCES

 The Contractor shall minimize interference with, disturbance to, and damage
 to fish, wildlife, and plants including their habitat. The Contractor shall
 be responsible for the protection of threatened and endangered animal and
 plant species including their habitat in accordance with Federal, State,
 Regional, and local laws and regulations.

3.11     INTEGRATED PEST MANAGEMENT

 In order to minimize impacts to existing fauna and flora, the Contractor,
 through the Contracting Officer, shall coordinate with the Installation Pest
 Management Coordinator (IPMC) Project Pesticide Coordinator (PPC) at the
 earliest possible time prior to pesticide application. The Contractor shall
 discuss integrated pest management strategies with the IPMC, PPC, and
 receive concurrence from the IPMC, PPC through the COR prior to the
 application of any pesticide associated with these specifications.
 Installation Project Office Pest Management personnel shall be given the
 opportunity to be present at all meetings concerning treatment measures for
 pest or disease control and during application of the pesticide. The use and
 management of pesticides are regulated under 40 CFR 152 - 186.

3.11.1     Pesticide Delivery and Storage

 Pesticides shall be delivered to the site in the original, unopened
 containers bearing legible labels indicating the EPA registration number and
 the manufacturer's registered uses. Pesticides shall be stored according to
 manufacturer's instructions and under lock and key when unattended.

3.11.2     Qualifications

 For the application of pesticides, the Contractor shall use the services of
 a subcontractor whose principal business is pest control. The subcontractor
 shall be licensed and certified in the state where the work is to be
 performed.

3.11.3     Pesticide Handling Requirements

 The Contractor shall formulate, treat with, and dispose of pesticides and
 associated containers in accordance with label directions and shall use the
 clothing and personal protective equipment specified on the labeling for use
 during all phases of the application. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
 shall be available for all pesticide products.

3.11.4     Application

 Pesticides shall be applied by a State Certified Pesticide Applicator in
 accordance with EPA label restrictions and recommendation. The Certified
 Applicator shall wear clothing and personal protective equipment as
 specified on the pesticide label. Water used for formulating shall only
 come from locations designated by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor
 shall not allow the equipment to overflow. Prior to application of
 pesticide, all equipment shall be inspected for leaks, clogging, wear, or
 damage and shall be repaired prior to being used.
                                                                 W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                    Page 101 of 463


3.12   PREVIOUSLY USED EQUIPMENT

 The Contractor shall clean all previously used construction equipment prior
 to bringing it onto the project site. The Contractor shall ensure that the
 equipment is free from soil residuals, egg deposits from plant pests,
 noxious weeds, and plant seeds. The Contractor shall consult with the USDA
 jurisdictional office for additional cleaning requirements.

3.13   MAINTENANCE OF POLLUTION FACILITIES

 The Contractor shall maintain permanent and temporary pollution control
 facilities and devices for the duration of the contract or for that length
 of time construction activities create the particular pollutant.

3.14   MILITARY MUNITIONS

 In the event the Contractor discovers or uncovers military munitions as
 defined in 40 CFR 260, the Contractor shall immediately stop work in that
 area and immediately inform the Contracting Officer.

3.15   TRAINING OF CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL

 The Contractor's personnel shall be trained in all phases of environmental
 protection and pollution control. The Contractor shall conduct
 environmental protection/pollution control meetings for all Contractor
 personnel prior to commencing construction activities. Additional meetings
 shall be conducted for new personnel and when site conditions change. The
 training and meeting agenda shall include: methods of detecting and
 avoiding pollution; familiarization with statutory and contractual pollution
 standards; installation and care of devices, vegetative covers, and
 instruments required for monitoring purposes to ensure adequate and
 continuous environmental protection/pollution control; anticipated hazardous
 or toxic chemicals or wastes, and other regulated contaminants; recognition
 and protection of archaeological sites, artifacts, wetlands, and endangered
 species and their habitat that are known to be in the area.

3.16 POST CONSTRUCTION CLEANUP

 The Contractor shall clean up all areas used for construction in accordance
 with Contract Clause: "Cleaning Up". The Contractor shall, unless otherwise
 instructed in writing by the Contracting Officer, obliterate all signs of
 temporary construction facilities such as haul roads, work area, structures,
 foundations of temporary structures, stockpiles of excess or waste
 materials, and other vestiges of construction prior to final acceptance of
 the work. The disturbed area shall be graded, filled and the entire area
 seeded unless otherwise indicated.

                       *    *   *   END OF SECTION   *   *   *
                                                                        W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                     0001
                                                                           Page 102 of 463

                                       SECTION 01 58 00

                                  PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
PART 1        GENERAL

1.1      REFERENCES

 The publication listed below form a part of this specification to the extent
 referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic
 designation only.

              AMERICAN WOOD-PRESERVERS' ASSOCIATION (AWPA)

 AWPA C1                                 (1996) All Timber Products - Preservative
                                         Treatment by Pressure Processes

 AWPA C2                                 (1996) Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine
                                         Ties - Preservative Treatment by Pressure
                                         Processes

1.2      PROJECT SIGN

Within 15 days after the Notice of Award provide one project identification
sign at the location designated. Construct the sign in accordance with
project sign detail attached at the end of this section. Maintain sign
throughout the life of the project. Upon completion of the project, remove
the sign from the site.

 A project identification signboard shall be provided in accordance with
 attached drawing. The signboard shall be provided at a conspicuous location
 on the job site where directed by the Contracting Officer.

         a.    The field of the sign shall consist of a 3 by 4 foot sheet of grade
               B-B medium density overlaid exterior plywood.

         b.    Lumber shall be B or Better Southern pine, pressure-preservative
               treated in accordance with AWPA C1 and AWPA C2. Nails shall be
               aluminum or galvanized steel.

         c.    The entire signboard and supports shall be given one coat of
               exterior alkyd primer and two coats of exterior alkyd enamel paint.
               The lettering and sign work shall be performed by a skilled sign
               painter using paint known in the trade as bulletin colors. The
               colors, lettering sizes, and lettering styles shall be as
               indicated. Where preservative-treated lumber is required, utilize
               only cured pressure-treated wood which has had the chemicals
               leached from the surface of the wood prior to painting.

PART 2        PRODUCTS   --- NOT USED.

PART 3        EXECUTION --- NOT USED.

                                 ***     END OF SECTION   ***
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 103 of 463

                                 SECTION 02 41 00

                                    DEMOLITION

PART 1      GENERAL

1.1      REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic
 designation only.

           U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)

 EM 385-1-1                        (1996) U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Safety
                                   and Health Requirements Manual

1.2      GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

 The work includes demolition, salvage of identified items and materials, and
 removal of resulting rubbish and debris. Rubbish and debris shall be
 removed from Government property daily, unless otherwise directed, to avoid
 accumulation at the demolition site. Materials that cannot be removed daily
 shall be stored in areas specified by the Contracting Officer. In the
 interest of occupational safety and health, the work shall be performed in
 accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 23, Demolition, and other applicable
 Sections.

1.3      SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that
 will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
 submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

         SD-03 Product Data

             Work Plan; G.

               The procedures proposed for the accomplishment of the work. The
             procedures shall provide for safe conduct of the work, including
             procedures and methods to provide necessary supports, lateral
             bracing and shoring when required, careful removal and disposition
             of materials specified to be salvaged, protection of property which
             is to remain undisturbed, coordination with other work in progress,
             and timely disconnection of utility services. The procedures shall
             include a detailed description of the methods and equipment to be
             used for each operation, and the sequence of operations in
             accordance with EM 385-1-1.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 104 of 463

1.4     DUST CONTROL

 The amount of dust resulting from demolition shall be controlled to prevent
 the spread of dust to occupied portions of the construction site and to
 avoid creation of a nuisance in the surrounding area. Use of water will not
 be permitted when it will result in, or create, hazardous or objectionable
 conditions such as pollution.

1.5     PROTECTION

1.5.1     Protection of Personnel

 During the demolition work the Contractor shall continuously evaluate the
 condition of the structure being demolished and take immediate action to
 protect all personnel working in and around the demolition site. No area,
 section, or component of floors, roofs, walls, columns, pilasters, or other
 structural element will be allowed to be left standing without sufficient
 bracing, shoring, or lateral support to prevent collapse or failure while
 workmen remove debris or perform other work in the immediate area.

1.5.2     Protection of Structures

 Floors, roofs, walls, columns, pilasters, and other structural components
 that are designed and constructed to stand without lateral support or
 shoring, and are determined to be in stable condition, shall remain standing
 without additional bracing, shoring, of lateral support until demolished,
 unless directed otherwise by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall
 ensure that no elements determined to be unstable are left unsupported and
 shall be responsible for placing and securing bracing, shoring, or lateral
 supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, or
 demolition work performed under this contract.

1.5.3     Protection of Existing Property

 Before beginning any demolition work, the Contractor shall survey the site
 and examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the
 work. The Contractor shall take necessary precautions to avoid damage to
 existing items to remain in place, to be reused, or to remain the property
 of the Government; any damaged items shall be repaired or replaced as
 approved by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall coordinate the
 work of this section with all other work and shall construct and maintain
 shoring, bracing, and supports as required. The Contractor shall ensure
 that structural elements are not overloaded and shall be responsible for
 increasing structural supports or adding new supports as may be required as
 a result of any cutting, removal, or demolition work performed under this
 contract.

1.5.4     Protection From the Weather

 The interior of buildings to remain; salvageable materials and equipment
 shall be protected from the weather at all times.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 105 of 463

1.5.5      Protection of Trees

 Trees within the project site which might be damaged during demolition, and
 which are indicated to be left in place, shall be protected. Any tree
 designated to remain that is damaged during the work under this contract
 shall be replaced in kind or as approved by the Contracting Officer.

1.5.6      Environmental Protection

 The work shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 57 20.0010
 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION.

1.6      BURNING

 The use of burning at the project site for the disposal of refuse and debris
 will not be permitted.

1.7      USE OF EXPLOSIVES

 Use of explosives will not be permitted.

PART 2      PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)

PART 3      EXECUTION

3.1      EXISTING STRUCTURES

 Existing structures and items shall be removed as indicated in each delivery
 order.

3.2      UTILITIES

 Disconnect utility services, with related meters and equipment, that are
 related to the demolition. Existing utilities shall be removed as
 indicated. When utility lines are encountered that are not indicated on the
 drawings, the Contracting Officer shall be notified prior to further work in
 that area.

3.3     DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL

 Title to material and equipment to be demolished, except Government salvage
 and historical items, is vested in the Contractor upon receipt of notice to
 proceed. The Government will not be responsible for the condition, loss or
 damage to such property after notice to proceed.

3.3.1      Salvageable Items and Material

 Contractor shall salvage items and material to the maximum extent possible.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 106 of 463

3.3.1.1     Material Salvaged for the Contractor

 Material salvaged for the Contractor shall be removed from Government
 property daily. Material salvaged for the Contractor shall not be sold on
 the site.

3.3.1.2     Items Salvaged for the Government

 Salvaged items to remain the property of the Government shall be removed in
 a manner to prevent damage, and packed or crated to protect the items from
 damage while in storage or during shipment. Items damaged during removal or
 storage shall be repaired or replaced to match existing items. Containers
 shall be properly identified as to contents. The items reserved as property
 of the Government shall be delivered to the Supply Division at the
 Directorate of Public Works.

3.3.1.3     Items Salvaged for the Using Service

 The items reserved as property of the using service shall be removed prior
 to commencement of work under this contract.

3.3.1.4     Historical Items

 Historical items shall be removed in a manner to prevent damage and deliver
 to the Government.

3.3.2     Unsalvageable Material

 Noncombustible material, shall be disposed off the Post. Combustible
 material shall be disposed off the Post.

3.4     CLEAN UP

 Debris shall be removed and transported in a manner that prevents spillage
 on streets or adjacent areas. Local regulations regarding hauling and
 disposal shall apply.


                               *** END OF SECTION ***
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 107 of 463


                                 SECTION 02 82 13

                                ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
PART 1      GENERAL

1.1      REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic
 designation only.

           AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

 ANSI Z9.2                         (1979; R 1991) Fundamentals Governing the
                                   Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems

 ANSI Z87.1                        (1989; Errata; Z87.1a) Occupational and
                                   Educational Eye and Face Protection

 ANSI Z88.2                        (1992) Respiratory Protection

           AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

 ASTM C 732                        (1995) Aging Effects of Artificial Weathering
                                   on Latex Sealants

 ASTM D 522                        (1993a) Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic
                                   Coatings

 ASTM D 1331                       (1989; R 1995) Surface and Interfacial
                                   Tension of Solutions of Surface-Active Agents

 ASTM D 2794                       (1993; R 1999el) Resistance of Organic
                                   Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation
                                   (Impact)

 ASTM D 4397                       (1996) Polyethylene Sheeting for
                                   Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural
                                   Applications

 ASTM E 84                         (2000a) Surface Burning Characteristics of
                                   Building Materials

 ASTM E 96                         (2000) Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

 ASTM E 119                        (2000) Fire Tests of Building Construction
                                   and Materials

 ASTM E 736                        (1992) Cohesion/Adhesion of Sprayed Fire-
                                   Resistive Materials Applied to Structural
                                   Members
                                                             W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                          0001
                                                                Page 108 of 463


ASTM E 1368                   (2000) Visual Inspection of Asbestos
                              Abatement Projects

      U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

29 CFR 1910                   Occupational Safety and Health Standards

29 CFR 1926                   Safety and Health Regulations for
                              Construction

40 CFR 61                     National Emissions Standards for Hazardous
                              Air Pollutants

40 CFR 763                    Asbestos

42 CFR 84                     Approval of Respiratory Protective Devices

49 CFR 107                    Hazardous Materials Program Procedures

49 CFR 171                    General Information, Regulations and
                              Definitions

49 CFR 172                    Hazardous Materials Table, Special
                              Provisions, Hazardous Materials
                              Communications, Emergency Response
                              Information, and Training Requirements

49 CFR 173                    Shippers - General Requirements for Shipments
                              and Packagings

      COMPRESSED GAS ASSOCIATION (CGA)

CGA G-7                       (1990) Compressed Air for Human Respiration

CGA G-7.1                     (1997) Commodity Specification for Air

      U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)

EM 385-1-1                    (1996) U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Safety
                              and Health Requirements Manual

      ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)

EPA 340/1-90/018              (1990) Asbestos/NESHAP Regulated Asbestos
                              Containing Materials Guidance

EPA 340/1-90/019              (1990) Asbestos/NESHAP Adequately Wet
                              Guidance

EPA 560/5-85-024              (1985) Guidance for Controlling Asbestos-
                              Containing Materials in Buildings
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                     Page 109 of 463


           NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

 NFPA 701                          (1999) Methods of Fire Tests for Flame-
                                   Resistant Textiles and Films

           NATIONAL INSTITUTE FOR OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH (NIOSH)

 NIOSH Pub No. 84-100              (1984; Supple 1985, 1987, 1988 & 1990) NIOSH
                                   Manual of Analytical Methods

           UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

 UL 586                            (1996; Rev thru Aug 1999) High-Efficiency,
                                   Particulate, Air Filter Units

1.2   DEFINITIONS

      a.    Adequately Wet: A term defined in 40 CFR 61, Subpart M, and EPA
            340/1-90/019 meaning to sufficiently mix or penetrate with liquid
            to prevent the release of particulate. If visible emissions are
            observed coming from asbestos-containing material (ACM), then that
            material has not been adequately wetted. However, the absence of
            visible emissions is not sufficient evidence of being adequately
            wetted.

      b.    Aggressive Method: Removal or disturbance of building material by
            sanding, abrading, grinding, or other method that breaks, crumbles,
            or disintegrates intact asbestos-containing material (ACM).

      c.    Amended Water: Water containing a wetting agent or surfactant with
            a surface tension of at least 29 dynes per square centimeter when
            tested in accordance with ASTM D 1331.

      d.    Asbestos: Asbestos includes chrysotile, amosite, crocidolite,
            tremolite asbestos, anthophylite asbestos, actinolite asbestos, and
            any of these minerals that have been chemically treated and/or
            altered.

      e.    Asbestos-Containing Material (ACM):   Any materials containing more
            than one percent asbestos.

      f.    Asbestos Fiber: A particulate form of asbestos, 5 micrometers or
            longer, with a length-to-width ratio of at least 3 to 1.

      g.    Authorized Person: Any person authorized by the Contractor and
            required by work duties to be present in the regulated areas.

      h.    Building Inspector: Individual who inspects buildings for asbestos
            and has EPA Model Accreditation Plan (MAP) "Building Inspector"
            training; accreditation required by 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix
            C.
                                                           W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                        0001
                                                              Page 110 of 463

i.   Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH): An Industrial Hygienist
     certified in the practice of industrial hygiene by the American
     Board of Industrial Hygiene.

j.   Class I Asbestos Work: Activities defined by OSHA involving the
     removal of thermal system insulation (TSI) and surfacing ACM.

k.   Class II Asbestos Work: Activities defined by OSHA involving the
     removal of ACM which is not thermal system insulation or surfacing
     material. This includes, but is not limited to, the removal of
     asbestos - containing wallboard, floor tile and sheeting, roofing
     and siding shingles, and construction mastic. Certain "incidental"
     roofing materials such as mastic, flashing and cements when they
     are still intact are excluded from Class II asbestos work. Removal
     of small amounts of these materials which would fit into a glovebag
     may be classified as a Class III job.

l.   Class III Asbestos Work: Activities defined by OSHA that involve
     repair and maintenance operations, where ACM, including TSI and
     surfacing ACM, is likely to be disturbed. Operations may include
     drilling, abrading, cutting a hole, cable pulling, crawling through
     tunnels or attics and spaces above the ceiling, where asbestos is
     actively disturbed or asbestos-containing debris is actively
     disturbed.

m.   Class IV Asbestos Work: Maintenance and custodial construction
     activities during which employees contact but do not disturb ACM
     and activities to clean-up dust, waste and debris resulting from
     Class I, II, and III activities. This may include dusting surfaces
     where ACM waste and debris and accompanying dust exists and
     cleaning up loose ACM debris from TSI or surfacing ACM following
     construction.

n.   Clean room: An uncontaminated room having facilities for the
     storage of employees' street clothing and uncontaminated materials
     and equipment.

o.   Competent Person: In addition to the definition in 29 CFR 1926,
     Section .32(f), a person who is capable of identifying existing
     asbestos hazards as defined in 29 CFR 1926, Section .1101,
     selecting the appropriate control strategy, has the authority to
     take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them and has EPA Model
     Accreditation Plan (MAP) "Contractor/Supervisor" training;
     accreditation required by 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix C.

p.   Contractor/Supervisor: Individual who supervises asbestos
     abatement work and has EPA Model Accreditation Plan
     "Contractor/Supervisor" training; accreditation required by 40 CFR
     763, Subpart E, Appendix C.

q.   Critical Barrier: One or more layers of plastic sealed over all
     openings into a regulated area or any other similarly placed
     physical barrier sufficient to prevent airborne asbestos in a
     regulated area from migrating to an adjacent area.
                                                            W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                         0001
                                                               Page 111 of 463


r.    Decontamination Area: An enclosed area adjacent and connected to
      the regulated area and consisting of an equipment room, shower
      area, and clean room, which is used for the decontamination of
      workers, materials, and equipment that are contaminated with
      asbestos.

s.    Demolition: The wrecking or taking out of any load-supporting
      structural member and any related razing, removing, or stripping of
      asbestos products.

t.    Disposal Bag: A 6 mil thick, leak-tight plastic bag, pre-labeled
      in accordance with 29 CFR 1926, Section .1101, used for
      transporting asbestos waste from containment to disposal site.

u.    Disturbance: Activities that disrupt the matrix of ACM, crumble or
      pulverize ACM, or generate visible debris from ACM. Disturbance
      includes cutting away small amounts of ACM, no greater than the
      amount which can be contained in 1 standard sized glovebag or waste
      bag, not larger than 60 inches in length and width in order to
      access a building component.

v.    Equipment Room or Area: An area adjacent to the regulated area
      used for the decontamination of employees and their equipment.

w.    Employee Exposure: That exposure to airborne asbestos that would
      occur if the employee were not using respiratory protective
      equipment.

x.    Fiber: A fibrous particulate, 5 micrometers or longer, with a
      length to width ratio of at least 3 to 1.

y.    Friable ACM: A term defined in 40 CFR 61, Subpart M and EPA 340/1-
      90/018 meaning any material which contains more than 1 percent
      asbestos, as determined using the method specified in 40 CFR 763,
      Subpart E, Appendix A, Section 1, Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM),
      that when dry, can be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by
      hand pressure. If the asbestos content is less than 10 percent, as
      determined by a method other than point counting by PLM, the
      asbestos content is verified by point counting using PLM.

z.    Glovebag: Not more than a 60 by 60 inch impervious plastic bag-
      like enclosure affixed around an asbestos-containing material, with
      glove-like appendages through which material and tools may be
      handled.

aa.    High-Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) Filter: A filter capable
      of trapping and retaining at least 99.97 percent of all mono-
      dispersed particles of 0.3 micrometers in diameter.

bb.    Homogeneous Area: An area of surfacing material or thermal system
      insulation that is uniform in color and texture.
                                                            W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                         0001
                                                               Page 112 of 463

cc.    Industrial Hygienist: A professional qualified by education,
      training, and experience to anticipate, recognize, evaluate, and
      develop controls for occupational health hazards.

dd.    Intact: ACM which has not crumbled, been pulverized, or otherwise
      deteriorated so that the asbestos is no longer likely to be bound
      with its matrix. Removal of "intact" asphaltic, resinous,
      cementitious products does not render the ACM non-intact simply by
      being separated into smaller pieces.

ee.    Model Accreditation Plan (MAP): USEPA training accreditation
      requirements for persons who work with asbestos as specified in 40
      CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix C.

ff.    Modification: A changed or altered procedure, material or
      component of a control system, which replaces a procedure, material
      or component of a required system.

gg.    Negative Exposure Assessment: A demonstration by the Contractor
      to show that employee exposure during an operation is expected to
      be consistently below the OSHA Permissible Exposure Limits (PELs).

hh.    NESHAP: National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants.
      The USEPA NESHAP regulation for asbestos is at 40 CFR 61, Subpart
      M.

ii.    Nonfriable ACM: A NESHAP term defined in 40 CFR 61, Subpart M and
      EPA 340/1-90/018 meaning any material containing more than 1
      percent asbestos, as determined using the method specified in 40
      CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix A, Section 1, Polarized Light
      Microscopy, that, when dry, cannot be crumbled, pulverized or
      reduced to powder by hand pressure.

jj.    Nonfriable ACM (Category I): A NESHAP term defined in 40 CFR 61,
      Subpart E and EPA 340/1-90/018 meaning asbestos-containing
      packings, gaskets, resilient floor covering, and asphalt roofing
      products containing more than 1 percent asbestos as determined
      using the method specified in 40 CFR 763, Subpart F, Appendix A,
      Section 1, Polarized Light Microscopy.

kk.    Nonfriable ACM (Category II): A NESHAP term defined in 40 CFR 61,
      Subpart E and EPA 340/1-90/018 meaning any material, excluding
      Category I nonfriable ACM, containing more than 1 percent asbestos,
      as determined using the methods specified in 40 CFR 763, Subpart F,
      Appendix A, Section 1, Polarized Light Microscopy, that when dry,
      cannot be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand
      pressure.

ll.    Permissible Exposure Limits (PELs):

      (1) PEL-Time weighted average(TWA): Concentration of asbestos not
      in excess of 0.1 fibers per cubic centimeter of air (f/cc) as an 8
      hour time weighted average (TWA), as determined by the method
                                                            W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                         0001
                                                               Page 113 of 463

      prescribed in 29 CFR 1926, Section .1101, Appendix A, or the
      current version of NIOSH Pub No. 84-100 analytical method 7400.

      (2) PEL-Excursion Limit: An airborne concentration of asbestos
      not in excess of 1.0 f/cc of air as averaged over a sampling period
      of 30 minutes as determined by the method prescribed in 29 CFR
      1926, Section .1101, Appendix A, or the current version of NIOSH
      Pub No. 84-100 analytical method 7400.

mm.    Regulated Area: An OSHA term defined in 29 CFR 1926, Section
      .1101 meaning an area established by the Contractor to demarcate
      areas where Class I, II, and III asbestos work is conducted; also
      any adjoining area where debris and waste from such asbestos work
      accumulate; and an area within which airborne concentrations of
      asbestos exceed, or there is a reasonable possibility they may
      exceed, the permissible exposure limit.

nn.    Removal: All operations where ACM is taken out or stripped from
      structures or substrates, and includes demolition operations.

oo.    Repair: Overhauling, rebuilding, reconstructing, or
      reconditioning of structures or substrates, including encapsulation
      or other repair of ACM attached to structures or substrates. If
      the amount of asbestos so "disturbed" cannot be contained in 1
      standard glovebag or waste bag, Class I precautions are required.

pp.    Spills/Emergency Cleanups: Cleanup of sizable amounts of asbestos
      waste and debris which has occurred, for example, when water damage
      occurs in a building, and sizable amounts of ACM are dislodged. A
      Competent Person evaluates the site and ACM to be handled, and
      based on the type, condition and extent of the dislodged material,
      classifies the cleanup as Class I, II, or III. Only if the
      material was intact and the cleanup involves mere contact of ACM,
      rather than disturbance, could there be a Class IV classification.

qq.    Surfacing ACM: Asbestos-containing material which contains more
      than 1% asbestos and is sprayed-on, troweled-on, or otherwise
      applied to surfaces, such as acoustical plaster on ceilings and
      fireproofing materials on structural members, or other materials on
      surfaces for acoustical, fireproofing, or other purposes.

rr.    Thermal system insulation (TSI) ACM: ACM which contains more than
      1% asbestos and is applied to pipes, fittings, boilers, breeching,
      tanks, ducts, or other interior structural components to prevent
      heat loss or gain or water condensation.

ss.    Transite:   A generic name for asbestos cement wallboard and pipe.

tt.    Worker: Individual (not designated as the Competent Person or a
      supervisor) who performs asbestos work and has completed asbestos
      worker training required by 29 CFR 1926, Section .1101, to include
      EPA Model Accreditation Plan (MAP) "Worker" training; accreditation
      required by 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix C, if required by the
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                     Page 114 of 463

            OSHA Class of work to be performed or by the state where the work
            is to be performed.

1.3     DESCRIPTION OF WORK

 The work covered by this section includes the removal, encapsulation,
 encasement, enclosure, repair of asbestos-containing materials (ACM) which
 are encountered during demolition, alteration, maintenance, renovation
 spill/emergency cleanup, housekeeping activities associated with this
 project and describes procedures and equipment required to protect workers
 and occupants of the regulated area from contact with airborne asbestos
 fibers and ACM dust and debris. Activities include OSHA Class I, Class II,
 Class III and Class IV work operations involving ACM. The work also
 includes containment, storage, transportation and disposal of the generated
 ACM wastes. More specific operational procedures shall be detailed in the
 required Accident Prevention Plan and its subcomponents, the Asbestos Hazard
 Abatement Plan and Activity Hazard Analyses required in paragraph SAFETY AND
 HEALTH PROGRAM AND PLANS.

1.3.1     Abatement Work Tasks

 The specific ACM to be abated is identified on the detailed plans and
 project drawings. A summary of work task data elements for each individual
 ACM abatement work task to include the appropriate RESPONSE ACTION DETAIL
 SHEET (item to be abated and methods to be used) and SET-UP DETAIL SHEETS
 (containment techniques to include safety precautions and methods) is
 included in Table 1, "Individual Work Task Data Elements" at the end of this
 section.

1.3.2     Unexpected Discovery of Asbestos

 For any previously untested building components suspected to contain
 asbestos and located in areas impacted by the work, the Contractor shall
 notify the Contracting Officer (CO) who will have the option of ordering up
 to 6 bulk samples to be obtained at the Contractor's expense and delivered
 to a laboratory accredited under the National Institute of Standards and
 Technology (NIST) "National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program
 (NVLAP)" and analyzed by PLM at no additional cost to the Government. Any
 additional components identified as ACM that have been approved by the
 Contracting Officer for removal shall be removed by the Contractor and will
 be paid for by an equitable adjustment to the contract price under the
 CONTRACT CLAUSE titled "changes". Sampling activities undertaken to
 determine the presence of additional ACM shall be conducted by personnel who
 have successfully completed the EPA Model Accreditation Plan (MAP) "Building
 Inspector" training course required by 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix C.

1.4     SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that
 will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
 submitted in accordance with Section 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
                                                             W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                          0001
                                                                Page 115 of 463

SD-03 Product Data

    Respiratory Protection Program; G.

         Records of the respirator program.

    Cleanup and Disposal; G.

      Waste shipment records. Weigh bills and delivery tickets shall
    be furnished for information only.

    Detailed Drawings; G.

      Descriptions, detail project drawings, and site layout to include
    worksite containment area techniques as prescribed on applicable
    SET-UP DETAIL SHEETS, local exhaust ventilation system locations,
    decontamination units and load-out units, other temporary waste
    storage facility, access tunnels, location of temporary utilities
    (electrical, water, sewer) and boundaries of each regulated area.

    Materials and Equipment; G.

      Manufacturer's catalog data for all materials and equipment to be
    used in the work, including brand name, model, capacity,
    performance characteristics and any other pertinent information.
    Test results and certificates from the manufacturer of encapsulants
    substantiating compliance with performance requirements of this
    specification.        Material Safety Data Sheets for all chemicals
    to be used onsite in the same format as implemented in the
    Contractor's HAZARD COMMUNICATION PROGRAM. Data shall include, but
    shall not be limited to, the following items:

    a.     High Efficiency Filtered Air (HEPA) local exhaust equipment

    b.     Vacuum cleaning equipment

    c.     Pressure differential monitor for HEPA local exhaust equipment

    d.     Air monitoring equipment

    e.     Respirators

    f.     Personal protective clothing and equipment

        (1) Coveralls
        (2) Underclothing
        (3) Other work clothing
        (4) Foot coverings
        (5) Hard hats
        (6) Eye protection
        (7) Other items required and approved by Contractors
    Designated IH and Competent Person
                                                         W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                      0001
                                                            Page 116 of 463

g.     Glovebag

h.     Duct Tape

i.     Disposal Containers

       (1)   Disposal bags
       (2)   Fiberboard drums
       (3)   Paperboard boxes

j.     Sheet Plastic

       (1)   Polyethylene Sheet - General
       (2)   Polyethylene Sheet - Flame Resistant
       (3)   Polyethylene Sheet - Reinforced

k.     Wetting Agent

       (1)   Amended Water
       (2)   Removal encapsulant

l.     Strippable Coating

m.     Prefabricated Decontamination Unit

n.     Other items

o.     Chemical encapsulant

p.     Chemical encasement materials

q.     Material Safety Data Sheets (for all chemicals proposed)

Qualifications; G.

A written report providing evidence of qualifications for
personnel, facilities and equipment assigned to the work.

Training Program; G.

  A copy of the written project site-specific training material as
indicated in 29 CFR 1926, Section .1101 that will be used to train
onsite employees. The training document shall be signed by the
Contractor's Designated IH and Competent Person.

Medical Requirements; G.

     Physician's written opinion.

Encapsulants; G.
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 117 of 463

              Certificates stating that encapsulants meet the applicable
            specified performance requirements.

        SD-06 Test Reports

            Exposure Assessment and Air Monitoring; G.

              Initial exposure assessments, negative exposure assessments, air-
            monitoring results and documentation.


 Local Exhaust Ventilation; G.

              Pressure differential recordings.

            Licenses, Permits and Notifications; G.

            Licenses, permits, and notifications.

        SD-07 Certificates

            Vacuum, Filtration and Ventilation

            Equipment; G.

              Manufacturer's certifications showing compliance with ANSI Z9.2
            for:

              a.   Vacuums.

              b.   Water filtration equipment.

              c.   Ventilation equipment.

              d.   Other equipment required to contain airborne asbestos fibers.

1.5     QUALIFICATIONS

1.5.1     Written Qualifications and Organization Report

 The Contractor shall furnish a written qualifications and organization
 report providing evidence of qualifications of the Contractor, Contractor's
 Project Supervisor, Designated Competent Person, supervisors and workers;
 Designated IH (person assigned to project and firm name); independent
 testing laboratory (including name of firm, principal, and analysts who will
 perform analyses); all subcontractors to be used including disposal
 transportation and disposal facility firms, subcontractor supervisors,
 subcontractor workers; and any others assigned to perform asbestos abatement
 and support activities. The report shall include an organization chart
 showing the Contractor's staff organization for this project by name and
 title, chain of command and reporting relationship with all subcontractors.
 The report shall be signed by the Contractor, the Contractor's onsite
 project manager, Designated Competent Person, Designated IH, designated
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 118 of 463

 testing laboratory and the principals of all subcontractors to be used. The
 Contractor shall include the following statement in the report: "By signing
 this report I certify that the personnel I am responsible for during the
 course of this project fully understand the contents of 29 CFR 1926, Section
 .1101, 40 CFR 61, Subpart M, and the federal, state and local requirements
 specified in paragraph SAFETY AND HEALTH PROGRAM AND PLANS for those
 asbestos abatement activities that they will be involved in."

1.5.2    Specific Requirements

 The Contractor shall designate in writing, personnel meeting the following
 qualifications:

        a.   Designated Competent Person: The name, address, telephone number,
             and resume of the Contractor's Designated Competent Person shall be
             provided. Evidence that the full-time Designated Competent Person
             is qualified in accordance with 29 CFR 1926, Sections .32 and
             .1101, has EPA Model Accreditation Plan (MAP)
             "Contractor/Supervisor" training accreditation required by 40 CFR
             763, Subpart E, Appendix C, and is experienced in the
             administration and supervision of asbestos abatement projects,
             including exposure assessment and monitoring, work practices,
             abatement methods, protective measures for personnel, setting up
             and inspecting asbestos abatement work areas, evaluating the
             integrity of containment barriers, placement and operation of local
             exhaust systems, ACM generated waste containment and disposal
             procedures, decontamination units installation and maintenance
             requirements, site safety and health requirements, notification of
             other employees onsite, etc. The duties of the Competent Person
             shall include the following: controlling entry to and exit from
             the regulated area; supervising any employee exposure monitoring
             required by 29 CFR 1926, Section .1101; ensuring that all employees
             working within a regulated area wear the appropriate personal
             protective equipment (PPE), are trained in the use of appropriate
             methods of exposure control, and use the hygiene facilities and
             decontamination procedures specified; and ensuring that engineering
             controls in use are in proper operating conditions and are
             functioning properly. The Designated Competent Person shall be
             responsible for compliance with applicable federal, state and local
             requirements, the Contractor's Accident Prevention Plan and
             Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan. The Designated Competent Person
             shall provide, and the Contractor shall submit, the
             "Contractor/Supervisor" course completion certificate and the most
             recent certificate for required refresher training with the
             employee "Certificate of Worker Acknowledgment" required by this
             paragraph. The Contractor shall submit evidence that this person
             has a minimum of 3 years of on-the-job asbestos abatement
             experience relevant to OSHA competent person requirements. The
             Designated Competent Person shall be onsite at all times during the
             conduct of this project.

             b. Project and Other Supervisors: The Contractor shall provide
             the name, address, telephone number, and resume of the Project
             Supervisor and other supervisors who have responsibility to
             implement the Accident Prevention Plan, including the Asbestos
                                                           W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                        0001
                                                              Page 119 of 463

     Hazard Abatement Plan and Activity Hazard Analyses, the authority
     to direct work performed under this contract and verify compliance,
     and have EPA Model Accreditation Plan (MAP) "Contractor/Supervisor"
     training accreditation required by 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix
     C. The Project Supervisor and other supervisors shall provide, and
     the Contractor shall submit, the "Contractor/Supervisor" course
     completion certificate and the most recent certificate for required
     refresher training with the employee "Certificate of Worker
     Acknowledgment" required by this paragraph. The Contractor shall
     submit evidence that the Project Supervisor has a minimum of 2
     years of on-the-job asbestos abatement experience relevant to
     project supervisor responsibilities and the other supervisors have
     a minimum of 2 years on-the-job asbestos abatement experience
     commensurate with the responsibilities they will have on this
     project.

     c. Designated Industrial Hygienist: The Contractor shall provide
     the name, address, telephone number, resume and other information
     specified below for the Industrial Hygienist (IH) selected to
     prepare the Contractor's Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan, prepare
     and perform training, direct air monitoring and assist the
     Contractor's Competent Person in implementing and ensuring that
     safety and health requirements are complied with during the
     performance of all required work. The Designated IH shall be a
     person who is board certified in the practice of industrial hygiene
     as determined and documented by the American Board of Industrial
     Hygiene (ABIH), has EPA Model Accreditation Plan (MAP)
     "Contractor/Supervisor" training accreditation required by 40 CFR
     763, Subpart E, Appendix C, and has a minimum of 3 years of
     comprehensive experience in planning and overseeing asbestos
     abatement activities. The Designated IH shall provide, and the
     Contractor shall submit, the "Contractor/Supervisor" course
     completion certificate and the most recent certificate for required
     refresher training with the employee "Certificate of Worker
     Acknowledgment" required by this paragraph. The Designated IH
     shall be completely independent from the Contractor according to
     federal, state, or local regulations; that is, shall not be a
     Contractor's employee or be an employee or principal of a firm in a
     business relationship with the Contractor negating such independent
     status. A copy of the Designated IH's current valid ABIH
     certification shall be included. The Designated IH shall be onsite
     at all times for the duration of asbestos activities and shall be
     available for emergencies. In addition, the Designated IH shall
     prepare, and the Contractor shall submit, the name, address,
     telephone numbers and resumes of additional IH's and industrial
     hygiene technicians (IHT) who will be assisting the Designated IH
     in performing onsite tasks. IHs and IHTs supporting the Designated
     IH shall have a minimum of 2 years of practical onsite asbestos
     abatement experience. The formal reporting relationship between
     the Designated IH and the support IHs and IHTs, the Designated
     Competent Person, and the Contractor shall be indicated.

d.   Asbestos Abatement Workers: Asbestos abatement workers shall meet
     the requirements contained in 29 CFR 1926, Section .1101, 40 CFR
     61, Subpart M, and other applicable federal, state and local
                                                           W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                        0001
                                                              Page 120 of 463

     requirements. Worker training documentation shall be provided as
     required on the "Certificate of Workers Acknowledgment" in this
     paragraph.

e.   Worker Training and Certification of Worker Acknowledgment:
     Training documentation will be required for each employee who will
     perform OSHA Class I, Class II, Class III, or Class IV
     asbestos abatement operations. Such documentation shall be
     submitted on a Contractor generated form titled "Certificate of
     Workers Acknowledgment", to be completed for each employee in the
     same format and containing the same information as the example
     certificate at the end of this section. Training course completion
     certificates (initial and most recent update refresher) required by
     the information checked on the form shall be attached.

f.   Physician: The Contractor shall provide the name, medical
     qualifications, address, telephone number and resume of the
     physician who will or has performed the medical examinations and
     evaluations of the persons who will conduct the asbestos abatement
     work tasks. The physician shall be currently licensed by the state
     where the workers will be or have been examined, have expertise in
     pneumoconiosis and shall be responsible for the determination of
     medical surveillance protocols and for review of examination/test
     results performed in compliance with 29 CFR 1926, Section .1101 and
     paragraph MEDICAL REQUIREMENTS. The physician shall be familiar
     with the site's hazards and the scope of this project.

g.   First Aid and CPR Trained Persons: The names of at least 2 persons
     who are currently trained in first aid and CPR by the American Red
     Cross or other approved agency shall be designated and shall be
     onsite at all times during site operations. They shall be trained
     in universal precautions and the use of PPE as described in the
     Bloodborne Pathogens Standard of 29 CFR 1910, Section .1030 and
     shall be included in the Contractor's Bloodborne Pathogen Program.
     These persons may perform other duties but shall be immediately
     available to render first aid when needed. A copy of each
     designated person's current valid First Aid and CPR certificate
     shall be provided.

h.   Independent Testing Laboratory: The Contractor shall provide the
     name, address and telephone number of the independent testing
     laboratory selected to perform the sample analyses and report the
     results. The testing laboratory shall be completely independent
     from the Contractor as recognized by federal, state or local
     regulations. Written verification of the following criteria,
     signed by the testing laboratory principal and the Contractor,
     shall be submitted:

     (1) Phase contrast microscopy (PCM): The laboratory is fully
     equipped and proficient in conducting PCM of airborne samples using
     the methods specified by 29 CFR 1926, Section .1101, OSHA method
     ID-160, the most current version of NIOSH Pub No. 84-100 Method
     7400, and NIOSH Pub No. 84-100 Method 7402, transmission electron
     microscopy (TEM); the laboratory is currently judged proficient
     (classified as acceptable) in counting airborne asbestos samples by
                                                           W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                        0001
                                                              Page 121 of 463

     PCM by successful participation in each of the last 4 rounds in the
     American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) Proficiency
     Analytical Testing (PAT) Program; the names of the selected
     microscopists who will analyze airborne samples by PCM with
     verified documentation of their proficiency to conduct PCM analyses
     by being judged proficient in counting samples as current
     participating analysts in the AIHA PAT Program, and having
     successfully completed the Asbestos Sampling and Analysis course
     (NIOSH 582 or equivalent) with a copy of course completion
     certificate provided; when the PCM analysis is to be conducted
     onsite, documentation shall be provided certifying that the onsite
     analyst meets the same requirements.

     (2) Polarized light microscopy (PLM): The laboratory is fully
     equipped and proficient in conducting PLM analyses of suspect ACM
     bulk samples in accordance with 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix E;
     the laboratory is currently accredited by NIST under the NVLAP for
     bulk asbestos analysis and will use analysts (names shall be
     provided) with demonstrated proficiency to conduct PLM to include
     its application to the identification and quantification of
     asbestos content.

     (3) Transmission electron microscopy (TEM): The laboratory is
     [fully equipped and proficient in conducting TEM analysis of
     airborne samples using the mandatory method specified by 40 CFR
     763, Subpart E, Appendix E; the laboratory is currently accredited
     by NIST under the NVLAP for airborne sample analysis of asbestos by
     TEM; the laboratory will use analysts (names shall be provided)
     that are currently evaluated as competent with demonstrated
     proficiency under the NIST NVLAP for airborne sample analysis of
     asbestos by TEM.

     (4) PCM/TEM: The laboratory is fully equipped and each analyst
     (name shall be provided) possesses demonstrated proficiency in
     conducting PCM and TEM analysis of airborne samples using NIOSH Pub
     No. 84-100Method 7400 PCM and NIOSH Pub No. 84-100 Method 7402 (TEM
     confirmation of asbestos content of PCM results) from the same
     filter.

i.   Disposal Facility, Transporter: The Contractor shall provide
     written evidence that the landfill to be used is approved for
     asbestos disposal by the USEPA, state and local regulatory
     agencies. Copies of signed agreements between the Contractor
     (including subcontractors and transporters) and the asbestos waste
     disposal facility to accept and dispose of all asbestos containing
     waste generated during the performance of this contract shall be
     provided. Qualifications shall be provided for each subcontractor
     or transporter to be used, indicating previous experience in
     transport and disposal of asbestos waste to include all required
     state and local waste hauler requirements for asbestos. The
     Contractor and transporters shall meet the DOT requirements of 49
     CFR 171, 49 CFR 172, and 49 CFR 173 as well as registration
     requirements of 49 CFR 107 and other applicable state or local
     requirements. The disposal facility shall meet the requirements of
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 122 of 463

            40 CFR 61, Sections .154 or .155, as required in 40 CFR 61, Section
            .150(b), and other applicable state or local requirements.

1.5.3     Federal, State or Local Citations on Previous Projects

 The Contractor and all subcontractors shall submit a statement, signed by an
 officer of the company, containing a record of any citations issued by
 Federal, State or local regulatory agencies relating to asbestos activities
 (including projects, dates, and resolutions); a list of penalties incurred
 through non-compliance with asbestos project specifications, including
 liquidated damages, overruns in scheduled time limitations and resolutions;
 and situations in which an asbestos-related contract has been terminated
 (including projects, dates, and reasons for terminations). If there are
 none, a negative declaration signed by an officer of the company shall be
 provided.

1.6     REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

 In addition to detailed requirements of this specification, work performed
 under this contract shall comply with EM 385-1-1, applicable federal, state,
 and local laws, ordinances, criteria, rules and regulations regarding
 handling, storing, transporting, and disposing of asbestos waste materials.
 This includes, but is not limited to, OSHA standards, 29 CFR 1926,
 especially Section .1101, 40 CFR 61, Subpart M and 40 CFR 763. Matters of
 interpretation of standards shall be submitted to the appropriate
 administrative agency for resolution before starting work. Where the
 requirements of this specification, applicable laws, criteria, ordinances,
 regulations, and referenced documents vary, the most stringent requirements
 shall apply. State and local laws, rules and regulations regarding
 demolition, removal, encapsulation, construction alteration, repair,
 maintenance, renovation, spill/emergency cleanup, housekeeping, handling,
 storing, transporting and disposing of asbestos material apply during
 contract performance.

1.7     SAFETY AND HEALTH PROGRAM AND PLANS

 The Contractor shall develop and submit a written comprehensive site-
 specific Accident Prevention Plan at least during the preconstruction and/or
 preperformance conference. The Accident Prevention Plan shall address
 requirements of EM 385-1-1, Appendix A, covering onsite work to be performed
 by the Contractor and subcontractors. The Accident Prevention Plan shall
 incorporate an Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan, and Activity Hazard Analyses
 as separate appendices into 1 site specific Accident Prevention Plan
 document. Any portions of the Contractor's overall Safety and Health
 Program that are referenced in the Accident Prevention Plan, e.g.,
 respirator program, hazard communication program, confined space entry
 program, etc., shall be included as appendices to the Accident Prevention
 Plan. The plan shall take into consideration all the individual asbestos
 abatement work tasks identified in Table 1. The plan shall be prepared,
 signed (and sealed, including certification number if required), and dated
 by the Contractor's Designated IH, Competent Person, and Project Supervisor.
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 123 of 463

1.7.1    Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan Appendix

 The Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan appendix to the Accident Prevention Plan
 shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

        a.   The personal protective equipment to be used;

        b.   The location and description of regulated areas including clean and
             dirty areas, access tunnels, and decontamination unit(clean room,
             shower room, equipment room, storage areas such as load-out unit);

        c.   Initial exposure assessment in accordance with 29 CFR 1926, Section
             .1101;

        d.   Level of supervision;

        e.   Method of notification of other employers at the worksite;

        f.   Abatement method to include containment and control procedures;

        g.   Interface of trades involved in the construction;

        h.   Sequencing of asbestos related work;

        i.   Storage and Disposal procedures and plan;

        j.   Type of wetting agent and asbestos encapsulant to be used;

        k.   Location of local exhaust equipment;

        l.   Air monitoring methods (personal, environmental
             and clearance);

        m.   Bulk sampling and analytical methods (if required);

        n.   A detailed description of the method to be employed in order to
             control the spread of ACM wastes and airborne fiber concentrations;

        o.   Fire and medical emergency response procedures;

        p.   The security procedures to be used for all regulated areas.

1.7.2    Activity Hazard Analyses Appendix

 Activity Hazard Analyses, for each major phase of work, shall be submitted
 and updated during the project. The Activity Hazard Analyses format shall
 be in accordance with EM 385-1-1 (Figure 1-1). The analysis shall define
 the activities to be performed for a major phase of work, identify the
 sequence of work, the specific hazards anticipated, and the control measures
 to be implemented to eliminate or reduce each hazard to an acceptable level.
 Work shall not proceed on that phase until the Activity Hazard Analyses has
 been accepted and a preparatory meeting has been conducted by the Contractor
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 124 of 463

 to discuss its contents with everyone engaged in the activities, including
 the onsite Government representatives. The Activity Hazard Analyses shall
 be continuously reviewed and, when appropriate, modified to address changing
 site conditions or operations.

1.8      PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE AND ONSITE SAFETY

 The Contractor and the Contractor's Designated Competent Person, Project
 Supervisor, and Designated IH shall meet with the Contracting Officer prior
 to beginning work at a safety pre-construction conference to discuss the
 details of the Contractor's submitted Accident Prevention Plan to include
 the Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan and Activity Hazard Analyses appendices.
 Deficiencies in the Accident Prevention Plan will be discussed and the
 Accident Prevention Plan shall be revised to correct the deficiencies and
 resubmitted for acceptance. Any changes required in the specification as a
 result of the Accident Prevention Plan shall be identified specifically in
 the plan to allow for free discussion and acceptance by the Contracting
 Officer, prior to the start of work. Onsite work shall not begin until the
 Accident Prevention Plan has been accepted. A copy of the written Accident
 Prevention Plan shall be maintained onsite. Changes and modifications to
 the accepted Accident Prevention Plan shall be made with the knowledge and
 concurrence of the Designated IH, the Project Supervisor, Designated
 Competent Person, and the Contracting Officer. Should any unforeseen hazard
 become evident during the performance of the work, the Designated IH shall
 bring such hazard to the attention of the Project Supervisor, Designated
 Competent Person, and the Contracting Officer, both verbally and in writing,
 for resolution as soon as possible. In the interim, all necessary action
 shall be taken by the Contractor to restore and maintain safe working
 conditions in order to safeguard onsite personnel, visitors, the public, and
 the environment. Once accepted by the Contracting Officer, the Accident
 Prevention Plan, including the Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan and Activity
 Hazard Analyses will be enforced as if an addition to the contract.
 Disregarding the provisions of this contract or the accepted Accident
 Prevention Plan will be cause for stopping of work, at the discretion of the
 Contracting Officer, until the matter has been rectified.

1.9      SECURITY

 Fenced and locked security area shall be provided for each regulated area.
 A log book shall be kept documenting entry into and out of the regulated
 area. Entry into regulated areas shall only be by personnel authorized by
 the Contractor and the Contracting Officer. Personnel authorized to enter
 regulated areas shall be trained, be medically evaluated, and wear the
 required personal protective equipment for the specific regulated area to be
 entered.

1.10      MEDICAL REQUIREMENTS

 Medical requirements shall conform to 29 CFR 1926, Section .1101.

1.10.1      Medical Examinations

 Before being exposed to airborne asbestos fibers, workers shall be provided
 with a medical examination as required by 29 CFR 1926, Section .1101 and
 other pertinent state or local requirements. This requirement shall have
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                        Page 125 of 463

 been satisfied within the last 12 months. The same medical examination shall
 be given on an annual basis to employees engaged in an occupation involving
 asbestos and within 30 calendar days before or after the termination of
 employment in such occupation. X-ray films of asbestos workers shall be
 identified to the consulting radiologist and medical record jackets shall be
 marked with the word "asbestos."

1.10.1.1        Information Provided to the Physician

 The Contractor shall provide the following information in writing to the
 examining physician:

         a.    A copy of 29 CFR 1926, Section .1101 and Appendices D, E, G, and I;

         b.    A description of the affected employee's duties as they relate to
               the employee's exposure;

         c.    The employee's representative exposure level or anticipated
               exposure level;

         d.    A description of any personal protective and respiratory equipment
               used or to be used;

         e.    Information from previous medical examinations of the affected
               employee that is not otherwise available to the examining
               physician.

1.10.1.2        Written Medical Opinion

 For each worker, a written medical opinion prepared and signed by a licensed
 physician indicating the following:

         a.    Summary of the results of the examination.

         b.    The potential for an existing physiological condition that would
               place the employee at an increased risk of health impairment from
               exposure to asbestos.

         c.    The ability of the individual to wear personal protective
               equipment, including respirators, while performing strenuous work
               tasks under cold and/or heat stress conditions.

         d.    A statement that the employee has been informed of the results of
               the examination, provided with a copy of the results, informed of
               the increased risk of lung cancer attributable to the combined
               effect of smoking and asbestos exposure, and informed of any
               medical condition that may result from asbestos exposure.

1.10.2        Medical and Exposure Records

 Complete and accurate records shall be maintained of each employee's medical
 examinations, medical records, and exposure data, as required by 29 CFR
 1910, Section .1910.20 and 29 CFR 1926, Section .1101 for a period of [50]
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                        Page 126 of 463

 years after termination of employment. Records of the required medical
 examinations and exposure data shall be made available, for inspection and
 copying, to the Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and
 Health (OSHA) or authorized representatives of the employee and an
 employee's physician upon request of the employee or former employee. A
 copy of the required medical certification for each employee shall be
 maintained on file at the worksite for review, as requested by the
 Contracting Officer or the representatives.

1.11     TRAINING PROGRAM

1.11.1        General Training Requirements

 The Contractor shall establish a training program as specified by
 EPA Model Accreditation Plan (MAP), training requirements at 40 CFR 763,
 Subpart E, Appendix C, the State of Puerto Rico regulation no. 422, OSHA
 requirements at 29 CFR 1926, Section .1101(k)(9), and this specification.
 Contractor employees shall complete the required training for the type of
 work they are to perform and such training shall be documented and provided
 to the Contracting Officer as specified in paragraph QUALIFICATIONS.

1.11.2        Project Specific Training

 Prior to commencement of work, each worker shall be instructed by the
 Contractor's Designated IH and Competent Person in the following project
 specific training:

         a.    The hazards and health effects of the specific types of ACM
               to be abated;

         b.    The content and requirements of the Contractor's Accident
               Prevention Plan to include the Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan and
               Activity Hazard Analyses and site-specific safety and health
               precautions;

         c.    Hazard Communication Program;

         d.    Hands-on training for each asbestos abatement technique to be
               employed;

         e.    Heat and/or cold stress monitoring specific to this project;

         f.    Air monitoring program and procedures;

         g.    Medical surveillance to include medical and exposure record-keeping
               procedures;

         h.    The association of cigarette smoke and asbestos-related disease;

         i.    Security procedures;
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                     Page 127 of 463

       j.   Specific work practice controls and engineering controls required
            for each Class of work in accordance with 29 CFR 1926, Section
            .1101.

1.12   RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM

 The Contractor's Designated IH shall establish in writing, and implement a
 respiratory protection program in accordance with 29 CFR 1926, Section
 .1101, 29 CFR 1910, Section .134, ANSI Z88.2, CGA G-7, CGA G-7.1 and DETAIL
 SHEET 12. The Contractor's Designated IH shall establish minimum
 respiratory protection requirements based on measured or anticipated levels
 of airborne asbestos fiber concentrations encountered during the performance
 of the asbestos abatement work. The Contractor's respiratory protection
 program shall include, but not be limited to, the following elements:

       a.   The company policy, used for the assignment of individual
            responsibility, accountability, and implementation of the
            respiratory protection program.

       b.   The standard operating procedures covering the selection and use of
            respirators. Respiratory selection shall be determined by the
            hazard to which the worker is exposed.

       c.   Medical evaluation of each user to verify that the worker may be
            assigned to an activity where respiratory protection is required.

       d.   Training in the proper use and limitations of respirators.

       e.   Respirator fit-testing, i.e., quantitative, qualitative and
            individual functional fit checks.

       f.   Regular cleaning and disinfection of respirators.

       g.   Routine inspection of respirators during cleaning and after each
            use when designated for emergency use.

       h.   Storage of respirators in convenient, clean, and sanitary
            locations.

       i.   Surveillance of regulated area conditions and degree of employee
            exposure (e.g., through air monitoring).

       j.   Regular evaluation of the continued effectiveness of the
            respiratory protection program.

       k.   Recognition and procedures for the resolution of special problems
            as they affect respirator use (e.g., no facial hair that comes
            between the respirator face piece and face or interferes with valve
            function; prescription eye wear usage; contact lenses usage; etc.).

       l.   Proper training in putting on and removing respirators.
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                        Page 128 of 463

1.12.1        Respiratory Fit Testing

 A qualitative or quantitative fit test conforming to 29 CFR 1926, Section
 1101, Appendix C shall be conducted by the Contractor's Designated IH
 for each Contractor worker required to wear a respirator, and for the
 Contracting Officer and authorized visitors who enter a regulated area where
 respirators are required to be worn. A respirator fit test shall be
 performed for each worker wearing a negative-pressure respirator prior to
 initially wearing a respirator on this project and every 6 months
 thereafter. The qualitative fit tests may be used only for testing the fit
 of half-mask respirators where they are permitted to be worn, or of full-
 facepiece air purifying respirators where they are worn at levels at which
 half-facepiece air purifying respirators are permitted. If physical changes
 develop that will affect the fit, a new fit test for the worker shall be
 performed. Functional fit checks shall be performed by employees each time
 a respirator is put on and in accordance with the manufacturer's
 recommendation.

1.12.2        Respirator Selection and Use Requirements

 The Contractor shall provide respirators, and ensure that they are used as
 required by 29 CFR 1926, Section .1101 and in accordance with the
 manufacturer's recommendations. Respirators shall be jointly approved by
 the Mine Safety and Health Administration and the National Institute for
 Occupational Safety and Health (MSHA/NIOSH), or by NIOSH, under the
 provisions of 42 CFR 84, for use in environments containing airborne
 asbestos fibers. Personnel who handle ACM, enter regulated areas that
 require the wearing of a respirator, or who are otherwise carrying out
 abatement activities that require the wearing of a respirator, shall be
 provided with approved respirators that are fully protective of the worker
 at the measured or anticipated airborne asbestos concentration level to be
 encountered. For air-purifying respirators, the particulate filter portion
 of the cartridges or canister approved for use in airborne asbestos
 environments shall be high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA). The initial
 respirator selection and the decisions regarding the upgrading or
 downgrading of respirator type shall be made by the Contractor
 's Designated IH based on the measured or anticipated airborne asbestos
 fiber concentrations to be encountered. Recommendations made by the
 Contractor's Designated IH to downgrade respirator type shall be submitted
 in writing to the Contracting Officer. The Contractor's Designated
 Competent Person in consultation with the Designated IH, shall have the
 authority to take immediate action to upgrade or downgrade respiratory type
 when there is an immediate danger to the health and safety of the wearer.
 Respirators shall be used in the following circumstances:


         a.   During all Class I asbestos jobs.

         b.    During all Class II work where the ACM is not removed in a
               substantially intact state.

         c.    During all Class II and III work which is not performed using wet
               methods. Respirators need not be worn during removal of ACM from
               sloped roofs when a negative exposure assessment has been made and
               ACM is removed in an intact state.
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                        Page 129 of 463


         d.    During all Class II and III asbestos jobs where the Contractor does
               not produce a negative exposure assessment.

         e.    During all Class III jobs where TSI or surfacing ACM is being
               disturbed.

         f.    During all Class IV work performed within regulated areas where
               employees performing other work are required to wear respirators.

         g.    During all work where employees are exposed above the PEL-TWA or
               PEL-Excursion Limit.

         h.    In emergencies


1.12.3        Class I Work

 The Contractor shall provide: (1) a tight-fitting, powered air purifying
 respirator equipped with high efficiency filters, or (2) a full-facepiece
 supplied air respirator operated in the pressure demand mode, equipped with
 HEPA egress cartridges, or (3) an auxiliary positive pressure self-contained
 breathing apparatus, for all employees within the regulated area where Class
 I work is being performed; provided that a negative exposure assessment has
 not been produced, and that the exposure level will not exceed 1 f/cc as an
 8-hour time weighted average. A full-facepiece supplied air respirator,
 operated in the pressure demand mode, equipped with an auxiliary positive
 pressure self-contained breathing apparatus shall be provided under such
 conditions, if the exposure assessment indicates exposure levels above 1
 f/cc as an 8-hour time weighted average.

1.12.4        Class II and III Work

 The Contractor shall provide an air purifying respirator, other than a
 disposable respirator, equipped with high-efficiency filters whenever the
 employee performs Class II and III asbestos jobs where the Contractor does
 not produce a negative exposure assessment; and Class III jobs where TSI or
 surfacing ACM is being disturbed.

1.12.5        Sanitation

 Employees who wear respirators shall be permitted to leave work areas to
 wash their faces and respirator facepieces whenever necessary to prevent
 skin irritation associated with respirator use.

1.13     HAZARD COMMUNICATION PROGRAM

 A hazard communication program shall be established and implemented in
 accordance with 29 CFR 1926, Section .59. Material safety data sheets
 (MSDSs) shall be provided for all hazardous materials brought onto the
 worksite. One copy shall be provided to the Contracting Officer and 1 copy
 shall be included in the Contractor's Hazard Communication Program.
                                                                    W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                 0001
                                                                       Page 130 of 463

1.14     LICENSES, PERMITS AND NOTIF ICATIONS

1.14.1        General Legal Requirements

 Necessary licenses, permits and notifications shall be obtained in
 conjunction with the project's asbestos abatement, transportation and
 disposal actions and timely notification furnished of such actions as
 required by federal, state, regional, and local authorities. The Contractor
 shall will notify the Regional Office of the USEPA, state's environmental
 protection agency responsible for asbestos air emissions, local air
 pollution control district/agency, state OSHA program and the Contracting
 Officer in writing, at least 10 days prior to the commencement of work, in
 accordance with 40 CFR 61, Subpart M, and state and local requirements to
 include the mandatory "Notification of Demolition and Renovation Record"
 form and other required notification documents. Notification shall be by
 Certified Mail, Return Receipt Requested. The Contractor shall furnish
 copies of the receipts to the Contracting Officer, in writing, prior to the
 commencement of work.
 Local fire department shall be notified 3 days before fire-proofing material
 is removed from a building and the notice shall specify whether or not the
 material contains asbestos. A copy of the rental company's written
 acknowledgment and agreement shall be provided as required by paragraph
 RENTAL EQUIPMENT. For licenses, permits, and notifications that the
 Contractor is responsible for obtaining, the Contractor shall pay any
 associated fees or other costs incurred.

1.14.2        Litigation and Notification

 The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer if any of the following
 occur:

         a.    The Contractor or any of the subcontractors are served with notice
               of violation of any law, regulation, permit or license which
               relates to this contract;

         b.    Proceedings are commenced which could lead to revocation of related
               permits or licenses; permits, licenses or other Government
               authorizations relating to this contract are revoked;

         c.    Litigation is commenced which would affect this contract;

         d.    The Contractor or any of the subcontractors become aware that their
               equipment or facilities are not in compliance or may fail to comply
               in the future with applicable laws or regulations.

 1.15     PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

 Two complete sets of personal protective equipment shall be made available
 to the Contracting Officer and authorized visitors for entry to the
 regulated area. Contracting Officer and authorized visitors shall be
 provided with training equivalent to that provided to Contractor employees
 in the selection, fitting, and use of the required personal protective
 equipment and the site safety and health requirements. Contractor workers
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 131 of 463

 shall be provided with personal protective clothing and equipment and the
 Contractor shall ensure that it is worn properly. The Contractor's
 Designated IH and Designated Competent Person shall select and approve all
 the required personal protective clothing and equipment to be used.

1.15.1     Respirators

 Respirators shall be in accordance with paragraph RESPIRATORY PROTECTION
 PROGRAM.

1.15.2     Whole Body Protection

 Personnel exposed to airborne concentrations of asbestos that exceed the
 PELs, or for all OSHA Classes of work for which a required negative exposure
 assessment is not produced, shall be provided with whole body protection and
 such protection shall be worn properly. The Contractor's Designated IH and
 Competent Person shall select and approve the whole body protection to be
 used. The Competent Person shall examine work suits worn by employees at
 least once per work shift for rips or tears that may occur during
 performance of work. When rips or tears are detected while an employee is
 working, rips and tears shall be immediately mended, or the work suit shall
 be immediately replaced. Disposable whole body protection shall be disposed
 of as asbestos contaminated waste upon exiting from the regulated area.
 Reusable whole body protection worn shall be either disposed of as asbestos
 contaminated waste upon exiting from the regulated area or be properly
 laundered in accordance with 29 CFR 1926, Section.1101. Whole body
 protection used for asbestos abatement shall not be removed from the
 worksite by a worker to be cleaned. Recommendations made by the Contractor
 's Designated IH to downgrade whole body protection shall be submitted in
 writing to the Contracting Officer. The Contractor's Designated Competent
 Person, in consultation with the Designated IH, has the authority to take
 immediate action to upgrade or downgrade whole body protection when there is
 an immediate danger to the health and safety of the wearer.

1.15.2.1     Coveralls

 Disposable-impermeable and/or Disposable-breathable coveralls with a zipper
 front shall be provided. Sleeves shall be secured at the wrists, and foot
 coverings secured at the ankles.

1.15.2.2     Underwear

 Disposable underwear shall be provided. If reusable underwear are used,
 they shall be disposed of as asbestos contaminated waste or laundered in
 accordance with 29 CFR 1926, Section .1101. Asbestos abatement workers
 shall not remove contaminated reusable underwear worn during abatement of
 ACM from the site to be laundered.

1.15.2.3     Work Clothing

 An additional coverall shall be provided when the abatement and control
 method employed does not provide for the exit from the regulated area
 directly into an attached decontamination unit. Cloth work clothes for wear
 under the protective coverall, and foot coverings, shall be provided when
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 132 of 463

 work is being conducted in low temperature conditions. Cloth work clothes
 shall be either disposed of as asbestos contaminated waste or properly
 laundered in accordance with 29 CFR 1926, Section .1101.

1.15.2.4     Gloves

 Gloves shall be provided to protect the hands. Where there is the potential
 for hand injuries (i.e., scrapes, punctures, cuts, etc.) a suitable glove
 shall be provided and used.

1.15.2.5     Foot Coverings

 Cloth socks shall be provided and worn next to the skin.   Footwear, as
 required by OSHA and EM 385-1-1, that is appropriate for safety and health
 hazards in the area shall be worn. Rubber boots shall be used in moist or
 wet areas. Reusable footwear removed from the regulated area shall be
 thoroughly decontaminated or disposed of as ACM waste. Disposable
 protective foot covering shall be disposed of as ACM waste. If rubber boots
 are not used, disposable foot covering shall be provided.

1.15.2.6     Head Covering

 Hood type disposable head covering shall be provided. In addition,
 protective head gear (hard hats) shall be provided as required.
 Hard hats shall only be removed from the regulated area after being
 thoroughly decontaminated.

1.15.2.7     Protective Eye Wear

 Eye protection provided shall be in accordance with ANSI Z87.1.

1.16     HYGIENE FACILITIES AND PRACTICES

 The Contractor shall establish a decontamination area for the
 decontamination of employees, material and equipment. The Contractor shall
 ensure that employees enter and exit the regulated area through the
 decontamination area.

1.16.1     Shower Facilities

 Shower facilities, when provided, shall comply with 29 CFR 1910, Section
 .141(d)(3).

1.16.2     3-Stage Decontamination Area

 A temporary negative pressure decontamination unit that is adjacent and
 attached in a leak-tight manner to the regulated area shall be provided as
 described or utilization of prefabricated units shall have prior approval of
 the Contracting Officer. The decontamination unit shall have an equipment
 room and a clean room separated by a shower that complies with 29 CFR 1910,
 Section .141 (unless the Contractor can demonstrate that such facilities are
 not feasible). Equipment and surfaces of containers filled with ACM shall
 be cleaned prior to removing them from the equipment room or area. Surfaces
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 133 of 463

 of the equipment room shall be wet wiped 2 times after each shift.
 Materials used for wet wiping shall be disposed of as asbestos contaminated
 waste. Two separate lockers shall be provided for each asbestos worker, one
 in the equipment room and one in the clean room. Hot water service may be
 secured from the building hot water system provided backflow protection is
 installed by the Contractor at the point of connection. Should sufficient
 hot water be unavailable, the Contractor shall provide a minimum 40 gal.
 electric water heater with minimum recovery rate of 20 gal. per hour and a
 temperature controller for each showerhead. The Contractor shall provide a
 minimum of 2 showers. Instantaneous type in-line water heater may be
 incorporated at each shower head in lieu of hot water heater, upon approval
 by the Contracting Officer. Flow and temperature controls shall be located
 within the shower and shall be adjustable by the user. The wastewater pump
 shall be sized for 1.25 times the showerhead flow-rate at a pressure head
 sufficient to satisfy the filter head loss and discharge line losses. The
 pump shall supply a minimum 25 gpm flow with 35 ft. of pressure head.
 Used shower water shall be collected and filtered to remove asbestos
 contamination. Filters and residue shall be disposed of as asbestos
 contaminated material. Filtered water shall be discharged to the sanitary
 system. Wastewater filters shall be installed in series with the first
 stage pore size of 20 microns and the second stage pore size of 5 microns.
 The floor of the decontamination unit's clean room shall be kept dry and
 clean at all times. Water from the shower shall not be allowed to wet the
 floor in the clean room. Surfaces of the clean room and shower shall be
 wet-wiped 2 times after each shift change with a disinfectant solution.
 Proper housekeeping and hygiene requirements shall be maintained. Soap and
 towels shall be provided for showering, washing and drying. Any cloth
 towels provided shall be disposed of as ACM waste or shall be laundered in
 accordance with 29 CFR 1926, Section .1101.

1.16.3    Load-Out Unit

 A temporary load-out unit that is adjacent and connected to the regulated
 area shall be provided. Utilization of prefabricated units shall have prior
 approval of the Contracting Officer. The load-out unit shall be attached in
 a leak-tight manner to each regulated area. Surfaces of the load-out unit
 and access tunnel shall be adequately wet-wiped 2 times after each shift
 change. Materials used for wet wiping shall be disposed of as asbestos
 contaminated waste.

 1.16.4    Single Stage Decontamination Area

 A decontamination area (equipment room/area) shall be provided for
 Class I work involving less than 25 feet or 10 square feet of TSI or
 surfacing ACM, and for Class II and Class III asbestos work operations where
 exposures exceed the PELs or where there is no negative exposure assessment
 produced before the operation. The equipment room or area shall be adjacent
 to the regulated area for the decontamination of employees, material, and
 their equipment which is contaminated with asbestos. The equipment room or
 area shall consist of an area covered by an impermeable drop cloth on the
 floor or horizontal working surface. The area must be of sufficient size to
 accommodate cleaning of equipment and removing personal protective equipment
 without spreading contamination beyond the area. Surfaces of the equipment
 room shall be wet wiped 2 times after each shift. Materials used for wet
 wiping shall be disposed of as asbestos contaminated waste.
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                        Page 134 of 463


1.16.5        Decontamination Requirements for Class IV Work

 The Contractor shall ensure that employees performing Class IV work within a
 regulated area comply with the hygiene practice required of employees
 performing work which has a higher classification within that regulated
 area, or the Contractor shall provide alternate decontamination area
 facilities for employees cleaning up debris and material which is TSI or
 surfacing ACM.

1.16.6        Decontamination Area Entry Procedures

 The Contractor shall ensure that employees entering the decontamination area
 through the clean room or clean area:

         a.    Remove street clothing in the clean room or clean area and deposit
               it in lockers.

         b.    Put on protective clothing and respiratory protection before
               leaving the clean room or clean area.

         c.    Pass through the equipment room to enter the regulated area.

1.16.7        Decontamination Area Exit Procedures

 The Contractor shall ensure that the following procedures are followed:

         a.    Before leaving the regulated area, respirators shall be worn while
               employees remove all gross contamination and debris from their work
               clothing using a HEPA vacuum.

         b.    Employees shall remove their protective clothing in the equipment
               room and deposit the clothing in labeled impermeable bags or
               containers see Detail Sheets 9 and 14) for disposal and/or
               laundering.

         c.    Employees shall not remove their respirators in the equipment room.

         d.    Employees shall shower prior to entering the clean room. If a
               shower has not been located between the equipment room and the
               clean room or the work is performed outdoors, the Contractor shall
               ensure that employees engaged in Class I asbestos jobs: a) Remove
               asbestos contamination from their work suits in the equipment room
               or decontamination area using a HEPA vacuum before proceeding to a
               shower that is not adjacent to the work area; or b) Remove their
               contaminated work suits in the equipment room, without cleaning
               work suits, and proceed to a shower that is not adjacent to the
               work area.

         e.    After showering, employees shall enter the clean room before
               changing into street clothes.
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                     Page 135 of 463

1.16.8     Lunch Areas

 The Contractor shall provide lunch areas in which the airborne
 concentrations of asbestos are below 0.01 f/cc.

1.16.9     Smoking

 Smoking, if allowed by the Contractor, shall only be permitted in designated
 areas approved by the Contracting Officer.

1.17     REGULATED AREAS

 All Class I, II, and III asbestos work shall be conducted within regulated
 areas. The regulated area shall be demarcated to minimize the number of
 persons within the area and to protect persons outside the area from
 exposure to airborne asbestos. Where critical barriers or negative pressure
 enclosures are used, they shall demarcate the regulated area. Access to
 regulated areas shall be limited to authorized persons. The Contractor
 shall control access to regulated areas, ensure that only authorized
 personnel enter, and verify that Contractor required medical surveillance,
 training and respiratory protection program requirements are met prior to
 allowing entrance.

1.18   WARNING SIGNS AND TAPE
  Warning signs and tape printed in English and Spanish in pictographs and
  graphics shall be provided at the regulated boundaries and entrances to
  regulated areas. The Contractor shall ensure that all personnel working in
  areas contiguous to regulated areas comprehend the warning signs. Signs
  shall be located to allow personnel to read the signs and take the necessary
  protective steps required before entering the area. Warning signs, as shown
  and described in DETAIL SHEET 11, shall be in vertical format conforming to
  29 CFR 1910 and 29 CFR 1926, Section .1101, a minimum of 20 by 14 inches,
  and displaying the following legend in the lower panel:

                               DANGER
                              ASBESTOS
                  CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD
                     AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
  RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING ARE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA

 Spacing between lines shall be at least equal to the height of the upper of
 any two lines. Warning tape and econtamination unit signage shall be
 provided.

1.19     WARNING LABELS

 Warning labels shall be affixed to all asbestos disposal containers used to
 contain asbestos materials, scrap, waste debris, and other products
 contaminated with asbestos. Containers with preprinted warning labels
 conforming to requirements are acceptable. Warning labels shall conform to
 29 CFR 1926, Section .1101 and shall be of sufficient size to be clearly
 legible displaying the following legend:
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                     Page 136 of 463

                                   DANGER
                         CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS
                            AVOID CREATING DUST
                      CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD


1.20   LOCAL EXHAUST VENTILATION

 Local exhaust ventilation units shall conform to ANSI Z9.2 and 29 CFR 1926,
 Section .1101. Filters on local exhaust system equipment shall conform to
 ANSI Z9.2 and UL 586. Filter shall be UL labeled.

1.21   TOOLS

 Vacuums shall be leak proof to the filter, equipped with HEPA filters, of
 sufficient capacity and necessary capture velocity at the nozzle or nozzle
 attachment to efficiently collect, transport and retain the ACM waste
 material. Power tools shall not be used to remove ACM unless the tool is
 equipped with effective, integral HEPA filtered exhaust ventilation capture
 and collection system, or has otherwise been approved for use by the
 Contracting Officer. Residual asbestos shall be removed from reusable tools
 prior to storage and reuse. Reusable tools shall be thoroughly
 decontaminated prior to being removed from regulated areas.

1.22   RENTAL EQUIPMENT

 If rental equipment is to be used, written notification shall be provided to
 the rental agency, concerning the intended use of the equipment, the
 possibility of asbestos contamination of the equipment and the steps that
 will be taken to decontaminate such equipment. A written acceptance of the
 terms of the Contractor's notification shall be obtained from the rental
 agency.

1.23   AIR MONITORING EQUIPMENT

 The Contractor's Designated IH shall approve air monitoring equipment to be
 used to collect samples. The equipment shall include, but shall not be
 limited to:


       a.   High-volume sampling pumps that can be calibrated and operated at a
            constant airflow up to 16 liters per minute when equipped with a
            sampling train of tubing and filter cassette.

       b.   Low-volume, battery powered, body-attachable, portable personal
            pumps that can be calibrated to a constant airflow up to
            approximately 3.5 liters per minute when equipped with a sampling
            train of tubing and filter cassette, and a self-contained
            rechargeable power pack capable of sustaining the calibrated flow
            rate for a minimum of 10 hours. The pumps shall also be equipped
            with an automatic flow control unit which shall maintain a constant
            flow, even as filter resistance increases due to accumulation of
            fiber and debris on the filter surface.
                                                                    W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                 0001
                                                                       Page 137 of 463

         c.    Single use standard 25 mm diameter cassette, open face, 0.8 micron
               pore size, mixed cellulose ester membrane filters and cassettes
               with 50 mm electrically conductive extension cowl, and shrink
               bands, to be used with low flow pumps in accordance with 29 CFR
               1926, Section .1101 for personal air sampling.

         d.    Single use standard 25 mm diameter cassette, open face, 0.45 micron
               pore size, mixed cellulose ester membrane filters and cassettes
               with 50 mm electrically conductive cowl, and shrink bands, to be
               used with high flow pumps when conducting environmental area
               sampling using NIOSH Pub No. 84-100 Methods 7400 and 7402, (and the
               transmission electric microscopy method specified at 40 CFR 763 if
               required).

         e.    Appropriate plastic tubing to connect the air sampling pump to the
               selected filter cassette.

         f.    A flow calibrator capable of calibration to within plus or minus 2
               percent of reading over a temperature range of minus 4 to plus 140
               degrees F and traceable to a NIST primary standard.

1.24     EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES

1.24.1        Glovebag

 Glovebags shall be provided as described in 29 CFR 1926, Section .1101 and
 SET-UP DETAIL SHEET 10. The glovebag assembly shall be 6 mil thick plastic,
 prefabricated and seamless at the bottom with preprinted OSHA warning label.

1.24.2        Duct Tape

 Industrial grade duct tape of appropriate widths suitable for bonding sheet
 plastic and disposal container shall be provided.

1.24.3        Disposal Containers

 Leak-tight (defined as solids, liquids, or dust that cannot escape or spill
 out) disposal containers shall be provided for ACM wastes as required by 29
 CFR 1926 Section .1101 and DETAIL SHEETS 9A, 9B, 9C and 14.

1.24.4        Disposal Bags

 Leak-tight bags, 6 mil thick, shall be provided for placement of asbestos
 generated waste as described in DETAIL SHEET 9A.

1.24.5        Fiberboard Drums

 Fiberboard drums shall be [Not approved].

1.24.6        Cardboard Boxes

 Heavy-duty corrugated cardboard boxes, coated with plastic or wax to retard
 deterioration from moisture, shall be provided as described in DETAIL SHEET
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 138 of 463

 9C, if required by state and local requirements. Boxes shall fit into
 selected ACM disposal bags. Filled boxes shall be sealed leak-tight with
 duct tape.

1.24.7     Sheet Plastic

 Sheet plastic shall be polyethylene of 6 mil minimum thickness and shall be
 provided in the largest sheet size necessary to minimize seams,as indicated
 on the project drawings. Film shall be frosted or black and conform to ASTM
 D 4397, except as specified below:

1.24.7.1     Flame Resistant

 Where a potential for fire exists, flame-resistant sheets shall be provided.
 Film shall be frosted or black and shall conform to the requirements of NFPA
 701.


1.24.7.2     Reinforced

 Reinforced sheets shall be provided where high skin strength is required,
 such as where it constitutes the only barrier between the regulated area and
 the outdoor environment. The sheet stock shall consist of translucent,
 nylon-reinforced or woven-polyethylene thread laminated between 2 layers of
 polyethylene film. Film shall meet flame resistant standards of NFPA 701.

1.24.8     Amended Water

 Amended water shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 1331.

1.24.9     Mastic Removing Solvent

 Mastic removing solvent shall be nonflammable and shall not contain
 methylene chloride, glycol ether, or halogenated hydrocarbons. Solvents
 used onsite shall have a flash point greater than 140 degrees F.

1.24.10     Leak-tight Wrapping

 Two layers of 6 mil minimum thick polyethylene sheet stock shall be used for
 the containment of removed asbestos-containing components or materials
 such as reactor vessels, large tanks, boilers, insulated pipe segments and
 other materials too large to be placed in disposal bags as described in
 DETAIL SHEET 9B. Upon placement of the ACM component or material, each
 layer shall be individually leak-tight sealed with duct tape.

1.24.11     Viewing Inspection Window

 Where feasible, a minimum of 1 clear, 1/8 inch thick, acrylic sheet, 18 by
 24 inches, shall be installed as a viewing inspection window at eye level on
 a wall in each containment enclosure. The windows shall be sealed leak-
 tight with industrial grade duct tape.
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                        Page 139 of 463

1.24.12      Wetting Agents

 Removal encapsulant (a penetrating encapsulant) shall be provided when
 conducting removal abatement activities that require a longer removal time
 or are subject to rapid evaporation of amended water. The removal
 encapsulant shall be capable of wetting the ACM and retarding fiber release
 during disturbance of the ACM greater than or equal to that provided by
 amended water. Performance requirements for penetrating encapsulants are
 specified in paragraph ENCAPSULANTS.

1.24.13      Strippable Coating

 Strippable coating in aerosol cans shall be used to adhere to surfaces and
 to be removed cleanly by stripping, at the completion of work. This work
 shall only be done in well ventilated areas.

1.25      MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

 A sufficient quantity of other items, such as, but not limited to:
 scrapers, brushes, brooms, staple guns, tarpaulins, shovels, rubber
 squeegees, dust pans, other tools, scaffolding, staging, enclosed chutes,
 wooden ladders, lumber necessary for the construction of containments, UL
 approved temporary electrical equipment, material and cords, ground fault
 circuit interrupters, water hoses of sufficient length, fire extinguishers,
 first aid kits, portable toilets, logbooks, log forms, markers with
 indelible ink, spray paint in bright color to mark areas, project boundary
 fencing, etc., shall be provided.

PART 2      PRODUCTS

2.1      ENCAPSULANTS

 Encapsulants shall conform to USEPA requirements, shall contain no toxic or
 hazardous substances and no solvent and shall meet the following
 requirements:

                                  ALL ENCAPSULANTS

          Requirement                   Test Standard

  Flame Spread - 25,                    ASTM E 84
    Smoke Emission - 50
  Combustion Toxicity                   Univ. of Pittsburgh Protocol
    Zero Mortality
  Life Expectancy, 20 yrs               ASTM C 732
    Accelerated Aging Test
  Permeability, Minimum                 ASTM E 96
    0.4 perms

                  Additional Requirements for Bridging Encapsulant

          Requirement                   Test Standard

  Cohesion/Adhesion Test,               ASTM E 736
    50 pounds of force/foot
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                        Page 140 of 463

  Fire Resistance, Negligible        ASTM E 119
    affect on fire resistance
    rating over 3 hour test (Classified
    by UL for use over fibrous and
    cementitious sprayed fireproofing)
  Impact Resistance, Minimum         ASTM D 2794
    43 in-lb (Gardner Impact Test)
  Flexibility, no rupture or         ASTM D 522
    cracking (Mandrel Bend Test)


                Additional Requirements for Penetrating Encapsulant

         Requirement                    Test Standard

  Cohesion/Adhesion Test,            ASTM    E 736
    50 pounds of force/foot
  Fire Resistance, Negligible        ASTM    E 119
    affect on fire resistance
    rating over 3 hour test(Classified
    by UL for use over fibrous and
    cementitious sprayed fireproofing)
  Impact Resistance, Minimum         ASTM    D 2794
    43 in-lb (Gardner Impact Test)
  Flexibility, no rupture or         ASTM    D 522
    cracking (Mandrel Bend Test)

                  Additional Requirements for Lockdown Encapsulant

         Requirement                    Test Standard

  Fire Resistance, Negligible         ASTM E 119
    affect on fire resistance
    rating over 3 hour test(Tested
    with fireproofing over encapsulant
    applied directly to steel member)
  Bond Strength, 100 pounds of        ASTM E 736
    force/foot (Tests
    compatibility with cementitious
    and fibrous fireproofing)

  2.2      ENCASEMENT PRODUCTS

 Encasement shall consist of primary cellular polymer coat, polymer finish
 coat, and any other finish coat as approved by the Contracting Officer.

  2.3      RECYCLABLE MATERIALS

 Recyclable materials shall conform to EPA requirements.

PART 3      EXECUTION

3.1      GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 141 of 463

 Asbestos abatement work tasks shall be performed as shown on the detailed
 plans and drawings, as summarized in paragraph DESCRIPTION OF WORK and
 including Table 1 and the Contractor's Accident Prevention Plan, Asbestos
 Hazard Abatement Plan, and the Activity Hazard Analyses. The Contractor
 shall use the engineering controls and work practices required in 29 CFR
 1926, Section .1101(g) in all operations regardless of the levels of
 exposure. Personnel shall wear and utilize protective clothing and
 equipment as specified. The Contractor shall not permit eating, smoking,
 drinking, chewing or applying cosmetics in the regulated area. All hot work
 (burning, cutting, welding, etc.) shall be conducted under controlled
 conditions in conformance with 29 CFR 1926, Section .352, Fire Prevention.
 Personnel of other trades, not engaged in asbestos abatement activities,
 shall not be exposed at any time to airborne concentrations of asbestos
 unless all the administrative and personal protective provisions of the
 Contractor's Accident Prevention Plan are complied with. Power to the
 regulated area shall be locked-out and tagged in accordance with 29 CFR
 1910, and temporary electrical service with ground fault circuit
 interrupters shall be provided as needed. Temporary electrical service
 shall be disconnected when necessary for wet removal. The Contractor shall
 stop abatement work in the regulated area immediately when the airborne
 total fiber concentration: (1) equals or exceeds 0.01 f/cc, or the pre-
 abatement concentration, whichever is greater, outside the regulated area;
 or (2) equals or exceeds 1.0 f/cc inside the regulated area. The Contractor
 shall correct the condition to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer,
 including visual inspection and air sampling. Work shall resume only upon
 notification by the Contracting Officer. Corrective actions shall be
 documented.

3.2     PROTECTION OF ADJACENT WORK OR AREAS TO REMAIN

 Asbestos abatement shall be performed without damage to or contamination of
 adjacent work or area. Where such work or area is damaged or contaminated,
 as verified by the Contracting Officer using visual inspection or sample
 analysis, it shall be restored to its original condition or decontaminated
 by the Contractor at no expense to the Government, as deemed appropriate by
 the Contracting Officer. This includes inadvertent spill of dirt, dust or
 debris in which it is reasonable to conclude that asbestos may exist. When
 these spills occur, work shall stop in all effected areas immediately and
 the spill shall be cleaned. When satisfactory visual inspection and air
 sampling analysis results are obtained and have been evaluated by the
 Contractor's Designated IH and the Contracting Officer, work shall proceed.

3.3     OBJECTS

3.3.1     Removal of Mobile Objects

 Mobile objects and equipment will be removed from the area of work by the
 Government before asbestos abatement work begins. Contractor shall perform
 all required handling, cleaning and storage and reinstallation of mobile
 objects and equipment located in each abatement area.

3.3.2     Stationary Objects

 Stationary objects and equipment could remain in place and shall be
 precleaned using HEPA vacuum followed by adequate wet wiping. Stationary
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 142 of 463

 objects and furnishings shall be covered with 2 layers of polyethylene and
 edges sealed with duct tape.

3.3.3     Reinstallation of Mobile Objects

 At the conclusion of the asbestos abatement work in each regulated area, and
 after meeting the final clearance requirements for each regulated area,
 objects previously removed shall be transferred back to the cleaned area
 from which they came and reinstalled.

3.4     BUILDING VENTILATION SYSTEM AND CRITICAL BARRIERS

 Building ventilating systems supplying air into or returning air out of a
 regulated area shall be shut down and isolated by lockable switch or other
 positive means in accordance with 29 CFR 1910, Section .147 and isolated by
 airtight seals to prevent the spread of contamination throughout the system.
 Air-tight critical barriers shall be installed on building ventilating
 openings located inside the regulated area that supply or return air from
 the building ventilation system or serve to exhaust air from the building.
 The critical barriers shall consist of air-tight rigid covers for building
 ventilation supply and exhaust grills, and/or 2 layers of polyethylene.
 Edges to wall, ceiling and floor surfaces shall be sealed with industrial
 grade duct tape. Critical barriers shall be installed.

3.5     PRECLEANING

 Surfaces shall be cleaned by HEPA vacuum and adequately wet wiped] prior to
 establishment of containment.

3.6     METHODS OF COMPLIANCE

3.6.1     Mandated Practices

 The Contractor shall employ proper handling procedures in accordance with 29
 CFR 1926 and 40 CFR 61, Subpart M, and the specified requirements. The
 specific abatement techniques and items identified shall be detailed in the
 Contractor's Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan including, but not limited to,
 details of construction materials, equipment, and handling procedures. The
 Contractor shall use the following engineering controls and work practices
 in all operations, regardless of the levels of exposure:

        a. Vacuum cleaners equipped with HEPA filters to collect debris and
        dust containing ACM.

         b.    Wet methods or wetting agents to control employee exposures during
              asbestos handling, mixing, removal, cutting, application, and
              cleanup; except where it can be demonstrated that the use of wet
              methods is unfeasible due to, for example, the creation of
              electrical hazards, equipment malfunction, and in roofing.

         c.    Prompt clean-up and disposal in leak-tight containers of wastes
              and debris contaminated with asbestos.

        d. Inspection and repair of polyethylene in work and high traffic
        areas.
                                                                    W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                 0001
                                                                       Page 143 of 463


        e.    Cleaning of equipment and surfaces of containers filled with ACM
             prior to removing them from the equipment room or area.

3.6.2   Control Methods

 The Contractor shall use the following control methods to comply with the
 PELs:

             a. Local exhaust ventilation equipped with HEPA filter dust
             collection systems;

             b.   Enclosure or isolation of processes producing asbestos dust;

             c. Ventilation of the regulated area to move contaminated air away
             from the breathing zone of employees and toward a filtration or
             collection device equipped with a HEPA filter;

             d.   Use of other work practices and engineering controls;

             e. Where the feasible engineering and work practice controls
             described above are not sufficient to reduce employee exposure to
             or below the PELs, the Contractor shall use them to reduce employee
             exposure to the lowest levels attainable by these controls and
             shall supplement them by the use of respiratory protection that
             complies with paragraph, RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM.

3.6.3   Unacceptable Practices

 The following work practices and engineering controls shall not be used for
 work related to asbestos or for work which disturbs ACM, regardless of
 measured levels of asbestos exposure or the results of initial exposure
 assessments:

             a. High-speed abrasive disc saws that are not equipped with point
             of cut ventilator or enclosures with HEPA filtered exhaust air.

             b. Compressed air used to remove asbestos, or materials containing
             asbestos, unless the compressed air is used in conjunction with an
             enclosed ventilation system designed to capture the dust cloud
             created by the compressed air.

             c. Dry sweeping, shoveling, or other dry clean-up of dust and
             debris containing ACM.

             d. Employee rotation as a means of reducing employee exposure to
             asbestos.

3.6.4   Class I Work Procedures

 In addition to requirements of paragraphs Mandated Practices and Control
 Methods, the following engineering controls and work practices shall be
 used:
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                     Page 144 of 463

        a.   A Competent Person shall supervise the installation and operation
             of the control system.

        b.   For jobs involving the removal of more than 25 feet or 10 square
             feet of TSI or surfacing material, the Contractor shall place
             critical barriers over all openings to the regulated area.

        c.   HVAC systems shall be isolated in the regulated area by sealing
             with a double layer of plastic or air-tight rigid covers.

        d.   Impermeable dropcloths (6 mil or greater thickness) shall be placed
             on surfaces beneath all removal activity.

        e.   Objects within the regulated area shall be handled as specified in
             paragraph OBJECTS.

        f.   Where a negative exposure assessment has not been provided or where
             exposure monitoring shows the PEL was exceeded, the regulated area
             shall be ventilated to move contaminated air away from the
             employee's breathing zone toward a HEPA unit or collection device.

3.6.5     Specific Control Methods for Class I Work

 In addition to requirements of paragraph Class I Work Procedures, Class I
 asbestos work shall be performed using the control methods identified in the
 subparagraphs below.

3.6.5.1      Negative Pressure Enclosure (NPE) System

 The NPE system shall be as shown in SETUP DETAIL SHEET 2, 3, 4, or 8. The
 system shall provide at least 4 air changes per hour inside the containment.
 The local exhaust unit equipment shall be operated 24 hours per day until
 the containment is removed, and shall be leak-proof to the filter and
 equipped with HEPA filters. Air movement shall be directed away from the
 employees and toward a HEPA filtration device. The NPE shall be smoke
 tested for leaks at the beginning of each shift. Local exhaust equipment
 shall be sufficient to maintain a minimum pressure differential of minus
 0.02 inch of water column relative to adjacent, unsealed areas. Pressure
 differential shall be monitored continuously, 24 hours per day, with an
 automatic manometric recording instrument. Pressure differential recordings
 shall be provided daily on the same day collected. Readings shall be
 reviewed by the Contractor's Designated Competent Person and IH prior to
 submittal. The Contracting Officer shall be notified immediately if the
 pressure differential falls below the prescribed minimum. The building
 ventilation system shall not be used as the local exhaust system for the
 regulated area. The local exhaust system shall terminate outdoors unless an
 alternate arrangement is allowed by the Contract Officer. All filters used
 shall be new at the beginning of the project and shall be periodically
 changed as necessary and disposed of as ACM waste.

3.6.5.2      Glovebag Systems

 Glovebag systems shall be as shown in SETUP DETAIL SHEET 10. The glovebag
 system shall be used to remove ACM from straight runs of piping and elbows
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                     Page 145 of 463

 and other connections. Glovebags shall be used without modification and
 shall be smoke-tested for leaks and any leaks sealed prior to use.
 Glovebags shall be installed to completely cover the circumference of pipe
 or other structures where the work is to be done. Glovebags shall be used
 only once and shall not be moved. Glovebags shall not be used on surfaces
 that have temperatures exceeding 150 degrees F. Prior to disposal,
 glovebags shall be collapsed by removing air within them using a HEPA
 vacuum. Before beginning the operation, loose and friable material adjacent
 to the glovebag operation shall be wrapped and sealed in 2 layers of plastic
 or otherwise rendered intact. At least 2 persons shall perform Class I
 glovebag removal. Asbestos regulated work areas shall be established as
 specified and shown on detailed drawings and plans for glovebag abatement.
 Designated boundary limits for the asbestos work shall be established with
 rope or other continuous barriers and all other requirements for asbestos
 control areas shall be maintained, including area signage and boundary
 warning tape as specified in SET-UP DETAIL SHEET 11.

        a.   In addition to requirements for negative pressure glovebag systems
             above, the Contractor shall attach HEPA vacuum systems or other
             devices to the bag to prevent collapse during removal of ACM from
             straight runs of piping and elbows and other connections.

        b.   The negative pressure glove boxes used to remove ACM from pipe runs
             shall be fitted with gloved apertures and a bagging outlet and
             constructed with rigid sides from metal or other material which can
             withstand the weight of the ACM and water used during removal. A
             negative pressure shall be created in the system using a HEPA
             filtration system. The box shall be smoke tested for leaks prior
             to each use.

3.6.5.3      Mini-Enclosures

 Single bulkhead containment, Double bulkhead containment, or Mini-
 containment (small walk-in enclosure) as shown in SETUP DETAIL SHEET 5, 6 or
 7 to accommodate no more than 2 persons, may be used if the disturbance or
 removal can be completely contained by the enclosure with the following
 specifications and work practices. The mini-enclosure shall be inspected
 for leaks and smoke tested before each use. Air movement shall be directed
 away from the employee's breathing zone within the mini-enclosure.

3.6.5.4      Wrap and Cut Operation

 Wrap and cut operations shall be as shown in SETUP DETAIL SHEET 9B or 10.
 Prior to cutting pipe, the asbestos-containing insulation shall be wrapped
 with polyethylene and securely sealed with duct tape to prevent asbestos
 becoming airborne as a result of the cutting process. The following steps
 shall be taken: install glovebag, strip back sections to be cut 6 inches
 from point of cut, and cut pipe into manageable sections.

3.6.6     Class II Work

 In addition to the requirements of paragraphs Mandated Practices and Control
 Methods, the following engineering controls and work practices shall be
 used:
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                   Page 146 of 463


          a.   A Competent Person shall supervise the work.


          b. For indoor work, critical barriers shall be placed over all
          openings to the regulated area.


          c. Impermeable dropcloths shall be placed on surfaces beneath all
          removal activity.

3.6.7   Specific Control Methods for Class II Work
  In addition to requirements of paragraph Class II Work, Class II work shall
  be performed using the following methods:

3.6.7.1   Vinyl and Asphalt Flooring Materials

 When removing vinyl and asphalt flooring materials which contain ACM from a
 building in which ACM has not been verified, the Contractor shall use the
 following practices <TAI OPT=NO DETAIL SHEETS>as shown in RESPONSE ACTION
 DETAIL SHEET 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, or 64. Resilient sheeting
 shall be removed by adequately wet methods. Tiles shall be removed intact
 (if possible); wetting is not required when tiles are heated and removed
 intact. Flooring or its backing shall not be sanded. Scraping of residual
 adhesive and/or backing shall be performed using wet methods. Mechanical
 chipping is prohibited unless performed in a negative pressure enclosure.
 Dry sweeping is prohibited. The Contractor shall use vacuums equipped with
 HEPA filter, disposable dust bag, and metal floor tool (no brush) to clean
 floors.

3.6.7.2   Roofing Material

 When removing roofing materials which contain ACM as described in 29 CFR
 1926, Section .1101(g)(8)(ii), the Contractor shall use the following
 practices as shown in RESPONSE ACTION DETAIL SHEET 74, or 75. Roofing
 material shall be removed in an intact state. Wet methods shall be used to
 remove roofing materials that are not intact, or that will be rendered not
 intact during removal, unless such wet methods are not feasible or will
 create safety hazards. When removing built-up roofs, with asbestos-
 containing roofing felts and an aggregate surface, using a power roof
 cutter, all dust resulting from the cutting operations shall be collected by
 a HEPA dust collector, or shall be HEPA vacuumed by vacuuming along the cut
 line. Asbestos-containing roofing material shall not be dropped or thrown
 to the ground, but shall be lowered to the ground via covered, dust-tight
 chute, crane, hoist or other method approved by the Contracting Officer.
 Any ACM that is not intact shall be lowered to the ground as soon as
 practicable, but not later than the end of the work shift. While the
 material remains on the roof it shall be kept wet or placed in an
 impermeable waste bag or wrapped in plastic sheeting. Intact ACM shall be
 lowered to the ground as soon as practicable, but not later than the end of
 the work shift. Unwrapped material shall be transferred to a closed
 receptacle precluding the dispersion of dust. Critical barriers shall be
 placed over roof level heating and ventilation air intakes.
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                     Page 147 of 463

3.6.7.3     Cementitious Siding and Shingles or Transite Panels

 When removing cementitious asbestos-containing siding, shingles or transite
 panels the Contractor shall use the following practices shown in RESPONSE
 ACTION DETAIL SHEET 81, 82, or 83]. Intentionally cutting, abrading or
 breaking siding, shingles, or transite panels is prohibited. Each panel or
 shingle shall be sprayed with amended water prior to removal. Nails shall
 be cut with flat, sharp instruments. Unwrapped or unbagged panels or
 shingles shall be immediately lowered to the ground via covered dust-tight
 chute, crane or hoist, or placed in an impervious waste bag or wrapped in
 plastic sheeting and lowered to the ground no later than the end of the work
 shift.

3.6.7.4     Gaskets

 Gaskets shall be thoroughly wetted with amended water prior to removal and
 immediately placed in a disposal container. If a gasket is visibly
 deteriorated and unlikely to be removed intact, removal shall be undertaken
 within a glovebag. Any scraping to remove residue shall be performed wet.


3.6.7.5     Other Class II Jobs

 The Contractor shall use the following work practices when performing Class
 II removal of Cat I & II ACM: The material shall be thoroughly wetted with
 amended water prior and during its removal. The material shall be removed
 in an intact state. Cutting, abrading or breaking the material is
 prohibited. The ACM removed shall be immediately bagged or wrapped.

3.6.8     Specific Control Methods for Class III Work

 Class III asbestos work shall be conducted using engineering and work
 practice controls which minimize the exposure to employees performing the
 asbestos work and to bystander employees. The work shall be performed using
 wet methods and, to the extent feasible, using local exhaust ventilation.
 The Contractor shall use impermeable drop cloths and shall isolate the
 operation, using mini-enclosures or glove bag systems, where the disturbance
 involves drilling, cutting, abrading, sanding, chipping, breaking, or sawing
 of TSI or surfacing material.

3.6.9     Specific Control Methods for Class IV Work

 Class IV jobs shall be conducted using wet methods, HEPA vacuums, and prompt
 clean-up of debris containing ACM. Employees cleaning up debris and waste
 in a regulated area where respirators are required shall wear the selected
 respirators.

3.6.10     Alternative Methods for Roofing Materials and Asphaltic Wrap

 The Contractor shall use the following engineering controls and work
 practices when removing, repairing, or maintaining intact pipeline asphaltic
 wrap, or roof cements, mastics, coatings, or flashings which contain
 asbestos fibers encapsulated or coated by bituminous or resinous compounds.
 If during the course of the job the material does not remain intact, the
                                                                          W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                       0001
                                                                             Page 148 of 463

 Contractor shall use the procedures described in paragraph Roofing Material.
 Before work begins, and as needed during the job, the Designated Competent
 Person shall conduct an inspection and determine that the roofing material
 is intact and will likely remain intact. The material shall not be sanded,
 abraded, or ground. Manual methods which would render the material non-
 intact shall not be used. Roofing material shall not be dropped or thrown
 to the ground but shall be lowered via covered, dust-tight chute, crane,
 hoist or other method approved by the Contracting Officer. All such
 material shall be removed from the roof as soon as practicable, but not
 later than the end of the work shift. Removal or disturbance of pipeline
 asphaltic wrap shall be performed using wet methods.

 3.6.11        Cleaning After Asbestos Removal

 After completion of all asbestos removal work, surfaces from which ACM has
 been removed shall be wet wiped or sponged clean, or cleaned by some
 equivalent method to remove all visible residue. Run-off water shall be
 collected and filtered through a dual filtration system. A first filter
 shall be provided to remove fibers 20 micrometers and larger, and a final
 filter provided that removes fibers 5 micrometers and larger. After the
 gross amounts of asbestos have been removed from every surface, remaining
 visible accumulations of asbestos on floors shall be collected using plastic
 shovels, rubber squeegees, rubber dustpans, and HEPA vacuum cleaners as
 appropriate to maintain the integrity of the regulated area. When TSI and
 surfacing material has been removed, workmen shall use HEPA vacuum cleaners
 to vacuum every surface. Surfaces or locations which could harbor
 accumulations or residual asbestos dust shall be checked after vacuuming to
 verify that no asbestos-containing material remains; and shall be re-
 vacuumed as necessary to remove the ACM.

3.6.12        Class I Asbestos Work Response Action Detail Sheets

 The following Class I Asbestos Work Response Action Detail Sheet is
 specified on Table 1 for each individual work task to be performed:

         a.    Troweled Wall Plaster on Masonry:     See Sheet 32

         b.    Troweled Wall Plaster on Stud Wall:     See Sheet 33

         c.    Troweled Ceiling Plaster on Structural Substrate:        See Sheet 35

         d.    Troweled Ceiling Plaster on Hung Ceiling:     See Sheet 36

         e.    Acoustical Wall Plaster on Masonry:     See Sheet 42

         f.    Acoustical Ceiling Plaster (Non-Asbestos Substrate):        See Sheet 44

         g.    Asbestos Decorative Paint on Plaster:     See Sheet 46

         h.    Asbestos-contaminated Masonry for Masonry Chimney:        See Sheet 50

         i.    Asbestos-contaminated Masonry Wall or Thermal Insulation:        See
               Sheet 51
                                                              W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                           0001
                                                                 Page 149 of 463

j.   Fireproofing or Thermal Surface Insulation:      See Sheet 68

k.   Acoustical Ceiling Insulation:    See Sheet 70

l.   Exterior Asbestos Stucco:   See Sheet 79

m.   Duct Insulation: Duct work insulation removal shall not begin
     without the written authorization of the Contracting Officer
     stating that the HVAC system to be worked on is either isolated or
     inoperative and locked out of service. Forced air circulation is
     not permitted in ductwork while abatement work is in progress. See
     Sheet 101

n.   Pipe Insulation (Using a Glovebag):    See Sheet 87

o.   Horizontal Pipe Insulation (Using a Containment Area):      See Sheet
     88

p.   Pipe Insulation (Using a Mini-Containment Area):      See Sheet 89

q.   Storage Tank and Boiler Breeching Insulation: See Sheet 93.
     Written approval shall be obtained from the Contracting Officer
     before start of work on tanks and boiler breeching. The
     Contracting Officer will ensure that tanks and boilers have been
     valved off or shut down and allowed a sufficient amount of time to
     cool down. Insulation shall be sprayed with a mist of amended
     water or removal encapsulant. Amended water or removal encapsulant
     shall be allowed to saturate material to substrate. Bands or wires
     holding breeching or insulation to equipment shall be cut. Cover
     jackets shall be slit at seams, and sections removed and hand-
     placed in a polyethylene disposable bag. Exposed surfaces shall be
     continuously sprayed with amended water to minimize airborne dust.
     Insulation on tanks and boiler breeching shall not be allowed to
     drop to the floor. Residue shall be removed from tank and boiler
     surfaces. A water stream shall be used to dislodge insulation in
     joints or irregular spaces that cannot be reached with tools.
     Lagging on piping and insulation on fittings shall be removed. A
     penetrating encapsulant shall be sprayed on all exposed tank,
     boiler and boiler breeching surfaces.

r.   Troweled Wall Plaster on Studs:    See Sheet 30

s.   Troweled Ceiling or Wall Plaster on Masonry:      See Sheet 31

t.   Acoustical Ceiling on Wall Plaster:    See Sheet 41

u.   Interior Stucco:   See Sheet 78

v.   Exterior Stucco:   See Sheet 80

w.   Pipe and Fitting Insulation (using Glovebag):      See Sheet 86

x.   Storage Tank and Boiler Breeching:    See Sheet 92
                                                                             W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                          0001
                                                                                Page 150 of 463


         y.    Duct Insulation:     See Sheet 100.

3.6.13        Class II Asbestos Work Response Action Detail Sheets

 The following Class II Asbestos Work Response Action Detail Sheet is
 specified on Table 1 for each individual work task to be performed:

         a.    Light Curtain:     See Sheet 47

         b.    Interior Asbestos Cement, Fiberboard and Drywall Panels:            See Sheet
               48

         c.    Suspended Asbestos Cement Ceiling Tile:        See Sheet 52

         d.    Asbestos Cement Architectural Products:        See Sheet 53

         e.    Glued-on Acoustical Ceiling and Wall Tile:           See Sheet 55

         f.    Suspended Acoustical Ceiling Tile:        See Sheet 54

         g.    Vinyl or Vinyl Asbestos Tile Adhered to Concrete Floor System by
               Asbestos-Containing Adhesive: See Sheet 56

         h.    Vinyl or Vinyl Asbestos Tile Adhered to Wood Floor System by
               Asbestos Containing Adhesive: See Sheet 60

         i.    Vinyl Asbestos Tile Adhered to Concrete Floor System by Asbestos
               Containing Adhesive: See Sheet 57

         j.    Vinyl Asbestos Tile Adhered to Concrete Floor System by Asbestos
               Free Adhesive: See Sheet 58

         k.    Vinyl Asbestos Tile and Chemical Dissolution of Asbestos-Containing
               Adhesives on Concrete Floor System: See Sheet 59

         l.    Vinyl Asbestos Tile Adhered to Wood Floor System by Asbestos-
               Containing Adhesive: See Sheet 61

         m.    Vinyl Asbestos Tile Adhered to Wood Floor System by Asbestos Free
               Adhesive: See Sheet 62

         n.    Sheet Flooring Adhered Wood Floor System:        See Sheet 63

         o.    Asbestos-Containing Sheet Flooring Adhered to Concrete Floor System
               by Asbestos-Containing Adhesive: See Sheet 64

         p.    Carpeting (Asbestos-Containing or Contaminated):           See Sheet 65

         q.    Miscellaneous Asbestos-Containing Materials:           See Sheet 45

         r.    Built-Up Roofing and Flashing:        See Sheet 74
                                                                           W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                        0001
                                                                              Page 151 of 463


         s.    Roof, Shingles and Underlayment:     See Sheet 75

         t.    Asbestos Cement Siding:    See Sheet 81

         u.    Asbestos Cement Roofing:    See Sheet 82

         v.    Asbestos-Containing Walkway Cover:    See Sheet 83

         w.    Asbestos-Contaminated Metal Siding:       See Sheet 84

         x.    Asbestos Cement Sunscreen Louvers:     See Sheet 85

         y.    Electrical Wiring and Fixtures:    See Sheet 95

         z.    Asbestos Insulated Electrical Fixture:       See Sheet 96

         aa.    Boiler Firebox Insulation: The asbestos-containing boiler firebox
               lining shall be removed from out-of-service boilers before the
               boiler is dismantled: See Sheet 97.

3.6.14        Abatement of Asbestos Contaminated Soil

 Asbestos contaminated soil shall be removed from areas to a minimum depth of
 2 inches or as directed by the PREQB Environmental Permit. Soil shall be
 thoroughly dampened with amended water and then removed by manual shoveling
 into labeled containers. The workers shall be closely monitored for heat
 exhaustion. The minimum ventilation shall be 8 air changes per hour through
 a local exhaust HEPA system. See DETAIL SHEET 73. The Contractor has the
 option to propose encapsulation of soil instead of removal. Since soil
 encapsulation is highly dependent on soil chemistry, available skills for
 application and proprietary products, the Contractor shall first test the
 proposed soil encapsulant on a minimum 100 square feet of soil area onsite.
 The test shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer's and the
 manufacturer's representative. A written application for encapsulation
 shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer with test results, encapsulant
 manufacturer's positive recommendation for use, a guarantee for satisfactory
 performance for 10 years, and limitation of application. The Contracting
 Officer reserves the right to accept or reject the application with no
 effect to the contract. If the application is accepted, the soil
 encapsulation shall proceed in compliance with all provisions and
 instructions of the encapsulant manufacturer and under the supervision of a
 person certified by the manufacturer who is trained and experienced in the
 proper application of the soil encapsulant. See DETAIL SHEET 72.

3.6.15        Enclosure of ACM

 Isolation of ACM by construction of a permanent enclosure shall be conducted
 as specified. Enclosures shall be as follows:

         a.    Enclosure of Acoustical Wall Plaster on Masonry Wall:        See Detail
               Sheet 37
                                                                       W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                    0001
                                                                          Page 152 of 463

         b.    Enclosure of Asbestos Contaminated Soil:   See Detail Sheet 71

         c.    Enclosure of Acoustical Ceiling Plaster, Spray-on Fireproofing and
               Thermal Insulation Plaster: See Detail Sheet 43.

3.6.16        Encapsulation of ACM

 Prior to applying any encapsulant, the entire surface area shall be
 inspected for loose, or damaged asbestos material:

         a.    Penetrating Encapsulation: Before penetrating encapsulation is
               applied, asbestos removal work in the area shall be complete and
               the surfaces to be encapsulated shall be free of loose or damaged
               material. Substrate shall be evaluated before application to
               ensure that the encapsulant will not cause the substrate to fail in
               any way. Acoustical wall and ceiling plaster surfaces shall be
               encapsulated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
               Plug samples shall be taken to determine if full penetration has
               been achieved. If full penetration has not been achieved, surfaces
               shall be recoated while the matrix is still wet, until full
               penetration is achieved: See Detail Sheet 39.

         b.    Bridging Encapsulation: Prior to applying the bridging
               encapsulant, the pre-encapsulation inspection shall be performed.
               The surface shall be encapsulated in sections of 1000 square feet
               or less as recommended by the encapsulant manufacturer. Upon
               completion of each section, the dry thickness of the bridging
               encapsulation shall be measured. Additional bridging encapsulant
               shall be applied to obtain the desired encapsulant thickness.
               Additional coats shall blend with the original bridging
               encapsulant. Bridging encapsulation shall include:

               (1) Troweled Wall Plaster: See Detail Sheet 29
               (2) Troweled Ceiling Plaster: See Detail Sheet 34
               (3) Acoustical Wall Plaster: See Detail Sheet 38
               (4) Acoustical Ceiling Plaster: See Detail Sheet 34
               (5) Asbestos Cement Wall, Fiberboard and Drywall Panels: See
               Detail Sheet 49
               (6) Exterior Asbestos Stucco: See Detail Sheet 76
               (7) Interior Asbestos Stucco: See Detail Sheet 77
               (8) Storage Tank and Boiler Breeching: See Detail Sheet 91
               (9) Boiler and Piping Gasket: See Detail Sheet 98.

3.6.17        Combination Encapsulation of Acoustical Wall and Ceiling Plaster

 The combination penetrating/bridging encapsulation system shall be installed
 by first applying the penetrating encapsulant and then the bridging
 encapsulant: See Detail Sheet 40.

3.6.18        Response Action Detail Sheets for Repair of Class I Materials

         a.    Troweled Wall Plaster on Studs:   See Detail Sheet 30

         b.    Troweled Ceiling or Wall Plaster on Masonry:   See Detail Sheet 31
                                                                          W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                       0001
                                                                             Page 153 of 463


         c.    Acoustical Ceiling on Wall Plaster:        See Detail Sheet 41

         d.    Interior Stucco:     See Detail Sheet 78

         e.    Exterior Stucco:     See Detail Sheet 80

         f.    Pipe and Fitting Insulation (using Glovebag):       See Detail Sheet 86

         g.    Storage Tank and Boiler Breeching:     See Detail Sheet 92

         h.    Duct Insulation:     See Detail Sheet 100

         i.    Exposed Pipe Insulation Edges: Asbestos insulation to remain shall
               have exposed edges contained; the following steps shall be
               performed: Wet and cut the rough ends true and square with sharp
               tools and then encapsulate the edges with a 1/4 inch thick layer of
               non-asbestos-containing insulating cement troweled to a smooth hard
               finish; when cement is dry, lag the end with a layer of non-
               asbestos lagging cloth, overlapping the existing ends by 4 inches.

3.6.19        Response Action Detail Sheets for Repair of Class II Materials

         a.    Vinyl or Vinyl Asbestos Tile Adhered to Concrete Floor System by
               Asbestos-Containing Adhesive: See Detail Sheet 56

         b.    Vinyl or Vinyl Asbestos Tile Adhered to Wood Floor System by
               Asbestos Containing Adhesive: See Detail Sheet 60.

3.6.20        Encasement of ACM

 Prior to applying the first layer of the polymer system, the structural
 stability of the ACM shall be verified. Encasement materials shall not be
 applied until all removal work within the regulated area has been completed.
 Mechanical fasteners shall be installed to wall, mesh or deck as needed. A
 low density cellular or polymer shall be applied to a depth of approximately
 1 inch. The asbestos substrate shall be completely encased. A polymer
 finish containing fiberglass shall be applied over the low density cellular
 foam to a thickness of 1 inch. All system components shall be applied
 according to the system manufacturer's instructions and data. Encased
 material shall be decontaminated. Encasement shall be applied to:

         a.    Beams and Decking:     See Detail Sheet 66

         b.    Columns:   See Detail Sheet 67

         c.    Acoustical Ceiling Insulation:     See Detail Sheet 69

         d.    Storage Tank and Boiler Breeching:     See Detail Sheet 90.

3.6.21        Sealing Contaminated Items Designated for Disposal
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 154 of 463

 Contaminated architectural, mechanical, and electrical appurtenances such as
 Venetian blinds, full height partitions, carpeting, duct work, pipes and
 fittings, radiators, light fixtures, conduit panels, and other contaminated
 items designated for removal shall be coated with an asbestos lockdown
 encapsulant at the demolition site before being removed from the asbestos
 control area. These items shall be vacuumed prior to application of the
 lockdown encapsulant. The asbestos lockdown encapsulant shall be tinted a
 contrasting color and shall be spray applied by airless method.
 Thoroughness of sealing operation shall be visually gauged by the extent of
 colored coating on exposed surfaces.

3.7     FINAL CLEANING AND VISUAL INSPECTION

 Upon completion of abatement, the regulated area shall be cleaned
 by collecting, packing, and storing all gross contamination; see SET-UP
 DETAIL SHEETS 9, 14 and 20. A final cleaning shall be performed using HEPA
 vacuum and wet cleaning of all exposed surfaces and objects in the regulated
 area. Upon completion of the cleaning, the Contractor shall conduct a
 visual pre-inspection of the cleaned area in preparation for a final
 inspection before final air clearance monitoring and recleaning, as
 necessary. Upon completion of the final cleaning, the Contractor and the
 Contracting Officer shall conduct a final visual inspection of the cleaned
 regulated area in accordance with ASTM E 1368 and document the results <TAI
 OPT=NO DETAIL SHEETS>on the Final Cleaning and Visual Inspection as
 specified on the SET-UP DETAIL SHEET 19. If the Contracting Officer rejects
 the clean regulated area as not meeting final cleaning requirements, the
 Contractor shall reclean as necessary and have a follow-on inspection
 conducted with the Contracting Officer. Recleaning and follow-up
 reinspection shall be at the Contractor's expense.

3.8     LOCKDOWN

 Prior to removal of plastic barriers and after clean-up of gross
 contamination and final visual inspection, a post removal (lockdown)
 encapsulant shall be spray applied to ceiling, walls, floors, and other
 surfaces in the regulated area.

3.9     EXPOSURE ASSESSMENT AND AIR MONITORING

3.9.1     General Requirements For Exposure

 Exposure assessment, air monitoring and analysis of airborne concentration
 of asbestos fibers shall be performed in accordance with 29 CFR 1926,
 Section .1101, the Contractor's air monitoring plan, and as specified.
 Personal exposure air monitoring (collected at the breathing zone) that is
 representative of the exposure of each employee who is assigned to work
 within a regulated area shall be performed by the Contractor's Designated
 IH. Breathing zone samples shall be taken for at least 25 percent of the
 workers in each shift, or a minimum of 2, whichever is greater. Air
 monitoring results at the 95 percent confidence level shall be calculated as
 shown in Table 2 at the end of this section. The Contractor shall provide
 an onsite independent testing laboratory with qualified analysts and
 appropriate equipment to conduct sample analyses of air samples using the
 methods prescribed in 29 CFR 1926, Section .1101, to include NIOSH Pub No.
 84-100 Method 7400. Preabatement and abatement environmental air monitoring
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 155 of 463

 shall be performed by the Contractor's Designated IH.
 Final clearance environmental air monitoring, shall be performed by the
 Contractor's Designated IH. Environmental and final clearance air monitoring
 shall be performed using NIOSH Pub No. 84-100 Method 7400 (PCM) with
 optional confirmation of results by [NIOSH Pub No. 84-100 Method 7402 (TEM)]
 [the EPA TEM Method specified in 40 CFR 763]. For environmental and final
 clearance, air monitoring shall be conducted at a sufficient velocity and
 duration to establish the limit of detection of the method used at 0.005
 f/cc. Confirmation of asbestos fiber concentrations (asbestos f/cc) from
 environmental and final clearance samples collected and analyzed by NIOSH
 Pub No. 84-100 Method 7400 (total f/cc) may be conducted using TEM in
 accordance with NIOSH Pub No. 84-100 Method 7402. When such confirmation is
 conducted, it shall be from the same sample filter used for the NIOSH Pub
 No. 84-100 Method 7400 PCM analysis. For all Contractor required
 environmental or final clearance air monitoring, confirmation of asbestos
 fiber concentrations, using NIOSH Pub No. 84-100 Method 7402, shall be at
 the Contractor's expense. Monitoring may be duplicated by the Government at
 the discretion of the Contracting Officer. Results of breathing zone
 samples shall be posted at the job site and made available to the
 Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall maintain a fiber concentration
 inside a regulated area less than or equal to 0.1 f/cc expressed as an 8
 hour, time-weighted average (TWA)during the conduct of the asbestos
 abatement. If fiber concentration rises above 0.1 f/cc, work procedures
 shall be investigated with the Contracting Officer to determine the cause.
 At the discretion of the Contracting Officer, fiber concentration may exceed
 0.1 f/cc but shall not exceed 1.0 f/cc expressed as an 8-hour TWA. The
 Contractor's workers shall not be exposed to an airborne fiber concentration
 in excess of 1.0 f/cc, as averaged over a sampling period of 30 minutes.
 Should either an environmental concentration of 1.0 f/cc expressed as an 8-
 hour TWA or a personal excursion concentration of 1.0 f/cc expressed as a
 30-minute sample occur inside a regulated work area, the Contractor shall
 stop work immediately, notify the Contracting Officer, and implement
 additional engineering controls and work practice controls to reduce
 airborne fiber levels below prescribed limits in the work area. Work shall
 not restart until authorized by the Contracting Officer.

3.9.2   Initial Exposure Assessment

 The Contractor's Designated IH shall conduct an exposure assessment
 immediately before or at the initiation of an asbestos abatement operation
 to ascertain expected exposures during that operation. The assessment shall
 be completed in time to comply with the requirements, which are triggered by
 exposure data or the lack of a negative exposure assessment, and to provide
 information necessary to assure that all control systems planned are
 appropriate for that operation. The assessment shall take into
 consideration both the monitoring results and all observations, information
 or calculations which indicate employee exposure to asbestos, including any
 previous monitoring conducted in the workplace, or of the operations of the
 Contractor which indicate the levels of airborne asbestos likely to be
 encountered on the job. For Class I asbestos work, until the employer
 conducts exposure monitoring and documents that employees on that job will
 not be exposed in excess of PELs, or otherwise makes a negative exposure
 assessment, the Contractor shall presume that employees are exposed in
 excess of the PEL-TWA and PEL-Excursion Limit.
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 156 of 463

3.9.3    Negative Exposure Assessment

 The Contractor shall provide a negative exposure assessment for the specific
 asbestos job which will be performed. The negative exposure assessment
 shall be provided within 5 days of the initiation of the project and conform
 to the following criteria:

        a.   Objective Data: Objective data demonstrating that the product or
             material containing asbestos minerals or the activity involving
             such product or material cannot release airborne fibers in
             concentrations exceeding the PEL-TWA and PEL-Excursion Limit under
             those work conditions having the greatest potential for releasing
             asbestos.

        b.   Prior Asbestos Jobs: Where the Contractor has monitored prior
             asbestos jobs for the PEL and the PEL-Excursion Limit within 12
             months of the current job, the monitoring and analysis were
             performed in compliance with asbestos standard in effect; the data
             were obtained during work operations conducted under workplace
             conditions closely resembling the processes, type of material,
             control methods, work practices, and environmental conditions used
             and prevailing in the Contractor's current operations; the
             operations were conducted by employees whose training and
             experience are no more extensive than that of employees performing
             the current job; and these data show that under the conditions
             prevailing and which will prevail in the current workplace, there
             is a high degree of certainty that the monitoring covered exposure
             from employee exposures will not exceed the PEL-TWA and PEL-
             Excursion Limit.

        c.   Initial Exposure Monitoring: The results of initial exposure
             monitoring of the current job, made from breathing zone air samples
             that are representative of the 8-hour PEL-TWA and 30-minute short-
             term exposures of each employee. The monitoring covered exposure
             from operations which are most likely during the performance of the
             entire asbestos job to result in exposures over the PELs.

3.9.4    Independent Environmental Monitoring

 The air monitoring contractor has been provided a copy of the contract that
 includes this abatement work. The abatement contractor will provide the air
 monitoring contractor with an up-to-date copy of the accepted Asbestos
 Hazard Abatement Plan, Accident Prevention Plan and pertinent detailed
 drawings. The air monitoring contractor is required to comply with the
 abatement contractor's safety and health requirements. The abatement
 contractor will coordinate all onsite activities with the air monitoring
 contractor, the COR, and other affected parties as directed by the COR. The
 abatement contractor will provide the air monitoring contractor with an up-
 to-date schedule of abatement contractor work activities. The air
 monitoring contractor will coordinate with the abatement contractor and the
 COR during the performance Government required air monitoring. The
 abatement contractor is responsible for performing exposure assessment and
 personal air monitoring of abatement contractor's work. The air monitoring
 contractor is responsible for performing these tasks for its employee.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 157 of 463



3.9.5    Preabatement Environmental Air Monitoring

 Preabatement environmental air monitoring shall be established 1 day prior
 to the masking and sealing operations or each regulated area to determine
 background concentrations before abatement work begins. As a minimum,
 preabatement air samples shall be collected using NIOSH Pub No. 84-100
 Method 7400, PCM at these locations: outside the building; inside the
 building, but outside the regulated area perimeter; and inside each
 regulated work area. One sample shall be collected for every 2000 square
 feet of floor space. At least 2 samples shall be collected outside the
 building: at the exhaust of the HEPA unit; and downwind from the abatement
 site. The PCM samples shall be analyzed within 24 hours; and if any result
 in fiber concentration greater than 0.01 f/cc, asbestos fiber concentration
 shall be confirmed using NIOSH Pub No. 84-100 Method 7402 (TEM).

 3.9.6    Environmental Air Monitoring During Abatement

 Until an exposure assessment is provided to the Contracting Officer,
 environmental air monitoring shall be conducted at locations and frequencies
 that will accurately characterize any evolving airborne asbestos fiber
 concentrations. The assessment shall demonstrate that the product or
 material containing asbestos minerals, or the abatement involving such
 product or material, cannot release airborne asbestos fibers in
 concentrations exceeding 0.01 f/cc as a TWA under those work conditions
 having the greatest potential for releasing asbestos. The monitoring shall
 be at least once per shift at locations including, but not limited to, close
 to the work inside a regulated area; preabatement sampling locations;
 outside entrances to a regulated area; close to glovebag operations;
 representative locations outside of the perimeter of a regulated area;
 inside clean room; and at the exhaust discharge point of local exhaust
 system ducted to the outside of a containment (if used). If the sampling
 outside regulated area shows airborne fiber levels have exceeded
 background or 0.01 f/cc, whichever is greater, work shall be stopped
 immediately, and the Contracting Officer notified. The condition causing
 the increase shall be corrected. Work shall not restart until authorized by
 the Contracting Officer.

3.9.7    Final Clearance Air Monitoring

 Prior to conducting final clearance air monitoring, the Contractor and the
 Contracting Officer shall conduct a final visual inspection of the regulated
 area where asbestos abatement has been completed. The final visual
 inspection shall be as specified in SET-UP DETAIL SHEET 19. Final clearance
 air monitoring shall not begin until acceptance of the Contractor's final
 cleaning by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor's Designated IH shall
 conduct final clearance air monitoring using aggressive air sampling
 techniques as defined in EPA 560/5-85-024 or as otherwise required by
 federal or state requirements. The sampling and analytical method used will
 be [NIOSH Pub No. 84-100Method 7400 (PCM) and Table 3 with confirmation of
 results by NIOSH Pub No. 84-100 Method 7402 (TEM) and the EPA TEM Method
 specified at 40 CFR 763 and Table 4.
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                   Page 158 of 463

3.9.7.1        Final Clearance Requirements, NIOSH PCM Method

 For PCM sampling and analysis using NIOSH Pub No. 84-100 Method 7400, the
 fiber concentration inside the abated regulated area, for each airborne
 sample, shall be less than 0.01 f/cc. The abatement inside the regulated
 area is considered complete when every PCM final clearance sample is below
 the clearance limit. If any sample result is greater than 0.01 total f/cc,
 the asbestos fiber concentration (asbestos f/cc) shall be confirmed from
 that same filter using NIOSH Pub No. 84-100 Method 7402 (TEM) at
 Contractor's expense. If any confirmation sample result is greater than
 0.01 asbestos f/cc, abatement is incomplete and cleaning shall be repeated.
 Upon completion of any required recleaning, resampling with results to meet
 the above clearance criteria shall be done.

3.9.7.2        Final Clearance Requirements, EPA TEM Method

 For EPA TEM sampling and analysis, using the EPA Method specified in 40 CFR
 763, abatement inside the regulated area is considered complete when the
 arithmetic mean asbestos concentration of the 5 inside samples is less than
 or equal to 70 structures per square millimeter (70 S/mm). When the
 arithmetic mean is greater than 70 S/mm, the 3 blank samples shall be
 analyzed. If the 3 blank samples are greater than 70 S/mm, resampling shall
 be done. If less than 70 S/mm, the 5 outside samples shall be analyzed and
 a Z-test analysis performed. When the Z-test results are less than 1.65,
 the decontamination shall be considered complete. If the Z-test results are
 more than 1.65, the abatement is incomplete and cleaning shall be repeated.
 Upon completion of any required recleaning, resampling with results to meet
 the above clearance criteria shall be done.


3.9.7.3        Air Clearance Failure

 If clearance sampling results fail to meet the final clearance requirements,
 the Contractor shall pay all costs associated with the required recleaning,
 resampling, and analysis, until final clearance requirements are met.

 3.9.8        Air-Monitoring Results and Documentation

 Air sample fiber counting shall be completed and results provided within 24
 hours (breathing zone samples), and 24 hours (environmental
 /clearance monitoring) after completion of a sampling period. The
 Contracting Officer shall be notified immediately of any airborne levels of
 asbestos fibers in excess of established requirements. Written sampling
 results shall be provided within 5 working days of the date of collection.
 The written results shall be signed by testing laboratory analyst, testing
 laboratory principal and the Contractor's Designated IH. The air sampling
 results shall be documented on a Contractor's daily air monitoring log. The
 daily air monitoring log shall contain the following information for each
 sample:

         a.    Sampling and analytical method used;

         b.    Date sample collected;
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                     Page 159 of 463


       c.   Sample number;

       d.   Sample type: BZ = Breathing Zone (Personal),
            P = Preabatement,
            E = Environmental,
            C = Abatement Clearance;

       e.   Location/activity/name where sample collected;

       f.   Sampling pump manufacturer, model and serial number, beginning flow
            rate, end flow rate, average flow rate (L/min);

       g.   Calibration date, time, method, location, name of calibrator,
            signature;

       h.   Sample period (start time, stop time, elapsed time (minutes);

       i.   Total air volume sampled (liters);

       j.   Sample results (f/cc
            and S/mm square) if EPA methods are required for final clearance;

       k.   Laboratory name, location, analytical method, analyst, confidence
            level. In addition, the printed name and a signature and date
            block for the Industrial Hygienist who conducted the sampling and
            for the Industrial Hygienist who reviewed the daily air monitoring
            log verifying the accuracy of the information.

3.10   CLEARANCE CERTIFICATION

 When asbestos abatement is complete, ACM waste is removed from the regulated
 areas, and final clean-up is completed, the Contracting Officer will certify
 the areas as safe before allowing the warning signs and boundary warning
 tape to be removed. After final clean-up and acceptable airborne
 concentrations are attained, but before the HEPA unit is turned off and the
 containment removed, the Contractor shall remove all pre-filters on the
 building HVAC system and provide new pre-filters. The Contractor shall
 dispose of such filters as asbestos contaminated materials. HVAC,
 mechanical, and electrical systems shall be re-established in proper working
 order. The Contractor and the Contracting Officer shall visually inspect
 all surfaces within the containment for residual material or accumulated
 debris. The Contractor shall reclean all areas showing
 dust or residual materials. The Contracting Officer will certify in writing
 that the area is safe before unrestricted entry is permitted. The
 Government will have the option to perform monitoring to certify the areas
 are safe before entry is permitted.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 160 of 463

3.11     CLEANUP AND DISPOSAL

3.11.1     Title to ACM Materials

 ACM material resulting from abatement work, except as specified otherwise,
 shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of as
 specified and in accordance with applicable federal, state and local
 regulations.

3.11.2     Collection and Disposal of Asbestos

 All ACM waste shall be collected and including contaminated wastewater
 filters, scrap, debris, bags, containers, equipment, and asbestos
 contaminated clothing, shall be collected and placed in leak-tight
 containers such as double plastic bags (see DETAIL SHEET 9A); sealed double
 wrapped polyethylene sheet (see DETAIL 9B); sealed fiberboard boxes (see
 DETAIL SHEET 9C); or other approved containers. Waste within the containers
 shall be wetted in case the container is breeched. Asbestos-containing
 waste shall be disposed at an EPA, state and local approved asbestos
 landfill off Government property. For temporary storage, sealed impermeable
 containers shall be stored in an asbestos waste load-out unit or in a
 storage/transportation conveyance (i.e., dumpster, roll-off waste boxes,
 etc.) in a manner acceptable to and in an area assigned by the Contracting
 Officer. Procedure for hauling and disposal shall comply with 40 CFR 61,
 Subpart M, state, regional, and local standards.

3.11.3     Scale Weight Measurement

 Scales used for measurement shall be public scales. Weighing shall be at a
 point nearest the work at which a public scale is available. Scales shall
 be standard truck scales of the beam type; scales shall be equipped with the
 type registering beam and an "over and under" indicator; and shall be
 capable of accommodating the entire vehicle. Scales shall be tested,
 approved and sealed by an inspector of the State of PR. Scales shall be
 calibrated and resealed as often as necessary and at least once every three
 months to ensure continuous accuracy. Vehicles used for hauling ACM shall
 be weighed empty daily at such time as directed and each vehicle shall bear
 a plainly legible identification mark.

3.11.4     Weigh Bill and Delivery Tickets

 Copies of weigh bills and delivery tickets shall be submitted to the
 Contracting Officer during the progress of the work. The Contractor shall
 furnish the Contracting Officer scale tickets for each load of ACM weighed
 and certified. These tickets shall include tare weight; identification mark
 for each vehicle weighed; and date, time and location of loading and
 unloading. Tickets shall be furnished at the point and time individual
 trucks arrive at the worksite. A master log of all vehicle loading shall be
 furnished for each day of loading operations. Before the final statement is
 allowed, the Contractor shall file with the Contracting Officer certified
 weigh bills and/or certified tickets and manifests of all ACM actually
 disposed by the Contractor for this contract.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 161 of 463

3.11.5   Asbestos Waste Shipment Record

 The Contractor shall complete and provide the Contracting Officer final
 completed copies of the Waste Shipment Record for all shipments of waste
 material as specified in 40 CFR 61, Subpart M and other required state waste
 manifest shipment records, within 3 days of delivery to the landfill. Each
 Waste Shipment Record shall be signed and dated by the Contractor, the waste
 transporter and disposal facility operator.
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                   Page 162 of 463

                                    TABLE 1

                       INDIVIDUAL WORK TASK DATA ELEMENTS

                                                   Sheet_____ of _____
 There is a separate data sheet for each individual work task.

   1.   WORK TASK DESIGNATION NUMBER   _______
   2.   LOCATION OF WORK TASK__________________________________________
        _______________________________________________________________
   3.   BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL TO BE ABATED:____________________
        _______________________________________________________________

        a.   Type of Asbestos _____________________________
        b.   Percent asbestos content ____________________%

   4.  ABATEMENT TECHNIQUE TO BE USED_________________________________
   5.  OSHA ASBESTOS CLASS DESIGNATION FOR WORK TASK__________________
   6.  EPA NESHAP FRIABILITY DESIGNATION FOR WORK TASK
       Friable _____ Non-friable Category I _____
       Non-friable Category II_____
   7. FORM _____ and CONDITION OF ACM: GOOD_____ FAIR_____ POOR_____
   8. QUANTITY: METERS__________________, SQUARE METERS_____________
   8a. QUANTITY: LINEAR FT.______________, SQUARE FT._______________
   9. RESPONSE ACTION DETAIL SHEET NUMBER FOR WORK TASK______________
  10. SET-UP DETAIL SHEET NUMBERS
       FOR WORK TASK   __________, __________, __________, __________,
                       __________, __________, __________, __________.

    NOTES:
    (1) Numeric sequence of individual work tasks (1,2,3,4, etc.) for
         each regulated area. Each category of EPA friability/OSHA class has
         a separate task.
    (2) Specific location of work (building, floor, area,
         e.g., Building 1421, 2nd Floor, Rm 201)
    (3) A description of material to be abated (example: horizontal pipe,
         cement wall panels, tile, stucco, etc.) type of asbestos
(chrysotile,
         amosite, crocidolite, etc.); and % asbestos content.
    (4) Technique to be used: Removal = REM; Encapsulation = ENCAP;
         Encasement = ENCAS; Enclosure = ENCL; Repair = REP.
    (5) Class designation: Class I, II, III, or IV (OSHA designation).
    (6) Friability of materials: Check the applicable EPA NESHAP friability
         designation.
    (7) Form: Interior or Exterior Architectural = IA or EA;
         Mechanical/Electrical = ME.
         Condition: Good = G; Fair = F; Poor = P.
    (8) Quantity of ACM for each work task in meters or square meters.
   (8a) Quantity of ACM for each work task in linear feet or square feet.
    (9) Response Action Detail Sheet specifies the material to be abated
         and the methods to be used. There is only one Response Action
Detail Sheet for each abatement task.
   (10) Set-up Detail Sheets indicate containment and control methods used
         in support of the response action (referenced in the selected
         Response Action Detail Sheet).
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 163 of 463

                                      TABLE 2

             FORMULA FOR CALCULATION OF THE 95 PERCENT CONFIDENCE LEVEL
                               (Reference: NIOSH 7400)

   _______________________________________________________________________


               Fibers/cc(01.95 percent CL) = X + [(X) * (1.645) * (CV)]

    Where:     X = ((E)(AC))/((V)(1000))

               E = ((F/Nf) - (B/Nb))/Af

               CV = The precision value; 0.45 shall be used unless the
                    analytical laboratory provides the Contracting Officer
                    with documentation (Round Robin Program participation
                    and results) that the laboratory's precision is better.

               AC = Effective collection area of the filter in square
millimeters

               V = Air volume sampled in liters

               E = Fiber density on the filter in fibers per square millimeter

               F/Nf = Total fiber count per graticule field

               B/Nb = Mean field blank count per graticule field

               Af = Graticule field area in square millimeters

               TWA = C1/T1 + C2/T2 = Cn/Tn

               Where: C = Concentration of contaminant

               T = Time sampled.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 164 of 463

                                  TABLE 3

                             NI0SH METHOD 7400

           PCM ENVIRONMENTAL AIR SAMPLING PROTOCOL (NON-PERSONAL)

     __________________________________________________________________

Sample         Minimum    Filter Pore     Min. Vol.   Sampling
Location       No. of     Size (Note 1)   (Note 2)    Rate
               Samples                    (Liters)    (liters/min.)
___________________________________________________________________

Inside         0.5/140    0.45 microns      3850         2-16
Abatement      Square
Area           Meters
               (Notes
               3 & 4)
___________________________________________________________________

Each Room in              0.45 microns      3850         2-16
1 Abatement
Area Less
than 140
Square meters
___________________________________________________________________

Field Blank       2       0.45 microns        0            0
___________________________________________________________________

Laboratory        1       0.45 microns        0            0
Blank
___________________________________________________________________

Notes:

1.     Type of filter is Mixed Cellulose Ester.

2.    Ensure detection limit for PCM analysis is established at
      0.005 fibers/cc.

3.    One sample shall be added for each additional 140 square meters.
      (The corresponding I-P units are 5/1500 square feet).

4.    A minimum of 5 samples are to be taken per abatement area,
      plus 2 field blanks.
                                                                      W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                   0001
                                                                         Page 165 of 463

                                    TABLE 4

                EPA AHERA METHOD:   TEM AIR SAMPLING PROTOCOL

     __________________________________________________________________

Location       Minimum    Filter Pore     Min.        Sampling
Sampled        No. of     Size            Vol.        Rate
               Samples                   (Liters)     (liters/min.)
___________________________________________________________________

Inside               5       0.45 microns      1500             2-16
Abatement
Area

___________________________________________________________________

Outside              5       0.45 microns      1500             2-16
Abatement
Area

___________________________________________________________________

Field Blank          2       0.45 microns         0              0

___________________________________________________________________

Laboratory           1       0.45 microns         0               0
Blank

___________________________________________________________________

Notes:

1.     Type of filter is Mixed Cellulose Ester.

2.     The detection limit for TEM analysis is 70 structures/square mm.
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                   Page 166 of 463


                    CERTIFICATE OF WORKER'S ACKNOWLEDGMENT


PROJECT NAME _________________________ CONTRACT NO. ______________________
PROJECT ADDRESS __________________________________________________________
CONTRACTOR FIRM NAME _____________________________________________________
EMPLOYEE'S NAME _________________________,_______________,______,
   (Print)               (Last)               (First)      (MI)

Social Security Number:   _______-_______-________,

   WORKING WITH ASBESTOS CAN BE DANGEROUS. INHALING ASBESTOS FIBERS HAS
   BEEN LINKED WITH TYPES OF LUNG DISEASE AND CANCER. IF YOU SMOKE AND
   INHALE ASBESTOS FIBERS, THE CHANCE THAT YOU WILL DEVELOP LUNG CANCER
   IS GREATER THAN THAT OF THE NONSMOKING PUBLIC.

Your employer's contract for the above project requires that you be provided
and you complete formal asbestos training specific to the type of work you
will perform and project specific training; that you be supplied with proper
personal protective equipment including a respirator, that you be trained in
its use; and that you receive a medical examination to evaluate your physical
capacity to perform your assigned work tasks, under the environmental
conditions expected, while wearing the required personal protective
equipment. These things are to be done at no cost to you. By signing this
certification, you are acknowledging that your employer has met these
obligations to you. The Contractor's Designated Industrial Hygienist will
check the block(s) for the type of formal training you have completed.
Review the checked blocks prior to signing this certification.

FORMAL TRAINING:
_____ a. For Competent Persons and Supervisors: I have completed EPA's
Model Accreditation Program (MAP) training course, "Contractor/Supervisor",
that meets this State's requirements.

        b.For Workers:
_____     (1) For OSHA Class I work: I have completed EPA's MAP training
          course, "Worker", that meets this State's requirements.
_____     (2) For OSHA Class II work (where there will be abatement of more
          than one type of Class II materials, i.e., roofing, siding, floor
          tile, etc.): I have completed EPA's MAP training course, "Worker",
          that meets this State's requirements.
          (3) For OSHA Class II work (there will only be abatement of one
          type of Class II material):
_____          (a) I have completed an 8-hour training class on the elements
of 29 CFR 1926, Section .1101(k)(9)(viii), in addition to the specific work
practices and engineering controls of 29 CFR 1926, Section .1101(g) and
hands-on training.
_____          (b) I have completed EPA's MAP training course, "Worker",
that meets this State's requirements.
_____     (4) For OSHA Class III work: I have completed at least a 16-hour
course consistent with EPA requirements for training of local education
agency maintenance and custodial staff at 40 CFR 763, Section .92(a)(2) and
the elements of 29 CFR 1926, Section .1101(k)(9)(viii), in addition to the
specific work practices and engineering controls at 29 CFR 1926, Section
.1101, and hands-on training.
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                   Page 167 of 463


_____     (5) For OSHA Class IV work: I have completed at least a 2-hr
course consistent with EPA requirements for training of local education
agency maintenance and custodial staff at 40 CFR 763, (a)(1), and the
elements of 29 CFR 1926, Section .1101(k)(9)(viii), in addition to the
specific work practices and engineering controls at 29 CFR 1926, Section
.1101(g) and hands-on training.

_____ c. Workers, Supervisors and the Designated Competent Person: I have
completed annual refresher training as required by EPA's MAP that meets this
State's requirements.

PROJECT SPECIFIC TRAINING:
_____ I have been provided and have completed the project specific training
required by this Contract. My employer's Designated Industrial Hygienist and
Designated Competent Person conducted the training.

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION:
_____ I have been trained in accordance with the criteria in the
Contractor's Respiratory Protection program. I have been trained in the
dangers of handling and breathing asbestos dust and in the proper work
procedures and use and limitations of the respirator(s) I will wear. I have
been trained in and will abide by the facial hair and contact lens use policy
of my employer.

RESPIRATOR FIT-TEST TRAINING:
_____ I have been trained in the proper selection, fit, use, care,
cleaning,maintenance, and storage of the respirator(s) that I will wear.    I
have been fit-tested in accordance with the criteria in the Contractor's
Respiratory Program and have received a satisfactory fit. I have been
assigned my individual respirator. I have been taught how to properly
perform positive and negative pressure fit-check upon donning negative
pressure respirators each time.

MEDICAL EXAMINATION:
_____ I have had a medical examination within the last twelve months which
was paid for by my employer. The examination included: health history,
pulmonary function tests, and may have included an evaluation of a chest x-
ray. A physician made a determination regarding my physical capacity to
perform work tasks on the project while wearing personal protective equipment
including a respirator. I was personally provided a copy and informed of the
results of that examination. My employer's Industrial Hygienist evaluated
the medical certification provided by the physician and checked the
appropriate blank below. The physician determined that there:

_____ were no limitations to performing the required work tasks.
_____ were identified physical limitations to performing the required work
tasks.

Date of the medical examination __________________

Employee Signature ______________________________________ date ___________
Contractor's Industrial
Hygienist Signature _____________________________________ date ___________

                            *** END OF SECTION ***
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 168 of 463


                                  SECTION 02 82 16

                ENGINEERING CONTROL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS

PART 1      GENERAL

1.1      REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
 basic designation only.

           AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

 ANSI Z9.2                         (1979; R 1991) Fundamentals Governing the
                                   Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems

 ANSI Z88.2                        (1992) Respiratory Protection

           AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

 ASTM C 732                        (1995) Aging Effects of Artificial Weathering
                                   on Latex Sealants

 ASTM D 522                        (1993; Rev. A) Mandrel Bend Test of Attached
                                   Organic Coatings

 ASTM D 1331                       (1989; R 1995) Surface and Interfacial
                                   Tension of Solutions of Surface-Active Agents

 ASTM D 2794                       (1993) Resistance of Organic Coatings to the
                                   Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact)

 ASTM E 84                         (1998) Surface Burning Characteristics of
                                   Building Materials

 ASTM E 96                         (1995) Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

 ASTM E 119                        (1998) Fire Tests of Building Construction
                                   and Materials

 ASTM E 736                        (1992) Cohesion/Adhesion of Sprayed Fire-
                                   Resistive Materials Applied to Structural
                                   Members

 ASTM E 1368                       (1997) Visual Inspection of Asbestos
                                   Abatement Projects

 ASTM E 1494                       (1992; R 1996) Encapsulants for Spray- or
                                   Trowel-Applied Friable Asbestos-Containing
                                   Building Materials
                                                                 W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                    Page 169 of 463


          U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

 29 CFR 1926.103                  Respiratory Protection


 29 CFR 1926.51                   Sanitation

 29 CFR 1926.200                  Accident Prevention Signs and Tags

 29 CFR 1926.59                   Hazard Communication

 29 CFR 1926.1101                 Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite,
                                  Actinolite

 40 CFR 61-SUBPART A              General Provisions

 40 CFR 61-SUBPART M              National Emission Standard for Asbestos

 40 CFR 763                       Asbestos Containing Material in Schools

          U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)

 EPA 560/5-85-024                 Guidance for Controlling Asbestos Containing
                                  Materials in Buildings

          U.S. NAVAL FACILITIES ENGINEERING COMMAND (NAVFAC)

 ND OPNAVINST 5100.23             (Rev. D) Navy Occupational Safety and Health
                                  (NAVOSH) Program Manual

          UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

 UL 586                           (1996) High-Efficiency, Particulate, Air
                                  Filter Units

          STATE OF VIRGINIA ADMINISTRATIVE CODE (VAC)

 VAC 25-20-30                     Notification and Permit Fee


1.2     DEFINITIONS

1.2.1     ACM

 Asbestos Containing Materials.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 170 of 463

1.2.2   Amended Water

 Water containing a wetting agent or surfactant with a maximum surface
 tension of 29 dynes per centimeter when tested in accordance with ASTM D
 1331.

1.2.3   Area Sampling

 Sampling of asbestos fiber concentrations which approximates the
 concentrations of asbestos in the theoretical breathing zone but is not
 actually collected in the breathing zone of an employee.

1.2.4   Asbestos

 The term asbestos includes chrysotile, amosite, crocidolite, tremolite
 asbestos, anthophyllite asbestos, and actinolite asbestos and any of these
 minerals that has been chemically treated or altered. Materials are
 considered to contain asbestos if the asbestos content of the material is
 determined to be at least one percent.

1.2.5   Asbestos Control Area

 That area where asbestos removal operations are performed which is isolated
 by physical boundaries which assist in the prevention of the uncontrolled
 release of asbestos dust, fibers, or debris.

1.2.6   Asbestos Fibers

 Those fibers having an aspect ratio of at least 3:1 and longer than 5
 micrometers as determined by National Institute for Occupational Safety and
 Health (NIOSH) Method 7400.

1.2.7   Asbestos Permissible Exposure Limit

 0.1 fibers per cubic centimeter of air as an 8-hour time weighted average
 measured in the breathing zone as defined by 29 CFR 1926.1101 or other
 Federal legislation having legal jurisdiction for the protection of workers
 health.

1.2.8   Background

 The ambient airborne asbestos concentration in an uncontaminated area as
 measured prior to any asbestos hazard abatement efforts. Background
 concentrations for other (contaminated) areas are measured in similar but
 asbestos free locations.

1.2.9   Contractor

 The Contractor is that individual, or entity under contract to the Navy to
 perform the herein listed work.
                                                                      W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                   0001
                                                                         Page 171 of 463

1.2.10        Encapsulation

 The abatement of an asbestos hazard through the appropriate use of chemical
 encapsulants.

1.2.11        Encapsulants

 Specific materials in various forms used to chemically or physically entrap
 asbestos fibers in various configurations to prevent these fibers from
 becoming airborne. There are four types of encapsulants as follows which
 must comply with performance requirements as specified herein.

         a.    Removal Encapsulant (can be used as a wetting agent)

         b.    Bridging Encapsulant (used to provide a tough, durable surface
               coating to asbestos containing material)


         c.    Penetrating Encapsulant (used to penetrate the asbestos containing
               material encapsulating all asbestos fibers and preventing fiber
               release due to routine mechanical damage)

         d.    Lock-Down Encapsulant (used to seal off or "lock-down" minute
               asbestos fibers left on surfaces from which asbestos containing
               material has been removed).

1.2.12        Friable Asbestos Material

 One percent asbestos containing material that can be crumbled, pulverized,
 or reduced to powder by hand pressure when dry.

1.2.13        Glovebag Technique

 Those asbestos removal and control techniques put forth in 29 CFR 1926.1101
 Appendix G.

1.2.14        HEPA Filter Equipment

 High efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filtered vacuum and/or exhaust
 ventilation equipment with a filter system capable of collecting and
 retaining asbestos fibers. Filters shall retain 99.97 percent of particles
 0.3 microns or larger as indicated in UL 586.

1.2.15        Army Consultant (AC)

 That qualified person employed directly by the Government to monitor,
 sample, inspect the work or in some other way advise the Contracting
 Officer. The NC is normally a private consultant, but can be an employee of
 the Government.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 172 of 463

1.2.16   Negative Pressure Enclosure (NPE)

 That engineering control technique described as a negative pressure
 enclosure in 29 CFR 1926.1101.

1.2.17   Nonfriable Asbestos Material

 Material that contains asbestos in which the fibers have been immobilized by
 a bonding agent, coating, binder, or other material so that the asbestos is
 well bound and will not normally release asbestos fibers during any
 appropriate use, handling, storage or transportation. It is understood that
 asbestos fibers may be released under other conditions such as demolition,
 removal, or mishap.

1.2.18   Personal Sampling

 Air sampling which is performed to determine asbestos fiber concentrations
 within the breathing zone of a specific employee, as performed in accordance
 with 29 CFR 1926.1101.

1.2.19   Private Qualified Person (PQP)

 That qualified person hired by the Contractor to perform the herein listed
 tasks.

1.2.20   Qualified Person (QP)

 A Registered Architect, Professional Engineer, Certified Industrial
 Hygienist, consultant or other qualified person who has successfully
 completed training and is therefore accredited under a legitimate State
 Model Accrediation Plan as described in 40 CFR 763 as a Building Inspector,
 Contractor/Supervisor Abatement Worker, and Asbestos Project Designer; and
 has successfully completed the National Institute of Occupational Safety and
 Health (NIOSH) 582 course "Sampling and Evaluating Airborne Asbestos Dust"
 or equivalent. The QP must be qualified to perform visual inspections as
 indicated in ASTM E 1368. The QP shall be appropriately licensed in the
 State of Puerto Rico.

1.2.21   TEM

 Refers to Transmission Electron Microscopy.

1.2.22   Time Weighted Average (TWA)

 The TWA is an 8-hour time weighted average airborne concentration of
 asbestos fibers.

1.2.23   Wetting Agent

 A chemical added to water to reduce the water's surface tension thereby
 increasing the water's ability to soak into the material to which it is
 applied. An equivalent wetting agent must have a surface tension of at most
 29 dynes per centimeter when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1331.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 173 of 463


1.3     REQUIREMENTS

1.3.1     Description of Work

 The work covered by this section includes the handling and control of
 asbestos containing materials and describes some of the resultant procedures
 and equipment required to protect workers, the environment and occupants of
 the building or area, or both, from contact with airborne asbestos fibers.
 The work also includes the disposal of any asbestos containing materials
 generated by the work. More specific operational procedures shall be
 outlined in the Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan called for elsewhere in this
 specification. The asbestos work includes the demolition and removal of ACM
 located at the U.S. Army Garrison, Fort Buchanan, PR which is governed by 40
 CFR 763. Under normal conditions non-friable or chemically bound materials
 containing asbestos would not be considered hazardous; however, this
 material may release airborne asbestos fibers during demolition and removal
 and therefore must be handled in accordance with the removal and disposal
 procedures as specified herein. Provide techniques as outlined in this
 specification. The Army will evacuate the building and work area during the
 asbestos abatement work.

1.3.2     Medical Requirements

 Provide medical requirements including but not limited to medical
 surveillance and medical record keeping as listed in 29 CFR 1926.1101.

1.3.2.1     Medical Examinations

 Before exposure to airborne asbestos fibers, provide workers with a
 comprehensive medical examination as required by 29 CFR 1926.1101 or other
 pertinent State or local directives. This requirement must have been
 satisfied within the 12 months prior to the start of work on this contract.
 The same medical examination shall be given on an annual basis to employees
 engaged in an occupation involving asbestos and within 30 calendar days
 before or after the termination of employment in such occupation.
 Specifically identify x-ray films of asbestos workers to the consulting
 radiologist and mark medical record jackets with the word "ASBESTOS."

1.3.2.2     Medical Records

 Maintain complete and accurate records of employees' medical examinations,
 medical records, and exposure data for a period of 50 years after
 termination of employment and make records of the required medical
 examinations and exposure data available for inspection and copying to: The
 Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health (OSHA), or
 authorized representatives of them, and an employee's physician upon the
 request of the employee or former employee.

1.3.3     Employee Training

 Submit certificates, prior to the start of work but after the main abatement
 submittal, signed by each employee indicating that the employee has received
 training in the proper handling of materials and wastes that contain
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 174 of 463

 asbestos in accordance with 40 CFR 763; understands the health implications
 and risks involved, including the illnesses possible from exposure to
 airborne asbestos fibers; understands the use and limits of the respiratory
 equipment to be used; and understands the results of monitoring of airborne
 quantities of asbestos as related to health and respiratory equipment as
 indicated in 29 CFR 1926.1101 on an initial and annual basis. Certificates
 shall be organized by individual worker, not grouped by type of
 certification. Train all personnel involved in the asbestos control work in
 accordance with United States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA)
 Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA) training criteria or State
 training criteria whichever is more stringent. The Contractor shall
 document the training by providing: dates of training, training entity,
 course outline, names of instructors, and qualifications of instructors upon
 request by the Contracting Officer. Furnish each employee with respirator
 training and fit testing administered by the PQP as required by 29 CFR
 1926.1101. Fully cover engineering and other hazard control techniques and
 procedures.

1.3.4   Permits, Licenses and Notifications

 Obtain necessary permits and licenses in conjunction with asbestos removal,
 encapsulation, hauling, and disposition, and furnish notification of such
 actions required by Federal, State, regional, and local authorities prior to
 the start of work. Notify the Regional Office of the United States
 Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA), State's environmental protection
 agency, local air pollution control district/agency and the Contracting
 Officer in writing 20 working days prior to commencement of work in
 accordance with 40 CFR 61-SUBPART M and 16 VAC 25-20-30. Notify the
 Contracting Officer and other appropriate Government agencies in writing 20
 working days prior to the start of asbestos work as indicated in applicable
 laws, ordinances, criteria, rules, and regulations. Submit copies of all
 Notifications to the Contracting Officer.

1.3.5   Environment, Safety and Health Compliance

 In addition to detailed requirements of this specification, comply with
 those applicable laws, ordinances, criteria, rules, and regulations of
 Federal, State, regional, and local authorities regarding handling, storing,
 transporting, and disposing of asbestos waste materials. Comply with the
 applicable requirements of the current issue of 29 CFR 1926.1101, 40 CFR 61-
 SUBPART A, 40 CFR 61-SUBPART M, and ND OPNAVINST 5100.23. Submit matters of
 interpretation of standards to the appropriate administrative agency for
 resolution before starting the work. Where the requirements of this
 specification, applicable laws, rules, criteria, ordinances, regulations,
 and referenced documents vary, the most stringent requirement as defined by
 the Government shall apply. The following laws, ordinances, criteria, rules
 and regulations regarding removal, handling, storing, transporting and
 disposing of asbestos materials apply: Refer to Item 1.1 References.

1.3.6   Respiratory Protection Program

 Establish and implement a respirator program as required by ANSI Z88.2, 29
 CFR 1926.1101, and 29 CFR 1926.103. Submit a written description of the
 program to the Contracting Officer. Submit a written program manual or
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 175 of 463

 operating procedure including methods of compliance with regulatory
 statutes.

1.3.6.1     Respirator Program Records

 Submit records of the respirator program as required by ANSI Z88.2, 29 CFR
 1926.103, and 29 CFR 1926.1101.

1.3.7     Asbestos Hazard Control Supervisor

 The Contractor shall be represented on site by a supervisor, trained using
 the model Contractor accreditation plan as indicated in the Federal statutes
 for all portions of the herein listed work.

1.3.8     Hazard Communication

 Adhere to all parts of 29 CFR 1926.59 and provide the Contracting Officer
 with a copy of the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all materials
 brought to the site.

1.3.9     Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan

 Submit a detailed plan of the safety precautions such as lockout, tagout,
 tryout, fall protection, and confined space entry procedures and equipment
 and work procedures to be used in the [encapsulation] [removal] [and
 demolition] of materials containing asbestos. The plan, not to be combined
 with other hazard abatement plans, shall be prepared, signed, and sealed by
 the PQP. Provide a Table of Contents for each abatement submittal, which
 shall follow the sequence of requirements in the contract. Such plan shall
 include but not be limited to the precise personal protective equipment to
 be used including, but not limited to, respiratory protection, type of
 whole-body protection and if reusable coveralls are to be employed
 decontamination methods (operations and quality control plan), the location
 of asbestos control areas including clean and dirty areas, buffer zones,
 showers, storage areas, change rooms, removal, encapsulation method,
 interface of trades involved in the construction, sequencing of asbestos
 related work, disposal plan, type of wetting agent and asbestos sealer to be
 used, locations of local exhaust equipment, planned air monitoring
 strategies, and a detailed description of the method to be employed in order
 to control environmental pollution. The plan shall also include (both fire
 and medical emergency) response plans. The Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan
 must be approved in writing prior to starting any asbestos work. The
 Contractor, Asbestos Hazard Control Supervisor, and PQP shall meet with the
 Contracting Officer prior to beginning work, to discuss in detail the
 Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan, including work procedures and safety
 precautions. Once approved by the Contracting Officer, the plan will be
 enforced as if an addition to the specification. Any changes required in
 the specification as a result of the plan shall be identified specifically
 in the plan to allow for free discussion and approval by the Contracting
 Officer prior to starting work.
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 176 of 463

1.3.10      Testing Laboratory

 Submit the name, address, and telephone number of each testing laboratory
 selected for the sampling, analysis, and reporting of airborne
 concentrations of asbestos fibers along with evidence that each laboratory
 selected holds the appropriate State license and/or permits and
 certification that each laboratory is American Industrial Hygiene
 Association (AIHA) accredited and that persons counting the samples have
 been judged proficient by current inclusion on the AIHA Asbestos Analysis
 Registry (AAR) and successful participation of the laboratory in the
 Proficiency Analytical Testing (PAT) Program. Where analysis to determine
 asbestos content in bulk materials or transmission electron microscopy is
 required, submit evidence that the laboratory is accredited by the National
 Institute of Science and Technology (NIST) under National Voluntary
 Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) for asbestos analysis.

1.3.11      Landfill Approval

 Submit written evidence that the landfill for disposal is approved for
 asbestos disposal by the USEPA, State and local regulatory agency(s).
 Submit to the Contracting Officer, waste shipment records, prepared in
 accordance with Federal regulations, signed and dated by an agent of the
 landfill, certifying the amount of asbestos materials delivered to the
 landfill, within 3 days after delivery. In those States that require a
 hazardous waste manifest the Contractor shall submit, within 3 days, signed
 copies of such to the Contracting Officer.

1.3.12      Medical Certification

 Provide a written certification for each worker and supervisor, signed by a
 licensed physician indicating that the worker and supervisor has met or
 exceeded all of the medical prerequisites listed herein and in 29 CFR
 1926.1101 and 29 CFR 1926.103 as prescribed by law. Submit certificates
 prior to the start of work but after the main abatement submittal.

1.4      SUBMITTALS

 Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330, "Submittal
 Procedures."

         SD-03 Product Data

             Local exhaust equipment; G

             Vacuums; G

             Respirators; G

             Pressure differential automatic recording instrument; G

             Amended water; G
                                                          W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                       0001
                                                             Page 177 of 463

    Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all materials proposed for
    transport to the project site; G

    Encapsulants; G

SD-06 Test Reports

    Air sampling results; G

    Pressure differential recordings for local exhaust system; G

    Asbestos disposal quantity report; G

    Encapsulation test patches; G

    Clearance sampling; G

SD-07 Certificates

    Asbestos hazard abatement plan; G

    Testing laboratory; G

    Private qualified person documentation; G

    Landfill approval; G

    Employee training; G

    Medical certification requirements; G

    Waste shipment records and if applicable exemption report; G

    Respiratory Protection Program; G

    Hazardous waste manifest; G

    Vacuums; G

    Water filtration equipment; G

    Ventilation systems; G

    Other equipment used to contain airborne asbestos fibers; G

    Chemical encapsulants sealers; G

    Notifications

    Show compliance with ANSI Z9.2 by providing manufacturers'
    certifications.
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                     Page 178 of 463


        SD-11 Closeout Submittals

            Notifications; G

            Rental equipment; G

            Respirator program records; G

            Permits [and licenses]; G

            Protective clothing decontamination quality control records; G

            Protective clothing decontamination facility notification; G

1.5     QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.5.1     Private Qualified Person Documentation

 Submit the name, address, and telephone number of the Private Qualified
 Person (PQP) selected to prepare the Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan, direct
 monitoring and training, and documented evidence that the PQP has
 successfully completed training in and is accredited and where required is
 certified as, a Building Inspector, Contractor/Supervisor Abatement Worker,
 and Asbestos Project Designer as described by 40 CFR 763 and has
 successfully completed the National Institute of Occupational Safety and
 Health (NIOSH) 582 course "Sampling and Evaluating Airborne Asbestos Dust"
 or equivalent. The PQP shall be appropriately licensed in the State of PR.

1.5.2     Air Sampling Results

 Complete fiber counting and provide results to the PQP and NC for review
 within 16 hours of the "time off" of the sample pump. Notify the
 Contracting Officer immediately of any airborne levels of asbestos fibers in
 excess of the acceptable limits. Submit sampling results to the Contracting
 Officer and the affected Contractor employees where required by law within 3
 working days, signed by the testing laboratory employee performing air
 sampling, the employee that analyzed the sample, and the PQP and NC. Notify
 the Contractor and the Contracting Officer immediately of any variance in
 the pressure differential which could cause adjacent unsealed areas to have
 asbestos fiber concentrations in excess of 0.01 fibers per cubic centimeter
 or background whichever is higher. In no circumstance shall levels exceed
 0.1 fibers per cubic centimeter.

1.5.3     Protective Clothing Decontamination Quality Control Records

 Provide all records that document quality control for the decontamination of
 reusable outer protective clothing.
                                                                    W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                 0001
                                                                       Page 179 of 463

1.5.4      Protective Clothing Decontamination Facility Notification

 Submit written evidence that persons who decontaminate, store, or transport
 asbestos contaminated clothing used in the performance of this contract were
 duly notified in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101.

1.6      EQUIPMENT

1.6.1      Rental Equipment

 Provide a copy of the written notification to the rental company concerning
 the intended use of the equipment and the possibility of asbestos
 contamination of the equipment.

PART 2      PRODUCTS

2.1      ENCAPSULANTS

 Shall conform to current USEPA requirements, shall contain no toxic or
 hazardous substances as defined in 29 CFR 1926.59, and shall conform to the
 following performance requirements.

2.1.1      Removal Encapsulants

  Requirement                                       Test Standard

  Flame Spread - 25, Smoke Emission - 50            ASTM E 84

  Life Expectancy - 20 years                        ASTM C 732 Accelerated
                                                    Aging Test

  Permeability - Minimum 0.4 perms                  ASTM E 96

2.1.2      Bridging Encapsulant

  Requirement                                       Test Standard

  Flame Spread - 25, Smoke Emission - 50            ASTM E 84

  Life Expectancy - 20 years                        ASTM C 732 Accelerated
                                                    Aging Test

  Permeability - Minimum 0.4 perms                  ASTM E 96

  Fire Resistance - Negligible affect on            ASTM E 119
  fire resistance rating over 3 hour test
  (Classified by UL for use over fibrous
  and cementitious sprayed fireproofing)

  Impact Resistance - Minimum                    ASTM D 2794
 43 in/lb                    Gardner Impact Test

  Flexibility - no rupture or cracking              ASTM D 522
                                                    Mandrel Bend Test
                                                                 W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                    Page 180 of 463


2.1.3      Penetrating Encapsulant

  Requirement                                    Test Standard

  Flame Spread - 25, Smoke Emission - 50         ASTM E 84

  Life Expectancy - 20 years                     ASTM C 732 Accelerated
                                                 Aging Test

  Permeability - Minimum 0.4 perms               ASTM E 96

  Cohesion/Adhesion Test -                       ASTM E 736
 50 pounds of force/foot

  Fire Resistance - Negligible affect on         ASTM E 119
  fire resistance rating over 3 hour test
  (Classified by UL for use over fibrous
  and cementitious sprayed fireproofing)

  Impact Resistance - Minimum                    ASTM D 2794
 43 in/lb                    Gardner Impact Test

  Flexibility - no rupture or cracking           ASTM D 522
                                                 Mandrel Bend Test

2.1.4      Lock-down Encapsulant

  Requirement                                    Test Standard

  Flame Spread:      25, Smoke Emission - 50     ASTM E 84

  Life Expectancy:      20 years                 ASTM C 732 Accelerated
                                                 Aging Test

  Permeability:      Minimum 0.4 perms           ASTM E 96

  Fire Resistance: Negligible affect on          ASTM E 119
  fire resistance rating over 3 hour test
  (Tested with fireproofing over encapsulant
  applied directly to steel member)

  Bond Strength: 100 pounds of force/foot      ASTM E 736
  (Tests compatibility with cementitious and fibrous fireproofing)

PART 3      EXECUTION

3.1      EQUIPMENT

 At all times, provide the Contracting Officer or the Contracting Officer's
 Representative, with at least two complete sets of personal protective
 equipment including decontaminating reusable coveralls as required for entry
 to and inspection of the asbestos control area. Provide equivalent training
 to the Contracting Officer or a designated representative as provided to
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 181 of 463

 Contractor employees in the use of the required personal protective
 equipment. Provide manufacturer's certificate of compliance for all
 equipment used to contain airborne asbestos fibers.

3.1.1     Respirators

 Select respirators from those approved by the National Institute for
 Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), Department of Health and Human
 Services.

3.1.1.1     Respirators for Handling Asbestos

 Provide personnel engaged in pre-cleaning, cleanup, handling, encapsulation
 removal and or demolition of asbestos materials with respiratory protection
 as indicated in 29 CFR 1926.1101 and 29 CFR 1926.103.

3.1.2     Exterior Whole Body Protection

3.1.2.1     Outer Protective Clothing

 Provide personnel exposed to asbestos with disposable "non-breathable,"
 whole body outer protective clothing, head coverings, gloves, and foot
 coverings. Provide disposable plastic or rubber gloves to protect hands.
 Cloth gloves may be worn inside the plastic or rubber gloves for comfort,
 but shall not be used alone. Make sleeves secure at the wrists, make foot
 coverings secure at the ankles, and make clothing secure at the neck by the
 use of tape.

3.1.2.2     Work Clothing

 Provide cloth work clothes for wear under the outer protective clothing and
 foot coverings and either dispose of or properly decontaminate them as
 recommended by the NC and PQP after each use.

3.1.2.3     Eye Protection

 Provide goggles to personnel engaged in asbestos abatement operations when
 the use of a full face respirator is not required.

3.1.3     Warning Signs and Labels

 Provide bilingual warning signs printed in English and Spanish at all
 approaches to asbestos control areas. Locate signs at such a distance that
 personnel may read the sign and take the necessary protective steps required
 before entering the area. Provide labels and affix to all asbestos
 materials, scrap, waste, debris, and other products contaminated with
 asbestos.

3.1.3.1     Warning Sign

 Provide vertical format conforming to 29 CFR 1926.200, and 29 CFR 1926.1101
 minimum 20 by 14 inches displaying the following legend in the lower panel:
                                                                 W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                    Page 182 of 463


  Legend                                     Notation

  Danger                                   one inch Sans Serif

                                             Gothic or Block

  Asbestos                                 one inch Sans Serif
                                            Gothic or Block

  Cancer and Lung Disease Hazard           1/4 inch Sans Serif
                                            Gothic or Block

  Authorized Personnel Only                1/4 inch Gothic

  Respirators and Protective               1/4 inch Gothic
  Clothing are Required in
  this Area

 Spacing between lines shall be at least equal to the height of the upper of
 any two lines.

3.1.3.2      Warning Labels

 Provide labels conforming to 29 CFR 1926.1101 of sufficient size to be
 clearly legible, displaying the following legend:

                                          DANGER

                                 CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS

                                   AVOID CREATING DUST

                              CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD

                               BREATHING ASBESTOS DUST MAY
                                CAUSE SERIOUS BODILY HARM

3.1.4      Tools

 Vacuums shall be leak proof to the filter and equipped with HEPA filters.
 Filters on vacuums shall conform to ANSI Z9.2 and UL 586. Do not use power
 tools to remove asbestos containing materials unless the tool is equipped
 with effective, integral HEPA filtered exhaust ventilation systems. Remove
 all residual asbestos from reusable tools prior to storage or reuse.

3.1.5      Rental Equipment

 If rental equipment is to be used, furnish written notification to the
 rental agency concerning the intended use of the equipment and the
 possibility of asbestos contamination of the equipment.
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                   Page 183 of 463

3.2   WORK PROCEDURE
  Perform asbestos related work in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101, 40 CFR
  61-SUBPART M, and as specified herein. Use wet removal procedures and
  appropriate encapsulation procedures as listed in the asbestos hazard
  abatement plan. Personnel shall wear and utilize protective clothing and
  equipment as specified herein. Eating, smoking, drinking, chewing gum,
  tobacco, or applying cosmetics shall not be permitted in the asbestos work
  or control areas. Personnel of other trades not engaged in the
  encapsulation, removal and demolition of asbestos containing material shall
  not be exposed at any time to airborne concentrations of asbestos unless all
  the personnel protection and training provisions of this specification are
  complied with by the trade personnel. Seal all roof top penetrations,
  except plumbing vents, prior to asbestos roofing work. Shut down the
  building heating, ventilating, and air conditioning system and cap the
  openings to the system prior to the commencement of asbestos work.
  Disconnect electrical service when encapsulation and/or wet removal is
  performed and provide temporary electrical service with verifiable ground
  fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) protection prior to the use of any water
  encapsulant. If an asbestos fiber release or spill occurs outside of the
  asbestos control area, stop work immediately, correct the condition to the
  satisfaction of the Contracting Officer including clearance sampling, prior
  to resumption of work.


3.2.1   Protection of Existing Work to Remain

 Perform work without damage or contamination of adjacent work. Where such
 work is damaged or contaminated as verified by the Contracting Officer using
 visual inspection or sample analysis, it shall be restored to its original
 condition or decontaminated by the Contractor at no expense to the
 Government as deemed appropriate by the Contracting Officer. This includes
 inadvertent spill of dirt, dust, or debris in which it is reasonable to
 conclude that asbestos may exist. When these spills occur, stop work
 immediately. Then clean up the spill. When satisfactory visual inspection
 and air sampling results are obtained from the PQP and NC, work may proceed
 at the discretion of the Contracting Officer.

3.2.2   Precleaning

 Wet wipe and HEPA vacuum all surfaces potentially contaminated with
 asbestos.

3.2.3   Removal Procedures

 Wet asbestos material with a fine spray of amended water and/or a specific
 wetting agent such as light oil during removal, cutting, or other handling
 so as to reduce the emission of airborne fibers. Remove material and
 immediately place in 6 mil plastic disposal bags. Remove asbestos
 containing material in a gradual manner, with continuous application of the
 amended water or wetting agent in such a manner that no asbestos material is
 disturbed prior to being adequately wetted. Where unusual circumstances
 prohibit the use of 6 mil plastic bags, submit an alternate proposal for
 containment of asbestos fibers to the Contracting Officer for approval.
 Asbestos containing material shall be containerized while wet. At no time
 shall asbestos material be allowed to accumulate or become dry. Lower and
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 184 of 463

 otherwise handle asbestos containing material as indicated in 40 CFR 61-
 SUBPART M.

3.2.4      Encapsulation Procedures

3.2.4.1      Preparation of Test Patches

 Install two test patches of encapsulant as indicated. Use airless spray at
 the lowest pressure and as recommended by the encapsulant manufacturer.
 Follow exactly the manufacturer's instructions for thinning recommendations,
 application procedures and rates. Curing time shall be not less than five
 days or that recommended by the manufacturer, whichever is more. A test
 patch shall be 9 square feet in size.

3.2.4.2      Field Testing

 Field test the encapsulation test patches in accordance with ASTM E 1494,
 paragraph "Required Field Test," in the presence of the Contracting Officer.
 Keep a written record of the testing procedures and test results. Upon
 successful testing of the encapsulant, submit a signed statement to the
 Contracting Officer certifying that the encapsulant is suitable for
 installation on the particular asbestos containing material.


3.2.4.3      Large-Scale Application

 Apply encapsulant using the same equipment and procedures as employed for
 the test patches. Keep the encapsulant material stirred to prevent
 settling. Keep a clean work area. Change pre-filters in the ventilation
 equipment as soon as they appear clogged by encapsulant aerosol or pressure
 differential drops below 0.02 Hg.

3.2.5     Air Sampling

 Sampling of airborne concentrations of asbestos fibers shall be performed in
 accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101 and as specified herein. Sampling
 performed in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101 shall be performed by the PQP.
 Sampling performed for environmental and quality control reasons shall be
 performed by the PQP. Unless otherwise specified, use NIOSH Method 7400 for
 sampling and analysis. Monitoring may be duplicated by the Government at
 the discretion of the Contracting Officer. If the air sampling results
 obtained by the Government differ from those results obtained by the
 Contractor, the Government will determine which results predominate.

3.2.5.1      Sampling Prior to Asbestos Work

 Provide area air sampling and establish the baseline one day prior to the
 masking and sealing operations for each demolition, removal and
 encapsulation site. Establish the background by performing area sampling in
 similar but uncontaminated sites in the building.
                                                                 W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                    Page 185 of 463

3.2.5.2     Sampling During Asbestos Work

 The PQP shall provide personal and area sampling as indicated in 29 CFR
 1926.1101 and governing environmental regulations. Where alternate methods
 are used, perform personal and area air sampling at locations and
 frequencies that will accurately characterize the evolving airborne asbestos
 levels.

3.2.5.3     Sampling After Final Clean-Up (Clearance Sampling)

 Provide area sampling of asbestos fibers [using aggressive air sampling
 techniques as defined in the EPA 560/5-85-024] and establish an airborne
 asbestos concentration of less than 0.01 fibers per cubic centimeter after
 final clean-up of the asbestos work control area. After final cleanup and
 the asbestos control area is dry but prior to clearance sampling, the PQP
 and NC shall perform a visual inspection in accordance with ASTM E 1368 to
 ensure that the asbestos control and work area is free of any accumulations
 of dirt, dust, or debris. Prepare a written report signed and dated by the
 PQP documenting that the asbestos control area is free of dust, dirt, and
 debris and all waste has been removed. Perform at least 3 samples. Use
 transmission electron microscopy (TEM) to analyze clearance samples and
 report the results in accordance with current NIOSH criteria. The asbestos
 fiber counts from these samples shall be less than 0.01 fibers per cubic
 centimeter or be not greater than the background, whichever is greater.
 Should any of the final samples indicate a higher value, the Contractor
 shall take appropriate actions to re-clean the area and shall repeat the
 sampling and analysis at the Contractor's expense.

3.2.6     Lock-Down

 Prior to removal of plastic barriers and after pre-clearance clean up of
 gross contamination, the PQP shall conduct a visual inspection of all areas
 affected by the removal and/or encapsulation in accordance with ASTM E 1368.
 Inspect for any visible fibers to ensure that encapsulants were applied
 evenly and appropriately. A post removal (lock-down) encapsulant shall then
 be spray applied to areas exposed in the removal area.

3.2.7     Site Inspection

 While performing asbestos engineering control work, the Contractor shall be
 subject to on-site inspection by the Contracting Officer who may be assisted
 by or represented by safety or industrial hygiene personnel. If the work is
 found to be in violation of this specification, the Contracting Officer or
 his representative will issue a stop work order to be in effect immediately
 and until the violation is resolved. All related costs including standby
 time required to resolve the violation shall be at the Contractor's expense.

3.3     CLEAN-UP AND DISPOSAL

3.3.1     Housekeeping

 Essential parts of asbestos dust control are housekeeping and clean-up
 procedures. Maintain surfaces of the asbestos control area free of
 accumulations of asbestos fibers. Give meticulous attention to restricting
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 186 of 463

 the spread of dust and debris; keep waste from being distributed over the
 general area. Use HEPA filtered vacuum cleaners. DO NOT BLOW DOWN THE
 SPACE WITH COMPRESSED AIR. When asbestos removal is complete, all asbestos
 waste is removed from the work-site, and final clean-up is completed, the
 Contracting Officer will attest that the area is safe before the signs can
 be removed. The Government shall have the option to perform monitoring to
 determine if the areas are safe before entry is permitted.

3.3.2     Title to Materials

 All waste materials, except as specified otherwise, shall become the
 property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of as specified in
 applicable local, State, and Federal regulations and herein.

3.3.3     Disposal of Asbestos

3.3.3.1     Procedure for Disposal

 Collect asbestos waste, asbestos contaminated water, scrap, debris, bags,
 containers, equipment, and asbestos contaminated clothing which may produce
 airborne concentrations of asbestos fibers and place in sealed fiber-proof,
 waterproof, non-returnable containers (e.g. double plastic bags 6 mils
 thick, cartons, drums or cans). Wastes within the containers must be
 adequately wet in accordance with 40 CFR 61-SUBPART M. Affix a warning and
 Department of Transportation (DOT) label to each container including the
 bags or use at least 6 mils thick bags with the approved warnings and DOT
 labeling preprinted on the bag. The name of the waste generator and the
 location at which the waste was generated shall be clearly indicated on the
 outside of each container. Prevent contamination of the transport vehicle
 (especially if the transport vehicle is a rented truck likely to be used in
 the future for non-asbestos purposes). These precautions include lining the
 vehicle cargo area with plastic sheeting (similar to work area enclosure)
 and thorough cleaning of the cargo area after transport and unloading of
 asbestos debris is complete. Dispose of waste asbestos material at an
 Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) or State-approved asbestos landfill
 off Government property. For temporary storage, store sealed impermeable
 bags in asbestos waste drums or skids. An area for interim storage of
 asbestos waste-containing drums or skids will be assigned by the Contracting
 Officer or his authorized representative. Procedure for hauling and
 disposal shall comply with 40 CFR 61-SUBPART M, State, regional, and local
 standards. Sealed plastic bags may be dumped from drums into the burial
 site unless the bags have been broken or damaged. Damaged bags shall remain
 in the drum and the entire contaminated drum shall be buried.
 Uncontaminated drums may be recycled. Workers unloading the sealed drums
 shall wear appropriate respirators and personal protective equipment when
 handling asbestos materials at the disposal site.


3.3.3.2     Asbestos Disposal Quantity Report

 Direct the PQP to record and report, to the Contracting Officer, the amount
 of asbestos containing material removed and released for disposal. Deliver
 the report for the previous day at the beginning of each day shift with
 amounts of material removed during the previous day reported in linear feet
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                        Page 187 of 463

 or square feet as described initially in this specification and in cubic
 feet for the amount of asbestos containing material released for disposal.

 Allow the NC to inspect, record and report the amount of asbestos containing
 material removed and released for disposal on a daily basis]


                          *   *   *   END OF SECTION   *   *   *




                                  SECTION 03 01 30.71

                      REHABILITATION OF CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE

PART 1      GENERAL

1.1      REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
 basic designation only.

           AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

 ASTM C 31/C 31M                      (1996) Making and Curing Concrete Test
                                      Specimens in the Field

 ASTM C 33                            (1997) Concrete Aggregates

 ASTM C 39                            (1996) Compressive Strength of Cylindrical
                                      Concrete Specimens
                                                                    W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                 0001
                                                                       Page 188 of 463

 ASTM C 117                          (1995) Materials Finer than 75-Micrometer
                                     (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by
                                     Washing

 ASTM C 136                          (1996; Rev. A) Sieve Analysis of Fine and
                                     Coarse Aggregates

 ASTM C 144                          (1997) Aggregate for Masonry Mortar

 ASTM C 881                          (1990) Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for
                                     Concrete

1.2     DEFINITIONS

1.2.1     Epoxy Resin Binder

 A two-component epoxy bonding system in low and medium viscosities used by
 itself as a primer or for producing epoxy concrete or mortars when mixed
 with aggregate.

1.2.2     Epoxy Concrete

 A combination of epoxy resin binder and fine and coarse aggregate used in
 the repair of spalling along joints or cracks, small surface spalls or
 "popouts."

1.2.3     Epoxy Mortar

 A combination of epoxy resin binder and fine aggregate used in the surface
 repair of non-structural cracks and filling of saw kerfs.

1.2.4     Non-Pressure Epoxy Grout

 A combination of epoxy resin binder, a mineral filler and a thixotropic
 agent used in cementing dowels in place and the repair of non-structural
 cracks.

1.2.5     Pressure Grouting Epoxy

 A low viscosity epoxy resin system pumped under pressure into structural
 cracks in walls or pavements.

1.3     SUBMITTALS

 Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00, "SUBMITTAL
 PROCEDURES".

        SD-05 Design Data, G.

            Job mix formula

        SD-06 Test Reports, G.
                                                                    W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                 0001
                                                                       Page 189 of 463

             Sieve analysis test for aggregate

             Epoxy resin binder tests

             Epoxy grout tests

        SD-07 Certificates, G.
            Epoxy resin binder

             Epoxy grout

        SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions, G.

             Epoxy repair material

             Submit for mixing and applying.

1.4     QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.4.1     Design Data

1.4.1.1      Job Mix Formula

 Submittal shall be approved before work commences, for a job-mix formula for
 each use of epoxy concrete and epoxy mortar. Test reports shall accompany
 the mix design. Identify the proposed source of the materials and state the
 proportions of aggregates and epoxy resin. When determining job mix, use
 samples of materials to be used on the job.

        a.   Trial batches: Perform a minimum of three trial batchings in a
             certified testing laboratory. Try different aggregate-resin
             proportions to obtain satisfactory placing and finishing
             characteristics but keep the proportion by weight of aggregate to
             epoxy resin binder at least five to one. When mixing, add the fine
             aggregates first, and then the coarse aggregates. The final trial
             batch should be sufficiently wet so that some fines will "bleed" to
             the surface during finishing operations.

        b.   Supporting criteria: Include in the submittal the following data
             for each trial batch:

             (1)   Proportions by weight

             (2)   Unit weights and specific gravities of constituents

             (3)   Batch weights

             (4) Compressive strengths of 3 by 6 inch cylinders, made in
             accordance with ASTM C 31/C 31M, air cured for 7 days and tested in
             accordance with ASTM C 39. Compressive strength shall be a minimum
             of 5,000 psi.

             (5)   Curing time
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 190 of 463


1.4.2     Test Reports

1.4.2.1      Epoxy Resin Binder

 Include the following:

        a.   Viscosity

        b.   Consistency

        c.   Gel time

        d.   Absorption

        e.   Shrinkage

        f.   Thermal compatibility

1.4.2.2      Epoxy Resin Grout

 Include the following:

        a.   Epoxy number

        b.   Consistency

        c.   Compressive single shear strength

        d.   Pot life

1.5     DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

 Inspect materials delivered to site for damage, unload and store with a
 minimum of handling. Deliver epoxy resin components and aggregate materials
 in original sealed containers and store in dry covered areas at temperatures
 below 90 degrees F. Remove from job site unused mixed materials which have
 reached end of working or pot life.

1.6     WEATHER LIMITATIONS

 Halt work when weather conditions detrimentally affect the quality of
 patching or bonding concrete. Apply epoxy resin materials only when the
 contact surfaces are completely dry and if the atmospheric and surface
 temperature ranges are suitable for the specified epoxy material. Follow
 manufacturer's instructions for weather conditions and temperature ranges.

1.7     TRAFFIC CONTROL

 Do not permit vehicular or heavy equipment traffic on the pavement in the
 work area during the curing period. At the end of the curing period, light
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                        Page 191 of 463

 local traffic may be permitted on the pavement if approved by the
 Contracting Officer.

1.8      EQUIPMENT

 Use a container recommended by the epoxy manufacturer as the mixing vessel.
 Use a power drive (air or spark-proof) propeller type blade for mixing
 except that hand mixing may be used for small batches. Use equipment
 specified by epoxy manufacturer for field mixing of aggregates and epoxy
 resin.

PART 2        PRODUCTS

2.1      MATERIALS

2.1.1      Epoxy

2.1.1.1        Epoxy Resin Binder for Concrete and Mortar

 ASTM C 881, Type III, Grade 1, Class B or C without mineral filler. For
 ceilings use ASTM C 881, Type III, Grade 3, Class B or C with filler.

2.1.1.2        Non-Pressure Epoxy Grout

 ASTM C 881 Type IV, Grade 3, Class B or C with or without mineral filler.

2.1.1.3        Crack Sealer for Pressure Grouting

 ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 1, Class B or C without filler.

2.1.1.4        Crack Surface Sealer for Pressure Grouting

 ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, Class B or C with mineral filler.

2.1.2      Aggregate

 For material passing No. 200 sieve provide a non-plastic material composed
 of a minimum of 75 percent limestone dust, talc or silica inert filler.
 Provide dry aggregate.

         a.    For epoxy concrete: ASTM C 33, maximum size 1/2 inch.      Conform to
               the following requirements:

              Sieve Designation               Percent Passing by Weight

                     1/2   in.
                     3/8   in.                           100
                     No.   4                            93-100
                     No.   8                            70-80
                     No.   16                           50-65
                     No.   30                           37-53
                     No.   50                           20-37
                     No.   100                          10-20
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                   Page 192 of 463

                    No. 200                              5-10
                                                         3-5]

         b.    For epoxy mortar:   ASTM C 144, No. 40 sieve.

PART 3        EXECUTION

3.1      PREPARATION

3.1.1      Epoxy Concrete

3.1.1.1        Patch Areas

 Remove loose concrete from the spalled areas indicated. Inspect the cavity
 for remaining defective concrete by tapping with a hammer or steel rod and
 listening for dull or hollow sounds. In areas where tapping does not
 produce a solid tone, remove additional concrete until testing produces a
 solid tone. Make the entire cavity at least one inch deep. Sawcut edges of
 cavity to avoid feather edging. Prepare surface of cavity by sandblasting,
 grinding, or water blasting. Remove dust, dirt, and loosely bonded material
 resulting from cleaning. Ensure cavity surfaces are dry.

3.1.1.2        Spalls at Joints and Cracks

 For spalls to be repaired that are adjacent to joints and working cracks
 insert preformed joint filler to the working faces of the spall. Trim
 filler to fit shape of the working faces of joint or crack so epoxy material
 is prevented from bypassing filler. Where practicable, extend filler
 horizontally and vertically into joint or crack opening. Secure filler
 strip in place prior to and during placement of epoxy concrete. Apply a bond
 breaker to working faces at keyed joints. Keep bond breaker off of concrete
 surface to be bonded. After the epoxy concrete has completely cured, saw
 out the top inch of the preformed joint filler and install liquid joint
 sealer in accordance with manufacturer recommendation.

3.1.1.3   Joints and Cracks
  Clean and seal joints and cracks as specified in Section 07920.

3.1.2      Epoxy Mortar for Cracks and Saw Kerfs

 Apply epoxy mortar to newly exposed loose and unsound materials. Prepare
 surfaces by scarifying or waterblasting. Remove dust, dirt, and loosely
 bonded material resulting from cleaning. Ensure surfaces are dry before
 application of epoxy mortar.

3.1.3      Epoxy Grout for Cracks

 Apply grout to newly exposed concrete free of loose and unsound materials.
 Prepare surfaces by scarifying or waterblasting. Remove dust, dirt, and
 loosely bonded material resulting from cleaning. Ensure surfaces are dry
 before application of epoxy grout.
                                                                    W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                 0001
                                                                       Page 193 of 463

3.2     MIXING MATERIALS

 Make batches small enough to ensure placement before binder sets.        Mix
 materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.3     PLACEMENT

3.3.1     Epoxy Concrete

 Prime dry cavity surfaces with epoxy resin using a stiff bristle brush. Make
 coating approximately 20 mils thick. Place epoxy concrete while primer is
 still tacky and in layers not exceeding one inch thick. Use vibratory
 floats, plates, or hand tampers to consolidate the concrete. Level each
 layer and screed the final surface to match the adjoining surfaces. Remove
 excess epoxy concrete on adjacent surfaces before the concrete hardens. Do
 not feather epoxy concrete out onto adjacent surfaces.

3.3.2     Epoxy Mortar

 Prime surfaces with epoxy resin binder. Scrub prime coat into surface with
 a stiff bristle brush. Make coating approximately 20 mils thick. Place
 epoxy mortar while primer is still tacky. Apply at a thickness recommended
 by the manufacturer. Work mortar into place and consolidate thoroughly so
 that contact surfaces are wetted by the mortar. Finish surface of mortar to
 the required texture. Do not feather edge epoxy mortar onto adjacent
 surfaces.

3.3.3     Non-Pressure Epoxy Grout

3.3.3.1     Cementing Dowels

 Immediately prior to      placing the dowel, clean hole of dust and other
 deleterious material      with a high pressure air hose. Fill hole halfway with
 grout. Insert dowel       in hole by rotating it at least one complete turn while
 tapping it down. If       necessary add more grout to fill hole.


3.3.3.2     Epoxy Grout for Cracks

 Apply epoxy grout at a thickness recommended by the manufacturer. Work
 grout into place and consolidate thoroughly so that contact surfaces are
 wetted by the grout. Finish surface of grout to the required texture. Do
 not feather edge epoxy grout onto adjacent surfaces.

3.3.4     Pressure Grouting of Cracks

 Clean each crack of dust, dirt, loose concrete and unsound material. Insert
 a valve at both ends of each crack, at the junction of two cracks, and along
 the length of each crack at 16 to 20 inch intervals. Fill crack between
 valves with crack surface sealer. After crack surface sealer has hardened
 and cured, pump crack sealer into valve at one end of crack. For vertical
 surfaces start at lowest valve and work upwards. As crack sealer appears at
 next valve, pinch closed pumping valve and move to next valve and commence
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                        Page 194 of 463

 pumping. Continue procedure until other end of crack is reached. Avoid
 delays in pumping operation. After crack sealer has hardened and cured
 grind valves off flush with concrete surface. Coat areas of valves with
 crack surface sealer and allow to harden and cure.

3.4      CURING

 Cure epoxy materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.5      FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.5.1      Sampling

 As soon as epoxy resin and aggregate materials are available for sampling,
 obtain by random selection a sample of each batch. Clearly identify samples
 by designated name, specification number, batch number, project contract
 number, intended use and quantity involved.

3.5.2      Testing

 At the discretion of the Contracting Officer, samples provided may be tested
 by the Contractor for verification. Test samples by an approved laboratory.
 If a sample fails to meet specification requirements after two tests,
 replace the batch represented by the samples tested and retest. Test
 aggregates in accordance with ASTM C 117 and ASTM C 136.

3.5.3      Inspection

 Check each repaired area for cracks, spalls, pop-outs and loss of bond
 between repaired area and surrounding concrete. Check each repaired area
 for voids by tapping with a hammer or steel rod and listening for dull or
 hollow sounds. Immediately repair defects.


                          *   *   *    END OF SECTION    *   *   *




                                      SECTION 03 52 00

                        LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE ROOF INSULATION

PART 1      GENERAL

1.1      REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
 basic designation only.
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                   Page 195 of 463

        AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING
        ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)

 ASHRAE HF                      (1989) Handbook, Fundamentals

        AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

 ASTM A 185                     (1997) Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for
                                Concrete Reinforcement

 ASTM C 150                     (1997) Portland Cement

 ASTM C 332                     (1987; R 1991) Lightweight Aggregates for
                                Insulating Concrete

 ASTM C 495                     (1991; Rev. A) Compressive Strength of
                                Lightweight Insulating Concrete

 ASTM C 513                     (1989; R 1995) Obtaining and Testing
                                Specimens of Hardened Lightweight Insulating
                                Concrete for Compressive Strength

 ASTM C 578                     (1995) Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal
                                Insulation

 ASTM C 612                     (1993) Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal
                                Insulation

 ASTM C 796                     (1987; Rev. A, R 1993) Foaming Agents for use
                                in Producing Cellular Concrete Using
                                Preformed Foam

1.2   QUALIFICATIONS OF APPLICATOR

 Perform work by or under the supervision of personnel specializing in
 insulating concrete application and having not less than 2 years experience.

1.3   SUBMITTALS

 Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00, "Submittal
 Procedures."

      SD-03 Product Data, G.

          Performance requirements

          Submit, indicating compressive strength, oven dry density, and
          coefficient of heat transmission.

      SD-06 Test Reports, G.

          Performance requirements
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 196 of 463


             Submit certified test reports on laboratory testing of insulating
             concrete samples taken at time of placement.

         SD-07 Certificates, G.

             Fabricator's Compatibility Certificates

         SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions, G.

             Application

 1.4      DELIVERY AND STORAGE

 Deliver all materials to the building site in original unopened, undamaged
 packages or containers, or approved bulk handling equipment, with
 manufacturer's brand name and contents clearly identified. Protect
 materials against dampness. Store materials under cover and off the ground,
 in well-ventilated areas, not exposed to extreme changes of temperature and
 humidity. Prevent deterioration or intrusion of foreign substances. Keep
 materials dry until ready for use. Protect metal components from rusting.

1.5      ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

1.5.1      Normal Conditions

 When ambient air temperatures of 40 degrees F or above are predicted for the
 initial 24 to 72 hours after placement of insulating concrete, the use of
 hot water and other cold weather protection measures are not required.

1.6      SAFETY AND HEALTH REQUIREMENTS

  Comply with manufacturer's protective measures in the safe installation of
  the insulation board.
1.7   QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.7.1      Fabricator's Compatibility Certificates

 Submit a written statement from the insulating concrete fabricator
 certifying that materials for this project are chemically and physically
 compatible.


PART 2      PRODUCTS

2.1   PORTLAND CEMENT
  ASTM C 150, Type I.

2.2   AGGREGATE
  ASTM C 332, Group I.
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                   Page 197 of 463

2.3      AIR-ENTRAINMENT

 The air-entrainment agent shall be prepackaged or added at the mixer.
 Provide amount and type of air-entrainment in accordance with the aggregate
 manufacturer's recommendations. Do not use calcium chloride.

2.4      FOAMING AGENTS

 ASTM C 796.

2.5      WATER

 Water shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of acids, alkali,
 organic matter, or other deleterious substances.

2.6      EXPANSION JOINT FILLER MATERIAL

 ASTM C 612, Class 1, semi-rigid, modified for maximum density of 6.0 pounds
 per cubic foot.

2.7   WELDED WIRE FABRIC
  Galvanized steel welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A 185.

PART 3      EXECUTION

3.1      PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

 Provide insulating concrete design mix to shall meet the following
 performance requirements. Test as specified.

3.1.1      Minimum Compressive Strength

 125 pounds per square inch in 28 days as tested with ASTM C 495.

3.1.2   Minimum Oven Dry Density
   22 pounds per cubic foot as determined by ASTM C 495.

3.1.3   Coefficient of Heat Transmission
  U value of .85 Btu/hr/sq. ft/degree F, as determined in accordance with
  ASHRAE HF. The U value shall incorporate the total roof deck and roofing
  system design and represent the average U value for the total roof area.

3.2      SURFACE PREPARATION

 Clean surfaces to receive insulating concrete of dirt, debris, and other
 foreign materials that would affect bonding. Deck shall be free of standing
 water.

3.3      REINFORCING MESH OR WELDED WIRE FABRIC

 Install reinforcing mesh or welded wire fabric with a minimum end lap of 6
 inches and no side lap. Cut mesh or fabric to fit at all walls, curbs, roof
 drains, and openings. Mesh not required over structural concrete decks.
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                     Page 198 of 463


3.4     APPLICATION OF INSULATING CONCRETE AND INSULATION BOARD

 Apply insulating concrete, insulation board and related materials in
 accordance with respective specifications and manufacturer's instructions,
 except as modified herein.

3.4.1     Mixing

 Mix insulating concrete materials mechanically to produce a uniform
 distribution.

3.4.2     Conveying

 Convey insulating concrete from the mixer to place of final deposit by
 methods that prevent segregation or loss of materials. Convey the concrete
 without material separation or loss of air content.

3.4.3     Expansion Joints

 Provide expansion joints through the depth of the light-weight insulating
 concrete at the perimeters of the roof deck, where the roof deck abuts
 vertical surfaces and where indicated.

3.4.4     Slurry Coat and Insulation Board

 Bond the insulation board to the structural deck with a slurry coat of the
 same insulating concrete mix ratio as used for fill over the insulation
 board. Screed the slurry of concrete to an even surface, to a minimum of
 1/8 inch over the top of the structural deck. Fill corrugations of steel
 decking with insulating concrete and screed even with the slurry coat.

3.4.5     Insulating Concrete Fill

 Place the insulating concrete on the insulation board and screed to an even
 surface in a continuous operation until placement of a section is completed.
 Provide slopes as indicated for high points, valleys and positive drainage
 to roof drains and to eliminate water accumulation. At no place shall the
 minimum and maximum thickness of the insulating concrete be less than 2
 inches or greater than 8 inches respectively over the top of insulation
 board.

3.4.5.1     Compacting

 Rodding, tamping, or vibrating are not permitted.

3.4.5.2     Curing

 Minimize traffic on the surface during the curing period. Under normal
 conditions, roofing may begin in 3 days. When the insulating concrete is
 placed during extremely dry conditions, sprinkle additional water on the
 concrete for hydration of the cement and to minimize shrinkage cracking.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 199 of 463

 After a heavy rainfall broom the surface immediately prior to installation
 of roofing.

3.4.5.3      Patching

 Remove portions of the insulating concrete deck with excessive scaling of
 more than 1/4 inch depth to sound concrete. Patch the surface with portland
 cement concrete slurry.

3.6      FIELD TESTS

 During progress of work, insulating concrete specimens shall be taken for
 laboratory testing as specified herein.

3.6.1      Test Specimens

 Take test cylinder specimens for compressive strength in the presence of the
 Contracting Officer. Notify the Contracting Officer one day prior to the
 date of taking specimens. A minimum of four test specimens shall be made
 for each day's concreting, with at least one test required for each 50 cubic
 yards of insulating concrete. Label specimens to indicate the location at
 which they were taken. Store specimens in an undisturbed place, which will
 not be exposed to rain, and extreme changes of temperature and humidity
 until ready for testing.

3.6.2      Rejections

 If the specified laboratory requirements are not met, the rejected
 insulating concrete shall be field tested for the compressive strength.
 Determine oven-dry unit weight with ASTM C 513. Remove and replace
 insulating concrete which does not meet the requirements specified with new
 insulating concrete roof deck materials.


                            *** END OF SECTION ***




                               SECTION 05 30 00

                                STEEL DECKING

PART 1      GENERAL

1.1      REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic
 designation only.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 200 of 463

      AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)

AISC ASD Spec S335            (1989) Specification for Structural Steel
                              Buildings - Allowable Stress Design, Plastic
                              Design

      AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE (AISI)

AISI Cold-Formed Mnl          (1996) Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual

      AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

ASTM A 108                    (1999) Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished,
                              Standard Quality

ASTM A 570/A 570M             (1998) Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-
                              Rolled, Structural Quality

ASTM A 611                    (1997) Structural Steel (SS), Sheet, Carbon,
                              Cold-Rolled

ASTM A 653/A 653M             (2000) Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
                              or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
                              the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM A 780                    (2000) Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas
                              of Hot-Dipped Galvanized Coatings

ASTM A 792/A 792M             (1999) Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-
                              Coated by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM C 423                    (1999a) Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption
                              Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method

ASTM E 795                    (2000) Mounting Test Specimens During Sound
                              Absorption Tests

      AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

AWS D1.1                      (2000) Structural Welding Code - Steel

AWS D1.3                      (1998) Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel


      STEEL DECK INSTITUTE (SDI)

SDI Diaphragm Mnl             (1991) Diaphragm Design Manual

SDI Pub No 29                 (1995) Design Manual for Composite Decks,
                              Form Decks, Roof Decks, and Cellular Metal
                              Floor Deck with Electrical Distribution
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                     Page 201 of 463

        THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)

 SSPC Paint 20                     (1991) Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I -
                                   "Inorganic" and Type II - "Organic")

1.2   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that
 will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
 submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

      SD-02 Shop Drawings

          Deck Units; G.
          Accessories; G.
          Attachments; G.
          Holes and Openings; G.

            Drawings shall include type, configuration, structural
          properties, location, and necessary details of deck units,
          accessories, and supporting members; size and location of holes to
          be cut and reinforcement to be provided; location and sequence of
          welded or fastener connections; and the manufacturer's erection
          instructions.

      SD-03 Product Data

          Deck Units; G.

            Design computations for the structural properties of the deck
          units or SDI certification that the units are designed in
          accordance with SDI specifications.

          Attachments; G.

          Prior to welding operations, submit certification for welder
          qualification, copies of qualified procedures and lists of names
          and identification symbols of qualified welders, welding operators
          and the firm and individual certifying the qualification tests.

      SD-04 Samples

          Deck Units; G.
          Accessories; G.

            A 2 sq. ft. sample of the decking material to be used, along with
          a sample of each of the accessories used. A sample of acoustical
          material to be used shall be included.

      SD-07 Certificates
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 202 of 463

             Deck Units; G.
             Attachments; G.

               Manufacturer's certificates attesting that the decking material
             meets the specified requirements. Manufacturer's certificate
             attesting that the operators are authorized to use the low-velocity
             piston tool.

1.3      DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

 Deck units shall be delivered to the site in a dry and undamaged condition,
 stored off the ground with one end elevated, and stored under a weather
 tight covering permitting good air circulation. Finish of deck units shall
 be maintained at all times by using touch-up paint whenever necessary to
 prevent the formation of rust.

PART 2      PRODUCTS

2.1      DECK UNITS

 Deck units shall conform to SDI Pub No 29. Panels of maximum possible
 lengths shall be used to minimize end laps. Deck units shall be fabricated
 in lengths to span 3 or more supports with flush, telescoped, or nested 2
 inch laps at ends, and interlocking, or nested side laps, unless otherwise
 indicated. Deck with cross-sectional configuration differing from the units
 indicated may be used, provided that the properties of the proposed units,
 determined in accordance with AISI Cold-Formed Mnl, are equal to or greater
 than the properties of the units indicated and that the material will fit
 the space provided without requiring revisions to adjacent materials or
 systems.

2.1.1      Roof Deck

 Steel deck used in conjunction with insulation and built-up roofing shall
 conform to ASTM A 792/A 792M, ASTM A 611 or ASTM A 792/A 792M. Roof deck
 units shall be fabricated of the steel design thickness required by the
 existing condition and shall be shop painted, galvanized, painted with an
 epoxy coating or equivalent applied to prime-coating in accordance with
 manufacturer's standard or zinc-coated in conformance with ASTM A 653/A
 653M, G90 coating class or aluminum-zinc coated in accordance with ASTM A
 792/A 792M Coating Designation AZ55; according to existing condition.

2.1.2      Sump Pans

 Sump pans shall be provided for roof drains and shall be minimum 0.075 inch
 thick steel, flat or recessed type as existing condition. Sump pans shall
 be shaped to meet roof slope by the supplier or by a sheet metal specialist.
 Bearing flanges of sump pans shall overlap steel deck a minimum of 3 inches.
 Opening in bottom of pan shall be shaped, sized, and reinforced to receive
 roof drain.

2.1.3      Shear Connectors
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 203 of 463

 Shear connectors shall be headed stud type, ASTM A 108, Grade 1015 or 1020,
 cold finished carbon steel with dimensions complying with AISC ASD Spec S335
 or strap type, ASTM A 570/A 570M, Grade D, hot-rolled carbon steel as
 existing condition.

2.2      TOUCH-UP PAINT

 Touch-up paint for shop-painted units shall be of the same type used for the
 shop painting, and touch-up paint for zinc-coated units shall be an approved
 galvanizing repair paint with a high-zinc dust content. Welds shall be
 touched-up with paint conforming to SSPC Paint 20 in accordance with ASTM A
 780. Finish of deck units and accessories shall be maintained by using
 touch-up paint whenever necessary to prevent the formation of rust.

2.3      ADJUSTING PLATES

 Adjusting plates or segments of deck units shall be provided in locations
 too narrow to accommodate full-size units. As far as practical, the plates
 shall be the same thickness and configuration as the deck units.

2.4      CLOSURE PLATES

2.4.1. Closure Plates for Roof Dec

 Voids above interior walls shall be closed with sheet metal where shown.
 Open decks cells at parapets, end walls, eaves, and opening through roof
 shall be closed with sheet metal. Sheet metals shall be same thickness as
 deck units.

2.5      ACCESSORIES

 The manufacturer's standard accessories shall be furnished as necessary to
 complete the deck installation. Metal accessories shall be of the same
 material as the deck and have minimum design thickness as follows: saddles,
 0.0474 inch; welding washers, 0.0598 inch; cant strip, 0.0295 inch; other
 metal accessories, 0.0358 inch; unless otherwise indicated. Accessories
 shall include but not be limited to saddles, welding washers, cant strips,
 butt cover plates, under lapping sleeves, and ridge and valley plates.

PART 3      EXECUTION

3.1      ERECTION

 Erection of deck and accessories shall be in accordance with SDI Pub No 29,
 SDI Diaphragm Mnl and the approved detail drawings. Damaged deck and
 accessories including material which is permanently stained or contaminated,
 with burned holes or deformed shall not be installed. The deck units shall
 be placed on secure supports, properly adjusted, and aligned at right angles
 to supports before being permanently secured in place. The deck shall not
 be used for storage or as a working platform until the units have been
 secured in position. Loads shall be distributed by appropriate means to
 prevent damage during construction and to the completed assembly. The
 maximum uniform distributed storage load shall not exceed the design live
 load. There shall be no loads suspended directly from the steel deck.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 204 of 463


3.2      ATTACHMENTS

 All fasteners shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
 recommended procedure, except as otherwise specified. The deck units shall
 be welded with nominal 5/8-inch diameter puddle welds or fastened with
 screws, powder-actuated fasteners or pneumatically driven fasteners to
 supports as indicated on the design drawings and in accordance with
 requirements of SDI Pub No 29. All welding of steel deck shall be in
 accordance with AWS D1.3 using methods and electrodes as recommended by the
 manufacturer of the steel deck being used. Welds shall be made only by
 operators previously qualified by tests prescribed in AWS D1.3 to perform
 the type of work required. Welding washers shall not be used at the
 connections of the deck to supports. Welding washers shall not be used at
 side laps. Holes and similar defects will not be acceptable. Deck ends
 shall be lapped 2 inches or butted. All partial or segments of deck units
 shall be attached to structural supports in accordance with Section 2.5 of
 SDI Diaphragm Mnl.   Powder-actuated fasteners shall be driven with a low-
 velocity piston tool by an operator authorized by the manufacturer of the
 piston tool. Pneumatically driven fasteners shall be driven with a low-
 velocity fastening tool and shall comply with the manufacturer's
 recommendations.

3.3      HOLES AND OPENINGS

 All holes and openings required shall be coordinated with the drawings,
 specifications, and other trades. Holes and openings shall be drilled or
 cut, reinforced and framed as indicated on the drawings or described in the
 specifications and as required for rigidity and load capacity. Holes and
 openings less than 6 inches across require no reinforcement. Holes and
 openings 6 to 12 inches across shall be reinforced by 0.0474 inch thick
 steel sheet at least 12 inches wider and longer than the opening and be
 fastened to the steel deck at each corner of the sheet and at a maximum of 6
 inches on center. Holes and openings larger than 12 inches shall be
 reinforced by steel angles installed perpendicular to the steel joists and
 supported by the adjacent steel joists. Steel angles shall be installed
 perpendicular to the deck ribs and shall be fastened to the angles
 perpendicular to the steel joists. Openings must not interfere with seismic
 members such as chords and drag struts.

                              *** END OF SECTION ***

                                 SECTION 05 50 00

                                METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1      GENERAL

1.1      REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
 basic designation only.
                                                                 W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                    Page 205 of 463

        ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)

AA 45                           (1980) Aluminum Finishes

AA 46                           (1978) Anodized Architectural Aluminum

        AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS
        (AASHTO)

AASHTO M180                     (1995) Corrugated Sheet Steel Beams for
                                Highway Guardrail

        AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)

AISC S303                       (1992) Steel Buildings and Bridges

AISC S335                       (1989) Structural Steel Buildings Allowable
                                Stress Design and Plastic Design

AISC S342L                      (1993) Load and Resistance Factor Design
                                Specification for Structural Steel Buildings

        AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

ANSI A10.3                      (1995) Power-Actuated Fastening Systems

ANSI B18.2.1                    (1996) Square and Hex Bolts and Screws Inch
                                Series

ANSI B18.6.2                    (1972; R 1993) Slotted Head Cap Screws,
                                Square Head Set Screws, and Slotted Headless
                                Set Screws

ANSI B18.6.3                    (1972; R 1997) Machine Screws and Machine
                                Screw Nuts

        ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)

ASME/ANSI B18.2.2               (1987; R 1993) Square and Hex Nuts (Inch
                                Series)

ASME/ANSI B18.21.1              (1994) Lock Washers (Inch Series)

ASME/ANSI B18.21.2M             (1994) Lock Washers (Metric)

ASME/ANSI B18.22M               (1981; R 1990) Metric Plain Washers

ASME/ANSI B18.22.1              (1965; R 1998) Plain Washers

        AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

ASTM A 36/A 36M                 (1996) Carbon Structural Steel
                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                0001
                                                      Page 206 of 463


ASTM A 47M          (1990; R 1996) Ferritic Malleable Iron
                    Castings (Metric)

ASTM A 47           (1990; R 1995) Ferritic Malleable Iron
                    Castings

ASTM A 48M          (1994; Rev. A) Gray Iron Castings (Metric)

ASTM A 48           (1994; Rev. A) Gray Iron Castings

ASTM A 53           (1996) Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,
                    Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless

ASTM A 123/A 123M   (1997; Rev. A) Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
                    Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

ASTM A 153/A 153M   (1995) Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and
                    Steel Hardware

ASTM A 307          (1994) Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000
                    psi Tensile Strength

ASTM A 500          (1996) Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
                    Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes

ASTM A 569/A 569M   (1997) Commercial Steel (CS) Sheet and Strip,
                    Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot-Rolled

ASTM A 653/A 653M   (1997) Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
                    or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
                    the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM A 687          (1993) High-Strength Nonheaded Steel Bolts
                    and Studs

ASTM A 780          (1993; Rev. A) Repair of Damaged and Uncoated
                    Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

ASTM A 786/A 786M   (1993) Rolled Steel Floor Plates

ASTM B 26/B 26M     (1997) Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings

ASTM B 108          (1997) Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings

ASTM B 209M         (1995) Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
                    Plate (Metric)



ASTM B 209          (1996) Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
                    Plate
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                   Page 207 of 463


ASTM B 221M                   (1996) Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded
                              Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
                              (Metric)

ASTM B 221                    (1996) Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded
                              Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

ASTM B 429                    (1995) Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural
                              Pipe and Tube

ASTM D 1187                   (1997) Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as
                              Protective Coatings for Metal

ASTM E 488                    (1996) Strength of Anchors in Concrete and
                              Masonry Elements

      AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

AWS D1.1                      (1998) Structural Welding Code - Steel

      U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

29 CFR 1910.27                Fixed Ladders

      U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)

FS TT-P-664                   (Rev. D) Primer Coating, Alkyd, Corrosion-
                              Inhibiting, Lead and Chromate Free, VOC-
                              Compliant

FS RR-G-1602                  (Rev. D) Grating, Metal, Other Than Bar Type
                              (Floor, Except for Naval Vessels)

      NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (NAAMM)

NAAMM BG                      (1993) Metal Bar Grating Manual

NAAMM PR                      (1995) Pipe Railing Manual

      NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 101                      (1997) Life Safety Code

      THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)

SSPC SP 3                     (1995) Power Tool Cleaning

SSPC SP 6                     (1994) Commercial Blast Cleaning
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                     Page 208 of 463


1.2   SUBMITTALS

 Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00, "Submittal
 Procedures."

      SD-02 Shop Drawings

          Fabrication drawings of steel stairs; GA

          Fabrication drawings of structural steel door frames; GA

          Access doors and panels, installation drawings; GA

          Cover plates and frames, installation drawings; GA

          Expansion joint covers, installation drawings; GA

          Roof walkways, installation drawings; GA

          Handrails, installation drawings; GA

          Ladders, installation drawings; GA

          Embedded angles and plates, installation drawings; GA

          Roof hatch; GA

          Submit fabrication drawings showing layout(s), connections to
          structural system, and anchoring details as specified in AISC S303.

          Submit templates, erection and installation drawings indicating
          thickness, type, grade, class of metal, and dimensions. Show
          construction details, reinforcement, anchorage, and installation
          with relation to the building construction.

      SD-03 Product Data

          Access doors and panels; GA

          Cover plates and frames; GA

          Control-joint covers; GA

          Expansion joint covers; GA

          Floor gratings and roof walkways; GA

          Handrails; GA

          Ladders; GA
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                        Page 209 of 463


               Steel stairs; GA

               Steel Stairs, circular; GA

               Structural steel door frames; GA

               Roof hatch; GA

         SD-04 Samples

               Expansion joint covers; GA

               Control-joint covers; GA

               Samples may be installed in the work, provided each sample is
               clearly identified and its location recorded.

1.3      QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS

 Qualify welders in accordance with AWS D1.1.        Use procedures, materials, and
 equipment of the type required for the work.

1.4      DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

 Protect from corrosion, deformation, and other types of damage. Store items
 in an enclosed area free from contact with soil and weather. Remove and
 replace damaged items with new items.

PART 2        PRODUCTS

2.1      MATERIALS

2.1.1      Structural Carbon Steel

 ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.1.2      Structural Tubing

 ASTM A 500.

2.1.3      Steel Pipe

 ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B.

2.1.4      Fittings for Steel Pipe

 Standard malleable iron fittings ASTM A 47.

2.1.5      Gratings

         a.    Gray cast iron ASTM A 48, Class 40.
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                        Page 210 of 463


        b.   Metal plank grating, non-slip requirement, FS RR-G-1602 aluminum
             ASTM B 209, 6061-T6; steel ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90.

        c.   Metal bar type grating NAAMM BG.

2.1.6     Floor Plates, Patterned

 Floor plate ASTM A 786/A 786M.        Steel plate shall not be less than 14 gage.

2.1.7     Anchor Bolts

 ASTM A 307. Where exposed, shall be of the same material, color, and finish
 as the metal to which applied.

2.1.7.1      Lag Screws and Bolts

 ANSI B18.2.1, type and grade best suited for the purpose.

2.1.7.2      Toggle Bolts

 ANSI B18.2.1.

2.1.7.3      Bolts, Nuts, Studs and Rivets

 ASME/ANSI B18.2.2 and ASTM A 687 or ASTM A 307.

2.1.7.4      Powder Driven Fasteners

 Follow safety provisions of ANSI A10.3.

2.1.7.5      Screws

 ANSI B18.2.1, ANSI B18.6.2, and ANSI B18.6.3.

2.1.7.6      Washers

 Provide plain washers to conform to ASME/ANSI B18.22.1. Provide beveled
 washers for American Standard beams and channels, square or rectangular,
 tapered in thickness, and smooth. Provide lock washers to conform to
 ASME/ANSI B18.21.1.

2.1.8     Aluminum Alloy Products

 Conform to ASTM B 209 for sheet plate, ASTM B 221 for extrusions and ASTM B
 26/B 26M or ASTM B 108 for castings, as applicable. Provide aluminum
 extrusions at least 1/8-inch thick and aluminum plate or sheet at least
 0.050 inch thick.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 211 of 463

2.2     FABRICATION FINISHES

2.2.1     Galvanizing

 Hot-dip galvanized items specified to be zinc-coated, after fabrication
 where practicable. Galvanizing: ASTM A 123/A 123M, ASTM A 153/A 153 Mor
 ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90, as applicable.

2.2.2     Galvanize

 Anchor bolts, grating fasteners, washers, and parts or devices necessary for
 proper installation, unless indicated otherwise.

2.2.3     Repair of Zinc-Coated Surfaces

 Repair damaged surfaces with galvanizing repair method and paint conforming
 to ASTM A 780 or by application of stick or thick paste material
 specifically designed for repair of galvanizing, as approved by Contracting
 Officer. Clean areas to be repaired and remove slag from welds. Heat
 surfaces to which stick or paste material is applied, with a torch to a
 temperature sufficient to melt the metallics in stick or paste; spread
 molten material uniformly over surfaces to be coated and wipe off excess
 material.

2.2.4     Shop Cleaning and Painting

2.2.4.1     Surface Preparation

 Blast clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 6. Surfaces that will be
 exposed in spaces above ceiling or in attic spaces, crawl spaces, furred
 spaces, and chases may be cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP 3 in lieu of
 being blast cleaned. Wash cleaned surfaces, which become contaminated with
 rust, dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants with solvents until
 thoroughly clean. Steel to be embedded in concrete shall be free of dirt
 and grease. Do not paint or galvanize bearing surfaces, including contact
 surfaces within slip critical joints, but coat with rust preventative
 applied in the shop.

2.2.4.2     Pretreatment, Priming and Painting

 Apply pretreatment, primer, and paint in accordance with manufacturer's
 printed instructions.

2.2.5     Nonferrous Metal Surfaces

 Protect by plating, anodic, or organic coatings.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 212 of 463

2.2.6     Aluminum Surfaces

2.2.6.1     Surface Condition

 Before finishes are applied, remove roll marks, scratches, rolled-in
 scratches, kinks, stains, pits, orange peel, die marks, structural streaks,
 and other defects which will affect uniform appearance of finished surfaces.

2.2.6.2     Unexposed Sheet, Plate, and Extrusions

 Unexposed sheet, plate and extrusions may have mill finish as fabricated.
 Sandblast castings' finish, medium, AA 45, or AA 46.

2.3     ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

 Provide flush type access doors and panels. Fabricate frames for access
 doors of steel not lighter than 14 gage with welded joints and anchorage for
 securing into construction. Provide access doors with a minimum of 14 by 20
 inches and of not lighter than 14 gage steel, with stiffened edges and
 welded attachments. Provide access doors hinged to frame and with a flush-
 face, turn-screw-operated latch. Provide exposed metal surface with a baked
 enamel finish.

2.4     CONTROL-JOINT COVERS

 Provide control-joint covers to be located on wall surfaces of concrete,
 masonry and tile work. Provide protective coating on the surface in contact
 with concrete, masonry or tile.

2.5     CORNER GUARDS AND SHIELDS

 Jambs and sills of openings and edges of platforms shall be steel shapes and
 plates anchored in masonry or concrete with welded steel straps or end-weld
 stud anchors.

2.6     COVER PLATES AND FRAMES

 Fabricate cover plates of 1/4-inch thick rolled steel weighing not more than
 100 pounds per plate with a selected raised pattern non-slip top surface.
 Plate shall be galvanized. Frames shall be structural steel shapes and
 plates, securely fastened to the structure as indicated. Miter and weld all
 corners. Butt joint straight runs. Allow for expansion on straight runs
 over 15 feet. Provide holes for lifting tools. Provide flush drop handles
 for removal formed from 1/4 inch round stock where indicated. Provide holes
 and openings with 1/2-inch clearance for pipes and equipment. Remove sharp
 edges and burrs from cover plates and exposed edges of frames. Weld all
 connections and grind top surface smooth. Weld bar stops every six inches.
 Provide 1/8-inch clearance at edges and between cover plates.

2.7     EXPANSION JOINT COVERS

 Provide expansion joint covers constructed of extruded aluminum with
 anodized satin aluminum finish for walls and ceilings and with standard mill
                                                                    W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                 0001
                                                                       Page 213 of 463

 finish for floor covers and exterior covers. Furnish plates, backup angles,
 expansion filler strip and anchors as indicated.

2.8   FLOOR GRATINGS AND ROOF WALKWAYS
  Design steel grating in accordance with NAAMM BG for bar type grating or
  manufacturer's charts for plank grating. Galvanize steel floor gratings.

         a.   Design floor gratings to support a live load of as indicated per
              square foot for the spans indicated, with maximum deflection of
              L/240.

         b.   NAAMM BG, band ends of gratings with bars of the same or greater
              thickness than the metal used for grating. Weld banding bars to
              the bearing bars or channels at least every fourth bar or channel
              and in every corner. Tack weld intervening bars or channels. Band
              diagonal or round cuts by welding bars of the same or greater
              thickness metal used for grating in accordance with the
              manufacturer's standard for trim unless otherwise indicated.

         c.   Anchor gratings to structural members with bolts, toggle bolts, or
              expansion shields and bolts. Attach grating as per manufacturer's
              roof attachment system.

         d.   Slip resistance requirements FS RR-G-1602.

         e.   Rooftop walkway: Minimum 2 feet wide, 14 gage, ASTM A 653/A 653M,
              G-90, steel with slip resistant surface. Furnish all brackets,
              connectors and other accessories. Support at minimum 5-foot
              intervals on hard rubber pads in accordance with manufacturers
              instructions.

2.9     HANDRAILS

 Design handrails to resist a concentrated load of 250 lbs. in any direction
 at any point of the top of the rail or 20 lbs. per foot applied horizontally
 to top of the rail, whichever is more severe. NAAMM PR, provide the same
 size rail and post. Provide pipe collars of the same material and finish as
 the handrail and posts.

2.9.1      Steel Handrails, Including Carbon Steel Inserts

 Provide steel handrails, including inserts in concrete, steel pipe
 conforming to ASTM A 53. Provide steel railings of 2 inches nominal size.
 Railings to be hot-dip galvanized and shop painted.

         a.   Fabrication: Joint posts, rail, and corners by one of the
              following methods:

              (1) Flush-type rail fittings of commercial standard, welded and
              ground smooth with railing splice locks secured with 3/8-inch
              hexagonal-recessed-head setscrews.

              (2) Mitered and welded joints made by fitting post to top rail and
              intermediate rail to post, mitering corners, groove welding joints,
                                                                    W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                 0001
                                                                       Page 214 of 463

               and grinding smooth. Butt railing splices and reinforce them by a
               tight fitting interior sleeve not less than 6 inches long.

               (3) Railings may be bent at corners in lieu of jointing, provided
               bends are made in suitable jigs and the pipe is not crushed.

         b.    Provide removable sections as indicated.

2.10     LADDERS

 Fabricate vertical ladders conforming to Section 7 of 29 CFR 1910.27. Use 2
 1/2 by 3/8-inch steel flats for stringers and 3/4 inch diameter steel rods
 for rungs. Rungs to be not less than 16 inches wide, spaced one foot apart,
 plug welded or shouldered and headed into stringers. Install ladders so
 that the distance from the rungs to the finished wall surface will not be
 less than 7 inches. Provide heavy clip angles riveted or bolted to the
 stringer and as indicated. Provide intermediate clip angles not over 48
 inches on centers.

2.10.1        Ladder Cages

 Conform to 29 CFR 1910.27. Fabricate 2 by 1/4-inch horizontal bands and 1
 1/2 by 3/16-inch vertical bars. Provide attachments for fastening bands to
 the side rails of ladders or directly to the structure. Provide and fasten
 vertical bars on the inside of the horizontal bands. Extend cages not less
 than 27 inches or more than 8 inches from the centerline of the rungs,
 excluding the flare at the bottom of the cage, and not less than 27 inches
 in width. Clear the inside of the cage of projections.

2.11     MISCELLANEOUS PLATES AND SHAPES

 Provide for items that do not form a part of the structural steel framework,
 such as lintels, sill angles, miscellaneous mountings and frames. Provide
 with connections and fasteners. Construct to have at least 8 inches bearing
 on masonry at each end. Provide angles and plates, ASTM A 36/A 36M, for
 embedment as indicated. Galvanize embedded items exposed to the elements
 according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

2.12     SAFETY NOSING FOR CONCRETE TREADS

 Provide safety nosing of cast iron with crosshatched abrasive-surfaces, or
 extruded aluminum with abrasive inserts. Nosing to be at least 4 inches wide
 and 1/4 inch thick and terminating at not more than 6 inches from the ends
 of treads for stairs and as indicated for platforms and landings.

2.13     SECURITY GRILLES

 Fabricate of channel frames with not less than two masonry anchors at each
 jamb and 1/2 inch hardened steel bars spaced not over 4 inches both ways and
 welded to frame. Provide 18 by 16 mesh screen and two layers of 1/4-inch
 hardware cloth clamped to frame.
                                                                    W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                 0001
                                                                       Page 215 of 463

2.14      STEEL STAIRS

 Provide steel stairs complete with stringers, steel-plate treads and risers,
 landings, columns, handrails, and necessary bolts and other fastenings.
 Steel stairs and accessories to be hot-dip galvanized.

2.14.1        Design Loads

 Design stairs to sustain a live load of not less than 450 pounds per square
 foot, or a concentrated load of 450 applied where it is most critical.
 Conform to AISC S335 or AISC S342L with the design and fabrication of steel
 stairs, other than a commercial product.

2.14.2        Materials

 Provide steel stairs of welded construction except that bolts may be used
 where welding is not practicable. Screw or screw-type connections are not
 permitted.

         a.    Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

         b.    Gratings for Treads and Landings: NAAMM BG.   Slip resistance shall
               meet test requirements of FS RR-G-1602.

         c.    Support steel grating on angle cleats welded to stringers or treads
               with integral cleats, welded or bolted to the stringer. Provide
               sheet-steel landings with angle stiffeners welded on. Close exposed
               ends. Exterior stairs shall have all exposed joints formed to
               exclude water.

         d.    Before fabrication, obtain necessary field measurements and verify
               drawing dimensions.

         e.    Clean metal surfaces free from mill scale, flake rust and rust
               pitting prior to shop finishing. Weld permanent connections.
               Finish welds flush and smooth on surfaces that will be exposed
               after installation.

PART 3        EXECUTION

3.1      INSTALLATION

 Install items at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's
 instructions. Items listed below require additional procedures.

3.2      ANCHORAGE, FASTENINGS, AND CONNECTIONS

 Provide anchorage where necessary for fastening miscellaneous metal items
 securely in place. Include for anchorage not otherwise specified or
 indicated slotted inserts, expansion shields, and powder-driven fasteners,
 when approved for concrete; toggle bolts and through bolts for masonry;
 machine and carriage bolts for steel; through bolts, lag bolts, and screws
 for wood. Do not use wood plugs in any material. Provide non-ferrous
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                   Page 216 of 463

 attachments for non-ferrous metal. Make exposed fastenings of compatible
 materials, generally matching in color and finish, to which fastenings are
 applied. Conceal fastenings where practicable.

3.3     BUILT-IN WORK

 Form for anchorage metal work built-in with concrete or masonry, or provide
 with suitable anchoring devices as indicated or as required. Furnish metal
 work in ample time for securing in place as the work progresses.

3.4     WELDING

 Perform welding, welding inspection, and corrective welding, in accordance
 with AWS D1.1. Use continuous welds on all exposed connections. Grind
 visible welds smooth in the finished installation.

3.5     FINISHES

3.5.1     Dissimilar Materials

 Where dissimilar metals are in contact, protect surfaces with a coat
 conforming to FS TT-P-664 to prevent galvanic or corrosive action. Where
 aluminum is in contact with concrete, mortar, masonry, wood, or absorptive
 materials subject to wetting, protect with ASTM D 1187, asphalt-base
 emulsion.

3.5.2   Field Preparation
  Remove rust preventive coating just prior to field erection, using a remover
  approved by the rust preventive manufacturer. Surfaces, when assembled,
  shall be free of rust, grease, dirt and other foreign matter.

3.5.3     Environmental Conditions

 Do not clean or paint surface when damp or exposed to foggy or rainy
 weather, when metallic surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above
 the dew point of the surrounding air, or when surface temperature is below
 45 degrees F or over 95 degrees F, unless approved by the Contracting
 Officer.

3.6     ACCESS PANELS

 Install a removable access panel not less than 12 by 12 inches directly
 below each valve, flow indicator, damper, or air splitter that is located
 above the ceiling, other than an acoustical ceiling, and that would
 otherwise not be accessible.

3.7     CONTROL-JOINT COVERS

 Provide covers over control-joints and fasten on one side only with
 fasteners spaced to give positive contact with wall surfaces on both sides
 of joint throughout the entire length of cover.
                                                                    W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                 0001
                                                                       Page 217 of 463

3.8     COVER PLATES AND FRAMES

 Install the tops of cover plates and frames flush with floor.

3.9     HANDRAILS

3.9.1     Steel Handrail

 Install by means of pipe sleeves secured by means of base plates bolted to
 stringers or structural steel framework. Secure rail ends by steel pipe
 flanges through-bolted to a back plate or by 1/4-inch lag bolts to studs or
 solid backing.

3.10     LADDERS

 Secure to the adjacent construction with the clip angles attached to the
 stringer. Install brackets as required for securing of ladders welded or
 bolted to structural steel or built into the masonry or concrete. In no
 case shall ends of ladders rest upon finished roof.

3.11     STEEL STAIRS

 Provide anchor bolts, grating fasteners, washers, and all parts or devices
 necessary for proper installation. Provide lock washers under nuts.

3.12     ROOF HATCH

 Shall be of zinc-coated steel sheets not less than 14 gage, with 3 inch-
 beaded flange, welded and ground at corner. Provide a minimum clear opening
 of 30 by 36 inches. Construction and accessories shall be as follows:

        a.   Insulate cover and curb with one-inch thick rigid fiberboard
             insulation covered and protected by zinc-coated steel liner not
             less than 26 gage. Curb shall be 12 inches high, formed with 3
             inch mounting flange with holes provided for securing to the roof
             deck. Equip the curb with an integral metal cap flashing of the
             same gage and metal as the curb, full welded and ground at corners
             for weather tightness.

        b.   Provide hatch completely assembled with pintle hinges, compression
             spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes, positive snap latch
             with turn handles on inside and outside, and neoprene draft seal.
             Provide fasteners for padlocking on the inside. Equip the cover
             with an automatic hold-open arm complete with grip handle to permit
             one-hand release. Cover action shall be smooth through its entire
             range with an operating pressure of approximately 30 pounds.


                           *   *   *   END OF SECTION   *   *   *
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 218 of 463




                                 SECTION 06 10 00

                                  ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1      GENERAL

1.1      REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic
 designation only.

           AMERICAN FOREST & PAPER ASSOCIATION (AF&PA)

 AF&PA T01                         (1991; Supple 1993; Addenda Apr 1997; Supple
                                   T02) National Design Specification for Wood
                                   Construction

 AF&PA T11                         (1988) Manual for Wood Frame Construction

           AMERICAN HARDBOARD ASSOCIATION (AHA)

 AHA A135.4                        (1995) Basic Hardboard

 AHA A194.1                        (1985) Cellulosic Fiber Board

           AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF TIMBER CONSTRUCTION (AITC)

 AITC TC Manual                    (1994) Timber Construction Manual

 AITC 109                          (1990) Standard for Preservative Treatment of
                                   Structural Glued Laminated Timber

 AITC 111                          (1979) Recommended Practice for Protection of
                                   Structural Glued Laminated Timber During
                                   Transit, Storage and Erection

 AITC 190.1                        (1992) Wood Products - Structural Glued
                                   Laminated Timber

           AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

 ANSI A208.1                       (1999) Particleboard Mat Formed Woods

           AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

 ASTM A 307                        (2000) Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000
                                   PSI Tensile Strength
                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                  0001
                                                        Page 219 of 463


ASTM C 79/C 79M       (2000) Treated Core and Nontreated Core
                      Gypsum Sheathing Board

ASTM C 208            (1995) Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board

ASTM C 516            (1980; R 1996el) Vermiculite Loose Fill
                      Thermal Insulation


ASTM C 518            (1998) Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements
                      and Thermal Transmission Properties By Means
                      of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus

ASTM C 549            (1981; R 1995e1) Perlite Loose Fill
                      Insulation

ASTM C 552            (2000) Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation

ASTM C 553            (1999) Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal
                      Insulation for Commercial and Industrial
                      Applications

ASTM C 578            (1995) Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal
                      Insulation

ASTM C 591            (1994) Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular
                      Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation

ASTM C 612            (2000) Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal
                      Insulation

ASTM C 665            (1998) Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal
                      Insulation for Light Frame Construction and
                      Manufactured Housing

ASTM C 726            (2000) Mineral Fiber Roof Insulation Board

ASTM C 739            (2000) Cellulosic Fiber (Wood-Base) Loose-
                      Fill Thermal Insulation

ASTM C 764            (1999) Mineral Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal
                      Insulation

ASTM C 1136           (1995) Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor
                      Retarders for Thermal Insulation

ASTM C 1177/C 1177M   (1999) Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as
                      Sheathing

ASTM C 1289           (1998) Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate
                      Thermal Insulation Board
                                                             W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                          0001
                                                                Page 220 of 463


ASTM D 2898                   (1994; R 1999) Accelerated Weathering of
                              Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood for Fire Testing

ASTM D 3498                   (1999) Standard Specification for Adhesives
                              for Field-Gluing Plywood to Lumber Framing
                              for Floor Systems

ASTM E 84                     (2000a) Surface Burning Characteristics of
                              Building Materials

ASTM E 96                     (2000) Water Vapor Transmission of Materials



ASTM E 154                    (1988; R 1999) Water Vapor Retarders Used in
                              Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on
                              Walls, or as Ground Cover

ASTM F 547                    (1977; R 1995) Definitions of Terms Relating
                              to Nails for Use with Wood and Wood-Base
                              Materials

      AMERICAN WOOD-PRESERVERS' ASSOCIATION (AWPA)

AWPA C2                       (2000) Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine
                              Ties - Preservative Treatment by Pressure
                              Processes

AWPA C9                       (1997) Plywood - Preservative Treatment by
                              Pressure Processes

AWPA C20                      (1999) Structural Lumber Fire-Retardant
                              Pressure Treatment

AWPA C27                      (1999) Plywood - Fire-Retardant Pressure
                              Treatment

AWPA M4                       (1999) Standard for the Care of Preservative-
                              Treated Wood Products

AWPA P5                       (2000) Standards for Waterborne Preservatives

      APA - THE ENGINEERED WOOD ASSOCIATION (APA)

APA EWS R540C                 (1996) Builder Tips Proper Storage and
                              Handling of Glulam Beams

APA EWS T300C                 (1997) Technical Note Glulam Connection
                              Details
                                                              W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                           0001
                                                                 Page 221 of 463

APA PRP-108                   (1980; Rev Jan 1996) Performance Standards
                              and Policies for Structural-Use Panels

      CALIFORNIA REDWOOD ASSOCIATION (CRA)

CRA RIS-01-SS                 (1997) Standard Specifications for Grades of
                              California Redwood Lumber

      U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

16 CFR 1209                   Interim Safety Standard for Cellulose
                              Insulation

      U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE (DOC)

DOC PS 1                      (1996) Voluntary Product Standard -
                              Construction and Industrial Plywood



DOC PS 2                      (1992) Performance Standards for Wood-Based
                              Structural-Use Panels

      FACTORY MUTUAL ENGINEERING AND RESEARCH (FM)

FM LPD 1-49                   (1995) Loss Prevention Data Sheet - Perimeter
                              Flashing

      NATIONAL HARDWOOD LUMBER ASSOCIATION (NHLA)

NHLA Rules                    (1994) Rules for the Measurement & Inspection
                              of Hardwood & Cypress

      NORTHEASTERN LUMBER MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NELMA)

NELMA Grading Rules           (1997) Standard Grading Rules for
                              Northeastern Lumber

      SOUTHERN CYPRESS MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (SCMA)

SCMA Specs                    (1986; Supple No. 1, Aug 1993) Standard
                              Specifications for Grades of Southern Cypress

      SOUTHERN PINE INSPECTION BUREAU (SPIB)

SPIB Rules                    (1994; Supple 8 thru 11) Standard Grading
                              Rules for Southern Pine Lumber
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                   Page 222 of 463

         TRUSS PLATE INSTITUTE (TPI)

 TPI 1                           (1995; Errata) National Design Standard for
                                 Metal Plate-Connected Wood Truss Construction
                                 and Commentary; and Appendix 1

 TPI Bklet HIB                   (1991) Handling, Installing & Bracing Metal
                                 Plate Connected Wood Trusses

         WEST COAST LUMBER INSPECTION BUREAU (WCLIB)

 WCLIB Std 17                    (1996; Supples VII(A-E), VIII(A-C)) Grading
                                 Rules for West Coast Lumber

         WESTERN WOOD PRODUCTS ASSOCIATION (WWPA)

 WWPA Grading Rules              (1999) Western Lumber Grading Rules 95

1.2   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "GA" designation;
 submittals not having a "GA" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "GA" designation identifies the office
 that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
 submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

      SD-02 Shop Drawings


          Structural Wood Members; GA
          Installation of Framing; GA

            Drawings of structural laminated members, fabricated wood
          trusses, engineered wood joists and rafters, and other fabricated
          structural members indicating materials, shop fabrication, and
          field erection details; including methods of fastening.

          Nailers and Nailing Strips; GA

            Drawings of field erection details, including materials and
          methods of fastening nailers in conformance with Factory Mutual
          wind uplift rated systems specified in other Sections of these
          specifications.

      SD-03 Product Data

          Structural Wood Members; GA

            Design analysis and calculations of structural laminated members,
          fabricated wood trusses, and other fabricated structural members
          showing design criteria used to accomplish the applicable analysis.

          Product Installations; GA
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 223 of 463


               List containing name and location of successful installation of
             similar type of fabricated structural members specified herein.

         SD-07 Certificates

             Grading and Marking; GA

               Manufacturer's certificates (approved by an American Lumber
             Standards approved agency) attesting that lumber and material not
             normally grade marked meet the specified requirements. Certificate
             of Inspection for grade marked material by an American Lumber
             Standards Committee (ALSC) recognized inspection agency prior to
             shipment.

             Insulation; GA

               Certificate attesting that the cellulose, perlite, glass and
             mineral fiber, glass mat gypsum roof board, polyurethane, or
             polyisocyanurate insulation furnished for the project contains
             recovered material, and showing an estimated percent of such
             recovered material.

1.3      DELIVERY AND STORAGE

 Materials shall be delivered to the site in undamaged condition, stored off
 ground in fully covered, well-ventilated areas, and protected from extreme
 changes in temperature and humidity. Laminated timber shall be handled and
 stored in accordance with AITC 111 or APA EWS R540C.

PART 2      PRODUCTS

2.1      LUMBER AND SHEATHING

2.1.1      Grading and Marking

2.1.1.1      Lumber Products

 Solid sawn and finger-jointed lumber shall bear an authorized grade stamp or
 grademark recognized by ALSC, or an ALSC recognized certification stamp,
 mark, or hammerbrand. Surfaces that are to be exposed to view shall not
 bear grademarks, stamps, or any type of identifying mark. Hammer marking
 will be permitted on timbers when all surfaces will be exposed to view.

2.1.1.2      Fabricated Structural Members

 Wood trusses shall be fabricated in accordance with TPI 1. Laminated
 timbers shall be marked with a quality mark indicating conformance to AITC
 190.1. Engineered wood joists and rafters shall be fabricated using an
 approved quality control system to meet specified requirements.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 224 of 463

2.1.1.3      Plywood and Other Products

 Materials shall bear the grademark, other identifying marks indicating
 grades of material and rules, or standards under which produced, including
 requirements for qualifications and authority of the inspection
 organization. Except for plywood and wood structural panels, bundle marking
 will be permitted in lieu of marking each individual piece. Surfaces that
 are to be exposed to view shall not bear grademarks or other types of
 identifying marks.

2.1.2     Sizes

 Lumber and material sizes shall conform to requirements of the rules or
 standards under which produced. Unless otherwise specified, lumber shall be
 surfaced on four sides. Unless otherwise specified, sizes indicated are
 nominal sizes, and actual sizes shall be within manufacturing tolerances
 allowed by the standard under which the product is produced.

2.1.3     Treatment

 Exposed areas of treated wood that are cut or drilled after treatment shall
 receive a field treatment in accordance with AWPA M4. Items of all-heart
 material of cedar, cypress, or redwood will not require preservative
 treatment, except when in direct contact with soil. Except as specified for
 all-heart material of the previously mentioned species, the following items
 shall be treated:

        a.   Wood members in contact with water.

      b. Wood members exposed to the weather including those used in built-
 up roofing systems or as nailing strips or nailers over fiberboard or
 gypsum-board wall sheathing as a base for wood siding.

      c. Wood members set into concrete regardless of location, including
 flush-with-deck wood nailers for roofs.

      d. Wood members in contact with concrete that is in contact with soil
 or water or that is exposed to weather.

2.1.3.1      Lumber and Timbers

 Lumber and timbers shall be treated in accordance with AWPA C2 with
 waterborne preservatives listed in AWPA P5 to a retention level as follows:

        a.   0.25 pcf intended for above ground use.

2.1.3.2 Plywood

 Plywood shall be treated in accordance with AWPA C9 with waterborne
 preservatives listed in AWPA P5 to a retention level as follows:

        a.   0.25 pcf intended for above ground use.
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 225 of 463

2.1.4 Moisture Content

 At the time lumber and other materials are delivered and when installed in
 the work their moisture content shall be as follows:

      a. Treated and Untreated Lumber Except Roof Planking: 4-inches or
 less, nominal thickness, 19 percent maximum. 5 inches or more, nominal
 thickness, 23 percent maximum in a 3-inch perimeter of the timber cross-
 section.

        b.   Roof Planking:   15 percent maximum.

      c. Materials Other Than Lumber:       In accordance with standard under
 which product is produced.

2.1.5    Fire-Retardant Treatment

 Fire-retardant treated wood shall be pressure treated in accordance with
 AWPA C20 for lumber and AWPA C27 for plywood. Material use shall be defined
 in AWPA C20 and AWPA C27 for Interior Type A and B and Exterior Type.
 Treatment and performance inspection shall be by an independent and
 qualified testing agency that establishes performance ratings. Each piece
 or bundle of treated material shall bear identification of the testing
 agency to indicate performance in accordance with such rating. Treated
 materials to be exposed to rain wetting shall be subjected to an accelerated
 weathering technique in accordance with ASTM D 2898 prior to being tested
 for compliance with AWPA C20 or AWPA C27.

2.1.6 Structural Wood Members
  Species and grades shall be as listed in AF&PA T01. Structural lumber used
  in fabrication of bolted trusses and other fabricated structural members for
  engineered uses, except laminated members, shall have allowable design
  values of .86 psi in bending; .84 psi in tension parallel to the grain; .67
  psi in compression perpendicular to the grain; .70 psi in compression
  parallel to the grain; .97 psi in horizontal shear; and a modulus of
  elasticity of .97 psi. Design of members and fastenings shall conform to
  AITC TC Manual. Other stress graded or dimensioned items such as blocking,
  carriages, and studs shall be standard or No. 2 grade except that studs may
  be Stud grade.

2.1.6.1 Trussed Rafters

 As an option to standard rafters, trussed rafters may be provided. The
 design shall be as indicated. Connections shall be made with light-metal
 plate-connectors. Light-metal-plate-connected wood trusses shall be
 designed and fabricated in conformance with TPI 1. When new plate
 configuration is proposed, load testing of trusses is required and shall
 conform to Appendix D of TPI 1.

2.1.6.2 Engineered Wood Joists and Rafters

 As an option to standard rafters, engineered wood joists and rafters may be
 provided. Engineered wood rafters shall be wood I-joists manufactured in
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 226 of 463

 accordance with a nationally recognized code and installed in accordance
 with the manufacturer's recommendations.

2.1.7     Sheathing

 Sheathing shall be fiberboard, gypsum board, plywood, wood structural
 panels, or wood for wall sheathing; and plywood, wood structural panels, or
 wood for roof sheathing.


2.1.7.1     Fiberboard

 Fiberboard shall conform to ASTM C 208, Type IV, Grade 2, Structural Grade,
 or AHA A194.1, Type IV, Grade 2 asphalt impregnated or asphalt coated to be
 water-resistant but vapor permeable.

2.1.7.2     Gypsum Sheathing Board

 Glass mat gypsum sheathing shall conform to ASTM C 79/C 79Mand ASTM C 1177/C
 1177M. Gypsum board shall conform to ASTM C 79/C 79M, 1/2 inch thick, 4
 feet wide with straight edges for supports 16 inches on center without
 corner bracing of framing or for supports 24 inches on center with corner
 bracing of framing; 2 feet wide with V-tongue and groove edges for supports
 16 or 24 inches on center with corner bracing of framing.

2.1.7.3     Plywood

 Plywood shall conform to DOC PS 1, APA PRP-108 or DOC PS 2, Grade C-D or
 sheathing grade with exterior glue. Sheathing for roof and walls without
 corner bracing of framing shall have a span rating of 16/0 or greater for
 supports 16 inches on center and a span rating of 24/0 or greater for
 supports 24 inches on center.

2.1.7.4     Wood Structural Panels

 Panels shall meet the qualification requirements of APA PRP-108 or DOC PS 2
 for rated sheathing, Exposure 1 or Structural I rated sheathing, Exposure 1.
 Sheathing for roofs or walls without corner bracing of framing shall have a
 span rating of 16/0 or greater for supports 16 inches on center and shall
 have a span rating of 24/0 or greater for supports 24 inches on center.

2.1.7.5     Wood

 Species and grade shall be in accordance with TABLE I at the end of this
 section. Wall sheathing shall be 1 inch thick for supports 16 or 24 inches
 on center without corner bracing of framing provided sheathing is applied
 diagonally. Roof sheathing shall be 1 inch thick for supports 16 or 24
 inches on center.

2.1.8 Underlayment

 Underlayment shall conform to one of the following:
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                     Page 227 of 463

2.1.8.1 Hardboard

 AHA A135.4 service class, sanded one side, 1/4 inch thick, 4 feet wide.

2.1.8.2

 ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-M-1, 1/4 inches thick, 4 x 4 feet.


2.1.8.3 Plywood

 Plywood shall conform to DOC PS 1, underlayment grade with exterior glue, or
 C-C (Plugged) exterior grade 11/32 inch thick, 4 feet wide.

2.1.9 Roof Decking

 Roof decking shall be commercial grade with minimum design value of 130 psi
 in bending. Decking shall be 2 inches thick with single tongue and groove;
 V-jointed, matched and dressed. As an option, fabricated laminated lumber
 decking with interlocking tongue and groove joints may be provided.

2.1.10 Miscellaneous Wood Members

2.1.10.1 Nonstress Graded Members

 Members shall include bridging, corner bracing, furring, grounds, and
 nailing strips. Members shall be in accordance with TABLE I for the species
 used. Sizes shall be as follows unless otherwise shown:

       Member                                 Size (inch)
      _________                              _____________

    Bridging                        1 x 3 or 1 x 4 for use between members
                                    2 x 12 and smaller; 2 x 4 for use
                                    between members larger than 2 x 12.

    Corner bracing                  1 x 4.

    Furring                         1 x 2.

    Grounds                         Plaster thickness by 1-1/2.

    Nailing strips                  1 x 3 or 1 x 4 when used as shingle
                                    base or interior finish, otherwise
                                    2 inch stock.

2.1.10.2 Wood Bumpers

 Bumpers shall be of the species and grade in accordance with TABLE II at the
 end of this section, size as shown.
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                        Page 228 of 463

2.1.10.3 Sill Plates

 Sill plates shall be standard or number 2 grade.

2.1.10.4 Blocking

 Blocking shall be standard or number 2 grade.


2.1.10.5 Rough Bucks and Frames

 Rough bucks and frames shall be straight standard or number 2 grade.

2.2     ACCESSORIES AND NAILS

 Markings shall identify both the strength grade and the manufacturer.
 Accessories and nails shall conform to the following:

2.2.1     Anchor Bolts

 ASTM A 307, size as indicated, complete with nuts and washers.

2.2.2     Bolts:   Lag, Toggle, and Miscellaneous Bolts and Screws

 Type, size, and finish best suited for intended use. Finish options include
 zinc compounds, cadmium, and aluminum paint impregnated finishes.

2.2.3     Clip Angles

 Steel, 3/16 inch thick, size best suited for intended use; or zinc-coated
 steel or iron commercial clips designed for connecting wood members.

2.2.4     Expansion Shields

 Type and size best suited for intended use.

2.2.5     Joist Hangers

 Steel or iron, zinc-coated, size to fit members where used, sufficient
 strength to develop the full strength of supported member, complete with any
 special nails required.

2.2.6     Metal Bridging

 Optional to wood bridging; zinc-coated steel, size and design to provide
 rigidity equivalent to specified wood bridging.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 229 of 463

2.2.7     Nails and Staples

 ASTM F 547, size and type best suited for purpose; staples shall be as
 recommended by the manufacturer of the materials to be joined. For
 sheathing and subflooring, length of nails shall be sufficient to extend 1
 inch into supports. In general, 8-penny or larger nails shall be used for
 nailing through 1 inch thick lumber and for toe nailing 2 inch thick lumber;
 16-penny or larger nails shall be used for nailing through 2 inch thick
 lumber. Nails used with treated lumber and sheathing shall be galvanized.
 Nailing shall be in accordance with the recommended nailing schedule
 contained in AF&PA T11. Where detailed nailing requirements are not
 specified, nail size and spacing shall be sufficient to develop an adequate
 strength for the connection. The connection's strength shall be verified
 against the nail capacity tables in AF&PA T01. Reasonable judgement backed
 by experience shall ensure that the designed connection will not cause the
 wood to split. If a load situation exceeds a reasonable limit for nails, a
 specialized connector shall be used.

2.2.8     Timber Connectors

 Unless otherwise specified, timber connectors shall be in accordance with
 TPI 1, APA EWS T300C or AITC TC Manual.

2.3     INSULATION

 Thermal resistance of insulation shall be not less than the R-values shown.
 R-values shall be determined at 75 degrees F in accordance with ASTM C 518.
 Contractor shall comply with EPA requirements in conformance with RECYCLED/
 RECOVERED MATERIALS. Insulation shall be the standard product of a
 manufacturer and factory marked or identified with manufacturer's name or
 trademark and R-value. Identification shall be on individual pieces or
 individual packages. Materials containing more than one percent asbestos
 will not be allowed.

2.3.1     Batt or Blanket

2.3.1.1     Glass Fiber Batts and Rolls

 Glass fiber batts and rolls shall conform to ASTM C 665, Type I unfaced
 insulation. Insulation shall have a 10 mil thick, white, puncture resistant
 woven-glass cloth with vinyl facing on one side. Width and length shall
 suit construction conditions.

2.3.1.2     Mineral Fiber Batt

 Mineral fiber batt shall conform to ASTM C 665, Type I unfaced insulation.

2.3.1.3     Mineral Fiber Blanket

 Mineral fiber blanket shall conform to ASTM C 553, Type I, Class 6.
 Blankets shall be sized to suit construction conditions, resilient type for
 use below and above ambient temperature to 350 degrees F. Blankets shall
 have a factory applied vapor-barrier facing on one side with 2 inch nailing
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                   Page 230 of 463

 tabs on both edges. Vapor barriers shall be fire retardant, high vapor
 transmission, and aluminum foil laminated to crepe paper type conforming to
 ASTM C 1136, Type II. Nominal density shall be 0.75 pcf.

2.3.2     Sill Sealer

 Mineral wool, 1 inch thick and compressible to 1/32 inch, width of sill,
 designed to perform as an air, dirt, and insect seal in conformance with
 ASTM C 665, Type I.

2.3.3     Rigid Insulation

2.3.3.1     Polystyrene Board

 Polystyrene board shall be extruded and conform to ASTM C 578, Type IV.

2.3.3.2     Polyurethane or Polyisocyanurate Board

 Unfaced preformed polyurethane shall conform to ASTM C 591.   Faced
 polyisocyanurate shall conform to ASTM C 1289.

2.3.3.3     Glass Fiber or Insulation Board

 Glass mat gypsum roof board shall conform to ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, flame
 spread 0, smoke developed 0, psi 500, water resistant. Glass fiber or
 insulation board shall conform to ASTM C 612, Type 1A.

2.3.3.4     Mineral Fiber Block and Board

 Mineral fiber block and board shall conform to ASTM C 612 or ASTM C 726.

2.3.3.5     Cellular Glass

 Cellular glass shall conform to ASTM C 552.

2.4     VAPOR RETARDER

 Vapor retarder shall be polyethylene sheeting conforming to ASTM E 154 or
 other equivalent material. Vapor retarder shall have a maximum vapor
 permeance rating of 0.5 perms as determined in accordance with ASTM E 96,
 unless otherwise specified.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1     INSTALLATION OF FRAMING

3.1.1     General

 General framing shall be in accordance with AF&PA T11. Members shall be
 closely fitted, accurately set to required lines and levels, and rigidly
 secured in place. Rafters, purlins, and joists shall be set with crown edge
 up. When joists, beams, and girders are placed on masonry or concrete, a
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 231 of 463

 wood base plate shall be positioned and leveled with grout. The joist,
 beam, or girder shall then be placed on the plate. When joists, beams, and
 girders are set into masonry or concrete, a pocket shall be formed into the
 wall. The joist, beam, or girder shall then be placed into the pocket and
 leveled with a steel shim.

3.1.2     Structural Members

 Members shall be adequately braced before erection. Members shall be
 aligned and all connections completed before removal of bracing.
 Individually wrapped members shall be unwrapped only after adequate
 protection by a roof or other cover has been provided. Scratches and
 abrasions of factory-applied sealer shall be treated with two brush coats of
 the same sealer used at the factory.

3.1.3     Roof Framing or Rafters

 Tops of supports or rafters shall form a true plane. Valley, ridge, and hip
 members shall be of depth equal to cut on rafters where practicable, but in
 no case less than depth of rafters. Valleys, hips, and ridges shall be
 straight and true intersections of roof planes. Necessary crickets and
 watersheds shall be formed. Rafters, except hip and valley rafters, shall
 be bolted by angles. Rafters shall be toe-nailed to ridge, valley, or hip
 members with at least three 8-penny nails. Rafters shall be braced to
 prevent movement until permanent bracing, decking or sheathing is installed.
 Hip and valley rafters shall be secured to wall plates by clip angles.
 Openings in roof shall be framed with headers and trimmers. Unless
 otherwise indicated, headers carrying more than two rafters and trimmers
 supporting headers carrying more than one rafter shall be double. Hip
 rafters longer than the available lumber shall be butt jointed and scabbed.
 Valley rafters longer than the available lumber shall be double, with pieces
 lapped not less than 4 feet and well spiked together. Trussed rafters shall
 be installed in accordance with TPI Bklet HIB. Engineered wood joists shall
 be installed in accordance with distributor's instructions.

3.1.4     Stair Framing

 Stair framing members shall be well spiked together. Rough carriages shall
 be cut to exact shape required to receive finish treads and risers. Risers
 shall be of uniform height, and treads shall be of uniform width except as
 otherwise shown. Trimmers, blocking, and other framing necessary for
 support of finish treads, risers, newels, and railing shall be provided.

3.2     INSTALLATION OF SHEATHING

3.2.1     Fiberboard

 Sheathing shall be applied with edges 1/8 inch apart at joints, fitted
 snugly at abutting frames of openings, and nailed or stapled in accordance
 with the manufacturer's approved instructions. Sheets shall be applied
 vertically, extended over top and bottom plates, and with all vertical and
 horizontal joints over supports.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 232 of 463

3.2.2    Gypsum Board

 Sheathing shall be applied with edges in light contact at joints and nailed
 in accordance with the manufacturer's approved instructions. Sheets 2 feet
 wide shall be applied horizontally with tongued edge up, with vertical
 joints over supports, and with vertical joints staggered. Sheets 4 feet
 wide shall be applied vertically, extended over top and bottom plates, and
 with all vertical and horizontal joints over supports.

3.2.3    Plywood and Wood Structural Panels

 Sheathing shall be applied with edges 1/8 inch apart at side and end joints,
 and nailed at supported edges at 6 inches on center and at intermediate
 supports 12 inches on center unless otherwise shown. Nailing of edges shall
 be 3/8 inch from the edges. Roof sheathing shall be applied with long
 dimension at right angles to supports, end joints made over supports, and
 end joints staggered.

3.2.4    Wood

 Sheathing end joints shall be made over framing members and so alternated
 that there will be at least two boards between joints on the same support.
 Each board shall bear on at least three supports. Boards shall be nailed at
 each support using two nails for boards 6 inches and less in width and three
 nails for boards more than 6 inches in width. Roof sheathing shall not be
 installed where roof decking is installed.

3.3     INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS WOOD MEMBERS

3.3.1    Bridging

 Wood bridging shall have ends accurately bevel-cut to afford firm contact
 and shall be nailed at each end with two nails. Metal bridging shall be
 installed as recommended by the manufacturer. The lower ends of bridging
 shall be driven up tight and secured after subflooring or roof sheathing has
 been laid and partition framing installed.

3.3.2    Corner Bracing

 Corner bracing shall be installed when required by type of sheathing used or
 when siding, other than panel siding, is applied directly to studs. Corner
 bracing shall be let into the exterior surfaces of the studs at an angle of
 approximately 45 degrees, shall extend completely over wall plates, and
 shall be secured at each bearing with two nails.

3.3.3    Blocking

 Blocking shall be provided as necessary for application of siding,
 sheathing, subflooring, wallboard, and other materials or building items,
 and to provide fire stopping. Blocking for fire stopping shall ensure a
 maximum dimension of 8 feet for any concealed space. Blocking shall be cut
 to fit between framing members and rigidly nailed thereto.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 233 of 463

3.3.4     Nailers and Nailing Strips

 Nailers and nailing strips shall be provided as necessary for the attachment
 of finish materials. Nailers used in conjunction with roof deck
 installation shall be installed flush with the roof deck system. Stacked
 nailers shall be assembled with spikes or nails spaced not more than 18
 inches on center and staggered. Beginning and ending nails shall not be
 more than 6 inches for nailer end. Ends of stacked nailers shall be offset
 approximately 12 inches in long runs and alternated at corners. Anchors
 shall extend through the entire thickness of the nailer. Strips shall be
 run in lengths as long as practicable, butt jointed, cut into wood framing
 members when necessary, and rigidly secured in place. Nailers and nailer
 installation for Factory Mutual wind uplift rated roof systems specified in
 other Sections of these specifications shall conform to the recommendations
 contained in FM LPD 1-49.

3.3.5     Furring Strips

 Furring strips shall be provided at the locations shown. Furring strips
 shall be installed at 16 inches on center unless otherwise shown, run in
 lengths as long as practicable, butt jointed and rigidly secured in place.

3.3.6     Rough Bucks and Frames

 Rough bucks shall be set straight, true, and plumb, and secured with anchors
 near top and bottom of each wood member and at intermediate intervals of not
 more than 3 feet. Anchors for concrete shall be expansion bolts, and
 anchors for masonry shall be 3/16 x 1-1/4 inch steel straps extending not
 less than 8 inches into the masonry and turned down 2 inches into the
 masonry.

3.3.7     Sill Plates

 Sill plates shall be set level and square and anchor bolted at not more than
 6 feet on centers and not more than 12 inches from end of each piece. A
 minimum of two anchors shall be used for each piece.

3.4     INSTALLATION OF TIMBER CONNECTORS

 Installation of timber connectors shall conform to applicable requirements
 of AF&PA T01.

3.5     INSTALLATION OF INSULATION

 Insulation shall be installed after construction has advanced to a point
 that the installed insulation will not be damaged by remaining work. For
 thermal insulation the actual installed thickness shall provide the R-values
 shown. For acoustical insulation the installed thickness shall be as shown.
 Insulation shall be installed on the weather side of such items as
 electrical boxes and water lines. Unless otherwise specified, installation
 shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 234 of 463

3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDER

 Vapor retarder shall be applied to provide a continuous barrier at window
 and doorframes, and at all penetrations such as electrical outlets and
 switches, plumbing connections, and utility service penetrations. Joints in
 the vapor retarder shall be lapped and sealed according to the
 manufacturer's recommendations.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER

 Air infiltration barrier shall be installed in accordance with the
 manufacturer's recommendations.
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 235 of 463


3.8 TABLES

                             TABLE I.   SPECIES AND GRADE

               Sub-flooring, Roof Sheathing, Wall Sheathing, Furring

  Grading                              Const   No. 2    No. 2       No. 3
   Rules            Species          Standard Comm     Board Comm    Comm
__________________________________________________________________________

NHLA Rules
                   Cypress                                     X

NELMA Grading Rules
                 Northern White Cedar                                      X
                 Eastern White Pine          X
                 Northern Pine               X
                 Balsam Fir                                                X
                 Eastern Hemlock-                                          X
                 Tamarack

CRA RIS-01-SS
                   Redwood                           X

SCMA Specs
                   Cypress                                     X

SPIB Rules
                   Southern Pine                     X

WCLIB Std 17
                   Douglas Fir-Larch         X
                   Hem-Fir                   X
                   Sitka Spruce              X
                   Mountain Hemlock          X
                   Western Cedar             X

WWPA Grading Rules
                 Douglas Fir-Larch           X
                 Hem-Fir                     X
                 Idaho White Pine            X
                 Lodgepole Pine                                X
                 Ponderosa Pine                                X
                 Sugar Pine                                    X
                 Englemann Spruce                              X
                 Douglas Fir South                             X
                 Mountain Hemlock                              X
                 Subalpine Fir                                 X
                 Western Cedar                                 X
                                                                       W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                    0001
                                                                          Page 236 of 463


                           TABLE II.      SPECIES AND GRADE

                                       Wood Bumpers

  Grading Rules          Species                      No. 1        No. 2
__________________________________________________________________________

NHLA Rules
                                Red Oak                            X

NELMA Grading Rules
                       Northern Pine                                       X
                       Eastern Hemlock-                                    X
                       Tamarack

SPIB Rules
                       Southern Pine                               X

WCLIB Std 17
                       Douglas Fir-Larch                                   X
                       Hem-Fir                                             X

WWPA Grading Rules
                       Douglas Fir-Larch                                   X
                       Hem-Fir                                             X
                       Douglas Fir-South                                   X


                       *    *     *   END OF SECTION   *   *   *
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                     Page 237 of 463



                                 SECTION 07 13 53

                          ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING


PART 1      GENERAL

1.1      REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic
 designation only.

           AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

 ASTM D 297                        (1993; R 1998) Rubber Products - Chemical
                                   Analysis

 ASTM D 412                        (1998a) Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
                                   Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers -
                                   Tension

 ASTM D 471                        (1998el) Rubber Property - Effect of Liquids

 ASTM D 624                        (1991; R 1998) Tear Strength of Conventional
                                   Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
                                   Elastomers

 ASTM D 1004                       (1994a) Initial Tear Resistance of Plastic
                                   Film and Sheeting

 ASTM D 1171                       (1999) Rubber Deterioration - Surface Ozone
                                   Cracking Outdoors or Chamber (Triangular
                                   Specimen)

 ASTM D 4637                       (1996) EPDM Sheet Used in Single-Ply Roof
                                   Membrane

 ASTM E 96                         (1995) Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

 ASTM E 154                        (1988; R 1999) Water Vapor Retarders Used in
                                   Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on
                                   Walls, or as Ground Cover

 ASTM G 21                         (1996) Determining Resistance of Synthetic
                                   Polymeric Materials to Fungi

1.2      SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 238 of 463

 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that
 will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
 submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

         SD-02 Shop Drawings

             Waterproofing; G.

               Detail drawings showing size of sheets, position of sheets and
             splices, flashing and termination details, and expansion joint
             details.

         SD-03 Product Data

             Installation; G.

               Manufacturer's instructions for installation of the elastomeric
             membrane, including procedures for preparing the membrane for use,
             flashing, and splicing. Instructions shall include recommended or
             required protective covering and procedures for safe handling and
             use of cleaners, adhesives, and sealants.

         SD-07 Certificates

             Materials; G.

               Certificates of compliance attesting that the materials meet
             specification requirements. Certificates may show qualification of
             the identical compound in the specified test.

1.3      DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

 Materials shall be delivered to the job site in unopened containers bearing
 the manufacturer's name, brand name, and description of contents. Membrane,
 flashing, and adhesives shall be stored in clean, dry areas. Storage
 temperature for adhesives shall be between 60 and 80 degrees F. Protection
 board shall be stored flat and off the ground.

1.4      Warranty

 Manufacturer's standard warranty for the roofing system shall be provided
 for not less than 10 years from acceptance of the work. Warranty shall
 state that manufacturer shall repair or replace defective materials if the
 roofing system leaks or allows the insulation beneath the membrane to become
 wet during the period of the warranty.

PART 2      PRODUCTS

2.1      MATERIALS

 Adhesives, mastics, cements, tapes, and primers shall be as recommended by
 the membrane manufacturer and shall be compatible with the material to which
 they are to be bonded.
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 239 of 463


2.1.1     Performance Requirements

 All membranes shall meet the following requirements when tested by the
 referenced ASTM standards:

   ASTM E 154
   Puncture Resistance                     40 pounds, (min.)

   ASTM E 96, Procedure B
   Water Vapor Transmission at             0.25 perms (max.)
   80 degrees F Permeance

   ASTM G 21 or

    ASTM E 154

   Resistance to Soil Bacteria or Fungi    No sustained growth or
                                           discoloration after 21 days

2.1.1.1     Butyl Rubber

   Thickness, plus or minus 10 percent     60 mils

   ASTM D 297
   Specific Gravity                        1.2 plus or minus 0.05

   ASTM D 412
   Tensile Strength                        1200 psi (min.)

   ASTM D 624
   Elongation                              300 percent (min.)

   ASTM D 624
   Tear Resistance                         125 lb./inch (min.)

   ASTM D 471
   Water Absorption 168 hours              plus 2 percent (max.)
   @ 158 degrees F

   ASTM D 1171
   Ozone Resistance 50 pphm in air         20 percent
   100 hours @ 104 degrees F

2.1.1.2     Plastic Elastomeric Sheeting

   Membrane shall be a minimum of 56 mils thick and shall meet the
   following requirements:

   ASTM D 412, Die C
   Textile Strength                        220 psi (min.)

   ASTM D 412, Die C
   Elongation                              250 percent (min.)
                                                                      W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                   0001
                                                                         Page 240 of 463

      ASTM D 1004
      Tear Resistance                           350 lb./inch (min.)

2.1.1.3      Composite Self-Adhering Membrane

 Membrane shall be a polymeric sheeting integrally bonded to rubberized
 asphalt with a minimum thickness of 60 mils.

2.1.1.4      Chlorinated Polyethylene (CPE) Sheeting

 Membrane shall be uncured chlorinated polyethylene, synthetic elastomeric
 sheeting of 40 mils nominal thickness.

2.1.1.5      Chloroprene

 Chloroprene membrane shall conform to ASTM D 4637, Type II, Grade 1, Class
 U, 60 mils minimum thickness.

2.1.1.6      Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM) Membrane

 EPDM membrane shall conform to ASTM D 4637, Type I, Grade I, Class U, 60
 mils minimum thickness.

2.2      ACCESSORIES

 Flashing, counter flashing, expansion joint covers and corner fillets shall
 be as recommended by the membrane manufacturer, round pipe flashing, inside
 and outside corners, 2-way roof vents, roof drain liners, drip edges, gravel
 stops, termination bars and fascia with covers and clips, and other
 available flashing.

PART 3      EXECUTION

3.1      PREPARATION

 Surfaces to which waterproofing are to be applied shall be clean, smooth,
 and free from deleterious materials and projections. Holes, honeycomb,
 cracks, or cavities shall be pointed or filled and finished flush with
 Portland cement mortar. Top surfaces of projecting masonry or concrete
 ledges below grade, except footings, shall be beveled. Before waterproofing
 is applied, the surfaces to be covered shall be swept to remove all dust and
 foreign matter. Concrete surfaces shall be cured 30 days prior to receiving
 elastomeric waterproofing and shall not be cured with compounds containing
 wax or oil. Masonry surfaces to be waterproofed shall have joints struck
 flush.

3.2      APPLICATION

 Waterproofing shall not be applied to wet surfaces. The ambient and surface
 temperatures shall be above 40 degrees F during application. Concrete
 surfaces shall be primed to receive the membrane. Membranes shall be
 handled and installed in accordance with the approved installation
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 241 of 463

 instructions. Primers, adhesives, and mastics shall be applied in
 accordance with the membrane manufacturer's printed instructions. Laps
 shall be oriented so that water will flow over the lap, and not into them.
 As soon as the mastic is fully set and dry, joints shall be checked. Where
 any openings or fish mouths appear, joints shall be resealed and re-rolled.
 Wrinkles and buckles shall be avoided in applying membrane and joint
 reinforcement. Non-adhering membranes shall be unrolled and allowed to
 remain flat for at least 2 hours before application. Membranes shall be
 drawn tight during installation without stretching. Self-adhering membrane
 shall be installed by removing the release sheets on the back of the
 membrane and applying the tacky surface onto the primed surface. Laps and
 splices shall be sealed prior to completion of a day's work.

3.2.1   Butyl Rubber Installation

 Each sheet shall be lapped at sides and ends a minimum of 6 inches over the
 preceding sheet. Lap and splice areas of membrane shall be cleaned with
 heptane, hexane, or white gasoline. UN-vulcanized compounded butyl tape, 6
 inch wide shall be applied between lapped splices so that the tape extends
 approximately 1/4 inch beyond the exposed sheeting edge. The tape shall be
 rolled firmly into place as it is applied. Tape backing shall be removed
 and the lapped sheeting rolled or pressed into place. Splicing adhesive
 shall be applied to the lapped area 3-1/2 inches on either side of the
 lapped edge. The splice adhesive shall be allowed to dry thoroughly and the
 lap reinforced with 6-inch wide un-vulcanized compounded butyl tape. Full
 contact shall be made for all laps areas. Corner splices and flashing
 overlaps shall be reinforced with a 12-inch wide strip of membrane over one
 layer of butyl tape or with a prefabricated corner of butyl rubber.

3.2.2   Plastic Elastomeric Sheeting Installation

 Sheeting shall be applied in sections no longer than 18 feet. Each sheeting
 shall be lapped at sides and ends a minimum of 6 inches over the preceding
 sheet. Lap splices shall be reinforced with 12 inch wide strips of plastic
 sheeting or as recommended in the approved installation instructions. Lap
 and splices shall be sealed in a full bed of adhesive at the rate
 recommended by the manufacturer of the material. Sheeting and joint strips
 shall be rolled with 50 to 100 pound roller on horizontal and 6 inch rubber
 hand roller on vertical surfaces.

3.2.3   Composite Self-Adhering Membrane Installation

 On vertical surfaces, membrane shall be applied in lengths up to 8 feet
 starting at the bottom. Each sheet shall be lapped at edges and ends a
 minimum of 2-1/2 inches over the preceding sheets. The membrane shall be
 rolled to adhere with the substrate. Corners and joints shall be double-
 covered by first applying a 12 inch width of membrane centered along the
 corner or joint. Inside and outside corners shall then be covered with
 membrane. Exposed termination edges of membrane on horizontal or vertical
 surfaces shall be finished with a troweled bead of mastic. Mastic shall be
 applied around termination edges of membrane and around drains and
 projections. Mastic shall be applied at the termination of each day's work.
                                                                 W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                    Page 242 of 463


3.2.4     Chlorinated Polyethylene (CPE) Sheeting Installation

 Sheets shall be lapped at edges and ends a minimum of 2-1/2 inches over the
 preceding sheet. All horizontal membranes shall overlap vertical surfaces
 by at least 3 inches.

3.2.5     Chloroprene Rubber Sheeting

 Each sheet shall overlap the previously installed sheet by a minimum of 3
 inches. Sheet shall be folded lengthwise to expose one half of the
 underside of the sheet for cleaning the sheet with cleaner recommended by
 the manufacturer. Adhesive shall be applied to sheet and substrate. Two
 coats of adhesive are required on the substrate with 1/2 hour between coats.
 Sheet shall not be bonded to substrate until adhesive does not come off at a
 dry finger touch. Chalk lines or masking tape shall be used as guides for
 adhesive application and positioning sheets. After adhesive has dried,
 sheet shall be folded back onto the substrate or previously applied sheet
 membrane. Membrane shall be rolled to obtain complete adhesion. The
 exposed edge of each sheet shall be further sealed with a fillet-shaped bead
 of adhesive, tooled to obtain positive contact with the surface of both
 sheets.

3.3     TESTS

 When required, and after the system is cured, the membranes on horizontal
 surfaces shall be tested by flooding the entire waterproofed area with a
 minimum of 2 inches head of water for a period of 24 hours. There shall be
 no water added after the start of the period. Water level shall be measured
 at the beginning and at the end of the 24 hour period. If the water level
 falls, remove the water and inspect the waterproofing membrane. Leak sites
 shall be marked, dried and repaired, and the test shall be repeated.

3.4     PROTECTION

 Horizontal applications of membrane shall be protected from traffic during
 installation. No equipment shall be allowed directly on the membrane.
 Plywood, or similar material, overlayment shall be provided for wheel-ways.
 Walkways shall be provided where heavy traffic from other trades is
 expected. Materials shall not be stored on the membrane. A protective
 covering shall be installed over the membrane immediately after installation
 or testing. If membrane is to be exposed, a temporary covering shall be
 applied to protect the membrane until the protection is installed.

3.4.1     Projections

 Projections passing through membrane shall be flashed as recommended by the
 manufacturer of the waterproofing membrane.

3.4.2     Counter flashing

 Waterproofing connecting with work exposed to the weather shall be counter
 flashed to form a watertight connection. Upper edge of membrane
 waterproofing and protective covering shall be counter flashed.
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                   Page 243 of 463


3.4.3   Expansion Joints and Fillets

 Expansion joints and corner fillets shall be installed as recommended by the
 manufacturer of the waterproofing membrane.

3.4.5   Horizontal Membrane Waterproofing

 Waterproofing shall be covered with Portland cement mortar not less than 3/4
 inch thick, uniformly placed, and allowed to set before subsequent
 construction is installed.

                       *   *   *   END OF SECTION   *   *   *
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                        Page 244 of 463




                                    SECTION 07 14 00

                               FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING

PART 1      GENERAL

1.1      REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
 basic designation only.

           AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

 ASTM C33                             (1997) Concrete Aggregates

 ASTM C578                            (1995) Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal
                                      Insulation

 ASTM C836                            (1995) High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-
                                      Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane
                                      for Use With Separate Wearing Course

 ASTM D1056                           (1998) Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge
                                      or Expanded Rubber

 ASTM D1751                           (1997) Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
                                      Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
                                      (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)

 ASTM D1752                           (1984; R 1996) Preformed Sponge Rubber and
                                      Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete
                                      Paving and Structural Construction

1.2   SUBMITTALS
  Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00, "Submittal
  Procedures."

         SD-03 Product Data, G.

             Fluid-applied membrane

             Membrane primer

             Elastomeric sheet
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                   Page 245 of 463


          Flexible foam-backed elastomeric sheet

          Solvent

          Moisture meter

          Protection board


          Bond breaker

          Submit material description and physical properties, application
          details, and recommendations regarding shelf life, application
          procedures, and precautions on flammability and toxicity.

1.3   PRE-WATERPROOFING CONFERENCE

 Prior to starting application of waterproofing system, arrange and attend a
 pre-waterproofing conference to ensure a clear understanding of drawings and
 specifications. Give the Contracting Officer seven (7) calendar days
 advance written notice of the time and place of meeting. Ensure that the
 mechanical and electrical subcontractor, flashing and sheet metal
 subcontractor, and other trades that may perform other types of work on or
 over the membrane after installation, attend this conference.

1.4   DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

 Deliver waterproofing materials in manufacturer's original, unopened
 containers, with labels intact and legible. Containers of materials covered
 by a referenced specification number shall bear the specification number,
 type, and class of the contents. Deliver materials in sufficient quantity
 to continue work without interruption. Store and protect materials in
 accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and use within their indicated
 shelf life. When hazardous materials are involved, adhere to special
 precautions of the manufacturer, unless precautions conflict with local,
 state, and federal regulations. Promptly remove from the site materials or
 incomplete work adversely affected by exposure to moisture. Store materials
 on pallets and cover from top to bottom with canvas tarpaulins.

1.5   ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

 Apply materials when ambient temperature is 40 degrees F or above for a
 period of 24 hours prior to the application and when there is no surface
 moisture, or visible dampness on the substrate surface. Apply materials when
 air temperature is expected to remain above 40 degrees F during the cure
 period recommended by the manufacturer. Moisture test for substrate is
 specified under paragraph entitled "Moisture Test." Work may be performed
 within heated enclosures, provided the surface temperature of the substrate
 is maintained at a minimum of 40 degrees F for 24 hours prior to the
 application of the waterproofing, and remains above that temperature during
 the cure period recommended by the manufacturer.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 246 of 463

1.6      WARRANTY

 Manufacturer's standard warranty for the roofing system shall be provided
 for not less than 10 years from acceptance of the work. Warranty shall
 state that manufacturer shall repair or replace defective materials if the
 roofing system leaks or allows the insulation beneath the membrane to become
 wet during the period of the warranty.

PART 2      PRODUCTS

2.1      FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE

 ASTM C836.

2.2      MEMBRANE PRIMER

 As recommended by the fluid-applied membrane manufacturer unless
 specifically prohibited by the manufacturer of the fluid-applied membrane.

2.3      SEALANT

 As specified in Section 07 92 00, "Joint Sealants."

2.4      SEALANT PRIMER

 As specified in Section 07 92 00, "Joint Sealants."

2.5      BACKING MATERIAL

 Premolded, closed-cell, polyethylene, or polyurethane foam rod having a
 diameter 25 percent larger than joint width before being compressed into
 joint. Provide bond breaker of polyethylene film or other suitable material
 between backing material and sealant.

2.6      JOINT FILLER

 As specified in ASTM 1751 or ASTM D1752.

2.7      BOND BREAKER

 As recommended by the fluid-applied membrane manufacturer. Bond breaker
 shall not interfere with the curing process or other performance properties
 of the fluid-applied membrane.

2.8      ELASTOMERIC SHEET

 Preformed; as recommended by the fluid-applied membrane manufacturer. Bond
 strength between the fluid-applied membrane and the preformed elastomeric
 sheet shall be a minimum of one psi when tested in accordance with ASTM
 C836.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 247 of 463

2.9      ELASTOMERIC SHEET ADHESIVE

 As recommended by the elastomeric sheet manufacturer.

2.10      FLEXIBLE FOAM-BACKED ELASTOMERIC SHEET

 Flexible foam-backed elastomeric sheet for protection over preformed
 elastomeric sheet at expansion joints shall be 1/2 inch thick, minimum,
 closed cell foam conforming to ASTM D1056, Type 2, Class B, Grades 2 or 3,
 factory-bonded to 1/16 inch thick, minimum, preformed elastomeric sheet.

2.11      PROTECTION BOARD

 Pre-molded bitumen composition board, 1/8 inch minimum thickness or other
 composition board compatible with the fluid-applied membrane.

2.12      DRAINAGE COURSE AGGREGATE

 ASTM C33, size No. 8.

2.13      INSULATION

 Polystyrene foam conforming to ASTM C578, Class IV, thickness as indicated
 by the Architect depending on roof substrate material.

PART 3      EXECUTION

3.1      PREPARATION

 Coordinate work with that of other trades to ensure that components to be
 incorporated into the waterproofing system are available when needed.
 Inspect and approve surfaces immediately before application of waterproofing
 materials. Remove laitance, loose aggregate, sharp projections, grease,
 oil, dirt, curing compounds, and other contaminants which could adversely
 affect the complete bonding of the fluid-applied membrane to the concrete
 surface.

3.1.1      Flashings

 Make penetrations through sleeves in concrete slab watertight before
 application of waterproofing. After flashing is completed, cover
 elastomeric sheet with fluid-applied waterproofing during waterproofing
 application.

3.1.1.1      Drains

 Make drain flanges flush with surface of structural slab. Apply a full
 elastomeric sheet around the drain, with edges fully adhered to drain flange
 and to structural slab. Do not adhere elastomeric sheet over joint between
 drain and concrete slab. Do not plug drainage or weep holes. Cover
 elastomeric sheet with fluid-applied waterproofing during waterproofing
 application. Lap elastomeric sheet a minimum of 4 inches onto concrete
 slab.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 248 of 463

3.1.1.2     Penetrations and Projections

 Flash penetrations and projections through structural slab with an
 elastomeric sheet adhered to the concrete slab and the penetration. Leave
 elastomeric sheet un-adhered for one inch over joint between penetration and
 concrete slab. Adhere elastomeric sheet a minimum of 4 inches onto
 horizontal deck.


3.1.1.3     Vertical Surfaces

 Flash wall intersections which are not of monolithic pour or constructed
 with reinforced concrete joints with an elastomeric sheet adhered to both
 vertical wall surfaces and concrete slab. Flash intersections, which are
 monolithically poured or constructed with reinforced concrete joints with
 either an elastomeric sheet or a vertical grade of fluid-applied
 waterproofing, adhered to vertical surfaces and concrete slab. Leave sheet
 unadhered for a distance of one inch from the corner on both vertical and
 horizontal surfaces.

3.1.2     Cracks and Joints

 Prepare visible cracks and joints in substrate to receive fluid-applied
 waterproofing membrane by placing a bond breaker and an elastomeric slip-
 sheet between membrane and substrate. Cracks that show movement shall
 receive a 2-inch bond breaker followed by an elastomeric sheet adhered to
 the deck. Nonmoving cracks shall be double coated with fluid-applied
 waterproofing.

3.1.3     Priming

 Prime surfaces to receive fluid-applied waterproofing membrane. Apply
 primer as required by membrane manufacturer's printed instructions.

3.2     SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS

 Protect waterproofing materials during transport and application. Do not
 dilute primers and other materials, unless specifically recommended by
 materials manufacturer. Keep containers closed except when removing
 contents. Do not mix remains of unlike materials. Thoroughly remove
 residual materials before using application equipment for mixing and
 transporting materials. Do not permit equipment on the project site that
 has residue of materials used on previous projects. Use cleaners only for
 cleaning, not for thinning primers or membrane materials. Ensure that
 workers and others who walk on cured membrane wear clean, soft-soled shoes
 to avoid damaging the waterproofing materials.

3.3     APPLICATION

 Over primed surfaces, provide a uniform, wet, monolithic coating of fluid-
 applied membrane, 60 mils thick, plus or minus 5 mils by following
 manufacturer's printed instructions. Apply material by trowel, squeegee,
 roller, brush, spray apparatus, or other method recommended by membrane
                                                                 W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                    Page 249 of 463

 manufacturer. Check wet film thickness as specified in paragraph entitled
 "Film Thickness" and adjust application rate as necessary to provide a
 uniform coating of the thickness specified. Where possible, mark off
 surface to be coated in equal units to facilitate proper coverage. At
 expansion joints, control joints, prepared cracks, flashing, and
 terminations, carry membrane over preformed elastomeric sheet in a uniform
 60 mil thick, plus or minus 5 mils, wet thickness to provide a monolithic
 coating. If membrane cures before next application, wipe previously applied
 membrane with a solvent to remove dirt and dust that could inhibit adhesion
 of overlapping membrane coat. Use solvent recommended by the membrane
 manufacturer, as approved.

3.3.1     Work Sequence

 Perform work   so that protection board is installed prior to using the
 waterproofed   surface. Do not permanently install protection board until the
 membrane has   passed the flood test specified under paragraph entitled "Flood
 Test." Move    material storage areas as work progresses to prevent abuse of
 membrane and   overloading of structural deck.

3.3.2     Protection Board

 Protect fluid-applied membrane by placing protection board over membrane at
 a time recommended by the membrane manufacturer. Protect membrane
 application when protection board is not placed immediately. Butt
 protection boards together and do not overlap.

3.3.3     Drainage Course

 Place drainage course where shown after flood tests are completed and
 wearing course is ready to be installed.


3.3.4     Insulation

 Place insulation of thickness indicated, on top of drainage course just
 prior to placement of wearing course.

3.4     FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.4.1     Moisture Test

 Prior to application of fluid-applied waterproofing, measure moisture
 content of substrate with a moisture meter in the presence of the
 Contracting Officer. An acceptable device is the Delmhorst Moisture Meter,
 Model BD7/2E/CS, Type 21 E. Similar meters by other manufacturers, which
 are suitable for the purpose, may be used as approved by the Contracting
 Officer. Do not begin application until meter reading indicates "dry"
 range.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 250 of 463

3.4.2     Film Thickness

 Measure wet film thickness every 100 square feet during application by
 placing flat metal plates on the substrate or using a mil-thickness gage
 especially manufactured for the purpose.

3.4.3     Flood Test

 After application and curing is complete, plug drains and fill waterproofed
 area with water to a depth of 2 inches. A minimum 48 hour cure time, or
 longer cure time if recommended by the membrane manufacturer, shall be
 required prior to flood testing. Allow water to stand 24 hours. Test water
 tightness by measuring water level at beginning and end of the 24 hour
 period. If water level falls, drain water, allow installation to dry, and
 inspect. Make repairs or replace as required and repeat the test. Work
 shall not proceed before approval of repairs or replacement.

3.5     INFORMATION CARD

 Furnish a typewritten card containing information listed in the attached
 Form l, framed in a watertight frame under clear glass or plastic for each
 waterproofing installation. Furnish framed card and duplicate card.
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                   Page 251 of 463

                                       FORM 1

                FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING SYSTEM COMPONENTS

1.   Contract Number

2.   Date Work Completed

3.   Project Specification Designation

4.   Substrate Material

5.   Slope of Substrate

6.   Drains Type/Manufacturer

7.   Waterproofing
     a. Membrane
     b. Sealant
     c. Elastomeric Sheet
     d. Materials Manufacturer(s)

8.   Protection Board
     a. Type
     b. Thickness
     c. Manufacturer's Name

9.   Drainage Course Material Graduation

10. Insulation
    a. Type
    b. Thickness
    c. Manufacturer's Name

11. Protection Slab
    a. Material
    b. Thickness
    c. Support
    d. Joint System

12. Wearing Course
    a. Type
    b. Slope
    c. Joint System
    d. Sealant/Gasket Type

13. Wearing Surface Type
    Manufacturer's Name

14. Statement of Compliance or Exception

     Contractor's Signature               Date Signed

     Inspector's Signature                Date Signed

                       *   *   *   END OF SECTION   *   *   *
                                                                    W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                 0001
                                                                       Page 252 of 463


                                 SECTION 07 22 00

                             ROOF AND DECK INSULATION

PART 1      GENERAL

1.1      REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic
 designation only.

           AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

 ANSI A208.1                       (1999) Particleboard Mat Formed Woods

           AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

 ASTM C 208                        (1995) Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board

 ASTM C 552                        (2000) Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation

 ASTM C 578                        (1995) Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal
                                   Insulation

 ASTM C 726                        (2000) Mineral Fiber Roof Insulation Board

 ASTM C 728                        (1997) Perlite Thermal Insulation Board

 ASTM C 1050                       (1991) Rigid Cellular Polystyrene-Cellulosic
                                   Fiber Composite Roof Insulation

 ASTM C 1177/C 1177M               (1999) Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as
                                   Sheathing

 ASTM C 1289                       (1998) Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate
                                   Thermal Insulation Board

 ASTM D 41                         (1994) Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing,
                                   Dampproofing, and Waterproofing

 ASTM D 226                        (1997a) Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used
                                   in Roofing and Waterproofing

 ASTM D 312                        (2000) Asphalt Used in Roofing

 ASTM D 2178                       (1997a) Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing
                                   and Waterproofing

 ASTM D 4586                       (1993; R 1999) Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos
                                   Free
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                     Page 253 of 463


 ASTM D 4897                      (1998) Asphalt-Coated Glass-Fiber Venting
                                  Base Sheet Used in Roofing


        FACTORY MUTUAL ENGINEERING AND RESEARCH (FM)

 FM P9513                         (1996) Loss Prevention Data for Roofing
                                  Contractors

 FM P7825a                        (1998) Approval Guide Fire Protection

 FM P7825c                        (1998) Approval Guide Building Materials

        UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

 UL Bld Mat Dir                   (1999) Building Materials Directory

1.2   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that
 will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
 submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

      SD-03 Product Data

            Application of Insulation; G.

              Insulation manufacturer's recommendations for the application and
            installation of insulation.

            Inspection; G.

              The inspection procedure for insulation installation, prior to
            start of roof insulation work.

      SD-07 Certificates

            Insulation; G.
            Glass Roofing Felt; G.
            Organic Roofing Felt; G.

              Certificate attesting that the expanded perlite or
            polyisocyanurate insulation contains recovered material and showing
            estimated percent of recovered material. Certificates of
            compliance for felt materials.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 254 of 463

1.3      STORAGE OF MATERIALS

 Insulation materials shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer's
 instructions. Insulation, base sheet, and felt shall be kept dry at all
 times, before, during, and after delivery to the site and shall be stored in
 an enclosed building or in a closed trailer. Wet insulation, wet base sheet
 or wet felt shall be permanently removed from the site. Felts shall be
 stacked on end one level high. Felt rolls shall be maintained at a
 temperature above 50 degrees F for 24 hours immediately before laying.

1.4      FIRE CLASSIFICATION

 Insulation shall have been tested as part of a roof construction assembly of
 the type used in this project, and the construction shall be listed as Fire-
 Classified in UL Bld Mat Dir or Class I in FM P7825a, except for
 installation on poured concrete decks or precast concrete roof deck panels.

PART 2      PRODUCTS

2.1      BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

 Bituminous materials shall conform to the following requirements:

2.1.1      Asphalt Bitumen

 ASTM D 312, Type III or IV. Asphalt flash point, finished blowing
 temperature, and equiviscous temperature (EVT) for mop and for mechanical
 spreader application shall be indicated on bills of lading or on individual
 containers.

2.1.2      Asphalt Cement

 ASTM D 4586, Type I for surfaces sloped from 0 to 3 inches per foot; Type II
 for slopes greater than 3 inches per foot.

2.1.3      Asphalt Primer

 ASTM D 41.

2.2      INSULATION

 Insulation shall be a standard product of the manufacturer and shall be
 factory marked with the manufacturer's name or trade mark, the material
 specification number, the R-value at 75 degrees F, and the thickness.
 Minimum thickness shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Boards shall
 be marked individually. The thermal resistance of insulation shall be not
 less than the R-value shown on the drawings. The insulation manufacturing
 process shall not include chloro-fluoro carbons (CFC) or formaldehydes.
 Contractor shall comply with EPA requirements in conformance with recycled
 and/or recovered materials regulations. Insulation shall be one, or a
 combination of the following materials:
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 255 of 463

2.2.1     Cellular Glass

 ASTM C 552, Type IV.

2.2.2     Composite Board Insulation

 ASTM C 1050 or ASTM C 1289 Type III, or ASTM C 1289 Type VI. Perlite, in
 composite board, may be replaced with ANSI A208.1 wood fiberboard, 7/16 inch
 minimum thickness, provided that the composite board meets specified
 physical requirements. Composite board with wood fiberboard shall conform
 to ASTM C 1289, Type V.

2.2.3     Expanded-Perlite Insulation Board

 ASTM C 728 with a minimum recovered material content of 23 percent of the
 expanded perlite portion of the board.

2.2.4     Fiberboard

 ASTM C 208 Type II, Grade 1 or 2, roof insulating board with a minimum
 recovered material content of 9 percent, treated with sizing, wax or
 bituminous impregnation. Bituminous impregnation shall be limited to 4
 percent by weight when used over steel decks.

2.2.5     Mineral-Fiber Insulation Board

 ASTM C 726.

2.2.6     Polyisocyanurate

 ASTM C 1289, Type I, or ASTM C 1289 Type II, having minimum recovered
 material content of 9 percent by weight of the polyisocyanurate portion of
 the board.

2.2.7     Polystyrene

 Polystrene shall be in accordance with ASTM C 578, Type II, IV, or X.

2.2.8     Glass Mat Gypsum Roof Board

 Glass mat gypsum roof board shall be in accordance with ASTM C 1177/C 1177M,
 flame spread - 0, smoke developed - 0, 500 psi Class A non-combustible.

2.3     FASTENERS

 Fasteners shall be specifically designed screws and plates or spikes and
 plates of sufficient length to hold insulation securely in place. Fasteners
 shall conform to insulation manufacturer's recommendations except that
 holding power, when driven, shall be not less than 120 pounds each in steel
 deck. Fasteners for steel or concrete decks shall conform to FM P7825c for
 Class I roof deck construction, and shall be spaced to withstand an uplift
 pressure of 90 pounds per square foot.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 256 of 463

2.4      VENTING INORGANIC BASE SHEET

 ASTM D 4897, Type II, Non-perforated, with spot mopping holes where
 specified.

2.5      GLASS ROOFING FELT

 ASTM D 2178, Type IV.

2.6      ORGANIC ROOFING FELT

 ASTM D 226, Type I.

2.7      WOOD NAILERS

 Wood nailers shall conform to Section 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY, including
 preservative treatment. Edge nailers shall be not less than nominal 6
 inches wide and of thickness to finish flush with the top surface of the
 insulation. Surface mounted nailers shall be a nominal 3 inches wide by the
 full thickness of the insulation.

PART 3      EXECUTION

3.1      COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS

 Insulation and roofing membrane shall be finished in one operation up to the
 line of termination at the end of each day's work. Completed sections shall
 be glaze coated when more than one day is required to finish the roofing.
 Phased construction will not be permitted.

3.2      ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

 The temperature of the roofing materials shall be as required by the
 manufacturer. Air temperature shall be above 40 degrees F and there shall
 be no visible moisture on the roof deck when the insulation and roofing are
 installed. Wind conditions shall be suitable for installation of
 insulation: Wind chill may affect the proper application temperatures of
 materials; hot materials may be blown about, creating safety dangers;
 insulation boards may become difficult and hazardous to handle; wrappers,
 coverings, and other debris may become airborne, and possibly contaminate
 laps and seams.

3.3      SUBSTRATE PREPARATION

 The substrate construction of any bay or section of the building shall be
 completed before insulation work is begun thereon. Insulation to be applied
 on lightweight insulating concrete or gypsum shall not be scheduled until
 the insulating concrete is dry. Insulation to be applied directly on
 concrete shall not be scheduled until joints have been grouted, deck has
 been primed and allowed to dry, frothing or bubbling does not occur when hot
 bitumen is applied to the concrete and until the hot bitumen sticks tightly
 to the concrete. Vents and other items penetrating the roof shall be
 secured in position and properly prepared for flashing. Prior to
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 257 of 463

 application of insulation, substrate joints shall be covered with a 4 inch
 strip of roofing felt, embedded in and coated with asphalt cement.
 Substrate surface shall be smooth, clean, and dry at time of application.

3.4     HEATING OF ASPHALT

 Asphalt shall not be heated higher than 105 degrees F above the EVT or 50
 degrees F below the flash point, or 525 degrees F, whichever is lower. EVT
 and flash point temperatures of asphalt in the kettle shall be conspicuously
 posted on the kettle. Kettle shall be provided with automatic thermostatic
 controls and an accurate thermometer. Kettle operators shall be in
 attendance at all times during heating to ensure that the maximum
 temperature is not exceeded. Asphalt shall be applied within a range of 25
 degrees F below or above the EVT, or as specified by the manufacturer.
 Application temperature shall be measured at the mop bucket or mechanical
 applicator. Asphalt at a temperature below this range shall be returned to
 the kettle. Flame-heated equipment shall not be placed on the roof.

3.5     INSTALLATION OF WOOD NAILERS

 Nailers shall be secured to cast-in-place deck materials by not less than
 3/8 inch diameter anchors embedded in the deck not over 47 inches on
 centers. Nailers shall be secured to precast deck materials and to steel
 decks as indicated. Bolt anchors shall have nuts and washers countersunk,
 and bolts shall be cut flush with top of nailer. Powder-actuated fasteners,
 sized and spaced for nailer anchorage equivalent to that specified and
 indicated, may be used when approved. Surface mounted nailers shall be
 installed parallel with the roof slope and shall be spaced not over 47
 inches face-to-face, except that where the insulation units are less than 47
 inches in length the nailers shall be spaced to minimize cutting of the
 insulation. On sloped roofs exceeding 3/4 inch per foot for modified
 bituminous systems and 1 inch per foot for BUR systems, nailers shall be
 installed in accordance with the recommendations of the membrane system
 manufacturer.

3.6     APPLICATION OF INSULATION

 Insulation shall be laid in two or more layers. Units of insulation shall
 be laid in courses parallel with the roof slope. End joints shall be
 staggered. Insulation shall be cut to fit neatly against adjoining
 surfaces. Joints between insulation boards shall not exceed 1/4 inch.
 Joints in successive layers shall be staggered with respect to joints of
 preceding layer. Where insulation is applied over steel deck, long edge
 joints shall continuously bear on surfaces of the steel deck. Insulation
 which can be readily lifted after installation is not considered to be
 adequately secured. Insulation shall be applied so that all roof insulation
 applied each day is waterproofed the same day. Phased construction will not
 be permitted. Application of impermeable faced insulation shall be
 performed without damage to the facing.

3.6.1     Mechanical Fastening

 On steel decks, for any slope exceeding 1/2 inch/foot, the first layer of
 insulation shall be mechanically fastened. Method of attachment shall be in
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 258 of 463

 accordance with recommendations of the insulation manufacturer and
 requirements specified.

3.6.2     Steel Decks

 All steel decks shall be insulated before receiving a roof membrane.
 Uninsulated steel decks shall have insulation applied to span the steel deck
 flutes and to act as an underlayment for the roof membrane. First layer of
 insulation on steel deck shall be compatible with mechanical fastening and
 shall meet fire resistant requirements.

3.6.3     Foam Insulation

 Polyisocyanurate, or polystyrene foam insulations shall be isolated from
 built-up roof and modified bitumen membrane by a separate or composite layer
 of cellular glass, mineral fiber board, perlite board, glass mat gypsum roof
 board, or fiberboard. Polystyrene shall not be exposed to solvent-base
 adhesive, coal-tar bitumen or to asphalt which is hotter than 200 degrees F.

3.6.4     Installation

 Except for the first layer on steel deck, insulation layers shall be laid in
 solid moppings of hot asphalt applied (over a fastened base ply, lightweight
 insulating concrete, gypsum or wood) at a rate of at least 20 pounds per
 square. Asphalt shall not be applied further than one panel length ahead of
 roof insulation being installed. Where roof slopes are greater than 1/2
 inch/foot, roof insulation shall be held in place by both asphalt mopping
 and mechanical fasteners. Asphalt primer shall be applied at the rate of 1
 gallon per square over the entire surface to be mopped when the insulation
 is applied over concrete deck. The edges of insulation boards adjoining
 vented nailers shall be kept free of asphalt.

3.6.5     Protection Requirements

 The insulation shall be kept dry at all times. Insulation boards shall not
 be kicked into position. Exposed edges of the insulation shall be protected
 by cutoffs at the end of each work day or whenever precipitation is
 imminent. Cutoffs shall be 2 layers of bituminous-saturated felt set in
 plastic bituminous cement. Cutoffs shall be removed when work is resumed.
 Edges of insulation at open spaces between insulation and parapets or other
 walls and spaces at curbs, scuttles, and expansion joints, shall be
 protected until permanent roofing and flashing is applied. Storing,
 walking, wheeling, or trucking directly on insulation or on roofed surfaces
 will not be permitted. Smooth, clean board or plank walkways, runways, and
 platforms shall be used, as necessary to distribute weight to conform to
 indicated live load limits of roof construction.

3.7     INSPECTION

 The Contractor shall establish and maintain an inspection procedure to
 assure compliance of the installed roof insulation with the contract
 requirements. Any work found not to be in compliance with the contract
 shall be promptly removed and replaced or corrected in an approved manner.
 Quality control shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
                                                              W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                           0001
                                                                 Page 259 of 463


  a. Observation of environmental conditions; number and skill level of
insulation workers; start and end time of work.

  b. Verification of certification, listing or label compliance with FM
P9513.

  c. Verification of proper storage and handling of insulation and vapor
retarder materials before, during, and after installation.

  d. Inspection of mechanical fasteners; type, number, length, and spacing.

  e. Coordination with other materials, cants, sleepers, and nailing strips.

  f. Inspection of insulation joint orientation and laps between layers,
joint width and bearing of edges of insulation on deck.

  g. Installation of cutoffs and proper joining of work on subsequent days.

  h. Continuation of complete roofing system installation to cover
insulation installed same day.


                     *   *   *   END OF SECTION   *   *   *
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                        Page 260 of 463




                                    SECTION 07 31 13

                                    ASPHALT SHINGLES

PART 1        GENERAL

1.1      REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
 basic designation only.

              AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

 ASTM D 41                            (1994) Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing,
                                      Dampproofing, and Waterproofing

 ASTM D 224                           (1989; R 1996) Smooth-Surfaced Asphalt Roll
                                      Roofing (Organic Felt)

 ASTM D 226                           (1997; Rev. A) Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt
                                      Used in Roofing and Waterproofing

 ASTM D 249                           (1989; R 1996) Asphalt Roll Roofing (Organic
                                      Felt) Surfaced with Mineral Granules

 ASTM D 3018                          (1990; R 1994) Class A Asphalt Shingles
                                      Surfaced with Mineral Granules

 ASTM D 3462                          (1997; Rev. A) Asphalt Shingles Made from
                                      Glass Felt and Surfaced with Mineral Granules

 ASTM D 4586                          (1993) Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free

              UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

 UL 790                               (1997) Fire Resistance of Roof Covering
                                      Materials

 UL 997                               (1995) Wind Resistance of Prepared Roof
                                      Covering Materials

1.2      DEFINITIONS

         a.    Top lap:   That portion of shingle overlapping shingle in course
               below.
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 261 of 463


        b.   Head lap: The triple coverage portion of top lap which is the
             shortest distance from the butt edge of an overlapping shingle to
             the upper edge of a shingle in the second course below.

        c.   Exposure: That portion of a shingle exposed to the weather after
             installation.

1.3     SUBMITTALS

 Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00, "Submittal
 Procedures."

        SD-03 Product Data

             Shingles

             Submit data including type, weight, class, UL labels, and special
             types of underlayment and eave flashing.

        SD-04 Samples

             Shingles; G

             Color charts; G

        SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

             Application

1.4     DELIVERY AND STORAGE

 Deliver materials in the manufacturer's unopened bundles and containers
 bearing the manufacturer's brand name. Keep materials dry, completely
 covered, and protected from the weather. Store according to manufacturer's
 written instructions.

1.5     WARRANTIES

 Warranties shall begin on the date of Government acceptance of the work.

1.5.1     Manufacturer's Warranty

 Furnish the asphalt shingle manufacturer's standard 20 year warranty for the
 asphalt shingles. The warranty shall run directly to the Government.

1.5.2     Contractor's Warranty

 The Contractor shall warrant for 10 years that the asphalt shingle roofing
 system, as installed, is free from defects in workmanship. When repairs due
 to defective workmanship are required during the Contractor's warranty
 period, the Contractor shall make such repairs within 72 hours of
                                                                    W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                 0001
                                                                       Page 262 of 463

 notification. When repairs are not performed within the specified time,
 emergency repairs performed by others will not void the warranty.

PART 2      PRODUCTS

2.1      MATERIALS

2.1.1      Shingles

 Mineral granule-surfaced asphalt shingles, self-sealing, square tab, strip
 fungus-resistant. ASTM D 3018, Type I, and ASTM D 3462, weighing not less
 than 210 pounds per 100 square feet. Shingles shall meet the fire
 resistance requirements of UL 790 for Class A and the wind resistance
 requirements of UL 997. Color shall be as selected from the manufacturer's
 standard color charts.

2.1.2      Mineral-Surfaced Asphalt Roll Roofing

 ASTM D 249.

2.1.3      Smooth-Surfaced Asphalt Roll Roofing

 ASTM D 224, Type II.

2.1.4      Shingle Underlayment

 Asphalt-saturated felt conforming to ASTM D 226, Type I, without
 perforations or other material specified by the shingle manufacturer for use
 as underlayment.

2.1.5      Self-Adhering Membrane

 Self-adhering rubberized asphaltic membrane, a minimum of 40 mils thick, and
 recommended by the shingle manufacturer for use as eaves flashing.

2.1.6      Nails for Applying Shingles and Asphalt-Saturated Felt

 Aluminum or hot-dipped galvanized steel with sharp points and flat heads 3/8
 to 7/16 inch in diameter. Shank diameter of nails shall be a minimum of
 0.105 inch and a maximum of 0.135 inch. Nails shall be long enough to
 penetrate completely through or extend a minimum of 3/4 inch into roof deck,
 whichever is less, when driven through materials to be fastened.

2.1.7      Asphalt Roof Cement

 ASTM D 4586, Type II.

2.1.8      Asphalt Primer

 ASTM D 41.
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                     Page 263 of 463

PART 3      EXECUTION

3.1      VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS

 Ensure that roof deck is smooth, clean, dry, and without loose knots.

3.2      SURFACE PREPARATION

 Cover knotholes and cracks with sheet metal nailed securely to sheathing.
 Flash and secure vents and other roof projections, and drive projecting
 nails firmly home.

3.3      APPLICATION

 Apply roofing materials as specified herein unless specified or recommended
 otherwise by shingle manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3.1      Underlayment

 Provide for roof slopes 4 inches per foot and greater. Apply one layer of
 shingle underlayment to roof deck. Lay underlayment parallel to roof eaves,
 starting at eaves. Provide minimum 2-inch head laps, 4-inch end laps, and
 6-inch laps from both sides over hips and ridges. Nail sufficiently to hold
 until shingles are applied. Turn up vertical surfaces a minimum of 4
 inches.

3.3.2      Drip Edges

 Provide metal drip edges as    specified in Section 07600N, "Flashing and Sheet
 Metal," applied directly on    the wood deck at eaves and over the underlayment
 at rakes. Extend back from     edge of deck a maximum of 3 inches, and secure
 with nails spaced a maximum    of 4inches o.c. along inner edge.

3.3.3      Eave Flashing

 Provide for roof slopes 4 inches per foot and greater. Provide eave
 flashing strips consisting of smooth-surfaced roll roofing. Flashing strips
 shall overhang metal drip edge 1/4 inch to 3/8 inch and extend up the slope
 far enough to cover a point 12 inches inside interior face of exterior wall.
 Where overhangs require flashings wider than 36 inches, locate laps outside
 exterior wall face. Laps shall be at least 2 inches wide and cemented with
 asphalt roof cement over entire length of lap. Lap end 12 inches and
 cement.

3.3.4      Starter Strip

 Apply starter strip at eaves, using 9-nch wide strip of mineral-surfaced
 roll roofing of a color to match shingles. Optionally, use a row of
 shingles with tabs removed and trimmed to ensure that joints are not exposed
 at shingle cutouts. Apply starter strip along eaves, overlaying and
 finishing even with lower edge of eave flashing strip and/or overhanging the
 metal drip edge at eaves and rake edges 1/4 inch to 3/8 inch; fasten in a
 line parallel to and 3 to 4 inches above eave edge. Place nails so top of
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 264 of 463

 nail is not exposed in cutouts of first course of shingles. Seal tabs of
 first course of shingles with asphalt roof cement as specified below.

3.3.5     Shingle Courses

 Start first course with full shingle, and apply succeeding courses with
 joints staggered at thirds or halves. Butt-end joints of shingles shall not
 align vertically more often than every fourth course. Apply shingle courses
 as follows:

        a.   Fastening: Do not drive fasteners into or above the factory-
             applied adhesive unless adhesive is located 5/8 inch or closer to
             top of cutouts. Place fasteners so they are concealed by shingle
             top lap and penetrate the head lap.

        b.   Shingles applied with nails: Nominal 5 inch exposure. Apply each
             shingle with minimum of four nails. Place one nail one inch from
             each end, and evenly space nails on a horizontal line a minimum of
             5/8 inch above top of cutouts. Cement each tab with one spot of
             asphalt roof cement placed one to 2 inches from bottom edge of
             shingle.

        c.   Nailing: Apply shingles with nominal 5-inch exposure. Apply each
             shingle with minimum of six nails. Place one nail one inch from
             each end and one nail on each side of each cutout, on a horizontal
             line 5/8 inch above cutouts.

        d.   Sealing: Seal each tab with continuous, 9-inch long, 1/4 inch
             diameter bead of asphalt roof cement, applied to the surface of
             course below. Place bead on horizontal line 5/8 inch above cutouts
             so bead will be one inch from bottom edge of tab to be sealed and
             so bead will not show through cutouts. After nailing each shingle,
             press tabs down to ensure spreading and bonding of asphalt roof
             cement.

3.3.6     Hips and Ridges

 Form with 9 by 12 inch individual shingles or with 12 by 12 inch shingles
 cut from 12 by 36 inch strip shingles. Bend shingles lengthwise down center
 with equal exposure on each side of hip or ridge. Lap shingles to provide a
 maximum 5 inch exposure, and nail each side in unexposed area 5 1/2 inches
 from butt and one inch in from edge.

3.3.7     Valleys

 Provide either closed cut, woven, open roll roofing, or open sheet metal
 valleys.

3.3.7.1      Closed Cut Valleys

 Provide 36 inch wide valley lining of single layer of smooth-surfaced or
 mineral-surfaced roll roofing, with mineral-surface facing down, for full
 length of valley as follows:
                                                                 W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                    Page 265 of 463


      a.   Center lining in valley over underlayment. Provide minimum 12 inch
           end laps in the lining and seal laps with asphalt roof cement.
           Fasten lining to hold it in place until shingles are applied.

      b.   Apply first regular course of shingles along eaves of one of the
           intersecting roof planes and across valley. Extend course at least
           12 inches onto adjoining roof.

      c.   Apply succeeding courses in same manner as first course, extending
           across valley and onto adjoining roof.

      d.   Press shingles tightly into valley and nail in normal manner,
           except apply nails not closer than 6 inches to valley centerline,
           and apply additional nail in top corner of each shingle crossing
           valley.

      e.   Apply shingles on the adjoining roof plane, starting along eaves
           and across valley onto previously applied shingles. Trim
           overlapping courses back to a line parallel to and a minimum of 2
           inches back from valley centerline.

      f.   Trim one inch on a 45 degree angle from upper corner of each end
           shingle. Embed end shingles in a 3 inch wide band of asphalt roof
           cement.

3.3.7.2    Woven Valleys

 Provide valley lining as specified for closed cut valley.   Lay valley
 shingles over lining by either of the following methods:

      a.   Method I: Apply regular shingles on both roofs simultaneously.
           Weave each course in turn over the valley. Lay the first regular
           course of shingles along eaves of roof up to and over valley.
           Extend course along adjoining roof deck at least 12 inches. Carry
           first regular course of shingles of adjoining roof over valley on
           top of previously applied shingles. Lay succeeding courses
           alternately, weaving valley shingles over each other for full
           length of valley.

      b.   Method II: Apply regular shingles on each roof surface separately
           to a line about 3 feet from center of valley, and weave valley
           shingles in place later, as specified for Method I.

 In following either method, press shingles tightly into valley, and fasten
 in normal manner; except apply nails not closer than 6 inches to valley
 centerline, and apply additional nail in top corner of terminal shingle on
 both sides of valley.
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                     Page 266 of 463

3.3.7.3    Open Roll Roofing Valleys

 Provide 18 inch wide strip of mineral-surfaced asphalt roll roofing, of a
 color to blend with asphalt shingles, and with granular surface facing down,
 for the full length of valley as follows:

      a.   Center roll roofing strip in valley over underlayment. Lay
           centered in valley over felt underlayment and with granular face
           down. Nail strip only enough to hold in place. Apply nails in
           rows one inch from each edge. As fastening along second side
           proceeds, press strip firmly into valley.

      b.   Center second strip 36 inches wide in valley and lay it over first
           strip with granular face exposed and nail as specified for 18 inch
           strip.

      c.   Before   applying roofing shingles, snap two chalk lines for full
           length   of valley. Locate each line 3 inches from centerline of
           valley   at top, and increase width between lines by one inch for
           each 8   feet of valley length, continuing to eaves.

      d.   Apply a 2-inch band of asphalt roof cement along each edge of 36
           inch strip from edge to chalk line. Cut regular shingle courses
           true along valley chalk lines, and nail in normal manner.

3.3.7.4    Open Sheet Metal Valleys

 Sheet metal flashing for valleys is specified in Section 07600N, "Flashing
 and Sheet Metal." Before installing and fastening flashing in place with
 metal cleats:

      a.   Install single layer of 36 inch wide, asphalt-saturated felt,
           centered on valley and extending entire length of valley over felt
           underlayment.

      b.   Cut regular shingle courses on each roof on true line 2 inches from
           valley centerline at top of valley, and increase width between
           lines by one inch for each 8 feet of valley length, continuing to
           eaves.

      c.   Apply 2-inch band of asphalt roof cement over flashing, along and
           under side of shingles adjoining valley.

      d.   Press shingles tightly into cement, and nail in normal manner,
           except apply nails not closer than 5 inches to valley centerline.
           Do not drive nails through valley flashing.

      e.   Provide a 4-inch band of asphalt roof cement for fastening shingle
           tabs down along open metal gutters.
                                                                    W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                 0001
                                                                       Page 267 of 463

3.3.8     Flashing

3.3.8.1     Stepped Flashing

 For sloping roofs which abut vertical surfaces, provide stepped metal
 flashing as specified in Section 07600N, "Flashing and Sheet Metal."

3.3.8.2     Vent and Stack Flashing

 Apply shingles up to point where vent or stack pipe projects through roof,
 and cut nearest shingle to fit around pipe. Before applying shingles beyond
 pipe, prepare flange of metal pipe vent flashing as specified in Section 07
 60 00, "Flashing and Sheet Metal," by applying a 1/8 inch thick coating of
 asphalt roof cement on bottom side of flashing flange. Slip flashing collar
 and flange over pipe, and set coated flange in 1/16 inch coating of asphalt
 roof cement. After applying flashing flange, continue shingling up roof.
 Lap lower part of flange over shingles. Overlap flange with side and upper
 shingles. Fit shingles around pipe, and embed in 1/16 inch thick coating of
 asphalt roof cement where shingles overlay flange.


                         *     *   *   END OF SECTION   *   *   *
                                                                    W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                 0001
                                                                       Page 268 of 463




                                 SECTION 07 51 13

                             ASPHALT BUILT-UP ROOFING

PART 1      GENERAL

1.1      REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic
 designation only.

           AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

 ASTM C 208                        (1995) Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board

 ASTM C 728                        (1997) Perlite Thermal Insulation Board

 ASTM C 1153                       (1997) Location of Wet Insulation in Roofing
                                   Systems Using Infrared Imaging

 ASTM C 1177/C 1177M               (1999) Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as
                                   Sheathing

 ASTM D 41                         (1994) Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Damp-
                                   proofing, and Waterproofing

 ASTM D 43                         (2000) Coal Tar Primer Used in Roofing, Damp-
                                   proofing, and Waterproofing

 ASTM D 226                        (1997a) Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used
                                   in Roofing and Waterproofing

 ASTM D 227                        (1998) Coal-Tar Saturated Organic Felt Used
                                   in Roofing and Waterproofing

 ASTM D 312                        (2000) Asphalt Used in Roofing

 ASTM D 450                        (1996) Coal-Tar Pitch Used in Roofing, Damp-
                                   proofing, and Waterproofing

 ASTM D 517                        (1998) Asphalt Plank
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                   Page 269 of 463

 ASTM D 1668                    (1997a) Glass Fabrics (Woven and Treated) for
                                Roofing and Waterproofing

 ASTM D 1863                    (1993; R 1996) Mineral Aggregate Used on
                                Built-Up Roofs

 ASTM D 2178                    (1997a) Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing
                                and Waterproofing

 ASTM D 2626                    (1997b) Asphalt-Saturated and Coated Organic
                                Felt Base Sheet Used in Roofing

 ASTM D 3617                    (1983; R 1994el) Sampling and Analysis of New
                                Built-Up Roof Membranes

 ASTM D 3909                    (1997b) Asphalt Roll Roofing (Glass Felt)
                                Surfaced With Mineral Granules

 ASTM D 4022                    (1994) Coal Tar Roof Cement, Asbestos
                                Containing

 ASTM D 4586                    (1993; R 1999) Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos
                                Free

 ASTM D 4601                    (1998) Asphalt-Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet
                                Used in Roofing

 ASTM D 4897                    (1998) Asphalt-Coated Glass-Fiber Venting
                                Base Sheet Used in Roofing

        FACTORY MUTUAL ENGINEERING AND RESEARCH (FM)

 FM P7825c                      (1998) Approval Guide Building Materials

1.2   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "GA" designation;
 submittals not having a "GA" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "GA" designation identifies the office
 that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
 submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

      SD-03 Product Data

          Inspection; GA

            The inspection procedure for roofing installation, prior to the
          start of roofing work.

      SD-07 Certificates

          Bitumen; GA
          Felt; GA
                                                                       W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                    0001
                                                                          Page 270 of 463


                  Certificates of Compliance for felts and bitumens.

             Cants; GA

               Certificate attesting that the fiberboard furnished for the
             project contains recovered material, and showing an estimated
             percent of such recovered material.

1.3      STORAGE OF MATERIALS

 Felts, fabrics,       and roll roofing shall be kept dry before, during, and after
 delivery to the       site and shall be stored in an enclosed building or in a
 closed trailer,       and stored on end 1 level high. Felt rolls shall be
 maintained at a       temperature above 50 degrees F for 24 hours immediately
 before laying.        Aggregate shall be kept dry as defined by ASTM D 1863.

1.4      WARRANTY

 Furnish the roofing system manufacturer's warranty for the roofing system.
 The warranty period shall not be less than 10 years from the date of
 Government acceptance of the work. The warranty shall be issued directly to
 the Government and shall not be limited in dollar value. The warranty shall
 provide that if within the warranty period, the asphalt built-up roofing
 system including membrane, membrane flashing, insulation and accessories
 becomes non-watertight, blisters or shows evidence of excessive weathering
 due to deterioration of the roofing system resulting from defective
 materials or workmanship, the repair of the defective materials or
 workmanship shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer. While roofing
 is under warranty, perform repairs that become necessary due to defective
 materials or workmanship within 72 hours of notification, unless additional
 time is approved by Contracting Officer. Failure to perform repairs within
 specified period of time will constitute grounds for the Government having
 repairs performed by others and cost billed to Contractor.

PART 2      PRODUCTS

2.1      PRIMER

 ASTM D 41 for asphalt roofing systems; ASTM D 43 for coal-tar roofing
 systems.

2.2      BITUMEN

2.2.1      Asphalt

 ASTM D 312, Type II on slopes from 1/4 inch per foot up to and including 1/2
 inch per foot; Type II or Type III on slopes above 1/2 inch per foot up to
 and including 1 inch per foot; Type III on slopes above 1 inch per foot up
 to and including 3 inches per foot. Bills of lading shall indicate the
 flash point and equiviscous temperature (EVT) or this information shall be
 shown on labels for each container of asphalt.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 271 of 463

2.2.2     Coal-Tar Bitumen

 ASTM D 450, Type III, for 1/4 inch per foot slope as an option to asphalt.

2.3     BITUMINOUS CEMENT

 ASTM D 4586 for use with asphalt roofing systems. ASTM D 4022 for use with
 coal-tar roofing systems; preference shall be given to cements whose mineral
 fillers exclude asbestos fibers.

2.4     CANTS

 Cants shall be made from treated wood not less than 3-1/2 inches high cut to
 reduce change in direction of the membrane to 45 degrees or less. Treated
 wood shall be of water-borne preservative-treated material.

2.5     FELT

2.5.1     Base Sheet

 Base sheet shall conform to ASTM D 4601, Type II, with no perforations.

2.5.2     Venting Inorganic Base Sheet

 ASTM D 4897, Type II.

2.5.3     Glass Roofing Felt

 ASTM D 2178, Type IV or VI, except felts for coal tar systems shall be
 impregnated with a bituminous resin coating which is compatible with coal
 tar bitumen.

2.5.4     Organic Felt Base

 ASTM D 2626 for use with asphalt roofing system.

2.5.5     Organic Felt

 ASTM D 226 for use with asphalt roofing system and ASTM D 227 for use with
 coal tar roofing system. Organic felts may be used for bitumen stops, and
 edge envelopes.

2.6     MINERAL-SURFACED ROLL ROOFING

 ASTM D 3909.

2.7     NAILS AND FASTENERS

 Nails and fasteners shall be an approved type recommended by the roofing
 felt manufacturer. Fasteners for steel or concrete deck shall conform to FM
 P7825c for Class I roof deck construction, to withstand an uplift pressure
 of 90 pounds per square foot.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 272 of 463


2.8      AGGREGATE SURFACING MATERIALS

 Crushed stone, gravel, or crushed slag conforming to ASTM D 1863. Subject
 to approval, other materials may be used when blended to the grading
 requirements of ASTM D 1863. Aggregate shall be light-colored and opaque.

2.9      WALKWAY SURFACES

2.9.1      Mineral Asphalt Plank

 ASTM D 517, minimum 3/4 inch thick.

2.9.2      Concrete Slab

 Precast Concrete 3000 psi, 12 x 24 x I inch.

2.10      WOVEN GLASS FABRIC

 ASTM D 1668, Type I for asphalt roofing systems and Type II for coal-tar
 roofing systems.

2.11      INSULATION

 Insulation shall be fiberboard, composite board, expanded perlite, mineral
 fiber, or polyisocyanurate, as specified in Section 07220 ROOF INSULATION.
 Top layer shall be minimum 3/4-inch thick fiberboard, mineral fiber or
 perlite.

2.12     FLASHINGS

 Bituminous flashings in accordance with these specifications shall be used
 throughout unless otherwise specified or indicated.

PART 3      EXECUTION

3.1      COORDINATION

 The entire roofing system, excluding flood coat and aggregate surfacing,
 shall be finished in 1 operation up to the line of termination at end of
 day's work. Glaze coating may be considered part of the flood coat as
 specified in paragraph GLAZE COAT. Phased construction will not be
 permitted.

3.1.1      Insulation

 Application of roofing shall immediately follow application of insulation as
 a continuous operation. Roofing operations shall be coordinated with
 insulation work so that all roof insulation applied each day is waterproofed
 the same day. Insulation is specified in Section 07220 ROOF INSULATION.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 273 of 463

3.1.2     Sheet Metalwork

 Roofing operations shall be coordinated with sheet metalwork so that sheet
 metal items are installed to permit continuous roof surfacing operations the
 same day felts are installed. Sheet metalwork is specified in Section 07600
 SHEET METALWORK, GENERAL.

3.2     ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

 Air temperature shall be above 40 degrees F and there shall be no visible
 moisture on the roof deck at the time roofing is installed.

3.3     PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS

 The substrate construction of a bay or section of the building shall be
 completed before roofing work is begun thereon. Roofing applied directly on
 lightweight insulating concrete shall not be scheduled until the insulating
 concrete passes the air-dry density test. Vents and other items penetrating
 the roof shall be secured in position and properly prepared for flashing.
 Nailers, curbs and other items attached to roof surface shall be in place
 before roofing is begun.

3.4     INSTALLATION OF CANTS

 Cants shall be installed in the angles formed between the roof and walls or
 other vertical surfaces. Cants shall be laid in a solid coat of bituminous
 cement just prior to laying the roofing plies. Cants shall be continuous,
 and shall be installed in lengths as long as practicable. Additional cants
 are not required at locations where cast-in-place cants are integrally
 formed with the structural deck or roof fill.

3.5     CONDITION OF SURFACES

 Surfaces shall be inspected and approved immediately before application of
 roofing and flashings. The roofing and flashings shall be applied to a
 smooth and firm surface free from visible moisture, dirt, projections, and
 foreign materials. Prior to application of primer on precast concrete
 decks, joints shall be covered with a 4-inch strip of roofing felt, embedded
 in and coated with bituminous cement.

3.6     MECHANICAL APPLICATION DEVICES

 Mechanical application devices shall be mounted on pneumatic-tired wheels,
 and shall be designed and maintained to operate without damaging the
 insulation, roofing membrane, or structural components.

3.7     PRIMING

 Concrete surfaces to receive bitumen shall be uniformly coated with primer
 at a rate of not less than 1 gallon per square and allowed to dry. Primer
 shall be compatible with the bitumen to be used.
                                                                 W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                    Page 274 of 463

3.8    HEATING OF BITUMEN

 Asphalt shall not be heated higher than 75 degrees F above the EVT or 50
 degrees below the flash point or 525 degrees F (maximum) whichever is lower.
 EVT and flash point temperatures of asphalt in the kettle shall be
 conspicuously posted on the kettle. Coal tar bitumen shall not be heated
 above 425 degrees F. Heating kettles shall be provided with automatic
 thermostatic controls and an accurate thermometer. Kettle operators shall
 be in attendance at all times during the heating to ensure that the maximum
 temperature specified is not exceeded. Equipment utilizing flame-heat shall
 not be placed on the roof.

3.9    BITUMEN STOPS

 Bitumen stops shall be installed at roof edges, openings and vertical
 projections before application of roofing plies unless otherwise recommended
 by the manufacturer's printed instructions. Bitumen stops shall be formed
 of two 18-inch wide strips of organic felt. Nine inches of the width shall
 be attached to the roof surface with 9 inches extending beyond the edge.
 The first strip shall be applied in a 9-inch wide layer of bituminous
 roofing cement and nailed 1/2 inch from the roof edge at 6-inch spacing.
 The second strip shall be applied to the first in a 9-inch wide mopping of
 bitumen. The free portion of each strip shall be protected from damage
 throughout the roofing period. After the roofing plies are in place, the
 free portion of each strip shall be folded back over the roofing membrane
 and embedded in a continuous coating of bituminous cement and secured with
 roofing nails spaced 3 inches on centers.

3.10    BITUMEN APPLICATION

 Asphalt shall be applied within a range of 25 degrees F below to 25 degrees
 F above the EVT. Temperature of coal-tar bitumen at the time it is applied
 shall be in accordance with the bitumen manufacturer's recommendations.
 Application temperatures shall be measured at the mop bucket or mechanical
 applicator. Bitumen at a temperature below the recommended temperature
 shall be returned to the kettle. Each layer of felt shall be laid in not
 less than 20 pounds nor more than 35 pounds of asphalt per square or not
 less than 30 pounds nor more than 35 pounds of coal-tar bitumen per square.
 Where solid moppings are required, the following requirements as evidenced
 in any one-roof cutout sample shall apply:

       a.   Overlapping voids between two or more plies are not acceptable.

       b.   The maximum length of any individual void that is encapsulated in
            bitumen shall be 2 inches.

       c.   The total length of all voids encapsulated in bitumen shall not
            exceed 4 inches between any two plies.

       d.   Dry voids (the absence of bitumen between plies) are not
            acceptable.

       e.   Voids continuous through the specimen are not acceptable.
                                                                      W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                   0001
                                                                         Page 275 of 463

         f.    Visual interply moisture in voids is not acceptable.

3.11     APPLICATION OF FELTS

 Felt plies shall be laid at right angles to the slope of the deck with
 minimum 6-inch end-laps staggered at least 12 inches. Felts shall be
 applied in 36-inch widths with 24 2/3-inch side laps and starter sheets 12,
 24 and 36 inches wide along eaves to maintain 4 full plies including the
 base sheet when used. The full 36-inch width of each ply shall be placed in
 hot bitumen immediately behind the applicator. A broom or follow through
 tool shall be used to eliminate air pockets and obtain complete adhesion
 between plies. Bitumen shall be visible beyond all edges of each ply as it
 is being installed. Plies shall be laid free of wrinkles, creases or
 fishmouths. Each layer of roofing felt shall be carried up to the top of
 the cant. Workers shall not walk on mopped surfaces when the bitumen is
 fluid. For slopes exceeding 1/2 inch per foot, each felt ply, other than
 venting base sheet, shall be nailed 2 inches and 6 inches from upper edge
 with nails spaced 12 inches on centers in each row.

3.11.1        On Gypsum, Lightweight Concrete or Insulating Concrete Surfaces

 One ply of venting inorganic base sheet shall be laid, shingle fashion,
 without mopping and with each sheet lapping 4 inches over the previous
 sheet. Each base sheet shall be nailed or fastened at 9 inch intervals
 along laps and shall also be nailed or fastened at 18 inch intervals
 staggered down the center of the sheet in 2 rows 11 inches apart. Three
 plies of glass roofing felts shall be immediately placed shingle-fashion in
 solid mopped bitumen over the base sheet as specified. Felts shall be
 applied in 36 inch widths with 24 2/3 inch side laps and starter sheets 12,
 24 and 36 inches wide along eaves to maintain 3 full plies over the base
 sheet.

3.11.2        On Concrete or Insulation Surfaces

 Four plies of 36-inch wide glass roofing felts shall be placed shingle-
 fashion in solid mopped bitumen.

3.12     MECHANICAL FASTENING

 Nails and fasteners for securing roofing shall be flush driven through flat
 metal disks of not less than 1-inch diameter. Metal disks may be omitted
 where heads of fasteners are equivalent in size to the 1-inch diameter
 disks. Fasteners, when required, shall be spaced within 20 percent of the
 indicated spacing dimensions. There shall be no less than the total number
 of indicated fasteners in any 100 square feet area. Fastener pullout
 resistance shall be not less than 40 pounds each.

3.13     PROTECTION OF APPLIED ROOFING

 At end of day's work or whenever precipitation is imminent, the terminated
 edge of built-up roofing shall be sealed with 2 full width strips of roofing
 felt set in and coated with bituminous cement. One half-width of the strips
 shall be extended up and over the finished roofing and the other half-width
 extended out and onto the bare roof deck. Sealing strips shall be removed
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 276 of 463

 before continuing installation of roofing. To facilitate sealing,
 termination edges may be straightened with pieces of insulation board which
 shall be removed when work is resumed.

3.14     FLASHINGS

 Flashings shall be provided over cants in the angles formed at walls and
 other vertical surfaces and where required to make the work watertight.
 Bituminous flashings described below shall be used, except where metal
 flashings are specified in other sections of the specifications. Flashings
 shall be provided and installed immediately after the top ply of felt is
 placed and before the flood coat and aggregate are placed, adjacent to the
 flashing. Modified bituminous flashing may be used when it is specified in
 the roofing manufacturer's instructions.

3.14.1     Base Flashings

 Base Flashings shall be a 3-ply system using woven glass fabric, laid in
 roofing cement, with mineral surfaced roll roofing as the outer ply. The
 top of the base flashing shall be at least 8 inches above the roof membrane
 surface. Mineral surfaced roofing strips shall be cut from the width of the
 rolls, and shall extend from the reglet or top of curb onto the roof at
 least 2 inches beyond the widest flashing ply. Laps shall be well cemented,
 and where possible, shall be shingled in a direction down slope or away from
 the prevailing wind. The top edge of base flashing systems shall be nailed
 a maximum of 8 inches on center.

3.14.2     Strip Flashings

 Sheet metal flashings, bitumen stops and gravel stops installed over the
 roofing top ply shall be strip flashed with 2 layers of roofing felt, 9
 inches and 12 inches wide and successively cemented in place.

3.14.3     Valleys and Ridges

 Felt plies shall continue across valleys and ridges and terminate
 approximately 12 inches from the valley or ridge. Exposed lap shall
 terminate on a line approximately 12 inches from, and parallel to the valley
 or ridge. Two plies of roofing felt 9 inch wide bottom ply, and 12 inch
 wide top ply, shall be successively mopped-in over each felt line of
 termination.

3.15     WALKWAYS

 Walkways shall be concrete slab, and shall be located as indicated.

3.16     AGGREGATE SURFACING

 After roofing felts have been laid and flashings installed, the roof
 surface, except for cants, shall be flood-coated uniformly with 60 pounds of
 hot asphalt per square of coal-tar bitumen if coal-tar roof system is used.
 Aggregate surfacing materials shall be spread on the hot bitumen at a rate
 of 400 pounds per square for gravel or 300 pounds per square for other
 approved surfacing aggregate.
                                                                 W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                    Page 277 of 463


3.17   GLAZE COAT

 Glaze coating shall be used to waterproof completed sections when more than
 one day is required to finish the roofing. If there is a probability of
 rain falling on the felts before the flood coat and aggregate can be
 applied, a light glaze coat of bitumen 10 to 15 pounds per square, shall be
 applied over the exposed felts. The surfacing operation shall be completed
 within 48 hours after application of the glaze coat. Where glaze coat is
 used, surface treatment shall be completed as soon as weather conditions
 permit.

3.18   INSPECTION

 The Contractor shall establish and maintain an inspection procedure to
 assure compliance of the installed roofing with the contract requirements.
 Any work found not to be in compliance with the contract shall be promptly
 removed and replaced or corrected in an approved manner. Inspection shall
 include, but not be limited to, the following:

       a.   Environmental conditions; number and skill level of roofing
            workers; start and end time of various tasks; condition of
            substrate.

       b.   Verification of compliance of materials before, during, and after
            installation.

       c.   Inspection of condition of equipment and accuracy of thermometers
            and metering devices.

       d.   Inspection of flashings, cants and curbs.

       e.   Inspection of membrane placement, including edge envelopes, widths
            of starter sheets, laps, proper use of squeegee, and mechanical
            fastening.

       f.   Inspection of application of bitumen, aggregate, and walkways.

       g.   Inspection of embedment of aggregate for required weight and
            coverage.

       h.   Cutout sampling and analysis as directed.




                        *   *   *   END OF SECTION   *   *   *
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                     Page 278 of 463




                                SECTION 07 51 13.13

                       COLD-APPLIED BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING

PART 1      GENERAL

1.1      REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
 basic designation only.

           AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

 ASTM D 41                         (1994) Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Damp
                                   proofing, and Waterproofing

 ASTM D 312                        (1995; Rev. A) Asphalt Used in Roofing

 ASTM D 2170                       (1995) Kinematic Viscosity of Asphalts
                                   (Bitumens)

 ASTM D 2178                       (1997; Rev. A) Asphalt Glass Felt Used in
                                   Roofing and Waterproofing

 ASTM D 3617                       (1983; R 1994) Sampling and Analysis of New
                                   Built-Up Roof Membranes

 ASTM D 3909                       (1997; Rev. B) Asphalt Roll Roofing (Glass
                                   Felt) Surfaced with Mineral Granules

 ASTM D 4402                       (1987; R 1995) Viscosity Determinations of
                                   Unfilled Asphalts Using the Brookfield
                                   Thermosel Apparatus

 ASTM D 4586                       (1993) Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free

 ASTM D 4601                       (1998) Asphalt-Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet
                                   Used in Roofing
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                     Page 279 of 463


 ASTM D 4897                       (1998) Asphalt-Coated Glass-Fiber Venting
                                   Base Sheet Used in Roofing

1.2   SUBMITTALS
  Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00, "Submittal
  Procedures."

      SD-03 Product Data

          Asphalt; G

          Felts; G

          Fasteners; G

          Primer; G

          Asphalt roof cement; G

          Walkway material; G
          Warranty certificate; G

          Submit roofing system manufacturer's warranty stamped "Sample" or
          "Facsimile."

          SD-06 Test Reports; G

          Samples of built-up roofing

          Submit test results on roofing field samples as required, verifying
          composition of sample. Submit six copies of laboratory analysis
          within 30 calendar days after samples are taken. Submit reports in
          accordance with ASTM D 3617.

          SD-07 Certificates; G

          Bill of lading

          Submit when labels of asphalt containers do not bear the flash
          point, finished blowing temperature and equiviscous temperature.

          Qualifications of Applicator

          Submit evidence of the roofing system manufacturer's approval.

          SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions; G

          Asphalt

          Felts, including flashing felts
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 280 of 463


             Primer

             Asphalt roof cement

             Walkway material

             Explicitly identify, in writing, differences between manufacturer's
             instructions and requirements specified herein.

             SD-11 Closeout Submittals; G

             Information card

             For each roofing installation, submit a typewritten card or
             photoengraved aluminum card containing the information listed on
             Form 1 located at the end of this section.


1.3     QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.3.1     Qualifications of Applicator

 The roofing system applicator shall be approved, authorized, or licensed in
 writing by the roofing system manufacturer and be approved at a level
 capable of providing the specified warranty.

1.3.2     Pre-roofing Conference

 After submittals have been approved but before roofing and insulation work,
 including associated work, is performed, the Contracting Officer will hold a
 pre-roofing conference to review the following:

        a.   The drawings and specifications.

        b.   Procedure for onsite inspection and acceptance of roofing substrate
             and pertinent structural details relating to roofing system.

        c.   Contractor's plan for coordination of work of the various trades
             involved in providing roofing system and other components secured
             to roofing.

        d.   Safety requirements.

 The pre-roofing conference shall be attended by the Contractor and personnel
 directly responsible for the roofing and insulation installation, flashing
 and sheet metal work, and representative of the roofing materials
 manufacturer. Conflicts among those attending the pre-roofing conference
 shall be resolved and confirmed in writing before roofing work, including
 associated work, is begun.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 281 of 463

1.4     DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

1.4.1     Delivery

 Deliver materials in manufacturers' original unopened containers and rolls
 with manufacturer's labels intact and legible. Mark and remove wet or
 damaged materials from site. Where materials are covered by a referenced
 specification, container shall bear the specification number, type, and
 class, as applicable. Indicate on labels or bill of lading for roofing
 asphalt the asphalt type, finished blowing temperature (FBT), flash point
 (FP), and equiviscous temperature (EVT), that is, the temperature at which
 the viscosity is either 125 centistokes when tested in accordance with ASTM
 D 2170 or 75 centipoise when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4402. Deliver
 materials in sufficient quantity to allow the work to proceed without
 interruption.

1.4.2     Storage

 Protect materials against moisture absorption. Store roll materials on end
 on clean raised platforms in dry locations in enclosed buildings or trailers
 with adequate ventilation. Do not store roll materials in buildings under
 construction until concrete, mortar, and plaster work are finished and dry.
 For a 24-hour period immediately before application, maintain roll materials
 at temperatures above 50 degrees F. Place only those materials to be used
 during one day's work on roof at one time. Remove materials from roof at
 end of each day's work.

1.4.3     Handling

 Select and operate material handling equipment so as not to damage applied
 roofing. Prevent damage to edges and ends of roll materials.

1.5     ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

 Do not install roofing during precipitation or fog, or when there is
 moisture or visible dampness on roof deck.

1.6     PROTECTION OF PROPERTY

1.6.1     Protective Coverings

 Install protective coverings at paving and building walls adjacent to hoist
 and kettles before starting work. Lap protective coverings not less than 6
 inches, secure against wind, and vent to prevent collection of moisture on
 covered surfaces. Keep protective coverings in place for duration of
 roofing work.

1.6.2     Flame-Heated Equipment

 Do not place flame-heated equipment closer than 25 feet to buildings or
 combustible materials. Provide minimum of two 20 pound ABC all-purpose
 extinguishers at melting kettle and at area of hot material application.
                                                                    W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                 0001
                                                                       Page 282 of 463

1.7      WARRANTY

 Furnish the roofing system manufacturer's warranty for the roofing system.
 The warranty period shall not be less than 10 years from the date of
 Government acceptance of the work. The warranty shall be issued directly to
 the Government and shall not be limited in dollar value. The warranty shall
 provide that if within the warranty period, the built-up roofing system
 including membrane, membrane flashing, insulation and accessories becomes
 non-watertight, blisters or shows evidence of excessive weathering due to
 deterioration of the roofing system resulting from defective materials or
 workmanship, the repair of the defective materials or workmanship shall be
 the responsibility of the manufacturer. While roofing is under warranty,
 perform repairs that become necessary due to defective materials or
 workmanship within 72 hours of notification, unless additional time is
 approved by Contracting Officer. Failure to perform repairs within
 specified period of time will constitute grounds for the Government having
 repairs performed by others and cost billed to Contractor.


PART 2        PRODUCTS

2.1      ROOFING SYSTEM

 Glass felt, asphalt bitumen, mineral surfaced.

  __________________________________________________________________________
  Substrate: Wood
  Components:                                Quantity:

  Unsaturated Felt or Building Paper             1 Ply
    Felt:
    Base Sheet (GB)                              1 Ply
    Ply Felt (GA)                                2 Plies
    Mineral Surfaced Cap Sheet (GC)              1 Ply
  Asphalt: (See a. below)
    On Base Sheet                                20-35 lbs./100 sq. ft.
    Between Each Ply                             20-35 lbs./100 sq. ft.

  ___________________________________________________________________________
  Substrate: Roof Insulation
  Components:                                Quantity:

  Felt:
    Ventilating Base Sheet (VB)                  1 Ply
    Ply Felt (GA)                                2 Plies
    Mineral Surfaced Cap Sheet (GC)              1 Ply
  Asphalt: (See a. below)
    Between Substrate and First Ply              20-35 lbs./100 sq. ft.
    Between Each Ply                             20-35 lbs./100 sq. ft.

         a.    Provide asphalt quantities within the indicated ranges, unless
               recommended otherwise in the roofing materials manufacturer's
               printed data.
                                                                          W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                       0001
                                                                             Page 283 of 463

2.2      MATERIALS

2.2.1      Asphalt

Roof Slope, in./ft                                    Specification

      1/4 to 1/2                                  ASTM D 312, Type II

      1/2 or more but not more than 3             ASTM D 312, Type III

2.2.2      Felts

 For built-up roofing and flashing:

Designation    Use       Felt      Impregnant   Coating      Specification
_____________________________________________________________________________

  GB           Base Sheet    Glass      Asphalt        Asphalt        ASTM D 4601,
                                                                      Type II, with-
                                                                      out perforations


  GA           Ply Felt      Glass      Asphalt         None          ASTM D 2178,
                                                                      Type IV or VI

  VB           Ventilating   Glass      Asphalt         Asphalt       ASTM D 4897,
               Base Sheet                                             Type II

  FF           Flashing      Glass      Asphalt         Asphalt       (See a. below)
               Felt

  GC           Mineral      Glass       Asphalt         Asphalt       ASTM D 3909
               Surfaced Cap
               Sheet

         a.   Provide flashing felt specifically prepared in the manufacturing
              process for use in two-ply base flashing construction of either: a
              single thickness of glass felt conforming to the properties listed
              in ASTM D 2178, for Type IV; or glass felt factory-laminated to a
              woven glass fiber scrim or cotton fabric; or styrene-butadiene-
              styrene (SBS) or atactic polypropylene (APP) modified bitumen.
              Factory-coat each type of flashing construction on both sides with
              an asphalt coating which includes a water-insoluble, fine mineral
              stabilizer and a fine mineral surfacing.

2.2.3      Primer

 ASTM D 41.

2.2.4      Asphalt Roof Cement

 ASTM D 4586, Type II for vertical surfaces and built-up bituminous flashing;
 Type I for horizontal surfaces.
                                                                    W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                 0001
                                                                       Page 284 of 463

2.2.5      Unsaturated Felt or Rosin-Sized Building Paper

 Minimum weight, 5 pounds per 100 square feet.

2.2.6      Fasteners

 Provide nonferrous or galvanized fasteners, except where in contact with
 copper, aluminum, or stainless steel. Use hard copper fasteners in contact
 with copper; aluminum or stainless steel fasteners in contact with aluminum;
 and stainless steel fasteners in contact with stainless steel. For
 fastening only roofing felts, use fasteners driven through metal disc, or
 one-piece composite fasteners with heads not less than one inch in diameter
 or one inch square with rounded or 45-degree tapered corners.

2.2.6.1        Wood Substrates and Nailers

 Provide 11 gage annular threaded shank nails with 7/16 to 5/8 inch diameter
 heads; or one-piece composite nails with annular threaded shanks not less
 than 11 gage for securing felts and metal items. Fasteners shall be long
 enough to penetrate the wood substrate not less than 5/8 inch, nailer not
 less than one inch and plywood substrate 3/8 to 7/16 inch and not protrude
 through the underside of deck, when driven through the material to be
 fastened.

2.2.6.2        Masonry or Concrete Walls and Vertical Surfaces

 Provide hardened steel nails with flat heads, diamond shaped points, and
 mechanically deformed shanks not less than one inch long for securing felts
 and metal items. Use power-driven fasteners only when approved in writing
 by the Contracting Officer.

2.2.7      Metal Discs (Tin Caps)

 Flat discs or caps of zinc-coated sheet metal not lighter than 28 gage and
 not less than 1 3/8 inch in diameter. Form discs to prevent dishing. Do
 not use bell or cup-shaped caps. Omit disc when one-piece composite
 fasteners are used.

2.2.8      Walkway Material

 Preformed reprocessed rubber pads or granular surfaced treads consisting of
 plasticizers, fibers, and inert fillers, not less than 3/4 inch thick.

PART 3        EXECUTION

3.1      CONDITION OF SURFACES

 Ensure that the following conditions exist before application of the roofing
 materials:

         a.    Drains, curbs, cants, control joints, expansion joints, perimeter
               walls, roof penetrating components, and equipment supports are in
               place.
                                                             W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                          0001
                                                                Page 285 of 463


b.   Surfaces are rigid, dry, smooth, and free from cracks, holes, and
     sharp changes in elevation. Joints in substrate are sealed to
     prevent drippage of bitumen into building or down exterior walls.

c.   Plane of substrate does not vary more than 1/4 inch within an area
     10 by 10 feet when checked with a 10 foot straight edge placed
     anywhere on substrate.

d.   Substrate is sloped as indicated to provide drainage.

e.   Walls and vertical surfaces are constructed to receive counter
     flashing.

f.   Treated wood nailers are in place on non-nailable surfaces to
     permit nailing of base flashing at minimum height of 8 inches above
     finished roofing surface.

g.   Treated wood nailers are fastened in place at eaves, gable ends,
     openings, and intersections with vertical surfaces for securing of
     felts, edging strips, gravel stops, and roof fixtures. Embedded
     nailers are flush with deck surfaces. Surface-applied nailers are
     same thickness as roof insulation.

h.   Cants are securely fastened in place in the angles formed by walls
     and other vertical surfaces. The angle of the cant is
     approximately 45 degrees and the height of the vertical leg is not
     less than nominal 4 inches. Cants are constructed of treated wood.

i.   Venting is provided in accordance with the following:

     (1) Edge Venting: Perimeter nailers are kerfed across the width
     of the nailers to permit escape of gaseous pressure at roof edges.

j.   Wood substrates are constructed of treated wood securely fastened
     to the framing members with exposed nail heads properly set.
     Warped and split boards have been replaced. There are no cracks or
     end joints 1/4 inch in width or greater. Knot holes are covered
     with sheet metal and nailed in place.

k.   Insulation boards are installed smoothly and evenly, and are not
     broken, cracked, or curled. Insulation is being roofed over on the
     same day the insulation is installed.

l.   Cast-in-place substrates have been allowed to cure and the surface
     dryness requirements specified under paragraph entitled "Field
     Quality Control" have been met.

m.   Joints between precast concrete deck units, including weld plates,
     are grouted, leveled, and covered with 4 inch wide ply felt solidly
     bedded in asphalt roof cement.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 286 of 463

3.2     PREPARATION

 Coordinate work with other trades to ensure that components, which are to be
 secured to or stripped into the roofing system, are available and that
 permanent flashing and counter-flashings are installed as the work
 progresses.

3.2.1     Priming of Surfaces

 Prime surfaces at rate of 0.75 gallon per 100 square feet.

3.2.1.1     Priming of Concrete and Masonry Surfaces

 After surface dryness requirements have been met, coat concrete and masonry
 surfaces, which are to receive roofing and base flashing uniformly with,
 asphalt primer. Allow primer to dry before application of roofing and
 flashing materials.

3.2.1.2     Priming of Metal Surfaces

 Prime flanges of metal gravel stops, edging strips, flashing collars, roof
 drain flashing, and accessories before stripping into roofing system.

3.2.2     Covering of Wood Substrate

 Cover wood substrate with a layer of unsaturated felt or rosin-sized
 building paper lapped 2 inches at sides and 4 inches at ends. Nail as
 required to sufficiently hold in place before application of roofing system.

3.2.3     Heating of Asphalt

 Break up solid asphalt on surface free of dirt and debris. Heat in kettle
 designed to prevent contact of flame with surfaces in contact with asphalt.
 Kettles shall have visible thermometer and thermostatic controls set to
 specified temperature limits. Keep controls in working order and
 calibrated. Use immersion thermometer, accurate within a tolerance of plus
 or minus 2 degrees F, for frequent checking of asphalt temperature. If
 temperature exceeds maximum specified, remove asphalt from site. If asphalt
 temperature, at the instant of application, is below minimum specified, take
 a field sample of the affected roofing, analyze as specified, and replace
 with new material if deficiencies are disclosed. Cutting back,
 adulterating, or fluxing of asphalt are prohibited.

3.3     APPLICATION

 Apply roofing materials as specified and as recommended by manufacturer's
 printed application instructions. Keep roofing materials dry before and
 during application. Phased construction is prohibited. Complete
 application of roofing in a continuous operation. Begin and apply only as
 much roofing in one day as can be completed that same day. Maintain
 specified temperatures for asphalt.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 287 of 463

3.3.1     Temporary Roofing and Flashing

 Provide temporary roofing and flashing where considerable work by other
 trades, such as installing cooling towers, antennas, pipes and ducts is to
 be performed on the roof or where construction scheduling or weather
 conditions require protection of building interior before permanent roofing
 system can be installed. Do not install temporary roofing over permanently
 installed insulation. Provide rigid pads for traffic over temporary
 roofing.

3.3.1.2     Temporary Flashing

 Install temporary flashing consisting of one ply of ply felt. Place in a
 trowel coat of asphalt roof cement and cover with a trowel coat of asphalt
 roof cement.

3.3.1.3     Removal

 Completely remove temporary roofing and flashing before continuing with
 application of permanent roofing system.

3.3.2     Bitumen Stops

 Provide bitumen stops at roof edges, openings, and vertical projections
 before applying roofing felts unless recommended otherwise by manufacturer's
 printed application instructions. Form bitumen stops with two 12 inch wide
 strips of organic ply felt. Laminate with and set strips into a coating of
 asphalt roof cement with one-half of the width overhanging the edge of the
 roof or opening. Where nailers are provided, nail the strips with roofing
 nails spaced 12 inches on center in addition to embedding in asphalt roof
 cement. After cap sheet is in place, fold free portion of the strips back
 over cap sheet and embed in a continuous coating of asphalt roof cement.
 Secure with roofing nails spaced 3 inches on center.

3.3.3     Mechanically Fastened Base Sheets

 Apply sheets shingle fashion and in same direction as ply felts with each
 sheet lapping not less than 2 inches over the preceding. Lap ends not less
 than 6 inches and stagger a minimum of 36 inches. Apply sheets with
 fasteners at 9 inch intervals along the laps and with fasteners down center
 of sheets in two rows approximately 11 inches apart. Space nails 18 inches
 on center. Throughout the area extending 10 feet in from the edge of the
 roof, provide fasteners at 5 inch intervals along laps and staggered down
 center of sheets in two rows approximately 11 inches apart, with nails
 spaced at 9 inches on center.

3.3.4     Ventilating Base Sheets

 Apply ventilating base sheets in accordance with the manufacturer's printed
 installation instructions. Extend sheets over roof cants, up vertical
 surfaces, and terminate under cap flashing; at roof edges terminate sheets
 under outside edge of perimeter edge nailers or under gravel stop.
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                        Page 288 of 463

3.3.5     Ply Felts

 Apply ply felts shingle fashion in hot-moppings of asphalt. Apply felts in
 a continuous operation. Provide starter sheets of ply felt to maintain the
 specified number of plies throughout the roofing. Apply felts with side
 laps in accordance with the material manufacturer's printed instructions and
 in uniform alignment. Lap ends not less than 6 inches and stagger 36 inches
 minimum. Apply felts at right angles to roof slope so that direction of
 water flow is over and not against laps. Extend felts approximately 4
 inches above top of cant strips at vertical surfaces and to top of cant
 strips elsewhere. Trim felts to a neat fit around vent pipes, roof drains,
 and other projections.

3.3.6     Mineral Surfaced Cap Sheet

 Before laying mineral surfaced cap sheets, cut rolls into sheets 12 to 18
 feet long, and stack in flat protected piles for not less than 24 hours.
 Sheets shall not be buckled or wrinkled. Apply shingle fashion and in same
 direction as ply felts. Maintain 2 inch side laps and 6 inch end laps.
 Stagger end laps not less than 12 inches. Apply sheets firmly in hot-
 moppings of asphalt the full width under sheets. Seal edges of sheets.

3.3.7     Hot-Mopping of Ply Felts and Mineral Surfaced Cap Sheets

 Bond ply felts to each other, to base sheets, and to the mineral surfaced
 cap sheet with hot asphalt. Apply felts immediately following application
 of hot asphalt. Do not work ahead with asphalt. At the instant felts come
 into contact with asphalt, asphalt shall be completely fluid, with mop
 temperatures within specified EVT range. Apply asphalt uniformly in a full,
 continuous, firmly bonding film at the rate specified. As felts are being
 rolled into the hot asphalt, immediately squeegee, roll or broom down to
 eliminate trapped air and to provide tight, smooth laminations without
 wrinkles, buckles, kinks, or fish mouths. The completed roofing system
 shall be free of pockets, felt delaminations, ridges, fishmouths, dry laps,
 or blisters. Do not lay felts dry, turning back laps for mopping between
 plies.

3.3.7.1     Temperature Limitations for Asphalt

 Heat and apply asphalt at the temperatures specified below unless specified
 otherwise by the manufacturer. Use thermometer to check temperature during
 heating and application. Have kettle attended constantly during heating
 process to ensure specified temperatures are maintained. Do not heat
 asphalt above its finished blowing temperature (FBT). Do not heat asphalt
 to the flash point (FP). Apply asphalt and embed roofing felts when asphalt
 temperature is within plus or minus 25 degrees F of the equiviscous
 temperature (EVT). Before heating asphalt refer to manufacturer's label or
 bill of lading for the FBT, FP and EVT of the asphalt used.

3.3.8     Backnailing

 In addition to hot-mopping of ply felts and mineral surfaced cap sheets with
 hot asphalt, backnail felts as specified below:
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 289 of 463

3.3.8.1      Backnailing of Felts to Wood Nailers

 Nail ply felts to wood nailers with two nails spaced approximately 2 and 10
 inches from the leading edge of each felt. Nail mineral surfaced cap sheets
 to wood nailers along a line approximately one inch from the leading edge of
 each sheet and 3 inches on center at end laps.

3.3.8.2      Backnailing of Felts to Substrates

 Fasten mineral surfaced cap sheets to wood fasteners spaced not over 24
 inches on center along a line approximately one inch from the leading edge
 of each felt, and 3 inches on center at end laps.

3.3.8.3      Concealing Fasteners

 Conceal fasteners with succeeding plies of felt.

3.3.9     Flashing

 Provide bituminous flashing in the angles formed where roof deck abuts
 walls, curbs, ventilators, pipes, and other vertical surfaces, and where
 necessary to make the work watertight. Install flashing after plies of felt
 have been applied, including the mineral surfaced cap sheet. Metal flashing
 are specified under Section 07600N, "Flashing and Sheet Metal." Except for
 SBS modified bitumen flashing, do not set built-up bituminous or metal
 flashing in hot asphalt.


3.3.9.1      Base Flashing

 Mechanically secure base flashing to vertical surfaces using one of the
 following base flashing systems as recommended by the manufacturer of the
 ply felt:

        a.   Three-Ply Bituminous Built-Up Base Flashing: Provide three plies
             of specified GA ply felt. Embed each in a uniform trowelling of
             asphalt roof cement not less than 1/8 inch thick. Smooth and press
             felts firmly into place. Extend felts not less than 6, 9, and 12
             inches, respectively, over the roofing membrane beyond toe of cant,
             and not less than 4 inches or more than 10 inches above top of cant
             on vertical surfaces. Lap ends not less than 12 inches and seal
             watertight with asphalt roof cement. Stagger end laps. Nail top
             edges of base flashing to wood nailers with large head roofing
             nails through metal discs or one-piece composite fasteners spaced
             not more than 4 inches on center on a line 1 1/2 inches below the
             top edge of the base flashing. Coat the finished base flashing
             with asphalt roof cement not less than 1/8 inch thick, extending
             from one inch above the top of base flashing on the vertical
             surface to one inch beyond edge of base flashing on the roofing
             membrane.

        b.   Two-Ply Bituminous Built-Up Base Flashing: Provide one ply of GA
             ply felt and one ply of flashing felt, FF, in accordance with the
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                        Page 290 of 463

               manufacturer's printed installation instructions and graphic
               details.

         c.    Modified Bitumen Base Flashing: Provide SBS or APP modified
               bitumen base flashing standard with the roofing system manufacturer
               in accordance with printed installation instructions and graphic
               details.

3.3.9.2        Strip Flashing

 Set flanges of horizontal sheet metal work which are to be incorporated into
 roofing system into a uniform coating of asphalt roof cement not less than
 1/16 inch thick applied over mineral surfaced cap sheets. Strip-in with
 either two layers of ply felt or one layer of modified bitumen sheet
 cemented to flange tops, roofing surface, and to each other. Use coatings
 of asphalt roof cement not less than 1/16 inch thick for ply felt. Use hot
 steep asphalt for modified bitumen sheet. Extend felts 3 and 6 inches,
 respectively, or modified bitumen sheet 6 inches beyond flange edges and
 onto cap sheet surface. Coat finished felt strip flashing with asphalt roof
 cement not less than 1/8 inch thick.

3.3.9.3        Flashing at Roof Drain

 Roof drains are specified under Section 15400N, "Plumbing Systems." Flashing
 for roof drains are specified under Section 07600N, "Flashing and Sheet
 Metal." Extend roofing plies and cap sheet to edge of drain bowl opening at
 roof drain deck flange. Neatly fit and press primed metal roof drain
 flashing into heavy coat of asphalt roof cement applied to top of cap sheet.
 Strip in and completely cover flashing with two layers of modified bitumen
 sheet, extending the sheets 4 and 6 inches, respectively, on the roofing
 beyond edge of flashing. Cement the two layers to the metal flashing and to
 each other with hot asphalt. Securely clamp membrane, mineral surfaced cap
 sheet, metal flashing, and strip flashing in the flashing clamping ring.
 Secure clamps so that membrane and metal flashing are free from wrinkles and
 folds. Trim membrane, flashing and stripping flush with inside of clamping
 ring.

3.3.10        Protection of Applied Roofing

3.3.10.1        Protection Against Moisture Absorption

 When precipitation is imminent and at the end of each day's work, protect
 applied felts as follows:

          a.    Temporary Flashing: Provide temporary flashing at drains, curbs,
               walls, and other penetrations and terminations of roofing felts
               until roofing membrane is complete, and permanent flashing are
               applied. Use one ply of felt applied in trowel coat of asphalt
               roof cement over primed surface. Finish with a surface coat of
               asphalt roof cement. Remove temporary flashing before applying
               permanent flashing.
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                        Page 291 of 463

3.3.10.2        Temporary Walkways, Runways, and Platforms

 Storing, walking, wheeling, and trucking directly on applied roofing
 materials is prohibited. Provide temporary walkways, runways, and platforms
 of smooth clean boards or planks as necessary to avoid damage to applied
 roofing materials, and to distribute weight to conform to indicated live
 load limits of roof construction. Use rubber-tired equipment for roofing
 work.

3.3.10.3        Glaze Coat

 At the end of each day's work, squeegee apply a glaze coat of hot asphalt of
 the type used with the ply felts at rate of 5 to 10 pounds per 100 square
 feet.

3.3.11        Walkways

 Provide reprocessed rubber pads or granular surfaced treads for access to
 mechanical equipment and for traffic areas, as indicated. Where walkways
 are used, make provision for continuous roof drainage. Install walk pads in
 spot-moppings of Type III asphalt applied with one spot at each corner and
 one in the middle of the longest sides of walk pads. Leave a 6 inch wide
 space between walk pads for drainage.

3.4      FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

 Perform field tests in the presence of the Contracting Officer.        Notify the
 Contracting Officer one day before performing tests.

3.4.1      Test for Surface Dryness

 Before starting work on area to be roofed, perform test for surface dryness
 in accordance with the following:

         a.    Foaming: When poured on the surface to receive felts, one pint of
               asphalt heated in the range of 350 to 400 degrees F, shall not foam
               upon contact.

         b.    Stripping: After asphalt used in foaming test application has
               cooled to ambient temperature, test for adherence. If a portion of
               the sample is readily stripped clean from the surface, do not
               consider the surface to be dry and do not start application. If
               rain occurs during application, stop work and do not resume until
               surface has been tested by the method above and found dry.

3.4.2      Samples of Built-Up Roofing

 After application of specified roofing felts and before applying surfacing,
 take field samples of built-up roofing in the presence of the Contracting
 Officer. Take and test samples in accordance with ASTM D 3617 and at
 locations selected by the Contracting Officer immediately before cutting.
 Cut 4 by 40 inch samples across felt laps in a manner to expose the
 specified number of plies. The 4 inch edge shall coincide with an edge lap
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 292 of 463

 of felt and shall not be positioned over an end lap. The 4 by 40 inch
 samples will be used by the Contracting Officer to inspect for the specified
 number of plies, bond between plies, skips in interply moppings, uniform
 asphalt mopping, presence of excessive voids or large voids in the ply
 construction, presence of harmful foreign materials, visible presence of
 moisture in the sandwich and wet insulation. 12 by 12 inch cut samples will
 be used to calculate bitumen quantities in accordance with ASTM D 3617 when
 necessary and directed by the Contracting Officer. Do not proceed with
 surfacing until all deficiencies disclosed as a result of "cut tests" have
 been corrected and approved.

3.4.2.1     Number of Cut Tests

 Take not less than two samples from each 1000 squares of roofed area, and
 take at least one sample from each day's application, regardless of quantity
 applied. If samples show any deficiency, no matter how slight, take
 additional sample to determine extent of deficiency.

3.4.2.2     Sample Cutting Device

 Provide a rectangular, 4 by 40 inch template and 12 by 12 inch template, of
 a type that will permit accurate cutting of samples with standard roofing
 knives. Keep cutting edge of knife clean by washing in solvent after each
 cut.

3.4.2.3     Patching Cut-Out Area

 Immediately after inspection, replace cut-out sample. When sample is needed
 for laboratory analysis or other circumstance makes it unavailable,
 substitute a new section of equivalent size and structure. For non-nailable
 decks, replace sample in hot asphalt. For nailable decks, insert one ply of
 felt into the opening from which sample was taken and sprinkle nail to hold
 in place; coat felt heavily with asphalt roof cement and press the cutout
 sample firmly into the asphalt roof cement. Cover area over replaced
 samples with 3 plies of felt and one ply of cap sheet, hot mopped in place
 with first ply overlapping the cutout area 3 inches on all sides and each
 succeeding ply overlapping previous ply 3 inches on all sides.

3.4.3     Correction of Deficiencies

 Where interply moppings are too light, apply additional 2 plies of felt in
 full moppings of asphalt. Apply with 4 inch side and end laps. Where free
 water, skips, excessive voids, dry laps, disbonding or any form of
 delamination are discovered between the plies, remove and rebuild affected
 area. Correction of inadequate number of plies, improper lap widths, or
 non-uniform or excessive asphalt mopping shall be as directed by the
 Contracting Officer. Where insulation is found to be wet, remove insulation
 and provide new built-up roofing and insulation.

3.4.4     Roof Drain Test

 After completing roofing system but before Government acceptance, perform
 the following test for water tightness. Plug primary roof drains and fill
 with water to edge of drain sump for 24 hours. To ensure some drainage from
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 293 of 463

 roof, do not test all drains at same time. Measure water at beginning and
 end of the 24 hour period. When precipitation occurs during test period,
 repeat test. When water level falls, remove water, thoroughly dry, and
 inspect installation; repair or replace roofing at drain. Repeat test until
 there is no water leakage.

3.5   INFORMATION CARD

 For each roof, provide a typewritten card, laminated in plastic for interior
 display, or a photoengraved 0.032 inch thick aluminum card for exterior
 display. Card shall be 8 1/2 by 11 inches minimum and contain the
 information listed on Form 1 located at the end of this section. Install
 card near point of access to roof or where indicated. Issue photo-static
 paper copy (2 each) to "Department of the Army, Directorate of Public Works,
 Building 556, Engineering Division, P.O. Box 34000, Fort Buchanan, Puerto
 Rico, 00934-3400."
                                                                           W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                        0001
                                                                              Page 294 of 463

FORM 1 - ROOFING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1.        Location __________________________      2. Bldg. Name __________________

3.        Bldg. No. _____ 4. Roof Area (SF) ______ 5. Contract No. ____________

6.        New Construction ( ) Yes ( ) No      7. Deck Slope: _____________________

8.     Type of Deck:
      ( ) Metal                                    ( ) Wood Plank or Plywood
      ( ) Cast-In-Place Concrete                   ( ) Other ____________________
      ( ) Precast/Prestressed Concrete

9.        Type of Insulation Board:
      (    ) Polyisocyanurate/Composite            ( ) Polyisocyanurate Foam
      (    ) Polystyrene/Composite                 ( ) Polystyrene
      (    ) Perlite                               ( ) Mineral Fiber
      (    ) Other ______________________

10. Insulation Manufacturer: ____________________________________________

11. Insulation Thickness: _____________________

12. Vapor Treatment:      Total Coverage          ( ) Yes ( ) No
   ( ) No Vapor Retarder                           ( ) Bituminous Vapor Retarder
   ( ) One Way Roof Vents                          ( ) Laminated Kraft Paper
   ( ) Other __________________________

13. Vapor Treatment Manufacturer(s): ____________________________________

14. Roofing Type:
   ( ) Built-Up (Asphalt)            (   )   PIB                ( ) TPA
   ( ) Built-Up (Coal-Tar)           (   )   Modified Bitumen   ( ) EPDM
   ( ) Metal                         (   )   CSPE               ( ) PVC
   ( ) Shingles                      (   )   Other _________________

15. Roofing Manufacturer: _______________________________________________

16. Roofing Installer/Warrantor: ________________________________________

17. Roofing Application Method:
   ( ) Bitumen                ( ) Fully Adhered            ( ) Loose-Laid
   ( ) Mechanically Fastened ( ) Torched                         Ballasted
   ( ) Mechanically Fastened/Fully Adhered                 ( ) Other _____________

18. Warranty Period:        From ________________ To ______________

19.        Warranty Serial Number: ____________________________________________

20. Date Roofing Completed: ______________            21. Inspector: ______________

22. Prime Contractor Name/Address: ______________________________________

Signature: ____________________________________ Date: ___________________
                                                                         W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                      0001
                                                                            Page 295 of 463


                        INSTRUCTIONS FOR FORM 1 (DO NOT POST)


1.    Location:     Name of activity as shown on contract.

2.    Bldg. Name:     As shown on contract or as provided by Contracting Officer.

3.    Bldg. Number:     As provided by Contracting Officer.

4. Roof Area: Area in square feet of roof for which deck insulation,
membrane, etc. are the same. A separate form is required if any part of
roof system is different over other areas of the roof.

5.    Contract Number:     As shown on the contract.

7.    Show deck slope.

8.    Deck: Check appropriate block.

9.    Type of Insulation Board:         Check appropriate block.

11. Show minimum thickness of installed insulation.

12. Vapor Treatment: Check appropriate blocks.

13. Show vapor treatment system manufacturer's name.

14. Roofing Type:       Check appropriate block.

15. Show roofing manufacturer's name.

16. Roofing Installer's or Contractor's name.

17. Roofing Application Method:           Check appropriate block.

18. Warranty Period:       Insert Start and End dates.

19.    Warranty Serial Number:         Insert serial number.

20. Show date roofing was accepted by the Contracting Officer.             Warranty
period begins on this date.

21. Show Government Inspector's name.

22. Prime Contractor Name/Address/Signature:             Must be signed and dated by an
official of contracting firm.

                           *   *   *    END OF SECTION    *   *   *
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                     Page 296 of 463

                                 SECTION 07 53 23

                         ETHYLENE-PROPILENE-DIENE-MONOMER

PART 1      GENERAL

1.1      REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic
 designation only.

           AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

 ASTM C 29/C 29M                   (1997) Bulk Density ("Unit Weight") and Voids
                                   in Aggregate

 ASTM D 448                        (1986; R 1993) Sizes of Aggregate for Road
                                   and Bridge Construction

 ASTM D 4637                       (1996) EPDM Sheet Used in Single-Ply Roof
                                   Membrane

 ASTM E 108                        (1996) Fire Tests of Roof Coverings

           FACTORY MUTUAL ENGINEERING AND RESEARCH (FM)

 FM P9513                          (1996) Loss Prevention Data for Roofing
                                   Contractors

           SINGLE PLY ROOFING INSTITUTE (SPRI)

 SPRI RP-4                         (1997) Wind Design Standard for Ballasted
                                   Single-Ply Roofing Systems

           UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

 UL 580                            (1994; Rev thru Feb 1998) Tests for Uplift
                                   Resistance of Roof Assemblies

 UL 790                            (1997; Rev thru Jul 1998) Tests for Fire
                                   Resistance of Roof Covering Materials

 UL 1256                           (1998) Fire Test of Roof Deck Constructions

1.2      SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "GA" designation;
 submittals not having a "GA" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "GA" designation identifies the office
 that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
 submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                   Page 297 of 463

      SD-02 Shop Drawings

          Roofing System; GA

            Drawings showing size of sheets, position of sheets and splices,
          flashing details, fastening patterns where applicable for
          insulation and membrane sheets, and expansion joint details.
          Detail showing construction of water cutoffs to be used at membrane
          terminations at the end of a day's work to seal the roofing system
          from water intrusion.

      SD-03 Product Data

          Installation; GA

            Manufacturer's instructions for preparing and installing the
          membrane, flashings, seams, insulation, nailers and other
          accessories.

          Protection of Finished Roofing;

            Protection plan showing areas to be protected, type of material
          used; a plan to protect the membrane from damage until completion
          of work by other trades, and a description of the method of
          repairing the roofing.

          Inspection; GA

            The inspection procedure for substrate suitability including
          decks, curbs and insulation installation, prior to start of the
          work. Inspection procedures during and after placement of the
          membrane, and after completion of work by other trades.

      SD-07 Certificates

          Materials; GA

            Certificates of compliance attesting that the roofing system and
          materials meet specification requirements. The certificates shall
          list the components required for the specified fire and wind uplift
          resistance ratings.

1.3   GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

 Elastomeric membrane roofing shall be fully adhered to the roof surfaces
 indicated. Roofing membrane sheet widths shall be consistent with membrane
 attachment methods and wind uplift requirements, and shall be as large as
 practical to minimize joints. Membrane shall be free of defects and foreign
 material. Flashing work shall be coordinated to permit continuous membrane
 installation operations. Applied insulation shall be weatherproofed by the
 membrane on the same day.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 298 of 463

1.3.1      Delivery and Storage

 Materials shall be delivered to the job-site in the manufacturer's original,
 unopened packages, clearly marked with the manufacturer's name, brand name,
 and description of contents. Materials other than ballast shall be stored
 in clean, dry areas. Storage temperatures shall be as specified by the
 manufacturer. Materials other than ballast stored on the roof shall not
 exceed one day's supply and shall be distributed so as not to exceed the
 roof live load capacity. Ballast shall be stored uncovered, shall not be in
 contact with sod or earth, and shall not be stored on the roof.

1.3.2      Fire Resistance

 The completed roof system shall have a ASTM E 108 (same test as UL 790 and
 FM P9513, Appendix A) Class A classification, and meet fire test
 requirements of UL 1256 or FM P9513, Appendix B for roof deck construction.
 Compliance of each component of the roofing system shall be evidenced by
 label or by written certification from the manufacturer.

1.3.3      Wind Uplift Requirements

 Fully adhered and mechanically attached roofing systems shall have a 90 UL
 580 Class Rating or FM P9513, Appendix C Windstorm Classification. Ratings
 from other independent laboratories may be substituted provided that the
 tests, requirements and ratings are documented to be equivalent, to the
 satisfaction of the Contracting Officer. Wind resistance of loose-laid
 ballasted system shall be in accordance with SPRI RP-4.

1.3.4      Warranty

 Manufacturer's standard warranty for the roofing system shall be provided
 for not less than 10 years from acceptance of the work. Warranty shall
 state that manufacturer shall repair or replace defective materials if the
 roofing system leaks or allows the insulation beneath the membrane to become
 wet during the period of the warranty.

PART 2      PRODUCTS

2.1      ADHESIVES

 Adhesives, splicing cements, solvents, and sealant shall be as recommended
 by the membrane manufacturer.

2.3      FASTENERS

 Fasteners for sheet-metal flashing shall be corrosion resistant steel
 annular-type nails or screws. Fasteners for anchoring the roofing membrane
 shall be as approved by the membrane manufacturer and identical to those
 used to obtain the wind uplift rating.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 299 of 463

2.4      FLASHING

 Flashing shall be of ultra-violet resistant materials as recommended by the
 membrane manufacturer. Prefabricated shaped flashings shall be used where
 possible. Sheared edges of metal flashings that contact the membrane shall
 be turned into a tight hem.

2.5      MEMBRANE

 Membrane shall conform to ASTM D 4637, Type I EPDM, Grade 1; Class U, 0.060
 inch minimum thickness.

2.6      PREFABRICATED ACCESSORIES

 Pipe seals and expansion joint covers shall be types and sizes recommended
 by the membrane manufacturer.

2.7      WALKWAYS

 Walkways shall be concrete pavers, size as indicated 1-inch minimum
 thickness, and made from 3000 psi air entrained concrete. Pavers for
 walkways less than 4 feet wide may rest directly on the membrane unless
 underlayment is recommended by the manufacturer. Where drainage would be
 blocked by walkway pavers, spaces shall be provided between or below pavers
 to facilitate drainage. If spaces are provided between pavers, they shall
 be at least 1 in wide and no more than 24 in. apart. Space below pavers
 shall be provided by using pavers with drainage channels or by elevating
 flat bottom pavers on pedestals. Alternative walkway material may be used
 if recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Contracting Officer.

PART 3      EXECUTION

3.1      ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

 Membrane shall not be installed in high wind, inclement weather or when
 there is visible moisture on the deck, insulation or membrane. Membrane
 shall not be installed when air temperature is below the minimum specified
 by the membrane manufacturer.

3.2      PREPARATION

 The substrate of any bay or section of the building shall be complete and
 suitable for insulation and membrane installation before roofing is begun.
 Roofing on lightweight insulating concrete shall not be scheduled until the
 concrete passes the air-dry density test. Insulation over which elastomeric
 roofing is installed shall conform to Section 07220 ROOF INSULATION.
 Surfaces against which membrane is applied shall be smooth, clean, and free
 from dirt, water, dew, oil, grease, sharp edges and construction debris; all
 joints over 1/4 inch wide shall be sealed; joints over 1/2 inch between
 insulation boards shall be filled with the same insulation.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 300 of 463

3.3     INSTALLATION

 Installation shall comply with the manufacturer's approved instructions,
 except as otherwise specified.

3.3.1     Flashing

 Edges of membrane, projections through the roof and changes in roof planes
 shall be flashed. The flashing material shall be extended and sealed a
 minimum of 3 inches on each side of the fasteners which attach the membrane
 to nailers. The installed flashing shall be fastened at the top of the
 flashing a maximum of 12 inches on center under metal counter-flashing or
 cap.

3.3.2     Expansion Joints

 Expansion joints shall be covered using prefabricated covers or elastomeric
 flashing in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.3.3     Membrane Installation

 Membrane shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions
 and the following requirements. Adjoining sheets comprising the membrane
 shall be adhered one to another using a butyl-based contact adhesive.
 Minimum width of the laps shall be 3 in. A primer shall be used before
 applying the contact adhesive if required by the membrane manufacturer. In
 applying the contact adhesive, the minimum thickness of the wet film shall
 be in accordance with the membrane manufacturer's recommendations. If
 manufacturer's recommendations are not available, the minimum thickness
 shall be 0.025 inch. A wet film thickness gage shall be used to determine
 wet film thickness. Direction of lap shall be such that water flows over
 lap. Membrane joints shall be free of wrinkles or fish-mouths. Before
 application of the contact adhesive, the rubber surfaces to be mated shall
 be well cleaned. Joints shall be inspected over entire length after
 completion and defective areas shall be resealed and patched. Damaged areas
 of membrane shall be removed and replaced with new materials, lapping
 underlying membrane by at least 3 inches on all sides.

3.3.4     Cutoffs

 Cutoffs shall be installed if workday is ended or interrupted by bad weather
 before roof section is complete. The insulation line shall be straightened
 using loose-laid cut insulation and the membrane shall be sealed to the roof
 deck. Flutes in metal decking shall be sealed off along the cutoff edge.
 Membrane shall be pulled free or cut to expose the insulation when resuming
 work, and cut insulation sheets used for fill-in shall be removed as
 necessary to maintain the staggered pattern.

3.3.5     Installation of Walkways

 Concrete paver walkways shall be installed on a loose-laid pad of the
 membrane material extending at least 1 inch beyond the walkway material, and
 as specified by the manufacturer. Stone ballast shall not be placed below
 or above walkways.
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                        Page 301 of 463


3.4   PROTECTION OF FINISHED ROOFING

 The roofing membrane shall be protected from damage by other trades. After
 completion of work by other trades, the protection shall be removed and the
 roof shall be inspected. Any damage shall be repaired in accordance with
 the recommendations of the roofing manufacturer.

3.5   INSPECTION

 The Contractor shall establish and maintain an inspection procedure to
 assure compliance of the installed elastomeric roofing with the contract
 requirements. The procedure shall include a checklist of points to be
 observed. Any work found not to be in compliance with the contract shall be
 promptly removed and replaced or corrected in an approved manner. Quality
 control shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

      a.   Observation of environmental conditions; number and skill level of
           roofing workers; start and end time of various tasks; condition of
           substrate.

      b.   Verification of compliance of materials before, during and after
           installation.

      c.   Inspection of insulation, nailers, flashings, penetrations and work
           requiring coordination with roofing.

      d.   Inspection of membrane placement, splicing, and attachment.

      e.   Inspection of placement of walkways.


                            *   *   *   END OF SECTION   *   *   *
                                                                       W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                    0001
                                                                          Page 302 of 463




                                     SECTION 07 55 52

                      MODIFIED BITUMINOUS PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING

PART 1      GENERAL

1.1      REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic
 designation only.

           AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

 ASTM C 208                           (1995) Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board

 ASTM C 1153                          (1997) Location of Wet Insulation in Roofing
                                      Systems Using Infrared Imaging

 ASTM D 41                            (1994) Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing,
                                      Dampproofing, and Waterproofing

 ASTM D 312                           (2000) Asphalt Used in Roofing

 ASTM D 517                           (1998) Asphalt Plank

 ASTM D 1863                          (1993; R 1996) Mineral Aggregate Used on
                                      Built-Up Roofs

 ASTM D 2824                          (1994) Aluminum-Pigmented Asphalt Roof
                                      Coatings, Non-Fibered, Asbestos Fibered, and
                                      Fibered without Asbestos

 ASTM D 4586                          (1993; R 1999) Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos
                                      Free

 ASTM D 4601                          (1998) Asphalt-Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet
                                      Used in Roofing

 ASTM D 4897                          (1998) Asphalt-Coated Glass-Fiber Venting
                                      Base Sheet Used in Roofing

 ASTM D 6162                          (2000) Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS)
                                      Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using a
                                      Combination of Polyester and Glass Fiber
                                      Reinforcements
                                                                 W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                    Page 303 of 463


 ASTM D 6163                      (2000) Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS)
                                  Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using
                                  Glass Fiber Reinforcements

 ASTM D 6164                      (2000) Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS)
                                  Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using
                                  Polyester Reinforcements

 ASTM D 6222                      (2000) Atactic Polypropylene (ARP) Modified
                                  Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Polyester
                                  Reinforcements

 ASTM D 6223                      (2000) Atactic Polypropylene (ARP) Modified
                                  Bituminous Sheet Materials Using a
                                  Combination of Polyester and Glass Fiber
                                  Reinforcements


          FACTORY MUTUAL ENGINEERING AND RESEARCH (FM)

 FM P7825c                        (1998) Approval Guide Building Materials

          UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

 UL Bld Mat Dir                   (1998) Building Materials Directory

 UL 790                           (1997; Rev thru Jul 1998) Tests for Fire
                                  Resistance of Roof Covering Materials

 UL 1256                          (1998) Fire Test of Roof Deck Constructions

1.2   SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

 The modified bitumen roofing system shall consist of a manufacturer's
 standard, prefabricated, reinforced polymer-modified bitumen membrane, with
 base sheet, and insulation as specified and indicated. The manufacturer
 shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in manufacturing of the proposed
 modified bitumen sheet roofing for similar applications.

1.3   SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "GA" designation;
 submittals not having a "GA" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "GA" designation identifies the office
 that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
 submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

      SD-03 Product Data

           EVT and Flash Point; GA
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                     Page 304 of 463

              Bills of lading shall indicate the flash point and equiviscous
            temperature (EVT) and this information shall be shown on labels for
            each unit (or plug) of asphalt.

            Materials; GA
            Installation; GA

              Manufacturer's instructions, including membrane description and
            performance data, detailed procedure for installation, and safety
            precautions, prior to the start of roofing work.

        SD-07 Certificates

            Manufacturer; GA

              Evidence that the manufacturer has a minimum of 5 years
            experience manufacturing modified bitumen roofing. The roofing
            system applicator shall be approved by the modified bitumen-roofing
            manufacturer, and shall have a minimum of 3 years experience as an
            approved applicator. A list of installations using the same
            products and applicator as proposed shall be included.

            Materials; GA

              Certificates of compliance for felts, bitumens, and membrane
            sheet.

1.4     STORAGE OF MATERIALS

 Felts and roofing sheets shall be kept dry before, during, and after
 delivery to the site. Felts and roofing sheets shall be stored on end one
 level high, in an enclosed building or trailer and on platforms, off the
 deck or floor. Felts and sheets shall be maintained at a temperature above
 50 degrees F for 24 hours immediately before laying.

1.5     COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS

 The work shall be coordinated with other trades to ensure that components
 are available when they are to be secured or stripped into the roofing
 system.

1.5.1     Insulation Application

 Application of roofing shall immediately follow application of insulation as
 a continuous operation.

1.5.2     Flashing

 Modified bituminous sheet shall be used for flashings where the roof deck
 abuts angles, vertical surfaces, edge metal, and penetrations, unless
 otherwise specified or indicated. Flashing shall be installed as the work
 progresses.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 305 of 463

1.5.3      Sheet Metalwork

 Sheet metalwork specified in Section 07600 SHEET METALWORK, GENERAL shall be
 coordinated with roofing operations.

1.6      FLAME HEATED EQUIPMENT

 Flame heated kettles shall not be placed on the roof. Torch application
 shall be approved by the membrane manufacturer for the specific modified
 bitumen. Open flame equipment shall not be left unattended while ignited.

1.7      ELECTRIC-HEATED EQUIPMENT

 Adequate electrical service shall be provided as required by the
 manufacturer of the equipment, to insure proper application of the roofing
 materials.

1.8      FIRE AND WIND UPLIFT REQUIREMENTS

 The complete roof system shall have a UL 790, Class A or B classification,
 be listed as "fire classified" in UL Bld Mat Dir, and bear the UL label or
 be listed as a Class I Roof Deck in FM P7825c. Roofing system over steel
 deck shall be rated Class I-90 in accordance with FM P7825c. Ratings from
 other independent laboratories may be substituted provided that the tests,
 requirements and ratings are documented to be equivalent, to the
 satisfaction of the Contracting Officer.

1.9      WARRANTY

 Manufacturer's standard warranty for the roofing system shall be provided
 for not less than 10 years from acceptance of the work. Warranty shall
 state that manufacturer shall repair or replace defective materials if the
 roofing system leaks or allows the insulation beneath the membrane to become
 wet during the period of the warranty.

PART 2      PRODUCTS

2.1      PRIMER

 Primer shall conform to ASTM D 41.

2.2      ASPHALT

 Asphalt shall conform to ASTM D 312, Type III for slopes up to 25 percent
 (1/4 vertical/horizontal) and Type IV for slopes up to 50 percent (1/2
 vertical/horizontal).

2.3      BITUMINOUS CEMENT

 Bituminous cement shall conform to ASTM D 4586.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 306 of 463

2.4    CANTS AND WOOD NAILERS

 Treated wood cants and wood nailers shall be of water-borne preservative-
 treated material as specified. Cants shall be made from treated wood not
 less than 3-1/2 inches high and cut to reduce change in direction of the
 membrane to 45 degrees or less. Fiberboard shall conform to ASTM C 208,
 treated with sizing, wax or bituminous impregnation. When membrane or
 flashing is to be torch applied, cants shall be fire resistant.

2.5    BASE SHEET

 Venting inorganic felt base sheet shall conform to ASTM D 4897, Type II.
 Non venting base sheet shall conform to ASTM D 4601, Type II.

2.6    MODIFIED BITUMEN SHEET

 Modified bitumen sheet shall be a prefabricated styrene-butadiene-styrene
 modified bitumen sheet and shall comply with ASTM D 6162, Type II, Grade G
 or S or ASTM D 6163, Type II, Grade G or S or ASTM D 6164, Type II, G or S.

2.7    NAILS AND FASTENERS

 Nails and fasteners shall be an approved type recommended by the roofing
 felt or membrane manufacturer.

2.8    SURFACING MATERIAL

 Surfacing shall be factory-applied granules requiring no further coating.

2.9    ADHESIVE

 Adhesive shall be an approved type recommended by the membrane manufacturer.

2.10    WALKWAY SURFACES

 Walkway surfaces shall be concrete pavers, size as indicated, 1-inch minimum
 thickness, and made from 3000 psi air entrained concrete or as recommended
 by the modified bitumen roofing manufacturer.

2.11    INSULATION

 Insulation shall be compatible with the membrane, as recommended by the
 membrane manufacturer's printed instructions, and as specified in Section
 07220 ROOF INSULATION.

2.12    COATING

 Aluminum coating shall conform to ASTM D 2824 Type I or III, or shall be as
 recommended by the membrane manufacturer.
                                                                 W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                    Page 307 of 463

PART 3      EXECUTION

3.1      PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS

 The substrate construction of any bay or section of the building shall be
 completed before roofing work is begun thereon. Roofing applied directly on
 lightweight insulating concrete shall not be scheduled until the insulating
 concrete passes the air-dry density test. Roofing applied directly on
 concrete shall not be scheduled until hot bitumen sticks tightly and does
 not froth or bubble when applied to the concrete. Vents and other items
 penetrating the roof shall be secured in position and properly prepared for
 flashing. Nailers, curbs and other items attached to roof surface shall be
 in place before roofing is begun.

3.2      INSTALLATION OF CANTS

 Cants shall be installed in the angles formed   between the roof and walls or
 other vertical surfaces. Cants shall be laid    in a solid coat of bituminous
 cement just prior to laying the base sheet or   membrane. Cants shall be
 continuous, and shall be installed in lengths   as long as practicable.

3.3      CONDITION OF SURFACES

 Surfaces shall be inspected and approved immediately prior to application of
 roofing and flashings. The roofing and flashings shall be applied to a
 smooth and firm surface free from visible moisture, dirt, projections, and
 foreign materials. Prior to application of primer on precast concrete
 decks, joints shall be covered with a 4-inch strip of roofing felt, embedded
 in and coated with bituminous cement. Modified bitumen membrane shall be
 isolated from coal tar pitch.

3.4      MECHANICAL APPLICATION DEVICES

 Mechanical application devices shall be mounted on pneumatic-tired wheels,
 and shall be designed and maintained to operate without damaging the
 insulation, roofing membrane, or structural components.

3.5      PRIMING

 Concrete, masonry and metal surfaces to receive bitumen shall be uniformly
 coated with primer at a rate of not less than 1 gallon per square and
 allowed to dry.

3.6      HEATING OF BITUMEN

 Asphalt shall not be heated higher than 75 degrees F above the EVT or 50
 degrees F below the flash point or 525 degrees F (maximum) whichever is
 lower. EVT and flash point temperatures of asphalt in the kettle shall be
 conspicuously posted on the kettle. Heating kettle shall be provided with
 automatic thermostatic control and an accurate thermometer. Kettle
 operators shall be in attendance at all times during the heating to ensure
 that the maximum temperature specified is not exceeded. An asphalt tanker
 shall be treated as a kettle.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 308 of 463


3.7    BITUMEN APPLICATION

 Asphalt shall be applied within 25 degrees F below or above the EVT, or 400
 degrees F, whichever is higher. Application temperatures shall be measured
 at the mop bucket or mechanical applicator. Bitumen at a temperature below
 the recommended temperature shall be returned to the kettle.

3.8    APPLICATIONS OF BASE SHEET

 Base sheet shall be applied, shingle fashion, in a continuous operation,
 with side laps in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. End
 laps shall be not less than 6 inches and staggered a minimum of 24 inches.
 Base sheets shall be applied at right angles to the slope (except on curved
 or steep deck) and laps shall face down the slope.

3.9    MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE APPLICATION

 Membrane shall be as indicated. Each sheet in each ply shall be fully
 adhered to the underlying surface. Sheet edges shall lie flat, with no
 fishmouths or wrinkles. Installation shall begin at the low point of the
 roof and progress to the high point with each sheet installed shingle
 fashion. Each sheet shall be unrolled to provide 4 inch side laps and 6
 inch end laps. End laps shall be staggered not less than 24 inches. Laps
 shall not coincide with laps of base layers except at lines of permanent
 termination. Sheets shall be adhesive-bonded as specified in the
 manufacturer's approved written instructions.

3.10    TERMINATIONS AT PERIMETERS

 The modified bitumen membrane shall extend up abutting surface at least 4
 inches above the top of the cant.

3.11    MECHANICAL FASTENING

 Nails and fasteners for securing base or membrane sheet to wood nailers or
 deck shall be flush driven through flat metal disks of not less than 1-inch
 diameter. Metal disks may be omitted where heads of fasteners are
 equivalent in size to the 1-inch diameter disks. Screw fasteners with disks
 as specified by the membrane manufacturer shall be used on concrete or metal
 deck. Nails and fasteners shall be spaced to meet the wind uplift
 requirement and within the tolerances specified by the manufacturer.
 Penetration of nails and fasteners will not be permitted through the exposed
 surface of membrane.

3.12    PROTECTION OF APPLIED ROOFING

 At end of day's work or whenever precipitation is imminent, the terminated
 edge of the roofing shall be sealed with two full width strips of roofing
 felt set in and coated with bituminous cement or hot mopped asphalt. One
 half-width of strips shall be extended up and over the finished roofing and
 the other half-width extended out and onto the bare roof deck or existing
 membrane. Sealing strips shall be removed before continuing installation of
                                                                 W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                    Page 309 of 463

 roofing. To facilitate sealing, termination edges may be straightened with
 pieces of insulation board which shall be removed when work is resumed.

3.13   FLASHINGS

 Flashings shall be provided over cants, in the angles formed at walls and
 other vertical surfaces, and where required to make the work watertight.
 Modified bitumen flashings shall be used, except where metal flashings are
 specified in other sections of the specifications.

3.14   SURFACING

 After roofing membrane has been laid and flashings installed, the roof
 surface, except for cants, shall be flood coated uniformly with 60 pounds of
 hot asphalt per square, and while the asphalt is still hot, aggregate
 surfacing material shall be spread on the hot bitumen at a rate of 400
 pounds per square for gravel or 300 pounds per square for other approved
 surfacing aggregate.

3.15   COATING APPLICATION

 After roofing membrane has been laid and flashings installed, the roof
 surface, including cants, shall be coated with an aluminum coating as
 recommended by the membrane manufacturer.

3.16   FIRE WATCH

 Fire watch shall be provided continuously during and for at least 1 hour
 following torch application. At least two 2-1/2 gallon containers of water
 and two 15-pound carbon dioxide extinguishers shall be available during the
 fire watch. When work is interrupted, or at the end of a section of
 roofing, and at end of each day's work, areas, which had been subjected to
 torch applications, shall be surveyed with an infrared sensing device. Hot
 spots shall be cooled and re-surveyed. If a hot spot persists, the roof
 shall be cut open and any smoldering shall be extinguished before the
 foreman leaves the site.

3.17   INSPECTION

 The Contractor shall establish and maintain an inspection procedure to
 assure compliance of the installed roofing with the contract requirements.
 Any work found not to be in compliance with the contract shall be promptly
 removed and replaced or corrected in an approved manner. Inspection shall
 include, but not be limited to, the following:

       a.   Observation of environmental conditions; number and skill level of
            roofing workers; start and end time of various tasks; condition of
            substrate.

       b.   Verification of compliance of materials before, during, and after
            installation.

       c.   Inspection of condition of equipment and accuracy of thermometers
            and metering devices.
                                                                     W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                  0001
                                                                        Page 310 of 463


      d.    Inspection of flashings, cants and curbs.

      e.    Inspection of membrane placement, including edge envelopes, widths
            of starter sheets, laps, proper use of squeegee, and mechanical
            fastening.

      f.    Inspection of application of bitumen, aggregate, and walkways.

      g.    Inspection of embedment of aggregate for required weight and
            coverage.

      h.    Cutout sampling and analysis as directed.

                         *   *   *    END OF SECTION    *   *   *

                                     SECTION 07 57 13

                      SPRAYED POLYURETHANE FOAM (SPF) ROOFING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic
 designation only.

           AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

 ASTM C 1029                          (1996) Spray-Applied Rigid Cellular
                                      Polyurethane Thermal Insulation

 ASTM D 412                           (1998a) Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
                                      Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers -
                                      Tension

 ASTM D 579                           (1997) Greige Woven Glass Fabrics

 ASTM D 2240                          (2000) Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness

           FACTORY MUTUAL ENGINEERING AND RESEARCH (FM)

 FM P7825a                            (1998) Approval Guide Fire Protection

 FM P7825c                            (1998) Approval Guide Building Materials

           UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

 UL Bld Mat Dir                       (1999) Building Materials Directory
                                                                 W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                    Page 311 of 463

 UL 790                          (1997; Rev thru Jul 1998) Tests for Fire
                                 Resistance of Roof Covering Materials

 UL 1256                         (1998) Fire Test of Roof Deck Constructions

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

 The roofing system shall consist of a layer of sprayed in-place urethane
 foam roof insulation covered with an elastomeric protective coating and
 surfaced with ceramic granules.

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.3.1 Coordination

 Roofing operations shall be coordinated with work of other trades to ensure
 that components are installed as required to permit continuous self-flashing
 of the sprayed polyurethane foam and protective coating system. The
 installed roofing system shall be protected from damage. Damaged areas
 shall be repaired.

1.3.2 Preparation

 Surfaces to receive elastomeric roofing shall be dry and free of loose
 coatings, surface curing agents, dust, wax or other contaminants. Workers
 shall wear clean, soft-soled, sneaker-type shoes.

1.3.3 Protection of Adjacent Surfaces

 Surfaces near roofing operations shall be protected from spray of roofing
 materials.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "GA" designation;
 submittals not having a "GA" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "GA" designation identifies the office
 that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
 submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

      SD-03 Product Data

           Installation; GA

             Manufacturer's instructions for installation of the roofing
           system.

      SD-04 Samples

           Materials; GA

             Samples of the following materials:
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 312 of 463

               Urethane foam           1 gallon each component
               Protective Coating      1 quart each component
               Foam Finish Texture     2 samples, each 2 feet square
               Ceramic Granules        Sample of each color

         SD-07 Certificates

             Installer certificate issued by the manufacturer; GA.
             Urethane Foam; GA
             Protective Coating Application; GA
             Protective Coating; GA

               Certificates of compliance attesting that the foam and protective
             coating materials meet the specified requirements, and that the
             proposed roofing system has been tested and meets the requirements
             of Class A system in accordance with UL 790. Instead of
             certificates, labels on the containers of foam and protective
             coating or listing by Underwriters Laboratories will be acceptable
             as evidence that the elastomeric roofing materials conform to these
             requirements.

1.5      DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

 Materials shall be delivered to the job site in their original unopened
 packages, clearly marked with the manufacturer's name, brand name, and
 description of contents. Materials shall be stored in clean, dry areas,
 away from excessive heat, sparks, and open flame. Storage area shall be
 ventilated to prevent build-up of flammable gases. Not more than half the
 shelf life shall have expired when materials are applied.

1.6      FIRE AND WIND UPLIFT

 Roofing system over steel deck shall be rated Class I-90 in accordance with
 FM P7825c. Ratings from other independent laboratories may be substituted if
 the tests, requirements and ratings are documented to be equivalent, to the
 satisfaction of the Contracting Officer.

1.7      WARRANTY

 Manufacturer's standard warranty for the roofing system shall be provided
 for not less than 10 years from acceptance of the work. Warranty shall
 state that manufacturer shall repair or replace defective materials if the
 roofing system leaks or allows the insulation beneath the membrane to become
 wet during the period of the warranty.

PART 2      PRODUCTS

2.1      URETHANE FOAM

 Urethane foam shall be standard product of the manufacturer, and containers
 shall be factory marked with the manufacturer's name or trademark. The
 cured foam shall meet requirements of ASTM C 1029 Type III or IV.
 Recyclable materials shall conform to EPA requirements.
                                                                           W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                        0001
                                                                              Page 313 of 463

2.2      PROTECTIVE COATING

 Coating shall consist of three coats of acrylic latex. Coating shall bond to
 urethane foam and shall have the following minimum properties:

                          * M I N I M U M     P R O P E R T I E S

MATERIAL      No. of          Tensile        Elongation        Hardness
              Components          Psi            Percent          Type A

  Silicone          one           400              150              45

  Silicone          two           500              100              45

  Urethane-         two           1000             400              60
   aromatic

  Urethane-         (top coat only)
   aliphatic        two          1600              150              80

  Urethane-         (base and intermediate coating only)
   aromatic         one          400           500                  50

  Urethane-         (top coat only)
   aliphatic        one          2000              450              80

  Acrylic           one           150              265              45

 * Minimum properties specified above shall be determined as follows:

 Tensile strength and elongation:           ASTM D 412 Die C, at 75 degrees F.
 Hardness: ASTM D 2240, Type A.

2.3      CERAMIC GRANULES

 Ceramic granules shall be No. 11 screen size, color as selected, dry, and
 free from dust.

2.4      SEALANTS

 Sealants shall be as recommended by the coating manufacturer.

2.5      FABRIC

 Fabric shall be ASTM D 579, style 1620.

PART 3      EXECUTION

3.1      INSTALLATION

 Installation shall comply with the manufacturer's instructions including
 minimum thickness, except as otherwise specified. Concrete surfaces shall
 be cured a minimum of 30 days before application of foam.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 314 of 463


3.1.1     Urethane Foam Application

 Foam shall be sprayed on the prepared surface in 1/2 to 1-inch lifts. Time
 between lifts shall not exceed 4 hours. The finished surface shall be
 "verge of popcorn" or smoother. An approved sample shall be used as the
 standard for determining the acceptability of the foam finish. Foam shall
 be extended up walls and around roof projections to form cants and flashings
 that terminate at least 2 inches above finished roof surface. Cured foam
 shall be free from water, dust, oils, and other materials, which would
 impair adhesion of the protective coating. No foam shall be allowed to
 stand overnight without a base protective coating. Foam shall cure at least
 1 hour, unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer before application
 of protective coating. Any non-adherence of foam to substrate shall be
 corrected and pinholes shall be finished flush with an approved sealant
 before finish coating is applied. Over-spraying to correct an unacceptable
 surface condition will not be permitted. The finished roof surface shall
 not vary more than 1/2 inch when measured with a 10-foot straight edge
 parallel and perpendicular to the roof slope.

3.1.2     Protective Coating Application

 Coating shall consist of base, intermediate, and top coats. Coatings shall
 be spray applied, unless otherwise approved. Coating shall completely cover
 the foam and extend up vertical surface beyond foam, up to and under the
 metal copping. The color of each coat shall contrast with the previous coat.
 Base or intermediate coats exposed for more than 24 hours shall be cleaned,
 thoroughly rinsed and dried, then given another covering of base coating
 before applying the top coat. No traffic will be allowed on finished areas
 for 24 hours after installation.

3.1.2.1     Base and Intermediate Coats

 Base and intermediate coats shall each have dry film thickness of not less
 than 10 mils for silicones, or 15 mils for urethane or acrylic coating.
 Coating shall be dry and clean before application of topcoat.

3.1.2.2     Top Coat

 Topcoat shall be white or light gray color. Topcoat shall be applied at
 right angles to the directions of the base coat application and shall fully
 cover the base coat. Topcoat dry film thickness shall be not less than 10
 mils.

3.1.2.3     Penetrations

 An additional 15 mils of coating shall be applied for 3 feet around roof
 access locations and 2 feet around all other roof penetrations. Thickness
 of coating at drain sumps shall be double that on the rest of the roof.
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 315 of 463

3.1.3     Granules

 Granules shall be applied within 5 minutes of topcoat application, using
 pressure equipment, at a rate of 40 pounds per 100 square feet. Granules
 shall be applied in a minimum of two passes made at right angles to each
 other. Finished granule system shall be uniform over entire surface with no
 apparent void areas.

3.1.4     Service Walks

 Service walks shall be applied after the protective coating system has been
 completed and cured. Walks shall consist of an extra coating system
 application or non-woven fiberglass fabric as indicated. Fabric shall be
 smoothed with brush or roller into an additional layer of protective
 coating; then a complete coating system shall cover the fabric and a minimum
 of 6 inches beyond each edge of the fabric. Topcoat shall be covered with
 roofing granules as specified.

3.2     EQUIPMENT CALIBRATION

 Spray equipment for two-component systems shall be calibrated each day at
 start of operations, after each restart if spraying operations have been
 terminated for more than 1 hour, whenever there is a change in fan pattern
 or pressure, whenever slow curing areas are noticed, whenever a change is
 made in hose length or working height and after changeover between
 materials. Calibration shall consist of demonstrating that the equipment is
 adjusted to deliver components in the proper proportions. Calibration tests
 shall be done on cardboard or plywood on the roof adjacent to the area to be
 sprayed.


                          *   *   *   END OF SECTION   *   *   *
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 316 of 463




                              SECTION 07 60 00

                          FLASHING AND SHEET METAL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
 basic designation only.

        AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

 ASTM A 167                     (1996) Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-
                                Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip

 ASTM A 653/A 653M              (1998) Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
                                or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
                                the Hot-Dip Process

 ASTM B 32                      (1996) Solder Metal

 ASTM B 69                      (1998) Rolled Zinc

 ASTM B 101                     (1996) Lead-Coated Copper Sheet and Strip for
                                Building Construction
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                     Page 317 of 463


 ASTM B 209M                       (1995) Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
                                   Plate (Metric)

 ASTM B 209                        (1996) Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
                                   Plate

 ASTM B 221M                       (1996) Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded
                                   Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
                                   (Metric)

 ASTM B 221                        (1996) Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded
                                   Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

 ASTM B 370                        (1992) Copper Sheet and Strip for Building
                                   Construction

 ASTM D 41                         (1994) Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Damp
                                   proofing, and Waterproofing

 ASTM D 1784                       (1997) Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
                                   Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
                                   Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds

 ASTM D 4586                       (1993) Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free

        AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

 AWS D1.2                          (1997) Structural Welding Code Aluminum

        SHEET METAL & AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION
        (SMACNA)

 SMACNA ASMM                       (1993) Architectural Sheet Metal Manual

1.2   SUBMITTALS

 Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00, "Submittal
 Procedures."

      SD-02 Shop Drawings

            Covering on flat, sloped, or curved surfaces; GA

            Gutters; GA

            Downspouts; GA

            Expansion joints; GA

            Gravel stops and fascias; GA
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 318 of 463

             Splash pans; GA

             Flashing for roof drains; GA

             Base flashing; GA

             Counter-flashing; GA

             Flashing at roof penetrations; GA

             Reglets; GA

             Scuppers; GA

             Copings; GA

             Drip edge; GA

             Conductor heads; GA

             Open valley flashing; GA

             Eave flashing; GA

             Indicate thickness, dimensions, fastenings and anchoring methods,
             expansion joints, and other provisions necessary for thermal
             expansion and contraction. Scaled manufacturer's catalog data may
             be submitted for factory fabricated items.

         SD-11 Closeout Submittals

             Quality Control Plan

             Submit for sheet metal works in accordance with paragraph entitled
             "Field Quality Control."

1.3      DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE

 Package and protect materials during shipment. Uncrate and inspect
 materials for damage, dampness, and wet-storage stains upon delivery to the
 job site. Remove from the site and replace damaged materials that cannot be
 restored to like-new condition. Handle sheet metal items to avoid damage to
 surfaces, edges, and ends. Store materials in dry, weather-tight,
 ventilated areas until immediately before installation.

PART 2      PRODUCTS

2.1      MATERIALS

 Furnish sheet metal items in 8 to 10 foot lengths. Single pieces less than
 8 feet long may be used to connect to factory-fabricated inside and outside
 corners, and at ends of runs. Factory fabricate corner pieces with minimum
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 319 of 463

 12-inch legs. Provide accessories and other items essential to complete the
 sheet metal installation. These accessories shall be made of the same
 materials as the items to which they are applied. Fabricate sheet metal
 items of the materials specified below and to the gage, thickness, or weight
 shown in Table I at the end of this section. Sheet metal items shall have
 mill finish unless specified otherwise. Where more than one material is
 listed for a particular item in Table I, each is acceptable and may be used
 except as follows:

2.1.1      Exposed Sheet Metal Items

 Shall be of the same material. The following items shall be considered as
 exposed sheet metal: gutters, including hangers; downspouts; gravel stops
 and fascias; cap, valley, steeped, base, and eave flashing and related
 accessories.

2.1.2      Drainage

 Do not use copper for an exposed item if drainage from that item will pass
 over exposed masonry, stonework or other metal surfaces.

2.1.3   Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
  ASTM A 653/A 653M.


2.1.3.1      Finish

 Exposed exterior items of zinc-coated steel sheet shall have a baked-on,
 factory-applied color coating of polyvinylidene fluoride or other equivalent
 fluorocarbon coating applied after metal substrates have been cleaned and
 pretreated. Finish coating dry-film thickness shall be 0.8 to 1.3 mils and
 color shall be as stated on Fort Buchanan's Installation Design Guide.

2.1.4      Stainless Steel

 ASTM A 167, Type 302 or 304, 2D Finish, fully annealed, dead-soft temper.

2.1.5     Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate

 ASTM B 209, form alloy, and temper appropriate for use.

2.1.5.1      Alclad

 When fabricated of aluminum, the following items shall be fabricated of
 Alclad 3003, Alclad 3004, Alclad 3005, clad on both sides unless otherwise
 indicated.

        a.   Gutters, downspouts, and hangers

        b.   Gravel stops and fascias

        c.   Flashing
                                                                    W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                 0001
                                                                       Page 320 of 463

2.1.5.2      Finish

 Exposed exterior sheet metal items of aluminum shall have a baked-on,
 factory-applied color coating of polyvinylidene fluoride (PVF2) or other
 equivalent fluorocarbon coating applied after metal substrates have been
 cleaned and pretreated. Finish coating dry-film thickness shall be 0.8 to
 1.3 mils, and color shall be as stated on Fort Buchanan's Installation
 Design Guide.

2.1.6      Aluminum Alloy, Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes

 ASTM B 221.

2.1.7      Solder

 ASTM B 32.

2.1.8      Polyvinyl Chloride Reglet

 ASTM D 1784, Type II, 0.075 inch minimum thickness.

2.1.9      Bituminous Plastic Cement

 ASTM D 4586, Type I.

2.1.10      Building Paper

 Uncreped, reinforced, 20 lb. per inch dry tensile strength, 16 hour minimum
 water resistance.

2.1.11      Asphalt Primer

 ASTM D 41.

2.1.12      Through-Wall Flashing

 Through-wall flashing for masonry is specified in Section 04200N, "Unit
 Masonry."

2.1.13      Fasteners

 Use the same metal or a metal compatible with the item fastened.       Use
 stainless steel fasteners to fasten dissimilar materials.

PART 3      EXECUTION

3.1      INSTALLATION

3.1.1      Requirements

 Make surfaces to receive sheet metal plumb and true, clean, even, smooth,
 dry, and free of defects and projections, which might affect the
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                   Page 321 of 463

 application. For installation of items not shown in detail or not covered
 by specifications, conform to the applicable requirements of SMACNA ASMM,
 Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. Provide sheet metal flashing in the
 angles formed where roof decks abut walls, curbs, ventilators, pipes, or
 other vertical surfaces and wherever indicated and necessary to make the
 work watertight. Join sheet metal items together as shown in Table II.

3.1.2     Workmanship

 Make lines, arises, and angles sharp and true. Free exposed surfaces from
 visible wave, warp, and buckle, and tool marks. Fold back exposed edges
 neatly to form a 1/2-inch hem on the concealed side. Make sheet metal
 exposed to the weather watertight with provisions for expansion and
 contraction.

3.1.3     Nailing

 Confine nailing of sheet metal generally to sheet metal having a maximum
 width of 18 inches. Confine nailing of flashing to one edge only. Space
 nails evenly not over 3 inches on centers and approximately 1/2 inch from
 edge unless otherwise specified or indicated. Face nailing will not be
 permitted. Where sheet metal is applied to other than wood surfaces,
 include in shop drawings, the locations for sleepers and nailing strips
 required to secure the work.

3.1.4     Cleats

 Provide cleats for sheet metal 18 inches and over in width. Space cleats
 evenly not over 12 inches on centers unless otherwise specified or
 indicated. Unless otherwise specified, cleats shall be not less than 2
 inches wide by 3 inches long and of the same material and thickness as the
 sheet metal being installed. Secure one end of the cleat with two nails and
 the cleat folded back over the nailheads. Lock the other end into the seam.
 Pretin cleats for soldered seams.

3.1.5     Bolts, Rivets, and Screws

 Install bolts, rivets, and screws where indicated or required. Provide
 compatible washers where required to protect surface of sheet metal and to
 provide a watertight connection.

3.1.6     Seams

 Straight and uniform in width and height with no solder showing on the face.

3.1.6.1     Flat-lock Seams

 Finish not less than 3/4 inch wide.

3.1.6.2     Lap Seams

 Finish soldered seams not less than one inch wide.   Overlap seams not
 soldered, not less than 3 inches.
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                   Page 322 of 463

3.1.6.3     Loose-Lock Expansion Seams

 Not less than 3 inches wide, provide minimum one-inch movement within the
 joint. Completely fill the joints with the specified sealant, applied at
 not less than 1/8-inch thick bed.

3.1.6.4     Standing Seams

 Not less than 1 1/2-inch high, double locked without solder.

3.1.6.5     Flat Seams

 Make seams in the direction of the flow.

3.1.7     Soldering

 Where soldering is specified, it shall apply to stainless steel, zinc-coated
 steel, and stainless steel items.


3.1.7.1     Edges

 Pretin edges of sheet metals before soldering. Slowly solder with well-
 heated soldering irons to thoroughly heat the seams and completely sweat the
 solder through the full width of the seam. Treat with soldering acid flux
 the edges of stainless steel to be pretinned. Solder immediately after
 application of the flux. Upon completion of soldering, the acid flux
 residue shall be thoroughly cleaned from the sheet metal with a solution of
 washing soda in water and rinsed with clean water. Seal the joints in
 aluminum sheets of 0.040 inch or less in thickness with specified sealants.
 Do not solder aluminum.

3.1.8     Welding and Mechanical Fastening

 Use welding for aluminum of thickness greater than 0.040 inch. Aluminum
 0.040 inch or less in thickness shall be butted and the space backed with
 formed flashing plate; or lock joined, mechanically fastened, and filled
 with sealant as recommended by the aluminum manufacturer.

3.1.8.1     Welding of Aluminum

 Use welding of the inert gas, shield-arc type. For procedures, appearance
 and quality of welds, and the methods used in correcting welding work,
 conform to AWS D1.2.

3.1.8.2     Mechanical Fastening of Aluminum

 Use No. 12, aluminum alloy, sheet metal screws or other suitable aluminum
 alloy or stainless steel fasteners. Drive fasteners in holes made with a
 No. 26 drill in securing side laps, end laps, and flashing. Space fasteners
 12 inches maximum on centers. Where end lap fasteners are required to
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 323 of 463

 improve closure, locate the end lap fasteners not more than 2 inches from
 the end of the overlapping sheet.

3.1.9     Protection from Contact with Dissimilar Materials

3.1.9.1   Aluminum

 Aluminum surfaces shall not directly contact other metals except stainless
 steel, zinc, or zinc coating. Where aluminum contacts another metal, paint
 the dissimilar metal with a primer followed by two coats of aluminum paint.
 Where drainage from a dissimilar metal passes over aluminum, paint the
 dissimilar metal with a non-lead pigmented paint.

3.1.9.2    Metal Surfaces

 Paint surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete, or other masonry materials
 with alkali-resistant coatings such as heavy-bodied bituminous paint.

3.1.9.3    Wood or Other Absorptive Materials

 Paint surfaces that may become repeatedly wet and in contact with metal with
 two coats of aluminum paint or a coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.

3.1.10    Expansion and Contraction

 Provide expansion and contraction joints at not more than 32-foot intervals
 for aluminum and at not more than 40-foot intervals for other metals. Where
 the distance between the last expansion joint and the end of the continuous
 run is more than half the required interval, an additional joint shall be
 provided. Space joints evenly. Join extruded aluminum gravel stops and
 fascias by expansion and contraction joints spaced not more than 12 feet
 apart.

3.1.11    Base Flashing

 Lay the base flashing with each course of the roof covering, shingle
 fashion, where practicable, where sloped roofs, curbs, walls, or other
 vertical surfaces. Extend up vertical surfaces of the flashing not less
 than 8 inches and not less than 4 inches under the roof covering. Where
 finish wall coverings form a counter flashing, extend the vertical leg of
 the flashing up behind the applied wall covering not less than 6 inches.
 Overlap the flashing strips or shingles with the previously laid flashing
 not less than 3-inches. Fasten the strips or shingles at their upper edge
 to the deck, with compatible, large-head roofing nails. Solder end laps and
 provide for expansion and contraction. Extend the metal flashing over
 crickets at the up-slope side of curbs and similar vertical surfaces
 extending through sloping roofs, the metal flashing. Extend the metal
 flashing onto the roof covering not less than 4.5 inches at the lower side
 of dormer walls and similar vertical surfaces extending through the roof
 decks. Install and fit the flashing to be completely weather-tight. Base
 flashing for interior and exterior corners shall be factory-fabricated.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 324 of 463

3.1.12     Counterflashing

 Except where indicated or specified otherwise, insert counterflashing in
 reglets located from 9 to 10 inches above roof decks, extend down vertical
 surfaces over upturned vertical leg of base flashing not less than 3-inches.
 Fold the exposed edges of counter-flashing 1/2-inch. Where stepped counter-
 flashing are required, they may be installed in short lengths or may be of
 the preformed one-piece type. Provide end laps in counter-flashing not less
 than 3-inches and make it weather-tight with plastic cement.   Do not make
 lengths of metal counter-flashing exceed 10 feet. Form the flashing to the
 required shapes before installation.   Factory-form the corners not less
 than 12 inches from the angle. Secure the flashing in the reglets with lead
 wedges and space not more than 18 inches apart; on short runs, place wedges
 closer together. Fill caulked-type reglets or raked joints which receive
 counterflashing with caulking compound. Turn up the concealed edge of
 counter-flashing built into masonry or concrete walls not less than 1/4-inch
 and extend not less than 2-inches into the walls. Install counterflashing
 to provide a spring action against base flashing.

3.1.13     Metal Reglets

 Caulked type or friction type reglets shall be factory fabricated with a
 minimum opening of 1/4 inch and a depth of 1 1/4 inches, as approved.


3.1.13.1     Caulked Reglets

 Provide with rounded edges and metal strap brackets or other anchors for
 securing to the concrete forms. Provide reglets with a core to protect them
 from injury during the installation. Provide built-up mitered corner pieces
 for internal and external angles. Wedge the flashing in the reglets with
 lead wedges every 18 inches, caulked full and solid with an approved
 compound.

3.1.13.2     Friction Reglets

 Provide with flashing receiving slots not less than 5/8-inch deep, one inch
 jointing tongues, and upper and lower anchoring flanges. Insert the
 flashing the full depth of the slot and lock by indentations made with a
 dull-pointed tool.

3.1.14     Polyvinyl Chloride Reglets

 Rigid polyvinyl chloride reglets may be provided instead of metal reglets
 for temporary construction.

3.1.15     Gravel Stops and Fascias

 Prefabricate in the shapes and sizes indicated and in lengths not less than
 8 feet. Extend flange at least 4 inches onto roofing. Provide
 prefabricated, mitered corners internal and external corners. Install
 gravel stops and fascias after all plies of the roofing membrane have been
 applied, but before the flood coat of bitumen is applied. Prime roof flange
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 325 of 463

 of gravel stops and fascias on both sides with an asphalt primer. After
 primer has dried, set flange on roofing membrane and strip-in as specified
 in Section 07510A "Built-up Asphalt Roofing". Nail flange securely to wood
 nailer with large-head, barbed-shank roofing nails 1.5 inches long spaced
 not more than 3 inches on centers, in two staggered rows.

3.1.15.1     Edge Strip

 Hook the lower edge of fascias at least 3/4-inch over a continuous strip of
 the same material bent outward at an angle not more than 45 degrees to form
 a drip. Nail hook strip to a wood nailer at 6 inches maximum on centers.
 Where fastening is made to concrete or masonry, use screws spaced 12 inches
 on centers driven in expansion shields set in the concrete or masonry.
 Where horizontal wood nailers are slotted to provide for insulation venting,
 install strips to prevent obstruction of vent slots. Where necessary,
 install strips over 1/16-inch thick compatible spacer or washers.

3.1.15.2     Joints

 Leave open the section ends of gravel stops and fascias 1/4 inch and backed
 with a formed flashing plate, mechanically fastened in place and lapping
 each section end a minimum of 4 inches set laps in plastic cement. Face
 nailing will not be permitted. Install prefabricated aluminum gravel stops
 and fascias in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and
 details.

3.1.16     Metal Drip Edge

 Provide a metal drip, designed to allow water run-off to drip free of
 underlying construction, at eaves and rakes before the application of
 roofing shingles. Apply directly on the wood deck at the eaves and over the
 underlay along the rakes. Extend back from the edge of the deck not more
 than 3 inches and secure with compatible nails spaced not more than 10
 inches on center along upper edge.

3.1.17     Gutters

 The hung type of shape indicated and supported on underside by brackets that
 permit free thermal movement of the gutter. Provide gutters in sizes
 indicated complete with mitered corners, end caps, outlets, brackets, and
 other accessories necessary for installation. Bead with hemmed edge or
 reinforce the outer edge of gutter with a stiffening bar not less than 3/4
 by 3/16 inch of material compatible with gutter. Fabricate gutters in
 sections not less than 8 feet. Lap the sections a minimum of one inch in
 the direction of flow or provide with concealed splice plate 6 inches
 minimum. Join the gutters, other than aluminum, by riveted and soldered
 joints. Aluminum gutters shall be joined with riveted sealed joints.
 Provide expansion-type slip joints midway between outlets. Support gutters
 on adjustable hangers spaced not more than 30 inches on center or as
 recommended by the manufacturer. Adjust gutters to slope uniformly to
 outlets, with high points occurring midway between outlets.   Fabricate
 hangers and fastenings from metals compatible with the gutters.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 326 of 463

3.1.18     Downspouts

 Types, shapes and sizes as indicated. Provide complete including elbows and
 offsets. Provide downspouts in approximately 10-foot lengths. Provide end
 joints to telescope not less than 1/2 inch and lock longitudinal joints.
 Provide gutter outlets with wire ball strainers for each outlet. Provide
 strainers to fit tightly into outlets and be of the same material used for
 gutters. Keep downspouts not less than one inch away from walls. Fasten to
 the walls at top, bottom, and at an intermediate point not to exceed 5 feet
 on centers with leader straps or concealed rack-and-pin type fasteners.
 Form straps and fasteners of metal compatible with the downspouts.

3.1.18.1     Terminations

 Neatly fit into the drainage connection the downspouts terminating in
 drainage lines and fill the joints with a Portland cement mortar cap sloped
 away from the downspout. Provide downspouts terminating in splash blocks
 with elbow-type fittings. Provide splash pans as specified.

3.1.19     Flashing for Roof Drains

 Roof drains are specified in Section: 05500A "Miscellaneous Metals".
 Provide a 30-inch square sheet indicated. Taper insulation to drain from 24
 inches out. Set flashing on finished felts in a full bed of asphalt roof
 cement as specified in Roofing Section. Apply strip flashing to the drain
 flashing in accordance with paragraph entitled "Roof Drain Flashing."
 Heavily coat the drain-flashing ring with asphalt roof cement. Clamp the
 roof membrane, flashing sheet, and stripping felt in the drain-clamping
 ring. Secure clamps so that felts and drain flashing are free of wrinkles
 and folds.

3.1.20     Scuppers

 Line interior of scupper openings with sheet metal. Extend the lining
 through and project outside of the wall to form a drip on the bottom edge
 and form to return not less than one inch against the face of the outside
 wall at the top and sides. Fold outside edges under 1/2-inch on all sides.
 Provide the perimeter of the lining approximately 1/2-inch less than the
 perimeter of the scupper. Join the top and sides of the lining on the roof
 deck side to a closure flange by a locked and soldered joint. Join the
 bottom edge by a locked and soldered joint to the closure flange, where
 required, form with a ridge to act as a gravel stop around the scupper
 inlet. Provide surfaces to receive the scupper lining and coat with
 bituminous plastic cement.   Mechanically fasten joints in aluminum and
 seal.

3.1.21     Conductor Heads

 Type indicated and fabricated of the same material as the downspouts. Set
 the depth of top opening equal to two-thirds of the width. Provide outlet
 tubes not less than 4-inches long. Flat-lock solder the seams except the
 mechanically fastened aluminum joints filled with a hard setting sealant.
 Where conductor heads are used in conjunction with scuppers, set the
 conductor a minimum of 2-inches wider than the scupper. Attach conductor
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                   Page 327 of 463

 heads to the wall with masonry fasteners, and loose-lock to provide
 conductor heads with screens of the same material. Securely fasten screens
 to the heads.

3.1.22   Splash Pans

 Install splash pans where downspouts discharge on roof surfaces and at other
 locations as indicated. Unless otherwise shown, provide pans not less than
 24-inches long by 18-inches wide with metal ribs across the bottom of the
 pan. Form the sides of the pan with vertical baffles not less than one inch
 high in the front, and 4-inches high in the back doubled over and formed
 continuous with horizontal roof flanges not less than 4-inches wide. Bend
 the rear flange of the pan to contour of cant strip and extend up 6-inches
 under the sidewall covering or to height of base flashing under counter-
 flashing. Bed the pans and roof flanges in plastic bituminous cement and
 strip-flash as specified in Roofing Section. Splash pans located in ground
 shall be made of concrete with the same dimensions indicated above.

3.1.23   Open Valley Flashing

 Provide valley flashing free of longitudinal seams, of width sufficient to
 extend not less than 6-inches under the roof covering on each side. Provide
 a 1/2-inch fold on each side of the valley flashing. Lap the sheets not
 less than 6-inches in the direction of flow and secure to roofing
 construction with cleats attached to the fold on each side. Nail the tops
 of sheets to roof sheathing. Space the cleats not more than 12-inches on
 centers. Provide exposed flashing not less than 4-inches in width at the
 top and increase one inch in width for each additional 8-feet in length.
 Where the slope of the valley is 4.5-inches or less per foot, or the
 intersecting roofs are on different slopes, provide an inverted V-joint, one
 inch high, along the centerline of the valley; and extend the edge of the
 valley sheets 8-inches under the roof covering on each side.

3.1.24   Eave Flashing

 One piece in width, applied in 8 to 10-foot lengths with expansion joints
 spaced as specified in paragraph entitled "Expansion and Contraction."
 Provide a 3/4-inch continuous fold in the upper edge of the sheet to engage
 cleats spaced not more than 10-inches on centers. Locate the upper edge of
 flashing not less than 18-inches from the outside face of the building,
 measured along the roof slope. Fold lower edge of the flashing over and
 loose-lock into a continuous edge strip on the fascia. Where eave flashing
 intersects metal valley flashing, secure with one inch flat locked joints
 with cleats that are 10-inches on centers. Place eave flashing over
 underlayment and in plastic bituminous cement.

3.1.25   Sheet Metal Covering on Flat, Sloped, or Curved Surfaces

 Except as specified or indicated otherwise, cover and flash all minor flat,
 sloped, or curved surfaces such as crickets, bulkheads, dormers and small
 decks with metal sheets of the material used for flashing; maximum size of
 sheets, 16 by 18-inches. Fasten sheets to sheathing with metal cleats.
 Lock seams and solder. Lock aluminum seams and fill with sealer as
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 328 of 463

 recommended by aluminum manufacturer.     Provide an underlayment of building
 paper for all sheet metal covering.

3.1.26      Expansion Joints

 Provide expansion joints for roofs, walls, and floors where indicated and
 conform to the requirements of Table I.

3.1.26.1      Roof Expansion Joints

 Consist of curb with wood nailing members on each side of joint, bituminous
 base flashing, metal counterflashing, and metal joint cover. Bituminous
 base flashing is specified in Roofing Section. Provide counterflashing as
 specified in paragraph "Counterflashing," except as follows: Provide
 counterflashing with vertical leg of suitable depth to enable forming into a
 horizontal continuous cleat. Secure the inner edge to the nailing member.
 Make the outer edge projection not less than one inch for flashing on one
 side of the expansion joint and be less than the width of the expansion
 joint plus one inch for flashing on the other side of the joint. Hook the
 expansion joint cover over the projecting outer edges of counterflashing.
 Provide roof joint with a joint cover of the width indicated. Hook and lock
 one edge of the joint cover over the shorter projecting flange of the
 continuous cleat, and the other edge hooked over and loose locked with the
 longer projecting flange.   Joints are specified in Table II.

3.1.27      Flashing at Roof Penetrations and Equipment Supports

 Provide metal flashing for all pipes, ducts, and conduits projecting through
 the roof surface and for equipment supports, guy wire anchors, and similar
 items supported by or attached to the roof deck.


3.1.27.1      Single Pipe Vents

 See Table I, footnote (d). Set metal housing with a metal sleeve having a 4
 inch roof flange in bituminous plastic cement and nailed 3 inches on
 centers. Extend sleeve a minimum of 8 inches above the roof deck and lapped
 a minimum of 3 inches by a metal hood secured to the vent pipe by a draw
 band. Seal the area of hood in contact with vent pipe with an approved
 sealant. Sealants are covered under Section 07920N, "Joint Sealants."

3.1.28      Copings

 Provide coping using galvanized steel sheets 8 or 10 feet long joined by a
 3/4 inch locked and soldered seam.   Terminate outer edges in edge strips.
 Install with sealed standing seam joints as indicated.

3.2      PAINTING

 Field-paint sheet metal for separation of dissimilar materials.
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                     Page 329 of 463

3.3     CLEANING

 Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove grease
 and oil films, handling marks, contamination from steel wool, fittings and
 drilling debris, and scrub-clean. Free the exposed metal surfaces of dents,
 creases, waves, scratch marks, and solder or weld marks.

3.4     REPAIRS TO FINISH

 Scratches, abrasions, and minor surface defects of finish may be repaired in
 accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and as approved.
 Repair damaged surfaces caused by scratches, blemishes, and variations of
 color and surface texture. Replace items, which cannot be repaired.

3.5     FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

 Establish and maintain a Quality Control Plan for sheet metal used in
 conjunction with roofing to assure compliance of the installed sheet
 metalwork with the contract requirements. Work not in compliance with the
 contract shall be promptly removed and replaced or corrected.   Quality
 control shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

        a.   Observation of environmental conditions; number and skill level of
             sheet metal workers; condition of substrate.

        b.   Verification of compliance before, during, and after installation.

        c.   Inspection of sheet metalwork, for proper size and thickness,
             fastening and joining, and proper installation.

3.5.1     Procedure

 Submit for approval prior to start of roofing work. Include a checklist of
 points to be observed. Document the actual quality control observations and
 inspections. Furnish a copy of the documentation to the Contracting Officer
 at the end of each day.

                TABLE I - SHEET METAL WEIGHTS, THICKNESS, AND GAGES

                                                         Zinc-
                                                         Coated
                                          Stainless      Steel,
  Sheet Metal Items           Aluminum,   Steel,         U.S.
                              Inch        Inch           Std.
                                                         Gage
  ___________________________________________________________________________

  Building Expansion
  Joints Cover..........        .032         .015           24

  Waterstop-bellows or
  flanged, U-type.......         -          .015            -

  Covering on minor flat,
                                                                 W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                    Page 330 of 463

pitched or curved
surfaces..............        .040           .018           -

Downspouts and
Leaders...............        .032           .015           24

Downspout clips
and anchors...........       .040 clip        -             -
                             .125 anchor      -             -

Downspout straps,
2-inch     ...........       .060           .050            -

Conductor heads     .....    .032           .015            -

Scupper lining     ......    .032           .015            -

Strainers, wire
diameter or gage     ....    .144           .109            -

                            diameter       diameter

Flashing:
Base ................        .040           .018        24
Cap (Counter-flashing)       .032           .015        26
Eave ................          -            .015        24
Spandrel beam .......          -            .010        -
Bond barrier ........          -            .015        -
Stepped .............        .032           .015        -
Valley ..............        .032           .015        -
Roof drain ..........       16(b)
Gravel stops and
fascias:
Extrusions ..........        .075             -             -
Sheets,
Corrugated ..........        .032           .015        -
Sheets, smooth ......        .050           .018        24
Edge strip ..........        .050           .025        -
Gutters:
 Gutter section.......       .032           .015       24
 Continuous cleat.....       .032           .015       24
 Hangers,
 Dimensions .........       1 inch x       1 inch x     -
                            .080 inch      .037 inch
                             (c)

Joint Cover plates ...      .032           .015        24
 (See Table II)
Reglets (c) .........         -            .010         -
Splash pans .........       .040           .018         -

(a)   May be polyvinyl chloride.

(b)   Where lead sleeve is impractical, refer to paragraph entitled "Single
      Pipe Vents" for optional material. Lead is not permitted to use.
                                                                 W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                    Page 331 of 463


                          TABLE II - SHEET METAL JOINTS
                                  TYPE OF JOINT

            Stainless
  Item      Steel, Zinc-Coated
  Designa-  Steel and
  tion      Stainless
            Steel                 Aluminum                    Remarks
______________________________________________________________________

  Joint cap   1.25 inch              1.25 inch                  - - -
  for         single lock,           single lock,
  building    standing               standing
  expansion   seam, cleated
  seam, cleated
  joint at
  roof

  Flashing

  Base       One inch              One inch               Aluminum producer's
             3 inch lap            flat locked,           recommended hard
             for expansion         soldered; sealed;      setting sealant for
             joint                 3 inch lap for         locked aluminum
                                   expansion joint        joints. Fill
                                                          each metal
                                                          expansion joint
                                                          with a joint
                                                          sealing compound
                                                          compound. See
                                                          Section 07920N,
                                                          "Joint Sealants."

  Cap-in     3 inch lap            3 inch lap             Seal groove with
  reglet                                                  joint sealing
                                                          compound. See
                                                          Section 07920N,
                                                          "Joint Sealants."

  Reglets    Butt joint             - - -                 Seal reglet groove
                                                          with joint sealing
                                                          compound. See
                                                          Section 07920N,
                                                          "Joint Sealants."

  Eave       One inch flat         One inch flat          Same as base
             locked, cleated       locked, locked,        flashing.
             One inch              cleated one inch
             loose locked,         loose locked, sealed
             expansion             expansion joints,
             joint cleated         cleated

  Stepped    3 inch lap            3 inch lap                 - - -

  Valley.    6 inch lap cleated    6 inch lap cleated         - - -
                                                                             W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                          0001
                                                                                Page 332 of 463


  Edge         Butt                      Butt                             - - -
  strip

  Gravel
  stops:

  Extrusions     - - -                    Butt with 1/2 inch          Use sheet flashing
                                          space                       beneath and a cover
                                                                      plate.

  Sheet,       Butt with 1/4 inch        Butt with 1/4-inch           Use sheet flashing
   smooth      space                     space                        backup plate.

  Sheet        Butt with 1/4 inch        Butt with 1/4 inch           Use sheet flashing
   corru-      space                     space                        beneath and a cover
   gated                                                              plate or a
                                                                      combination unit

  Gutters      1.5-inch lap,             One inch flat locked,        Aluminum producers
               riveted and               riveted, and sealed          recommended hard
               soldered                                               setting sealant for
                                                                      locked aluminum
                                                                      joints.

      (a)      Elastomeric flashing shall have 3-inch lap with manufacturers
               recommended sealant.

      (b)      Polyvinyl chloride reglet shall be sealed with manufacturers
               recommended sealant.


                          *    *   *    END OF SECTION    *   *   *




                                       SECTION 07 61 13

                 STRUCTURAL STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF (SSSMR) SYSTEM

PART 1      GENERAL

1.1      REFERENCES

 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
 extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic
 designation only.

            ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)

 AA Design Manual                       (2000) Aluminum Design Manual: Specification
                                        & Guidelines for Aluminum Structures
                                                              W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                           0001
                                                                 Page 333 of 463


      AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)

AISC ASD Spec S335            (1989) Specification for Structural Steel
                              Buildings - Allowable Stress Design, Plastic
                              Design

      AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE (AISI)

AISI Cold-Formed Mnl          (1996) Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual

      AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

ASTM A 463/A 463M             (2000) Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the
                              Hot-Dip Process

ASTM A 653/A 653M             (2000) Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
                              or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
                              the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM A 792/A 792M             (1999) Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-
                              Coated by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM B 209                    (2000) Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
                              Plate

ASTM B 209M                   (2000) Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
                              Plate (Metric)

ASTM C 518                    (1998) Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements
                              and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means
                              of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus

ASTM C 991                    (1998) Flexible Glass Fiber Insulation for
                              Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings

ASTM C 1177/C 1177M           (1999) Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as
                              Sheathing


ASTM C 1289                   (1998) Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate
                              Thermal Insulation Board

ASTM D 522                    (1993a) Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic
                              Coatings

ASTM D 523                    (1989; R 1999) Specular Gloss

ASTM D 610                    (1995) Evaluating Degree of Rusting on
                              Painted Steel Surfaces
                                             W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                          0001
                                                Page 334 of 463

ASTM D 714    (1987; R 1994el) Evaluating Degree of
              Blistering of Paints

ASTM D 968    (1993) Abrasion Resistance of Organic
              Coatings by Falling Abrasive

ASTM D 1308   (1987; R 1998) Effect of Household Chemicals
              on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes

ASTM D 1654   (1992) Evaluation of Painted or Coated
              Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments

ASTM D 2244   (1995) Calculation of Color Differences from
              Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates

ASTM D 2247   (1999) Testing Water Resistance of Coatings
              in 100% Relative Humidity

ASTM D 2794   (1993; R 1999el) Resistance of Organic
              Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation
              (Impact)

ASTM D 3359   (1997) Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test

ASTM D 4214   (1998) Evaluating Degree of Chalking of
              Exterior Paint Films

ASTM D 4397   (1996) Polyethylene Sheeting for
              Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural
              Applications

ASTM D 5894   (1996) Standard Practice for Cyclic Salt
              Fog/UV Exposure of Painted Metal,
              (Alternating Exposures in a Fog/Dry Cabinet
              and a UV/Condensation Cabinet)

ASTM E 84     (2000a) Surface Burning Characteristics of
              Building Materials

ASTM E 96     (2000) Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

ASTM E 1592   (1998) Structural Performance of Sheet Metal
              Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air
              Pressure Difference



ASTM G 154    (2000ael) Standard Practice for Operating
              Fluorescent Light Apparatus for UV Exposure
              of Nonmetallic Materials
                                                                 W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                              0001
                                                                    Page 335 of 463

          AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)

 ASCE 7                           (1998) Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and
                                  Other Structures

          STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE (SJI)

 SJI Specs & Tables               (1994) Standard Specifications Load Tables
                                  and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist
                                  Girders

1.2     GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

 The Contractor shall furnish a commercially available roofing system which
 satisfies all requirements contained herein and has been verified by load
 testing and independent design analyses to meet the specified design
 requirements.

1.2.1     Structural Standing Seam Metal Roof (SSSMR) System

 The SSSMR system covered under this specification shall include the entire
 roofing system; the standing seam metal roof panels, fasteners, connectors,
 roof securement components, and assemblies tested and approved in accordance
 with ASTM E 1592. In addition, the system shall consist of panel finishes,
 slip sheet, insulation, vapor retarder, all accessories, components, and
 trim and all connections with roof panels. This includes roof penetration
 items such as vents, curbs, skylights; interior or exterior gutters and
 downspouts; eaves, ridge, hip, valley, rake, gable, wall, or other roof
 system flashings installed and any other components specified within this
 contract to provide a weather-tight roof system.

1.2.2     Manufacturer

 The SSSMR system shall be the product of a manufacturer who has been in the
 practice of manufacturing and designing SSSMR systems for a period of not
 less than 3 years and has been involved in at least five projects similar in
 size and complexity to this project.

1.2.3     Installer

 The installer shall be certified by the SSSMR system manufacturer to have
 experience in installing at least three projects that are of comparable
 size, scope and complexity as this project for the particular roof system
 furnished. The installer may be either employed by the manufacturer or be
 an independent installer.

1.3     DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

 The design of the SSSMR system shall be provided by the Contractor as a
 complete system. Members and connections not indicated on the drawings
 shall be designed by the Contractor. Roof panels, components, transitions,
 accessories, and assemblies shall be supplied by the same roofing system
 manufacturer.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 336 of 463


1.3.1     Design Criteria

 Design criteria shall be in accordance with ASCE 7.

1.3.2     Dead Loads

 The dead load shall be the weight of the SSSMR system. Collateral loads
 such as sprinklers, mechanical and electrical systems, and ceilings shall
 not be attached to the panels.

1.3.3     Live Loads

1.3.3.1      Concentrated Loads

 The panels and anchor clips shall be capable of supporting a 300 pound
 concentrated load. The concentrated load shall be applied at the panel
 midspan and will be resisted by a single standing seam metal roof panel
 assumed to be acting as a beam. The undeformed shape of the panel shall be
 used to determine the section properties.

1.3.3.2      Uniform Loads

 The panels and concealed anchor clips shall be capable of supporting a
 minimum uniform live load of 20 psf.

1.3.4     Wind Loads

 The design wind uplift pressure for the roof system shall be as shown on the
 contract drawings. The design uplift force for each connection assembly
 shall be that pressure given for the area under consideration, multiplied by
 the tributary load area of the connection assembly. The safety factor
 listed below shall be applied to the design force and compared against the
 ultimate capacity. Prying shall be considered when figuring fastener design
 loads.

        a.   Single fastener in each connection.........3.0

        b.   Two or more fasteners in each connection...2.25

1.3.5     Thermal Loads

 Roof panels shall be free to move in response to the expansion and
 contraction forces resulting from a total temperature range of 50 - 95
 degrees F during the life of the structure.

1.3.6 Framing Members Supporting the SSSMR System

 Any additions/revisions to framing members supporting the SSSMR system to
 accommodate the manufacturer/fabricator's design shall be the Contractor's
 responsibility and shall be submitted for review and approval. New or
 revised framing members and their connections shall be designed in
 accordance with AISC ASD Spec S335, AISI Cold-Formed Mnl or SJI Specs &
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                     Page 337 of 463

 Tables. Maximum deflection under applied live load, or wind load shall not
 exceed 1/180 of the span length.

1.3.7     Roof Panels Design

 Steel panels shall be designed in accordance with AISI Cold-Formed Mnl.
 Aluminum panels shall be designed in accordance with AA Design Manual. The
 structural section properties used in the design of the panels shall be
 determined using the unloaded shape of the roof panels. The calculated
 panel deflection from concentrated loads shall not exceed 1/180 of the span
 length. The calculated panel deflection under applied live load, or wind
 load shall not exceed 1/180 times the span length. Deflections shall be
 based on panels being continuous across three or more supports. Deflection
 shall be calculated and measured along the major ribs of the panels.

1.3.8     Accessories and Their Fasteners

 Accessories and their fasteners shall be capable of resisting the specified
 design wind uplift forces and shall allow for thermal movement of the roof
 panel system. Exposed fasteners shall not restrict free movement of the
 roof panel system resulting from thermal forces. There shall be a minimum
 of two fasteners per clip. Single fasteners with a minimum diameter of 3/8
 inch will be allowed when the supporting structural members are prepunched
 or predrilled.

1.4     PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

 The SSSMR shall be tested for wind uplift resistance in accordance with ASTM
 E 1592; SSSMR systems previously tested and approved by the Corps of
 Engineers' STANDARD TEST METHOD FOR STRUCTURAL PERFORMANCE OF SSMRS BY
 UNIFORM STATIC AIR PRESSURE DIFFERENCE may be acceptable. Two tests shall
 be performed. Test 1 shall simulate the edge condition with one end having
 crosswise restraint and other end free of crosswise restraint. The maximum
 span length for the edge condition shall be 30 inches. Test 2 shall
 simulate the interior condition with both ends free of crosswise restraint.
 The maximum span length for the interior condition shall be 5.0 feet.
 External reinforcement, such as clamps on the ribs, shall not be installed
 to improve uplift resistance. Bolts through seams shall not be installed.

1.5     SUBMITTALS

 Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
 submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
 used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that
 will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
 submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

        SD-02 Drawings

            Structural Standing Seam Metal Roof System; G.

              Metal roofing drawings and specifications and erection drawings;
            shop coating and finishing specifications; and other data as
            necessary to clearly describe design, materials, sizes, layouts,
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 338 of 463

    standing seam configuration, construction details, provisions for
    thermal movement, line of panel fixity, fastener sizes and

    spacings, sealants and erection procedures. Drawings shall reflect
    the intent of the architectural detailing using the manufacturer's
    proprietary products and fabricated items as required. The SSSMR
    system shop drawings shall be provided by the metal roofing
    manufacturer.

SD-03 Product Data

    Design Analysis; G. Design analysis signed by a Registered
    Professional Engineer employed by the SSSMR manufacturer. The
    design analysis shall include a list of the design loads, and
    complete calculations for the support system (when provided by the
    Contractor), roofing system and its components; valley designs,
    gutter/downspout calculations, screw pullout test results, and
    shall indicate how expected thermal movements are accommodated.

    Qualifications; G.

      Qualifications of the manufacturer and installer.

SD-04 Samples

    Accessories; G.

      One sample of each type of flashing, trim, closure, thermal
    spacer block, cap and similar items. Size shall be sufficient to
    show construction and configuration.

    Roof Panels; G.

    One piece of each type to be used, 9 inches long, full width.

    Factory Color Finish; G.

      Three 3 by 5 inches samples of each type and color.

    Fasteners; G.

    Two samples of each type to be used, with statement regarding
    intended use. If so requested, random samples of bolts, nuts, and
    washers as delivered to the job site shall be taken in the presence
    of the Contracting Officer and provided to the Contracting Officer
    for testing to establish compliance with specified requirements.

    Insulation; G.

      One piece,    12 by   12 inches, of each type and thickness to be
    used, with a    label   indicating the rated permeance (if faced) and R-
    values. The     flame   spread, and smoke developed rating shall be
    shown on the    label   or provided in a letter of certification.
                                                              W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                           0001
                                                                 Page 339 of 463


    Gaskets and Insulating Compounds; G.

    Two samples of each type to be used and descriptive data.

    Sealant; G.

      One sample, approximately 1 pound, and descriptive data.

    Concealed Anchor Clips; G.

      Two samples of each type used.

    Subpurlins; G.

      One piece, 9 inches long.

    EPDM Rubber Boots; G.

      One piece of each type.

SD-06 Test Reports

    Test Report for Uplift Resistance of the SSSMR; G.

      The report shall include the following information:

         a. Details of the SSSMR system showing the roof panel cross-
    section with dimensions and thickness.

            b.   Details of the anchor clip, dimensions, and thickness.

         c. Type of fasteners, size, and the number required for each
    connection.

            d.   Purlins/subpurlins size and spacing used in the test.

            e.   Description of the seaming operation including equipment
    used.

         f. Maximum allowable uplift pressures. These pressures are
    determined from the ultimate load divided by a factor of safety
    equal to 1.65.

         g. Any additional information required to identify the SSSMR
    system tested.

         h. Signature and seal of an independent registered engineer
    who witnessed the test.

SD-07 Certificates
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 340 of 463


            Structural Standing Seam Metal Roof System; G.

                 a. Certification that the actual thickness of uncoated sheets
            used in SSSMRS components including roofing panels, subpurlins, and
            concealed anchor clips complies with specified requirements.

                 b. Certification that materials used in the installation are
            mill certified.

                 c. Previous certification of SSSMR system tested under the
            Corps of Engineers' Standard Test Method in lieu of ASTM E 1592
            testing.

                 d. Certification that the sheets to be furnished are produced
            under a continuing quality control program and that a
            representative sample consisting of not less than three pieces has
            been tested and has met the quality standards specified for factory
            color finish.

                 e. Certification of installer.    Installer certification shall
            be furnished.

                 f. Warranty certificate. At the completion of the project
            the Contractor shall furnish signed copies of the 10-year Warranty
            for Structural Standing Seam Metal Roof (SSSMR) System, a sample
            copy of which is attached to this section, and the 20-year
            Manufacturer's Material Warranties, and the manufacturer's 20-year
            system weathertightness warranty.

1.6     DELIVERY AND STORAGE

 Materials shall be delivered to the site in a dry and undamaged condition
 and stored out of contact with the ground. Materials shall be covered with
 weathertight coverings and kept dry. Storage conditions shall provide good
 air circulation and protection from surface staining.

1.7     WARRANTIES

 The SSSMR system shall be warranted as outlined below. Any emergency
 temporary repairs conducted by the owner shall not negate the warranties.

1.7.1     Contractor's Weathertightness Warranty

 The SSSMR system shall be warranted by the Contractor on a no penal sum
 basis for a period of five years against material and workmanship
 deficiencies; system deterioration caused by exposure to the elements and/or
 inadequate resistance to specified service design loads, water leaks, and
 wind uplift damage. The SSSMR system covered under this warranty shall
 include the entire roofing system including, but not limited to, the
 standing seam metal roof panels, fasteners, connectors, roof securement
 components, and assemblies tested and approved in accordance with ASTM E
 1592. In addition, the system shall consist of panel finishes, slip sheet,
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 341 of 463

 insulation, all accessories, components, and trim and all connections with
 roof panels. This includes roof penetration items such as vents, curbs, and
 skylights; interior or exterior gutters and downspouts; eaves, ridge, hip,
 valley, rake, gable, wall, or other roof system flashings installed and any
 other components specified within this contract to provide a weathertight
 roof system; and items specified in other sections of these specifications
 that are part of the SSSMR system. All material and workmanship
 deficiencies, system deterioration caused by exposure to the elements and/or
 inadequate resistance to specified design loads, water leaks and wind uplift
 damage shall be repaired as approved by the Contracting Officer. See the
 attached Contractor's required warranty for issue resolution of warrantable
 defects. This warranty shall warrant and cover the entire cost of repair or
 replacement, including all material, labor, and related markups. The
 Contractor shall supplement this warranty with written warranties from the
 installer and system manufacturer, which shall be submitted along with
 Contractor's warranty; however, the Contractor shall be ultimately
 responsible for this warranty. The Contractor's written warranty shall be
 as outlined in attached WARRANTY FOR STRUCTURAL STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF
 (SSSMR) SYSTEM, and shall start upon final acceptance of the facility. It
 is required that the Contractor provide a separate bond in an amount equal
 to the installed total roofing system cost in favor of the owner
 (Government) covering the Contractor's warranty responsibilities effective
 throughout the ten year Contractor's warranty period for the entire SSSMR
 system as outlined above.

1.7.2   Manufacturer's Material Warranties.

 The Contractor shall furnish, in writing, the following manufacturer's
 material warranties which cover all SSSMR system components such as roof
 panels, anchor clips and fasteners, flashing, accessories, and trim,
 fabricated from coil material:

      a. A manufacturer's 10 year material warranty warranting that the
 aluminum, zinc-coated steel, aluminum-zinc alloy coated steel or aluminum-
 coated steel as specified herein will not rupture, structurally fail,
 fracture, deteriorate, or become perforated under normal design atmospheric
 conditions and service design loads. Liability under this warranty shall be
 limited exclusively to the cost of either repairing or replacing
 nonconforming, ruptured, perforated, or structurally failed coil material.

      b. A manufacturer's 10 year exterior material finish warranty on the
 factory colored finish warranting that the finish, under normal atmospheric
 conditions at the site, will not crack, peel, or delaminate; chalk in excess
 of a numerical rating of eight, as determined by ASTM D 4214 test
 procedures; or change color in excess of five CIE or Hunter Lab color
 difference (delta E) units in accordance with ASTM D 2244. Liability under
 this warranty is exclusively limited to refinishing with an air-drying
 version of the specified finish or replacing the defective coated material.

      c. A roofing system manufacturer's 10 year system weathertightness
 warranty.
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                   Page 342 of 463

1.8      COORDINATION MEETING

 A coordination meeting shall be held 30 days prior to the first submittal,
 for mutual understanding of the Structural Standing Seam Metal Roof (SSSMR)
 System contract requirements. This meeting shall take place at the building
 site and shall include representatives from the Contractor, the roof system
 manufacturer, the roofing supplier, the erector, the SSSMR design engineer
 of record, and the Contracting Officer. All items required by paragraph
 SUBMITTALS shall be discussed, including applicable standard manufacturer
 shop drawings, and the approval process. The Contractor shall coordinate
 time and arrangements for the meeting.

PART 2      PRODUCTS

2.1      ROOF PANELS

 Panels shall be steel or aluminum and shall have a factory color finish.
 Length of sheets shall be sufficient to cover the entire length of any
 unbroken roof slope for slope lengths that do not exceed 30 feet. When
 length of run exceeds 30 feet and panel laps are provided, each sheet in the
 run shall extend over three or more supports. Sheets longer than 100 feet
 may be furnished if approved by the Contracting Officer. Width of sheets
 shall provide not more than 24 inches of coverage in place. SSSMR system
 with roofing panels greater than 12 inches in width shall have standing
 seams rolled during installation by an electrically driven seaming machine.
 Height of standing seams shall be not less than 1 3/4 inches for rolled seam
 and 1 3/4 inches for seams that are not rolled.

2.1.1      Steel Panels

 Steel panels shall be aluminum-zinc alloy coated steel conforming to ASTM A
 792/A 792M, AZ 50 coating. Zinc, zinc-aluminum alloy or aluminum coated
 panels shall be 0.023 inch thick minimum. Panels shall be within 95 percent
 of reported tested thickness as noted in wind uplift resistance testing
 required in paragraph PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS.

2.1.2    Aluminum Panels

Alloy conforming to ASTM B209, temper as required for the forming operation,
minimum 0.032 inch thick.

2.2      CONCEALED ANCHOR CLIPS

 Concealed anchor clips shall be the same as the tested roofing system. Clip
 bases shall have factory punched or drilled holes for attachment. Clips
 shall be made from multiple pieces with the allowance for the total thermal
 movement required to take place within the clip. Single piece clips may be
 acceptable when the manufacturer can substantiate that the system can
 accommodate the thermal cyclic movement under sustained live loads.

2.3      ACCESSORIES

 Flashing, trim, metal closure strips, caps and similar metal accessories
 shall be the manufacturer's standard products. Exposed metal accessories
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 343 of 463

 shall be finished to match the panels furnished. Molded closure strips
 shall be bituminous-saturated fiber, closed-cell or solid-cell synthetic
 rubber or neoprene, or polyvinyl chloride pre-molded to match configuration
 of the panels and shall not absorb or retain water. The use of a continuous
 angle butted to the panel ends to form a closure will not be allowed.

2.4     FASTENERS

 Fasteners for steel roof panels shall be zinc-coated steel, aluminum,
 corrosion resisting steel, or nylon-capped steel, type and size specified
 below or as otherwise approved for the applicable requirements. Fasteners
 for aluminum roof panels shall be aluminum or corrosion resisting steel.
 Fasteners for structural connections shall provide both tensile and shear
 ultimate strengths of not less than 750 pounds per fastener. Fasteners for
 accessories shall be the manufacturer's standard. Exposed roof fasteners
 shall be sealed or have sealed washers on the exterior side of the roof to
 waterproof the fastener penetration. Washer material shall be compatible
 with the roofing; have a minimum diameter of 3/8 inch for structural
 connections; and gasket portion of fasteners or washers shall be neoprene or
 other equally durable elastomeric material approximately 1/8 inch thick.
 Exposed fasteners for factory color finished panels shall be factory
 finished to match the color of the panels.

2.4.1     Screws

 Screws for attaching anchor devices shall be not less than No. 14. Actual
 screw pull out test results shall be performed for the actual material gage
 and yield strength of the structural purlins or subpurlins to which the clip
 is to be anchored/attached. Other screws shall be as recommended by the
 manufacturer to meet the strength design requirements of the panels.

2.4.2     Bolts

 Bolts shall be not less than 1/4 inch diameter, shouldered or plain shank as
 required, with locking washers and nuts.

2.4.3     Structural Blind Fasteners

 Blind screw-type expandable fasteners shall be not less than 1/4 inch
 diameter. Blind (pop) rivets shall be not less than 9/32 inch minimum
 diameter.

2.5     SUBPURLINS

 Cold formed supporting structural members/subpurlins shall have a minimum
 thickness of 0.059 inches and a minimum tensile yield strength of 50000 psi.
 Hot rolled structural members shall have a minimum thickness of 0.25 inches
 and a minimum tensile yield strength of 36000 psi. Subpurlins shall be
 galvanized.

2.6     FACTORY COLOR FINISH

 Panels shall have a factory applied polyvinylidene fluoride finish on the
 exposed side. The exterior finish shall consist of a baked-on topcoat with
                                                                W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                             0001
                                                                   Page 344 of 463

 an appropriate prime coat. Color shall match the color indicated by the
 Architect. The exterior coating shall be a nominal 1 mil thickness
 consisting of a topcoat of not less than 0.7 mil dry film thickness and the
 paint manufacturer's recommended primer of not less than 0.2 mil thickness.
 The interior color finish shall consist of a backer coat with a dry film
 thickness of 0.5 mil to include .2 mil thick prime coat. The exterior color
 finish shall meet the test requirements specified below.

2.6.1   Salt Spray Test

 A sample of the sheets shall withstand a cyclic corrosion test for a minimum
 of 2016 hours in accordance with ASTM D 5894, including the scribe
 requirement in the test. Immediately upon removal of the panel from the
 test, the coating shall receive a rating of not less than 10, no blistering,
 as determined by ASTM D 714; 10, no rusting, as determined by ASTM D 610;
 and a rating of 6, over 21/16 to 1/8 inch failure at scribe, as determined
 by ASTM D 1654.

2.6.2   Formability Test

 When subjected to testing in accordance with ASTM D 522 Method B, 1/8 inch
 diameter mandrel, the coating film shall show no evidence of cracking to the
 naked eye.

2.6.3   Accelerated Weathering, Chalking Resistance and Color Change

 A sample of the sheets shall be tested in accordance with ASTM G 154, test
 condition UVA-340 lamp, 4h UV at 60 degrees C followed by 4h CON at 50
 degrees C for 2 total hours. The coating shall withstand the weathering
 test without cracking, peeling, blistering, loss of adhesion of the
 protective coating, or corrosion of the base metal. Protective coating with
 an adhesion rating less than 4B when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3359,
 Test Method B, shall be considered as an area indicating loss of adhesion.
 Following the accelerated weathering test, the coating shall have a chalk
 rating not less than No. 8 in accordance with ASTM D 4214 test procedures,
 and the color change shall not exceed 5 CIE or Hunter Lab color difference
 (delta E) units in accordance with ASTM D 2244. For sheets required to have
 a low gloss finish, the chalk rating shall be not less than No. 6 and the
 color difference shall be not greater than 7 units.

2.6.4   Humidity Test

 When subjected to a humidity cabinet test in accordance with ASTM D 2247 for
 1000 hours, a scored panel shall show no signs of blistering, cracking,
 creepage or corrosion.

2.6.5   Impact Resistance

 Factory-painted sheet shall withstand direct and reverse impact in
 accordance with ASTM D 2794 0.500 inch diameter hemispherical head indenter,
 equal to 1.5 times the metal thickness in mils, expressed in inch-pounds,
 with no cracking.
                                                                  W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                               0001
                                                                     Page 345 of 463

2.6.6     Abrasion Resistance Test

 When subjected to the falling sand test in accordance with ASTM D 968,
 Method A, the coating system shall withstand a minimum of 50 liters of sand
 before the appearance of the base metal. The term "appearance of base
 metal" refers to the metallic coating on steel or the aluminum base metal.

2.6.7 Pollution Resistance

 Coating shall show no visual effects when covered spot tested in a 10
 percent hydrochloric acid solution for 24 hours in accordance with ASTM D
 1308.

2.7     INSULATION

 Thermal resistance of insulation shall be not less than the R-values shown
 on the contract drawings. R-values shall be determined at a mean
 temperature of 75 degrees F in accordance with ASTM C 518. Insulation shall
 be a standard product with the insulation manufacturer, factory marked or
 identified with insulation manufacturer's name or trademark and R-value.
 Identification shall be on individual pieces or individual packages.
 Insulation shall have a flame spread not in excess of 0 and a smoke
 developed rating not in excess of 0 when tested in accordance with ASTM E
 84. The stated R-value of the insulation shall be certified by an
 independent Registered Professional Engineer if tests are conducted in the
 insulation manufacturer's laboratory. Contractor shall comply with EPA
 requirements.

2.7.1     Polyisocyanurate Rigid Board Insulation for Use Above a Roof Deck

 Polyisocyanurate insulation shall conform to ASTM C 1289, Type II, (having a
 minimum recovered material content of 9 percent by weight of core material
 in the polyisocyanurate portion). For polyisocyanurate, the maximum design
 R-value per 1 inch of insulation used shall be 7.2. Facings shall be non-
 asphaltic, glass fiber reinforced.

2.7.2     Blanket Insulation

 Blanket insulation shall conform to ASTM C 991.

2.7.3     Glass Mat Gypsum Roof Board

 Glass mat gypsum roof board for use above the deck or insulation for thermal
 protection shall have a flame spread - 0, smoke developed - 0, shall be
 water resistant and have a compressive strength of 500 psi. Glass mat
 gypsum roof board shall conform to ASTM C 1177/C 1177M.

2.8     INSULATION RETAINERS

 Insulation retainers shall be type, size, and design necessary to adequately
 hold the insulation and to provide a neat appearance. Metallic retaining
 members shall be nonferrous or have a nonferrous coating. Nonmetallic
 retaining members, including adhesives used in conjunction with mechanical
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 346 of 463

 retainers or at insulation seams, shall have a fire resistance
 classification not less than that permitted for the insulation.

2.9      SEALANT

 Sealants shall be elastomeric type containing no oil or asphalt. Exposed
 sealant shall be colored to match the applicable building color and shall
 cure to a rubber like consistency. Sealant placed in the roof panel standing
 seam ribs shall be provided in accordance with the manufacturer's
 recommendations.

2.10      GASKETS AND INSULATING COMPOUNDS

 Gaskets and insulating compounds shall be nonabsorptive and suitable for
 insulating contact points of incompatible materials. Insulating compounds
 shall be nonrunning after drying.

2.11     EPDM RUBBER BOOTS

 Flashing devices around pipe penetrations shall be flexible, one-piece
 devices molded from weather-resistant EPDM rubber. Rubber boot material
 shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. The boots shall have base
 rings made of aluminum or corrosion resisting steel that conform to the
 contours of the roof panel to form a weather-tight seal.

2.12      PREFABRICATED CURBS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

 Prefabricated curbs and equipment supports shall be of structural quality,
 hot-dipped galvanized or galvanized sheet steel, factory primed and prepared
 for painting with mitered and welded joints. Integral base plates and water
 diverter crickets shall be provided. Minimum height of curb shall be 8
 inches above finish roof. Curbs shall be constructed to match roof slope
 and to provide a level top surface for mounting of equipment. Curb flange
 shall be constructed to match configuration of roof panels. Curb size shall
 be coordinated, prior to curb fabrication, with the mechanical equipment to
 be supported. Strength requirements for equipment supports shall be
 coordinated to include all anticipated loads. Flashings shall not be
 rigidly attached to underline structure.

PART 3      EXECUTION

3.1      INSTALLATION

 Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's erection
 instructions and drawings. Dissimilar materials which are not compatible
 when contacting each other shall be insulated by means of gaskets or
 insulating compounds. Molded closure strips shall be installed wherever
 roofing sheets terminate in open-end configurations, exclusive of flashings.
 The closure strip installation shall be weather-tight and sealed. Screws
 shall be installed with a clutching screw gun, to assure screws are not
 stripped. Field test shall be conducted on each gun prior to starting
 installation and periodically thereafter to assure it is adjusted properly
 to install particular type and size of screw as recommended by
 manufacturer's literature. Improper or mislocated drill holes shall be
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 347 of 463

 plugged with an oversize screw fastener and gasketed washer; however, sheets
 with an excess of such holes or with such holes in critical locations shall
 not be used. Exposed surfaces and edges shall be kept clean and free from
 sealant, metal cuttings, hazardous burrs, and other foreign material.
 Stained, discolored, or damaged sheets shall be removed from the site.

3.1.1     Field Forming of Panels for Unique Area

 When roofing panels are formed from factory-color-finished steel coils at
 the project site, the same care and quality control measures that are taken
 in shop forming of roofing panels shall be observed. Rollformer shall be
 operated by the metal roofing manufacturer's representative.

3.1.2     Subpurlins

 Unless otherwise shown, subpurlins shall be anchored to the purlins or other
 structural framing members with bolts or screws. Attachment to the
 substrate (when provided) or to the panels is not permitted. The subpurlin
 spacing shall not exceed 30 inches on centers at the corner, edge and ridge
 zones, and 5 foot maximum on centers for the remainder of the roof. Corner,
 edge, and ridge zones are as defined in ASCE 7.

3.1.3     Roof Panel Installation

 Roof panels shall be installed with the standing seams in the direction of
 the roof slope. The side seam connections for installed panels shall be
 completed at the end of each day's work. Method of applying joint sealant
 shall conform to the manufacturer's recommendation to achieve a complete
 weather-tight installation. End laps of panels shall be provided in
 accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Closures, flashings, EPDM
 rubber boots, roof curbs, and related accessories shall be installed
 according to the manufacturer's drawings. Fasteners shall not puncture
 roofing sheets except as provided for in the manufacturer's instructions for
 erection and installation. Expansion joints for the standing seam roof
 system shall be installed at locations indicated on the contract drawings
 and other locations indicated on the manufacturer's drawings.

3.1.4     Concealed Anchor Clips

 Concealed anchor clips shall be fastened directly to the structural framing
 members. Attachment to the substrate (when provided) or to the metal deck
 is not permitted. The maximum distance, parallel to the seams, between
 clips shall be 30 inches on center at the corner, edge, and ridge zones, and
 5 feet maximum on centers for the remainder of the roof.

3.2     INSULATION INSTALLATION

 Insulation shall be continuous over entire roof surface. Where expansion
 joints, terminations, and other connections are made, the cavity shall be
 filled with batt insulation providing equivalent R-value and perm rating as
 remaining insulation. Insulation shall be installed as indicated and in
 accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
                                                               W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                            0001
                                                                  Page 348 of 463

3.2.1   Board Insulation with Blanket Insulation

 Rigid or semirigid board insulation shall be laid in close contact. Board
 shall be attached to the metal roof deck with bearing plates and fasteners,
 as recommended by the insulation manufacturer, so that the insulation joints
 are held tight against each other, and shall have a minimum of 1 fastener
 per 4 square feet. Layout and joint pattern of insulation and fasteners
 shall be indicated on the shop drawings. If more than one layer of
 insulation is required, joints in the second layer shall be offset from
 joints in the first layer. A layer of blanket insulation shall be placed
 over the rigid or semirigid board insulation to be compressed against the
 underside of the metal roofing to reduce thermal bridging, dampen noise, and
 prevent roofing flutter. This layer of blanket insulation shall be
 compressed a minimum of 50 percent.

3.2.2   Blanket Insulation

 Blanket insulation shall be installed between and parallel to the purlins
 with tabs of a facer lapping on the top face of the purlins. Thermal blocks
 shall be provided over purlins, between clips. A second layer of unfaced
 insulation shall be added between purlins to provide full R-value. Integral
 facing or other commercially available support system shall support blanket
 insulation.

3.3 CLEANING AND TOUCH-UP

 Exposed SSSMR systems shall be cleaned at completion of installation.
 Debris that could cause discoloration and harm to the panels, flashing,
 closures and other accessories shall be removed. Grease and oil films,
 excess sealant, and handling marks shall be removed and the work shall be
 scrubbed clean. Exposed metal surfaces shall be free of dents, creases,
 waves, scratch marks, and solder or weld marks. Immediately upon detection,
 abraded or corroded spots on shop-painted surfaces shall be wires brushed
 and touched up with the same material used for the shop coat. Factory color
 finished surfaces shall be touched up with the manufacturer's recommended
 touch up paint.
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 349 of 463


               CONTRACTOR'S TEN (10) YEAR NO PENAL SUM WARRANTY
                                      FOR
              STRUCTURAL STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF (SSSMR) SYSTEM


FACILITY DESCRIPTION_________________________________________________

BUILDING NUMBER:_____________________________________________________

CORPS OF ENGINEERS CONTRACT NUMBER:__________________________________


                                  CONTRACTOR

CONTRACTOR:__________________________________________________________

ADDRESS:_____________________________________________________________

POINT OF CONTACT:____________________________________________________

TELEPHONE NUMBER:____________________________________________________


                                    OWNER

OWNER:_______________________________________________________________

ADDRESS:_____________________________________________________________

POINT OF CONTACT:____________________________________________________

TELEPHONE NUMBER:____________________________________________________


                              CONSTRUCTION AGENT

CONSTRUCTION AGENT:__________________________________________________

ADDRESS:_____________________________________________________________

POINT OF CONTACT:____________________________________________________

TELEPHONE NUMBER:____________________________________________________
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 350 of 463


               CONTRACTOR'S TEN (10) YEAR NO PENAL SUM WARRANTY
                                      FOR
              STRUCTURAL STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF (SSSMR) SYSTEM
                                  (continued)


THE SSSMR SYSTEM INSTALLED ON THE ABOVE NAMED BUILDING IS WARRANTED BY
_____________________________ FOR A PERIOD OF TEN (10) YEARS AGAINST
WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIAL DEFICIENCES, WIND DAMAGE, STRUCTURAL FAILURE, AND
LEAKAGE. THE SSSMR SYSTEM COVERED UNDER THIS WARRANTY SHALL INCLUDE, BUT
SHALL NOT BE LIMITED TO, THE FOLLOWING: THE ENTIRE ROOFING SYSTEM,
MANUFACTURER SUPPLIED FRAMING AND STRUCTURAL MEMBERS, METAL ROOF PANELS,
FASTENERS, CONNECTORS, ROOF SECUREMENT COMPONENTS, AND ASSEMBLIES TESTED AND
APPROVED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM E 1592. IN ADDITION, THE SYSTEM PANEL
FINISHES, SLIP SHEET, INSULATION, VAPOR RETARDER, ALL ACCESSORIES,
COMPONENTS, AND TRIM AND ALL CONNECTIONS ARE INCLUDED. THIS INCLUDES ROOF
PENETRATION ITEMS SUCH AS VENTS, CURBS, SKYLIGHTS; INTERIOR OR EXTERIOR
GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS; EAVES, RIDGE, HIP, VALLEY, RAKE, GABLE, WALL, OR
OTHER ROOF SYSTEM FLASHINGS INSTALLED AND ANY OTHER COMPONENTS SPECIFIED
WITHIN THIS CONTRACT TO PROVIDE A WEATHERTIGHT ROOF SYSTEM; AND ITEMS
SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS OF THE SPECIFICATIONS THAT ARE PART OF THE SSSMR
SYSTEM.

ALL MATERIAL DEFICIENCIES, WIND DAMAGE, STRUCTURAL FAILURE, AND LEAKAGE
ASSOCIATED WITH THE SSSMR SYSTEM COVERED UNDER THIS WARRANTY SHALL BE
REPAIRED AS APPROVED BY THE CONTRACTING OFFICER. THIS WARRANTY SHALL COVER
THE ENTIRE COST OF REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT, INCLUDING ALL MATERIAL, LABOR, AND
RELATED MARKUPS. THE ABOVE REFERENCED WARRANTY COMMENCED ON THE DATE OF
FINAL ACCEPTANCE ON ____________________________ AND WILL REMAIN IN EFFECT
FOR STATED DURATION FROM THIS DATE.

SIGNED, DATED, AND NOTARIZED (BY COMPANY PRESIDENT)


____________________________________________________________
       (Company President)                      (Date)
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 351 of 463


               CONTRACTOR'S TEN (10) YEAR NO PENAL SUM WARRANTY
                                      FOR
              STRUCTURAL STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF (SSSMR) SYSTEM
                                  (continued)


THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUPPLEMENT THIS WARRANTY WITH WRITTEN WARRANTIES FROM
THE MANUFACTURER AND/OR INSTALLER OF THE SSSMR SYSTEM, WHICH SHALL BE
SUBMITTED ALONG WITH THE CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY. HOWEVER, THE CONTRACTOR WILL
BE ULTIMATELY RESPONSIBLE FOR THIS WARRANTY AS OUTLINED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS
AND AS INDICATED IN THIS WARRANTY EXAMPLE.


                           EXCLUSIONS FROM COVERAGE

1. NATURAL DISASTERS, ACTS OF GOD (LIGHTNING, FIRE, EXPLOSIONS, SUSTAINED
WIND FORCES IN EXCESS OF THE DESIGN CRITERIA, EARTHQUAKES, AND HAIL).

2. ACTS OF NEGLIGENCE OR ABUSE OR MISUSE BY GOVERNMENT OR OTHER PERSONNEL,
INCLUDING ACCIDENTS, VANDALISM, CIVIL DISOBEDIENCE, WAR, OR DAMAGE CAUSED BY
FALLING OBJECTS.

3. DAMAGE BY STRUCTURAL FAILURE, SETTLEMENT, MOVEMENT, DISTORTION, WARPAGE,
OR DISPLACEMENT OF THE BUILDING STRUCTURE OR ALTERATIONS MADE TO THE
BUILDING.

4. CORROSION CAUSED BY EXPOSURE TO CORROSIVE CHEMICALS, ASH OR FUMES
GENERATED OR RELEASED INSIDE OR OUTSIDE THE BUILDING FROM CHEMICAL PLANTS,
FOUNDRIES, PLATING WORKS, KILNS, FERTILIZER FACTORIES, PAPER PLANTS, AND THE
LIKE.

5. FAILURE OF ANY PART OF THE SSSMR SYSTEM DUE TO ACTIONS BY THE OWNER TO
INHIBIT FREE DRAINAGE OF WATER FROM THE ROOF AND GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS OR
ALLOW PONDING WATER TO COLLECT ON THE ROOF SURFACE. CONTRACTOR'S DESIGN
SHALL INSURE FREE DRAINAGE FROM THE ROOF AND NOT ALLOW PONDING WATER.

6. THIS WARRANTY APPLIES TO THE SSSMR SYSTEM. IT DOES NOT INCLUDE ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE TO THE BUILDING INTERIOR OR CONTENTS WHICH IS COVERED BY
THE WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION CLAUSE INCLUDED IN THIS CONTRACT.

7. THIS WARRANTY CANNOT BE TRANSFERRED TO ANOTHER OWNER WITHOUT WRITTEN
CONSENT OF THE CONTRACTOR; AND THIS WARRANTY AND THE CONTRACT PROVISIONS WILL
TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER ANY CONFLICTS WITH STATE STATUTES.
                                                                   W912C3-09-B-0006
                                                                                0001
                                                                      Page 352 of 463


               CONTRACTOR'S TEN (10) YEAR NO PENAL SUM WARRANTY
                                      FOR
              STRUCTURAL STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF (SSSMR) SYSTEM
                                  (continued)


**REPORTS OF LEAKS AND